Introducing Windows Server 2008

Purchase select Microsoft Press books at a discount (available in the United States only)

To learn more about this book, visit Microsoft Learning at http://www.microsoft.com/MSPress/books/11163.aspx

Additional Resources for IT Professionals Published and Forthcoming Titles from Microsoft Press

Windows Server

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Resource Kit Microsoft MVPs and Partners with Microsoft Windows Server Team 978-0-7356-2232-6

Microsoft Windows® XP Professional Resource Kit Third Edition The Microsoft Windows Team with Charlie Russel and Sharon Crawford 978-0-7356-2167-1

Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Administrator’s Companion Second Edition Charlie Russel, Sharon Crawford, and Jason Gerend 978-0-7356-2047-6

Microsoft Windows XP Professional Administrator’s Pocket Consultant Second Edition William R. Stanek 978-0-7356-2140-4

Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Inside Out William R. Stanek 978-0-7356-2048-3

Microsoft Windows Command-Line Administrator’s Pocket Consultant William R. Stanek 978-0-7356-2038-4

Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Administrator’s Pocket Consultant Second Edition William R. Stanek 978-0-7356-2245-6

SQL Server 2005

Windows Client

Windows Vista™ Resource Kit Tulloch, Northrup, Honeycutt, Russel, and Wilson with the Microsoft Windows Vista Team 978-0-7356-2283-8

Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Administrator’s Companion Whalen, Garcia, et al. 978-0-7356-2198-5 Inside Microsoft SQL Server 2005: The Storage Engine Kalen Delaney 978-0-7356-2105-3

Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 Administrator’s Companion Walter Glenn and Scott Lowe 978-0-7356-2350-7

Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 Administrator’s Pocket Consultant William R. Stanek 978-0-7356-2348-4

Scripting

Microsoft Windows PowerShell™ Step by Step Ed Wilson 978-0-7356-2395-8 Microsoft VBScript Step by Step Ed Wilson 978-0-7356-2297-5 Microsoft Windows Scripting with WMI: Self-Paced Learning Guide Ed Wilson 978-0-7356-2231-9 Advanced VBScript for Microsoft Windows Administrators Don Jones and Jeffery Hicks 978-0-7356-2244-9

Inside Microsoft SQL Server 2005: T-SQL Programming Itzik Ben-Gan, Dejan Sarka, and Roger Wolter 978-0-7356-2197-8

R E L A T E D

T I T L E S

Windows Vista Administrator’s Pocket Consultant William R. Stanek 978-0-7356-2296-8

Microsoft SQL Server™ 2005 Administrator’s Pocket Consultant William R. Stanek 978-0-7356-2107-7

Exchange Server 2007

0LFURVRIW2IÀFH SharePoint® Server 2007 Administrator’s Companion Bill English with the Microsoft SharePoint Community Experts 978-0-7356-2282-1

Microsoft Windows Security Resource Kit Second Edition Ben Smith and Brian Komar with the Microsoft Security Team 978-0-7356-2174-9

Microsoft Windows Small Business Server 2003 R2 Administrator’s Companion Charlie Russel and Sharon Crawford 978-0-7356-2280-7

Microsoft Internet Security and Acceleration (ISA) Server 2004 Administrator’s Pocket Consultant Bud Ratliff and Jason Ballard with the Microsoft ISA Server Team 978-0-7356-2188-6

microsoft.com/mspress

ITPRO_front_04.indd 1

4/16/2007 9:49:37 AM

Resources for IT Professionals

Administrator’s Pocket Consultant O

O

O

Practical, portable guide for fast answers when you need them Focus on core operations and support tasks Organized for quick, precise reference— to get the job done

Administrator’s Companion O

O

O

Comprehensive, one-volume guide to deployment and system administration Real-world insights, procedures, troubleshooting tactics, and workarounds Fully searchable eBook on CD

Resource Kit

Self-Paced Training Kit

O

O

O

O

In-depth technical information and tools from those who know the technology best Definitive reference for deployment and operations Essential toolkit of resources, including eBook, on CD

O

O

Two products in one: official exam prep guide + practice tests Features lessons, exercises, and case scenarios Comprehensive selftests; trial software; eBook on CD

Available in 2008 from Microsoft Press Windows Server Windows Server® 2008 Resource Kit 978-0-7356-2361-3 Windows Server 2008 Active Directory® Resource Kit 978-0-7356-2515-0 Windows Server 2008 Virtualization Resource Kit 978-0-7356-2517-4

Windows Server 2008 Inside Out 978-0-7356-2438-2 Windows Server 2008 Terminal Services 978-0-7356-2516-7 Windows Server 2008 Administrator’s Companion 978-0-7356-2505-1 Windows Server 2008 Administrator’s Pocket Consultant 978-0-7356-2437-5

Windows Server 2008 Security Resource Kit 978-0-7356-2504-4

Windows Group Policy Guide, Second Edition 978-0-7356-2514-3

Windows Administration Resource Kit: Productivity Solutions For IT Professionals 978-0-7356-2431-3

Understanding IPv6, Second Edition 978-0-7356-2446-7

®

Windows Server 2008 Networking Guide 978-0-7356-2422-1 Windows Server 2008 TCP/IP Protocols and Services 978-0-7356-2447-4

Internet Information Services Internet Information Services (IIS) 7.0 Administrator’s Pocket Consultant 978-0-7356-2364-4

Internet Information Services (IIS) 7.0 Resource Kit 978-0-7356-2441-2

Scripting Windows PowerShell™ Scripting Guide 978-0-7356-2279-1 Windows PowerShell & Command-line Administrator’s Pocket Consultant 978-0-7356-2262-3

Certification MCITP Self-Paced Training Kit (Exams 70-640, 70-642, 70-643, 70-646): Windows Server Administrator Core Requirements 978-0-7356-2508-2

MCTS Self-Paced Training Kit (Exam 70-642): Configuring Windows Server 2008 Network Infrastructure 978-0-7356-2512-9 MCTS Self-Paced Training Kit (Exam 70-643): Configuring Windows Server 2008 Applications Platform 978-0-7356-2511-2 MCITP Self-Paced Training Kit (Exam 70-646): Windows Server 2008 Administrator 978-0-7356-2510-5 MCITP Self-Paced Training Kit (Exam 70-647): Windows Server 2008 Enterprise Administrator 978-0-7356-2509-9

MCTS Self-Paced Training Kit (Exam 70-640): Configuring Windows Server 2008 Active Directory 978-0-7356-2513-6

See our full line of learning resources at: microsoft.com/mspress and microsoft.com/learning

LonghornIBC.indd 1

4/24/07 3:31:46 AM

PUBLISHED BY Microsoft Press A Division of Microsoft Corporation One Microsoft Way Redmond, Washington 98052-6399 Copyright © 2007 by Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved. No part of the contents of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without the written permission of the publisher. Library of Congress Control Number: 2007924650 Printed and bound in the United States of America. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 QWT 2 1 0 9 8 7 Distributed in Canada by H.B. Fenn and Company Ltd. A CIP catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library. &KDSWHUFRQWDLQVWKH³)URPWKH([SHUWV:0,5HPRWH&RQQHFWLRQ´VLGHEDU&RS\ULJKW © 2007 by Alain Lissoir. Microsoft Press books are available through booksellers and distributors worldwide. For further information about international editions, contact your local Microsoft Corporation office or contact Microsoft Press International directly at fax (425) 936-7329. Visit our Web site at www.microsoft.com/mspress. Send comments to [email protected]. Microsoft, Microsoft Press, Active Directory, ActiveX, Aero, BitLocker, ClearType, Direct3D, Excel, Internet Explorer, Microsoft Dynamics, MSDN, MS-DOS, Outlook, PowerPoint, SharePoint, SQL Server, Terminal Services RemoteApp, Visual Basic, Visual Studio, Visual Web Developer, Win32, Windows, Windows CardSpace, Windows Live, Windows Media, Windows Mobile, Windows NT, Windows PowerShell, Windows Server, Windows Server System, Windows Vista, and WinFX are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners. The example companies, organizations, products, domain names, e-mail addresses, logos, people, places, and events depicted herein are fictitious. No association with any real company, organization, product, domain name, e-mail address, logo, person, place, or event is intended or should be inferred. 7KLVERRNH[SUHVVHVWKHDXWKRU¶VYLHZVDQGRSLQLRQV7KHLQIRUPDWLRQFRQWDLQHGLQWKLVERRNLVSURYLGHG without any express, statutory, or implied warranties. Neither the authors, Microsoft Corporation, nor its resellers, or distributors will be held liable for any damages caused or alleged to be caused either directly or indirectly by this book. Acquisitions Editor: Martin DelRe Developmental Editor: Karen Szall Project Editor: Denise Bankaitis Body Part No. X13-72717

Table of Contents Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii

1

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 What’s Between the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Acknowledgments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 One Last Thing—Humor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

2

Usage Scenarios. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Providing an Identity and Access Infrastructure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Ensuring Security and Policy Enforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Easing Deployment Headaches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Making Servers Easier to Manage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Supporting the Branch Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Providing Centralized Application Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Deploying Web Applications and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Ensuring High Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Ensuring Secure and Reliable Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Leveraging Virtualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

3

Windows Server Virtualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Why Enterprises Love Virtualization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Server Consolidation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Business Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Testing and Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Application Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Virtualization in the Datacenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

What do you think of this book? We want to hear from you! Microsoft is interested in hearing your feedback so we can continually improve our books and learning resources for you. To participate in a brief online survey, please visit:

www.microsoft.com/learning/booksurvey/

v

vi

Table of Contents

Virtualization Today . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Monolithic Hypervisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Microkernelized Hypervisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Understanding Virtualization in Windows Server 2008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Partition 1: Parent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Partition 2: Child with Enlightened Guest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Partition 3: Child with Legacy Guest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Partition 4: Child with Guest Running Linux. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Features of Windows Server Virtualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Managing Virtual Machines in Windows Server 2008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 System Center Virtual Machine Manager 2007. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 SoftGrid Application Virtualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Additional Reading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

4

Managing Windows Server 2008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Performing Initial Configuration Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Using Server Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Managing Server Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 ServerManagerCmd.exe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Remote Server Administration Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Other Management Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Group Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Windows Management Instrumentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Windows PowerShell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Microsoft System Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

5

Managing Server Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Understanding Roles, Role Services, and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Available Roles and Role Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Available Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Table of Contents

vii

Adding Roles and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Using Initial Configuration Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Using Server Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 From the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Additional Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

6

Windows Server Core. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 What Is a Windows Server Core Installation? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Understanding Windows Server Core . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 The Rationale for Windows Server Core . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Performing Initial Configuration of a Windows Server Core Server . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Performing Initial Configuration from the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Managing a Windows Server Core Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Local Management from the Command Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Remote Management Using Terminal Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Remote Management Using the Remote Server Administration Tools . . . . 140 Remote Administration Using Group Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Remote Management Using WinRM/WinRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Windows Server Core Installation Tips and Tricks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

7

Active Directory Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Understanding Identity and Access in Windows Server 2008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Understanding Identity and Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Identity and Access in Windows 2000 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Identity and Access in Windows Server 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Identity and Access in Windows Server 2003 R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Identity and Access in Windows Server 2008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Active Directory Domain Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 AD DS Auditing Enhancements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Read-Only Domain Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Restartable AD DS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Granular Password and Account Lockout Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

viii

Table of Contents

Active Directory Lightweight Directory Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Active Directory Certificate Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Certificate Web Enrollment Improvements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Network Device Enrollment Service Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Online Certificate Status Protocol Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Enterprise PKI and CAPI2 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Other AD CS Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Active Directory Federation Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Active Directory Rights Management Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

8

Terminal Services Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Core Enhancements to Terminal Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Remote Desktop Connection 6.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Single Sign-On for Domain-joined Clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Other Core Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Installing and Managing Terminal Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Terminal Services RemoteApp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Using TS RemoteApp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Benefits of TS RemoteApp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Terminal Services Web Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Using TS Web Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Benefits of TS Web Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Terminal Services Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Implementing TS Gateway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Benefits of TS Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Terminal Services Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Other Terminal Services Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Terminal Services WMI Provider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Windows System Resource Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Terminal Services Session Broker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Table of Contents

9

ix

Clustering Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Failover Clustering Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Goals of Clustering Improvements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Understanding the New Quorum Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Understanding Storage Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Understanding Networking and Security Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Other Security Improvements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Validating a Clustering Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Tips for Validating Clustering Solutions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Setting Up and Managing a Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Creating a Highly Available File Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Performing Other Cluster Management Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Network Load Balancing Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

10

Network Access Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 The Need for Network Access Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Understanding Network Access Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 What NAP Does . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 NAP Enforcement Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Understanding the NAP Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 A Walkthrough of How NAP Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Implementing NAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Choosing Enforcement Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Phased Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Configuring the Network Policy Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Configuring NAP Clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Troubleshooting NAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

x

Table of Contents

11

Internet Information Services 7.0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Understanding IIS 7.0 Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Security and Patching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Administration Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Configuration and Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Extensibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 What’s New in IIS 7.0 in Windows Server 2008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 The Application Server Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

12

Other Features and Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Storage Improvements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 File Server Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Windows Server Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Storage Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 SMB 2.0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Multipath I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 iSCSI Initiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 iSCSI Remote Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 iSNS Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Networking Improvements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Security Improvements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Other Improvements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

13

Deploying Windows Server 2008. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Getting Windows Server 2008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Installing Windows Server 2008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Manual Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Unattended Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Table of Contents

xi

Using Windows Deployment Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Multicast Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 TFTP Windowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 EFI x64 Network Boot Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Solution Accelerator for Windows Server Deployment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Understanding Volume Activation 2.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

14

Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Product Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Microsoft Windows Server TechCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Microsoft Download Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Microsoft Connect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Microsoft TechNet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Beta Central . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 TechNet Events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 TechNet Virtual Labs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 TechNet Community Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 TechNet Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 TechNet Magazine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 TechNet Flash Newsletter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 MSDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Blogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 Blogs by MVPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Channel 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Microsoft Press Books. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

What do you think of this book? We want to hear from you! Microsoft is interested in hearing your feedback so we can continually improve our books and learning resources for you. To participate in a brief online survey, please visit:

www.microsoft.com/learning/booksurvey/

Chapter 1

Introduction Well, you’ve made it past the table of contents and have arrived at the Introduction, so I guess I better start introducing this book to you and explaining what it’s about. This is the first book about Microsoft Windows Server 2008 published by Microsoft Press, and let me be straight with you right from the beginning. What? A book about Windows Server 2008 is being published when the product is only in Beta 3? Won’t it have inaccuracies? (Sure.) Aren’t features still subject to change? (Yup.) Doesn’t that make this a “throwaway” book? (Not on your life, you’ll see.) And why would Microsoft Press publish a book about a product that’s not even finished yet? The short answer to that final question is that Microsoft Press has always done this sort of thing. Remember Introducing Windows Vista by William Stanek? Or Introducing Microsoft Windows Server 2003 by Jerry Honeycutt? Or Introducing Microsoft .NET by David S. Platt? See? I told you. Why does Microsoft Press do this? To get you excited about what’s coming down the product pipeline from Microsoft. To help you become familiar with new products while they’re still in the development stage. And, of course, to get you ready to buy other books from them once the final version of the product is released. After all, you know what it’s like. You have a business and have to make money—so do they. But isn’t a book that’s based on a pre-release version (in this case, close to Beta 3) going to be full of inaccuracies and not reflect the final feature lineup in the RTM version of the product? Well, not really, for several reasons. First, I’ve had the pleasure (sometimes the intense pleasure) of interacting daily with dozens of individuals on the Windows Server 2008 product team at Microsoft during the course of writing this book. And they’ve been generous (sometimes too generous) in supplying me with insights, specifications, pre-release documentation, and answers to my many, many questions—the answers to some of which I was actually able to understand (sometimes). It’s been quite an experience interacting with the product team like this; they’re proud of the features they’re developing and they have good reason to be. And all this interaction with the product group should mean that a lot of technical errors and inaccuracies will have been avoided for many descriptions of features in this book. In addition, the product team has generously given their time (occasionally after repeated, badgering e-mails on my part) to review my chapters in draft and to make comments and suggestions (sometimes a lot of suggestions). This, too, should result in a lot of technical gaffs being weeded out. To understand what it means for these individuals to have given their time like this to poring over my chapter drafts, you’ve got to understand something about the stress of developing a product like Windows Server 2008 and getting it out the door as bug-

1

2

Introducing Windows Server 2008

free as possible and into customers’ hands while working under heavy time constraints. After all, the market won’t stand still if a product like Windows Server 2008 is delayed. There are competitors—we won’t mention their names here, but they’re out there and you know about them. Another reason this book has a high degree of technical accuracy (especially for a pre-release title) is because a lot of it is actually written by the product team themselves! You’ll find scattered throughout most of the chapters almost a hundred sidebars (95 at last count) whose titles are prefixed “From the Experts.” These sidebars are a unique feature of this book (and especially for a pre-release book), and they provide valuable “under the hood” insights concerning how different Windows Server 2008 features work, recommendations and best practices for deploying and configuring features, and tips on troubleshooting features. These sidebars range from a couple of paragraphs to several pages in length, and most of them were written by members of the Windows Server 2008 product team at Microsoft. A few were written by members of other teams at Microsoft, while a couple were contributed by contractors and vendors who work closely with Microsoft. And more than anything else, the depth of expertise provided by these sidebars makes this book a “keeper” instead of a “throwaway,” as most pre-release books usually are. I’ll get you a list of all the names of these sidebar writers in a minute to acknowledge them, but maybe I better show you what a sidebar actually looks like if you’ve never seen one before (or if you’ve seen them in other titles but didn’t know what they were called). Here’s an example of a sidebar:

From the Experts: Important Disclaimer! The contents of this book are based on a pre-release version of Windows Server 2008 and are subject to change. The new features and enhancements described in the chapters that follow might get pulled at the last minute, modified (especially the GUI), tweaked, twisted, altered, adjusted, amended—press Shift+F7 in Microsoft Office Word for more. Nothing written here is written in stone, and the product group (and myself) have tried not to promise anything or describe features that might not make it into RTM. So while we’ve made our best effort to ensure this book is a technically accurate description of Windows Server 2008 at the Beta 3 milestone (and hopefully well beyond), we disclaim and deny and renounce and repudiate and whatever (Shift+F7 again) any and all responsibility for anything in this book that is no longer accurate once the final release of Windows Server 2008 occurs. Thanks for understanding. —Mitch Tulloch with the Windows Server Team at Microsoft That’s what a sidebar looks like. Sure hope you’ve read it!

Chapter 1

Introduction

3

And having a disclaimer like that shouldn’t be a problem, right? For example, if the UI changes for some feature between now and RTM, that shouldn’t decrease the technical value of this book much, should it? After all, you’re IT pros, so you’re pretty smart and can figure out a UI, right? And if a feature has to be dropped at the last minute or changed to make it meet some emerging standard, interoperate better with products from other vendors, or simply to ensure the highest possible stability of the final product, you’ll understand, won’t you? I mean, you’re IT pros, so you know all about how the software development process works, right? Thanks for cutting us some slack on this. I’m sure you won’t be disappointed by what you find between these covers. And whatever flaws or errors or gaps you do happen to find, feel free to fill them in yourself with extra reading and hands-on experimenting with the product. You have the power—you’re IT pros. You rock. You rule.

What’s Between the Sheets I guess I should have said “what’s between the covers,” but sheets are pages, right? Lame attempt at humor there, but I guess you want to know what I’m going to be covering in this book. Well, I could start talking about the “three pillars of Windows Server 2008,” which are (Warning! The Marketing Police insist on Init Caps here!) More Control, Increased Protection, and Greater Flexibility. But if I started talking like that you’d probably clap your hands tightly over your ears and start shouting, “Augh! Marketing fluff! Shut it off! Shut it off!!” and run away screaming madly to the server room. I know that’s not being fair to those who work in marketing (poor souls), but we all need to pick on somebody sometimes, don’t we? And since you are an IT pro (the target audience of this book), what you want is technical “meat,” not marketing “fluff”—and that’s exactly what we (myself together with the product team at Microsoft) have tried to bring you. So instead of talking about “pillars,” we’re going to focus on “features” and “enhancements” (changes to features found on previous Windows Server platforms) so that you can derive the utmost benefit from reading this book. Windows Server 2008 has a lot of new features and a ton of enhancements to existing ones. Unfortunately, in a book this size (there’s no point writing a 1500-page book about pre-release software) this means some features have to get more prominence than others. So some features and enhancements have their own separate chapters, while others get unceremoniously lumped together for coverage. Don’t read more into this than is intended, however, as some features simply interest me more than others and some are closer to being finished at the time of writing this than others. Features closer to being finished generally have more internal documentation (the raw source material for much of this book) available and that documentation is usually in near-finished condition.

4

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Anyway, for personal reasons or otherwise, the following new features and enhancements have been chosen by me (and me alone) to be showcased within their own separate chapters: ■

The Windows server core installation option of Windows Server 2008

■

New and improved server management tools

■

Identity and Access (IDA) enhancements to Active Directory

■

Clustering enhancements

■

Terminal Services enhancements

■

Network Access Protection (NAP)

■

Internet Information Services 7.0

■

Deployment tools

These features all got their own chapters, while most everything else has been lumped together into Chapter 12, “Other Features and Enhancements”—not because they’re any less important, but simply for reasons of my personal interest in things, limited time and resources, and convenience. I’ll also talk briefly in Chapter 2, “Usage Scenarios” about why you will (the Marketing Police insisted on my using italics there) want to deploy Windows Server 2008 in your enterprise. Thus, Chapter 2 will briefly talk about various scenarios where the new features and enhancements found in Windows Server 2008 can bring your enterprise tangible benefits. So there’s a bit of marketing content in that chapter, but it’s important for reasons of planning and design. Otherwise, the rest of the book is pure geek stuff.

Acknowledgments Anyway, before I jump in and start describing all the new features and enhancements found in Windows Server 2008, I’d first like to say “Hats off” to all those working inside Microsoft and others who contributed their valuable time and expertise. Their efforts in writing sidebars for this book, reviewing chapters in their draft form, answering questions, and providing me with access to internal documentation and specifications made this book the quality technical resource that I’m sure you’ll find it to be. In fact, let me acknowledge them by name now. I’ll omit their titles, as these can be found in the credits at the end of each sidebar. I know the compositor (the person who transforms my manuscript into pages) will probably hate this, but I’m going to put everyone’s name on a separate line to call them out and recognize them better for their invaluable contribution to this book. Here goes: Aaron J. Smith Ahmed Bisht Ajay Kumar Alain Lissoir

Chapter 1

Alex Balcanquall Amit Date Amith Krishnan Andrew Mason Aruna Somendra Asad Yaqoob Aurash Behbahani Avi Ben-Menahem Bill Staples Brett Hill Chandra Nukala Chris Edson Chuck Timon Claudia Lake Craig Liebendorfer Dan Harman David Lowe Dino Chiesa Donovan Follette Eduardo Melo Elden Christensen Emily Langworthy Eric Deily Eric Fitzgerald Eric Holk Eric Woersching George Menzel Harini Muralidharan Harish Kumar Poongan Shanmugam Isaac Roybal Jason Olson Jeff Woolsey Jeffrey Snover Jez Sadler Joel Sloss

Introduction

5

6

Introducing Windows Server 2008

John Morello Kadirvel C. Vanniarajan Kalpesh Patel Kapil Jain Kevin London Kevin Rhodes Kevin Sullivan Kurt Friedrich Lu Zhao Mahesh Lotlikar Manish Kalra Marcelo Mas Mike Schutz Mike Wilenzick Moon Majumdar Nick Pierson Nils Dussart Nisha Victor Nitin T Bhat Oded Shekel Paul Mayfield Peter Waxman Piyush Lumba Rahul Prasad Rajiv Arunkundram Reagan Templin Samim Erdogan Samir Jain Santosh Chandwani Satyajit Nath Scott Dickens Scott Turnbull Siddhartha Sen Somesh Goel Soo Kuan Teo

Chapter 1

Introduction

7

Sriram Sampath Suryanarayana Shastri Suzanne Morgan Tad Brockway Thom Robbins Tim Elhajj Tobin Titus Tolga Acar Tom Kelnar Tony Ureche Tres Hill Ulf B. Simon-Weidner Vijay Gajjala Wai-O Hui Ward Ralston Yogesh Mehta Zardosht Kasheff I hope I haven’t missed anyone in the above list of reviewers, sidebar contributors, and other experts. If I have, I’m really sorry—e-mail me and I’ll see that you get a free copy of my book! And since we’re acknowledging people here, let me also give credit to the editorial staff at Microsoft Press who helped bring this project to fruition. Thank you, Martin DelRe, Karen Szall, and Denise Bankaitis for your advice, patience, and prodding to help me get this book completed on time for TechEd ’07. And thank you, Roger LeBlanc, for your skill and restraint in copyediting my writing and weeding out dangling participles, nested colons, and other grammatical horrors while maintaining my natural voice and rambling style of writing. Thank you to Waypoint Press for their editorial and production services. And thanks especially to Ingrid, my wife and business partner, who contributed many hours of research gathering and organizing material for this book and helped in many other ways every step of the way. She deserves to have her name on a separate page all by herself, but the compositor would probably choke if I tried this, so I’ll just give her a whole line to herself, like this: Thank you, Ingrid!

One Last Thing—Humor You’ve probably noticed by now that this chapter is written with a fairly light tone. After all, I’m a geek, so my wife usually doesn’t find the jokes I tell to be funny, right? (I’m being ironic

8

Introducing Windows Server 2008

actually and using “my wife” as a literary device here, but please don’t tell her in case she’s offended by this usage.) (More irony.) OK, so maybe I’m not the most slapstick kind of guy. And why add humor, anyway, to a serious book about a serious product developed by a serious company like Microsoft? Well, apart from the fact that Microsoft can poke fun at itself sometimes (search the Internet for the “Microsoft IPod” video and you’ll see what I mean), the main reason I’ve tried to use humor is to better engage you, the reader. Yes, you’re an IT pro, a geek, and you read manuals all day long and get your kick out of finding errors in them. Well I am too—my father used to tell me a story about how, when I was in high school, he came down to see me in my room one evening and found me “reading a calculus textbook and chuckling in a superior way” about something I was reading. I can’t remember that particular incident, but I do recall getting a laugh over some of the textbooks I had to read in university. Such is the curse of being a geek. And, hopefully, that describes you as well—because if you’re the totally wound-up and straightlaced type, you’re probably in the wrong business if you’re an IT pro. Software doesn’t always do what it’s supposed to do, and it’s usually best just to laugh about it and find a workaround instead of taking it out on the vendor. Anyway, I’m telling you all this just so that you’re aware that I’ll be adding the occasional joke or giving lighthearted treatment to some of the features and enhancements discussed in this book. In fact, at one point I even thought of trying to add a Dilbert cartoon at the start of each chapter to set the stage for what I wanted to tell you concerning each feature. Unfortunately, I eventually abandoned this plan for three reasons: ■

Reason #1: I had to write this book in a hurry so that it could be published in time for TechEd while still being based on builds as near to Beta 3 as possible. So, unfortunately, there was no time to wade through the red tape that Microsoft Legal would probably have required to make this happen.

■

Reason #2: My project manager didn’t have the kind of budget to pay the level of royalties that United Feature Syndicate, Inc., would probably have demanded for doing this kind of thing.

■

Reason #3: Scott Adams probably uses a Mac.

Chapter 2

Usage Scenarios In this chapter: Providing an Identity and Access Infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Ensuring Security and Policy Enforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Easing Deployment Headaches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Making Servers Easier to Manage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Supporting the Branch Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Providing Centralized Application Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Deploying Web Applications and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Ensuring High Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Ensuring Secure and Reliable Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Leveraging Virtualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Before we jump into the technical stuff, let’s pause and make a business case for deploying Microsoft Windows Server 2008 in your organization. Sure, there’s a marketing element in doing this, and as a techie you’d rather get to the real stuff right away. However, reality for most IT pros means preparing RFPs for bosses, presenting slide decks showing ROI from planned implementations of products, and generally trying to work within the constraints of a meager budget created by pointy-headed executives who can’t seem to understand how cool technology is and why they need it for their business. So let’s look briefly at how Windows Server 2008 can benefit your enterprise. I’m assuming you already know a few basic things about the new features and enhancements of the platform (otherwise, you wouldn’t be going to TechEd ‘07 and similar events where this book is being distributed), but you might also want to give this chapter a re-read once you’ve finished the rest of the book. This will give you a better idea of what Windows Server 2008 is and what it’s capable of. Anyway, let’s ask the sixty-four-dollar questions: Who needs Windows Server 2008? And why do I need it? Oh yeah, I forgot:

9

10

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Providing an Identity and Access Infrastructure At the core of any mid- or large-sized organization are controls—controls concerning who is allowed to access your organization’s information resources, how you verify someone’s identity, what they’re allowed to do, how you enforce controls, and how you keep records for auditing and for increasing efficiency. An umbrella name for all this is Identity and Access Management, or IDA. Organizations need an IDA solution that provides services for managing information about users and computers, making information resources available and controlling access to them, simplifying access using single sign-on, ensuring sensitive business information is adequately protected, and safeguarding your information resources as you communicate and exchange information with customers and business partners. Why is Windows Server 2008 an ideal platform for building your IDA solution? Because it both leverages the basic functionality of Active Directory found in previous Windows Server platforms and includes new features and enhancements to Active Directory in Windows Server 2008. For example, you can now use Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) auditing to maintain a detailed record of changes made to directory objects that records both the new value of an attribute that was changed and its original value. You can leverage the new support for Online Certificate Status Protocol in Active Directory Certificate Services (AD CS) to streamline the process of managing and distributing revocation status information across your enterprise. You can use several enhancements in Active Directory Rights Management Services (AD RMS) together with RMS-enabled applications to help you safeguard your company’s digital information from unauthorized use more easily than was possible using RMS on previous Windows Server platforms. And you can use the integrated Active Directory Federation Services (AD FS) role to leverage the industry-supported Web Services (WS-*) protocols to securely exchange information with business partners and provide a single signon (SSO) authentication experience for users and applications over the life of an online session. Want to find out more about these enhancements? Turn to Chapter 7, “Active Directory Enhancements,” to learn about all this and more. And with Windows Vista on the client side, you have added benefits such as an integrated RMS client, improved smart card support, and better integration with SSO and other Active Directory enhancements in Windows Server 2008.

Ensuring Security and Policy Enforcement Do users and computers connecting to your network comply with your company’s security policy requirements? Is there any way to enforce that this is indeed the case? Yes, there is. In addition to standard policy enforcement mechanisms such as Group Policy and Active Directory authentication, Windows Server 2008 also includes the new Network Access Protection (NAP) platform. NAP provides a platform that helps ensure that client computers

Chapter 2

Usage Scenarios

11

trying to connect to your network meet administrator-defined requirements for system health as laid out in your security policy. For example, NAP can ensure that computers connecting to your network to access resources on it have all critical security updates, antivirus software, the latest signature files, a functioning host-based firewall that’s properly configured, and so on. And if NAP determines that a client computer doesn’t meet all these health requirements, it can quarantine the computer on an isolated network until remediation can be performed or it can deny access entirely to the network. By using the power of NAP, you can enforce compliance with your network health requirements and mitigate the risk of having improperly configured client computers that might have been exposed to worms and other malware. Want to find out more about NAP? Turn to Chapter 10, “Implementing Network Access Protection,” where I have a comprehensive description of the platform and how it’s implemented using Windows Server 2008 together with Windows Vista. And if you really want to enhance the security of your servers, try deploying the Windows server core installation option of Windows Server 2008 instead of the full installation option. The Windows server core installation option has a significantly smaller attack surface because all nonessential components and functionality have been removed. Want to learn about this installation option? Turn to Chapter 6, “Windows Server Core,” for a detailed walkthrough of its capabilities and tasks related to its management.

Easing Deployment Headaches Do you currently use third-party, image-based deployment tools to deploy your Windows servers? I’m not surprised—until Microsoft released the Windows Automated Installation Kit (Windows AIK), you were pretty much limited to either deploying Windows using third-party imaging tools or using Sysprep and answer files. The Windows AIK deploys Windows Vista based on Vista’s new componentized, modular architecture and Windows image (.wim) file-based installation media format. Windows Vista and the Windows AIK has changed everything, and now Microsoft has finally come on strong in the deployment tools arena. And with the release of the Microsoft Solution Accelerator for Business Desktop Deployment (BDD) 2007 customers now have a best-practice set of comprehensive guidance and tools from Microsoft that they can use to easily deploy Windows Vista and the 2007 Office system across an enterprise. So deploying Windows clients is a snap now, but what about deploying Windows servers? Windows Server 2008 includes huge improvements in this area with its new Windows Deployment Services role, an updated and redesigned version of the Remote Installation Services (RIS) feature found in Windows Server 2003 and Windows 2000 Server. Windows Deployment Services enables enterprises to rapidly deploy Windows operating systems using network-based installation, a process that doesn’t require you to be physically present at each target computer or to install directly from DVD media.

12

Introducing Windows Server 2008

And if you liked BDD 2007, you’ll like the similar set of guidance and tools that Microsoft is currently developing for deploying Windows Server 2008 machines. This new set of tools and best practices will be called the Solution Accelerator for Windows Server Deployment and it will integrate the capabilities of Windows AIK, ImageX, Windows Deployment Services, and other deployment tools to provide a point-and-click, drag-and-drop deployment experience similar to what you’ve experienced with BDD 2007 if you’ve had a chance to play with it already. Deploying systems is a headache sometimes, but managing licensing and activation of these machines can bring on a migraine. Instead of taking two pills and going to bed, however, you’ll find that the enhancements made to Volume Activation 2.0 in Windows Server 2008 take the pain away. This improved feature will also help you sleep at night, knowing that your machines are in compliance with licensing requirements. Want to read more about all these improvements? Crack open Chapter 13, “Deploying Windows Server 2008,” and you’ll find everything you need to get you started in this area.

Making Servers Easier to Manage I usually don’t get excited about tools—they’re designed to get the job done and nothing more. Sure, some people might buy a new compound miter saw, show it to all their neighbors, and go “Ooh, aah.” Not me—maybe it’s because I’m a geek and I get excited about quad-core processors instead! Still, you’ve gotta love tools when they make life easier, and Windows Server 2008 includes a slate of new and improved tools for managing Windows Server 2008 machines throughout your enterprise. There’s Server Manager, an integrated MMC console that provides a single source for managing your server’s roles and features and for monitoring your server’s status. Server Manager even comes in a command-line version called ServerManagerCmd.exe, which you can use to quickly add role services and features or perform “what if” scenarios such as, “What components would get installed if I added the Web Server role on my system?” Then there’s Windows PowerShell, a command-line shell and scripting language that includes more than 130 cmdlets, plus an intuitive scripting language specifically designed for IT pros like you. As of the Beta 3 release of Windows Server 2008, PowerShell is now included as an optional component you can install. PowerShell is a powerful tool for performing administration tasks on Windows Server 2008, such as managing services, processes, and storage. And PowerShell can also be used to manage aspects of certain server roles such as Internet Information Services (IIS) 7.0, Terminal Services, and Active Directory Domain Services. Then there’s the Windows Remote Shell (WinRS) and Windows Remote Management (WinRM) components first included in Windows Vista; enhancements to Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI), also introduced in Windows Vista; improvements in

Chapter 2

Usage Scenarios

13

how Group Policy works, including both changes in Windows Vista and in Windows Server 2008; and more. Where can you learn more about these different tools? Try Chapter 4, “Managing Windows Server 2008” for a start. Then turn to Chapter 6 and to Chapter 11, “Internet Information Services 7.0,” for more examples of seeing these tools at work. Managing your Windows servers has never been easier than using what the Windows Server 2008 platform provides for you to do this.

Supporting the Branch Office It would be nice if all your servers were set up in a single location so that you could keep an eye on them, wouldn’t it? Unfortunately, today’s enterprise often consists of a corporate headquarters and a bunch of remote branch offices, sometimes scattered all around the globe. What’s worse, you might be the main IT person stuck there at headquarters, while people who don’t know a router from a switch have hands-on physical access to your servers, which just happen to be located out there in remote sites instead of being safe under your watchful eye. What can you do to maintain control? “My precioussss! gollum…” Windows Server 2008 has several technologies that help you keep control and be Lord of the Servers in your enterprise. Read-Only Domain Controllers (RODCs) are a new type of domain controller that hosts a read-only replica of your Active Directory database. If you combine RODCs with the BitLocker Drive Encryption feature first introduced in Windows Vista, you no longer have to worry about thieves (or silly employees) walking off with one of your domain controllers and all your goodies. Restartable Active Directory Domain Services lets you stop Active Directory services on your domain controllers so that updates can be applied or offline defragmentation of the database can be performed, and it can do this without requiring you to reboot your machine. This is a big improvement that not only reduces downtime, but makes your domain controllers easier to manage, which is a plus when they’re located at a remote site. Other improvements—such as delegation improvements, the new SMB 2.0 protocol, and the enhanced DFSR introduced in Windows Server 2003 R2—help make Windows Server 2008 an ideal platform for domain controllers that need to be located at branch offices. Want to find out more about these improvements? Chapter 7 covers RODC and Restartable AD DS, while various other improvements can be found in Chapter 12, “Other Features and Enhancements.”

Providing Centralized Application Access Mobile users can be a pain to support. Although virtual private network (VPN) technologies have made remote access simpler, giving remote users full access to your internal network from over the Internet is often not the best solution. With the improvements to Terminal

14

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Services in Windows Server 2008, however, users (both remote and on the network) can securely access business applications running on your Terminal Servers and have the same kind of experience as if these applications were installed locally on their machines. Terminal Services Gateway (TS Gateway) lets remote users securely punch through your perimeter firewall and access Terminal Servers running on your corpnet. Terminal Services RemoteApp enables remoting of individual application windows instead of the whole desktop so that an application that is actually running on a Terminal Server looks and feels to the user as if it were running on her own desktop. And Terminal Services Web Access makes application deployment a snap—the user visits a Web site, clicks on a link or icon, and launches an application on a Terminal Server located somewhere in a galaxy far, far away. Interested in learning more about these new features and enhancements to Terminal Services in Windows Server 2008? Flip to Chapter 8, “Terminal Services Enhancements,” and you’ll find a ton of information on the subject.

Deploying Web Applications and Services Does your organization rely on providing Web applications and Web services to customers? Is the Web a way of life for your business? The new features and enhancements found in Internet Information Services 7.0 are going to excite you if that’s the case. Hosting companies will benefit from xcopy deployment, which copies both a site’s content and its configuration to the Web server in one single action. The new modular architecture of IIS 7.0 will make a difference in datacenters because it enables you to deploy Web servers that have a low footprint and minimal attack surface. Enterprises that build B2B and B2C solutions that rely on the .NET Framework 3.0 can use the Application Server role of Windows Server 2008 to leverage industry-standard Web Services (WS-*) protocols for building these solutions on top of IIS 7.0. And Windows System Resource Manager and other components can help you make efficient use of your hardware resources and ensure a consistent end-user experience. Want to learn more about IIS 7.0 and the Application Server role? Turn to Chapter 11 for a whirlwind tour of these topics.

Ensuring High Availability I get miffed when I try to buy a book online from some bookstore and have to wait more than five seconds for the check-out page to appear, or if the site temporarily seems to go down. What’s wrong with these guys? Don’t they understand high availability? What, are they running their entire store on a single box? Don’t they know single point of failure?

Chapter 2

Usage Scenarios

15

Whatever applications are critical to the operation of your business, you need to use some form of clustering to make sure they never go down or become inaccessible to customers. Windows Server 2008 includes two enhancements in the area of high availability. First, server clusters (now called failover clusters) have been significantly improved to make them simple to set up and configure, easier to manage, more secure, and more stable. Improvements have been made in the way the cluster communicates with storage, which can increase performance for both storage area network (SAN) and direct attached storage (DAS). Failover clusters also offer new configuration options that can eliminate the quorum resource from being a single point of failure. Network Load Balancing (NLB) has also been improved in Windows Server 2008 to include support for IPv6 and the NDIS 6.0 specification. And the WMI provider has been enhanced with new functionality to make NLB solutions more manageable. Has this piqued your interest? Check out Chapter 9, “Clustering Enhancements,” and find out more.

Ensuring Secure and Reliable Storage I used to think file servers were boring until I learned about the new storage features and enhancements in Windows Server 2008. Not any more. The Share And Storage Management snap-in provided by the File Server role makes managing volumes and shares easier than ever before with its two new wizards. The Provision Storage Wizard provides an integrated storage provisioning experience for performing tasks like creating a new LUN, specifying the LUN type, unmasking a LUN, and creating and formatting a volume. The wizard also supports multiple protocols—including Fibre Channel, iSCSI, and SAS—and it requires only a VDS 1.1 hardware provider. The Provision A Shared Folder Wizard provides an integrated file-share provisioning experience that lets you easily configure permissions, quotas, file screens, and other settings for SMB shares, and it supports NFS shares also. Then there’s Storage Explorer, a new MMC snap-in that provides a tree-structured view of detailed information concerning all the components of your Fibre Channel or iSCSI SAN, including Fabrics, Platforms, Storage Devices, and LUNs. And it provides integrated support for Microsoft Multipath IO (MPIO), which enables software and hardware vendors to develop multipathing solutions that work effectively with solutions built using Windows Server 2008 and vendor-supplied storage hardware devices. And the built-in iSCSI Initiator lets you configure a target iSCSI storage device, plug your server and storage device into a Gigabit Ethernet switch, and—presto!—you’ve now got high-speed block storage over IP. And there’s iSCSI Boot, which lets you install Windows Server 2008 directly to an iSCSI volume on a SAN. The enhanced Windows Server Backup uses the same block-level, image-based (.vhd) backup technology that is used by the CompletePC Backup And Recovery feature of Windows Vista. How’s all that for your lowly, much-maligned file server? Find out more about storage improvements and lots more in Chapter 12.

16

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Leveraging Virtualization Last but not least (in fact, so not least that we’ll be covering this topic in our very next chapter), there’s Windows Server Virtualization, which will change (once it’s released after Windows Server 2008 is released) the entire architecture of Windows servers in fundamental ways. And even though Windows Server Virtualization is still in an early stage of development at the time of writing this book, IT pros like you already know the power virtualization technologies have to affect today’s enterprises through server consolidation, business continuity management, development and testing environments, application compatibility, and datacenter workload decoupling. I won’t go into more details about Windows Server Virtualization here—turn to Chapter 3, “Windows Server Virtualization,” and get a preview.

Conclusion

Whew, that’s a relief! That’s not the hat I usually wear, because I’m a geek and not a hawker of wares and potions. I’m glad that’s over with because now we can get to the technical stuff that we IT pros love to talk about. But, in point of fact, I respect the marketing professionals for what they have to do. If they don’t get the news out there about Windows Server 2008, who’s going to buy it? And if people don’t buy it, how can Microsoft stay in business? And if Microsoft goes out of business, how can I write about their products, make money, and feed my family? Anyway, now that all that’s out of the way, let’s dig into the technical stuff and get down and geeky.

Chapter 3

Windows Server Virtualization In this chapter: Why Enterprises Love Virtualization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Virtualization Today . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Understanding Virtualization in Windows Server 2008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Features of Windows Server Virtualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Managing Virtual Machines in Windows Server 2008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 System Center Virtual Machine Manager 2007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 SoftGrid Application Virtualization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Additional Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Now that we’ve examined some possible usage scenarios for Microsoft Windows Server 2008, it’s time to start digging deep into the features of the platform. But there are a lot of new features and enhancements in Windows Server 2008—why begin with virtualization? Customer-facing answer? Need. Technical answer for us IT pros? Architecture.

Why Enterprises Love Virtualization Virtualization has been around in computing since the mainframe days of the late ’60s. Those of us who are old enough to remember punch cards (carrying boxes of them around was a great way of getting exercise) might remember the IBM 360 mainframe system and the CP/CMS time-sharing operating system, which simulated the effect of each user having a full, standalone IBM mainframe at their fingertips. Each user’s “virtual machine” was fully independent of those belonging to other users, so if you ran an application that crashed “your” machine, other users weren’t affected. PCs changed this paradigm in the ’80s, and eventually gave users’ physical machines that today are far more powerful than the mainframes of the ’60s and ’70s. But as desktop PCs began to proliferate, so did servers in the back rooms of most businesses. Soon you’d have two domain controllers, a mail server running Microsoft Exchange, a couple of file servers, a database server, a Web server for your intranet, and so on. Larger companies might have

17

18

Introducing Windows Server 2008

dozens or even hundreds of servers, some running multiple roles such as AD, DNS, DHCP, or more. Managing all these separate boxes can be a headache, and restoring them from backup after a disaster can involve costly downtime for your business. But even worse from a business standpoint is that many of them are underutilized. How does virtualization for x86/x64 platforms solve these issues?

Server Consolidation In a production environment, having a server that averages only 5 percent CPU utilization doesn’t make sense. A typical example would be a DHCP server in an enterprise environment that leases addresses to several thousand clients. One solution to such underutilization is to consolidate several roles on one box. For example, instead of just using the box as a DHCP server, you could also use it as a DNS server, file server, and print server. The problem is that as more roles are installed on a box, the uncertainty in their peak usage requirements increases, making it difficult to ensure that the machine doesn’t become a bottleneck. In addition, the attack surface of the machine increases because more ports have to be open so that it can listen for client requests for all these services. Patching also becomes more complicated when updates for one of the running service need to be applied—if the update causes a secondary issue, several essential network services could go down instead of one. Using virtualization, however, you can consolidate multiple server roles as separate virtual machines running on a single physical machine. This approach lets you reduce “server sprawl” and maximize the utilization of your current hardware, and each role can run in its own isolated virtual environment for greater security and easier management. And by consolidating multiple (possibly dozens of) virtual machines onto enterprise-class server hardware that has fault-tolerant RAID hardware and hot-swappable components, you can reduce downtime and make the most efficient use of your hardware. The process of migrating server roles from separate physical boxes onto virtual machines is known as server consolidation, and this is probably the number one driver behind the growing popularity of virtualization in enterprise environments. After all, budgets are limited nowadays!

Business Continuity Being able to ensure business continuity in the event of a disaster is another big driver toward virtualization. Restoring a critical server role from tape backup when one of your boxes starts emitting smoke can be a long and painful process, especially when your CEO is standing over you wringing his hands waiting for you to finish. Having hot-spare servers waiting in the closet is, of course, a great solution, but it costs money, both in terms of the extra hardware and the licensing costs.

Chapter 3

Windows Server Virtualization

19

That’s another reason why virtualization is so compelling. Because guest operating systems, which run inside virtual machines (VMs), are generally independent of the hardware on which the host operating system runs, you can easily restore a backed-up virtual server to a system that has different hardware than the original system that died. And using virtual machines, you can reduce both scheduled and unscheduled downtime by simplifying the restore process to ensure the availability of essential services for your network.

Testing and Development IT pros like us are always in learn mode because of the steady flow (or flood) of new technologies arriving on our doorstep. I remember when I had to set up a test network to evaluate Exchange 5.5. I had eight boxes sitting on a bench just so I could try out the various features of the new messaging platform. These included an Exchange 5.0 server, an Exchange 4.0 server, and an MS Mail 3.0 server so that I could test migration from these platforms. Plus I had several different clients running on different boxes. The heat alone from these systems could have kept me warm during a Winnipeg winter. Testing new platforms is a lot easier today because of virtualization. I can run a half dozen virtual machines easily on a single low-end server, and I can even set up a routed network without having to learn IOS by enabling IP routing on a virtual Microsoft Windows XP machine with two virtual NICs. Architects can benefit from virtualization by being able to create virtual test networks on a single server that mimic closely the complexity of large enterprise environments. Developers benefit too by being able to test their applications in isolated environments, where they can roll back their virtual machines when needed instead of having to install everything from scratch. The whole IT life cycle becomes easier to manage because virtualization reduces the time it takes to move new software from a development environment to test and then production.

Application Compatibility Another popular use of virtualization today is to ensure application compatibility. Suppose you upgrade the version of Windows you have running on your desktop and find that a critical LOB application won’t run properly on the new version. You can try several ways to resolve this problem. You can run the program in application compatibility mode, using the Application Compatibility Toolkit to shim the application so that it works on the new platform. Or you can contact the vendor for an updated version of the application. Another alternative, however, is virtualization: install Microsoft Virtual PC 2007 on each desktop computer where the user needs to use the problem application, install the old version of Windows as a guest OS, and then run the application from there.

Virtualization in the Datacenter Virtualization also has a special place in the datacenter, as it lets you decouple workloads from hardware to make the best use of your resources. You can rapidly provision workloads as they

20

Introducing Windows Server 2008

are needed so that your solutions can both scale up and scale out easily. Virtualization also simplifies automating complex solutions, though current virtualization products are limited in this regard. But that’s where Windows Server 2008 comes in.

Virtualization Today Virtualization today on Windows platforms basically takes one of two forms: Type 2 or Hybrid. A typical example of Type 2 virtualization is the Java virtual machine, while another example is the common language runtime (CLR) of the .NET Framework. In both examples, you start with the host operating system—that is, the operating system installed directly onto the physical hardware. On top of the host OS runs a Virtual Machine Monitor (VMM), whose role is to create and manage virtual machines, dole out resources to these machines, and keep these machines isolated from each other. In other words, the VMM is the virtualization layer in this scenario. Then on top of the VMM you have the guests that are running, which in this case are Java or .NET applications. Figure 3-1 shows this arrangement, and because the guests have to access the hardware by going through both the VMM and the host OS, performance is generally not at its best in this scenario.

Figure 3-1 Architecture of Type 2 VMM

More familiar probably to most IT pros is the Hybrid form of virtualization shown in Figure 3-2. Here both the host OS and the VMM essentially run directly on the hardware (though with different levels of access to different hardware components), whereas the guest OSs run on top of the virtualization layer. Well, that’s not exactly what’s happening here. A more accurate depiction of things is that the VMM in this configuration still must go through the host OS to access hardware. However, the host OS and VMM are both running in kernel mode and so they are essentially playing tug o’ war with the CPU. The host gets CPU cycles when it needs them in the host context and then passes cycles back to the VMM and the VMM services then provide cycles to the guest OSs. And so it goes, back and forth. The reason why the Hybrid model is faster is that the VMM is running in kernel mode as opposed to the Type 2 model where the VMM generally runs in User mode. Anyway, the Hybrid VMM approach is used today in two popular virtualization solutions from Microsoft, namely Microsoft Virtual PC 2007 and Microsoft Virtual Server 2005 R2.

Chapter 3

Windows Server Virtualization

21

The performance of Hybrid VMM is better than that of Type 2 VMM, but it’s still not as good as having separate physical machines.

Figure 3-2 Architecture of Hybrid VMM

Note

Another way of distinguishing between Type 2 and Hybrid VMMs is that Type 2 VMMs are process virtual machines because they isolate processes (services or applications) as separate guests on the physical system, while Hybrid VMMs are system virtual machines because they isolate entire operating systems, such as Windows or Linux, as separate guests.

A third type of virtualization technology available today is Type 1 VMM, or hypervisor technology. A hypervisor is a layer of software that sits just above the hardware and beneath one or more operating systems. Its primary purpose is to provide isolated execution environments, called partitions, within which virtual machines containing guest OSs can run. Each partition is provided with its own set of hardware resources—such as memory, CPU cycles, and devices—and the hypervisor is responsible for controlling and arbitrating access to the underlying hardware. Figure 3-3 shows a simple form of Type 1 VMM in which the VMM (the hypervisor) is running directly on the bare metal (the underlying hardware) and several guest OSs are running on top of the VMM.

Figure 3-3 Architecture of Type 1 VMM

Going forward, hypervisor-based virtualization has the greatest performance potential, and in a moment we’ll see how this will be implemented in Windows Server 2008. But first let’s compare two variations of Type 1 VMM: monolithic and microkernelized.

22

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Monolithic Hypervisor In the monolithic model, the hypervisor has its own drivers for accessing the hardware beneath it. (See Figure 3-4.) Guest OSs run in VMs on top of the hypervisor, and when a guest needs to access hardware it does so through the hypervisor and its driver model. Typically, one of these guest OSs is the administrator or console OS within which you run the tools that provision, manage, and monitor all guest OSs running on the system.

Figure 3-4 Monolithic hypervisor

The monolithic hypervisor model provides excellent performance, but it can have weaknesses in the areas of security and stability. This is because this model inherently has a greater attack surface and much greater potential for security concerns due to the fact that drivers (and even sometimes third-party code) runs in this very sensitive area. For example, if malware were downloaded onto the system, it could install a keystroke logger masquerading as a device driver in the hypervisor. If this happened, every guest OS running on the system would be compromised, which obviously isn’t good. Even worse, once you’ve been “hyperjacked” there’s no way the operating systems running above can tell because the hypervisor is invisible to the OSs above and can be lied to by the hypervisor! The other problem is stability—if a driver were updated in the hypervisor and the new driver had a bug in it, the whole system would be affected, including all its virtual machines. Driver stability is thus a critical issue for this model, and introducing any third-party code has the potential to cause problems. And given the evolving nature of server hardware, the frequent need for new and updated drivers increases the chances of something bad happening. You can think of the monolithic model as a “fat hypervisor” model because of all the drivers the hypervisor needs to support.

Microkernelized Hypervisor Now contrast the monolithic approach just mentioned with the microkernelized model. (See Figure 3-5.) Here you have a truly ”thin” hypervisor that has no drivers running within it. Yes, that’s right—the hypervisor has no drivers at all. Instead, drivers are run in each partition

Chapter 3

Windows Server Virtualization

23

so that each guest OS running within a virtual machine can access the hardware through the hypervisor. This arrangement makes each virtual machine a completely separate partition for greater security and reliability.

Figure 3-5 Microkernelized hypervisor

In the microkernelized model, which is used in Windows Server virtualization in Windows Server 2008, one VM is the parent partition while the others are child partitions. A partition is the basic unit of isolation supported by the hypervisor. A partition is made up of a physical address space together with one or more virtual processors, and you can assign specific hardware resources—such as CPU cycles, memory and devices—to the partition. The parent partition is the partition that creates and manages the child partitions, and it contains a virtualization stack that is used to control these child partitions. The parent partition is generally also the root partition because it is the partition that is created first and owns all resources not owned by the hypervisor. And being the default owner of all hardware resources means the root partition (that is, the parent) is also in charge of power management, plug and play, managing hardware failure events, and even loading and booting the hypervisor. Within the parent partition is the virtualization stack, a collection of software components that work in conjunction with and sit on top of the hypervisor and that work together to support the virtual machines running on the system. The virtualization stack talks with the hypervisor and performs any virtualization functions not directory supplied by the hypervisor. Most of these functions are centered around the creation and management of child partitions and the resources (CPU, memory, and devices) they need. The virtualization stack also exposes a management interface, which in Windows Server 2008 is a WMI provider whose APIs will be made publicly known. This means that not only will the tools for managing virtual machines running on Windows Server 2008 use these APIs, but third-party system management vendors will also be able to code new tools for managing, configuring, and monitoring VMs running on Windows Server 2008. The advantage of the microkernelized approach used by Windows Server virtualization over the monolithic approach is that the drivers needed between the parent partition and the physical server don’t require any changes to the driver model. In other words, existing drivers just work. Microsoft chose this route because requiring new drivers would have been a

24

Introducing Windows Server 2008

showstopper. And as for the guest OSs, Microsoft will provide the necessary facilities so that these OSs just work either through emulation or through new synthetic devices. On the other hand, one could argue that the microkernelized approach does suffer a slight performance hit compared with the monolithic model. However, security is paramount nowadays, so sacrificing a percentage point or two of performance for a reduced attack surface and greater stability is a no-brainer in most enterprises. Tip What’s the difference between a virtual machine and a partition? Think of a virtual machine as comprising a partition together with its state.

Understanding Virtualization in Windows Server 2008 Before I get you too excited, however, you need to know that what I’m going to describe now is not yet present in Windows Server 2008 Beta 3, the platform that this book covers. It’s coming soon, however. Within 180 days of the release of Windows Server 2008, you should be able to download and install the bits for Windows Server virtualization that will make possible everything that I’ve talked about in the previous section and am going to describe now. In fact, if you’re in a hotel after a long day at TechEd and you’re reading this book for relaxation (that is, you’re a typical geek), you can probably already download tools for your current prerelease build of Windows Server 2008 that might let you test some of these Windows Server virtualization technologies by creating and managing virtual machines on your latest Windows Server 2008 build. I said might let you test these new technologies. Why? First, Windows Server virtualization is an x64 Editions technology only and can’t be installed on x86 builds of Windows Server 2008. Second, it requires hardware processors with hardware-assisted virtualization support, which currently includes AMD-V and Intel VT processors only. These extensions are needed because the hypervisor runs out of context (effectively in ring 1), which means that the code and data for the hypervisor are not mapped into the address space of the guest. As a result, the hypervisor has to rely on the processor to support various intercepts, which are provided by these extensions. And finally, for security reasons it requires processor support for hardwareenabled Data Execution Prevention (DEP), which Intel describes as XD (eXecute Disable) and AMD describes as NX (No eXecute). So if you have suitable hardware and lots of memory, you should be able to start testing Windows Server virtualization as it becomes available in prerelease form for Windows Server 2008. Let’s dig deeper into the architecture of Windows Server virtualization running on Windows Server 2008. Remember, what we’re looking at won’t be available until after Windows Server 2008 RTMs—today in Beta 3, there is no hypervisor in Windows Server 2008, and the operating system basically runs on top of the metal the same way Windows Server 2003 does. So we’re temporarily time-shifting into the future here, and assuming that when

Chapter 3

Windows Server Virtualization

25

we try and add the Windows Virtualization role to our current Windows Server 2008 build that it actually does something! Figure 3-6 shows the big picture of what the architecture of Windows Server 2008 looks like with the virtualization bits installed.

Figure 3-6 Detailed architecture of Windows Server virtualization

Partition 1: Parent Let’s unpack this diagram one piece at a time. First, note that we’ve got one parent partition (at the left) together with three child partitions, all running on top of the Windows hypervisor. In the parent partition, running in kernel mode, there must be a guest OS, which must be Windows Server 2008 but can be either a full installation of Windows Server 2008 or a Windows server core installation. Being able to run a Windows server core installation in the parent partition is significant because it means we can minimize the footprint and attack surface of our system when we use it as a platform for hosting virtual machines. Running within the guest OS is the Virtualization Service Provider (VSP), a “server” component that runs within the parent partition (or any other partition that owns hardware). The VSP talks to the device drivers and acts as a kind of multiplexer, offering hardware services to whoever requests them (for example, in response to I/O requests). The VSP can pass on such requests either directly to a physical device through a driver running in kernel or user mode, or to a native service such as the file system to handle. The VSP plays a key role in how device virtualization works. Previous Microsoft virtualization solutions such as Virtual PC and Virtual Server use emulation to enable guest OSs to access hardware. Virtual PC, for example, emulates a 1997-era motherboard, video card, network

26

Introducing Windows Server 2008

card, and storage for its guest OSs. This is done for compatibility reasons to allow the greatest possible number of different guest OSs to run within VMs on Virtual PC. (Something like over 1,000 different operating systems and versions can run as guests on Virtual PC.) Device emulation is great for compatibility purposes, but generally speaking it’s lousy for performance. VSPs avoid the emulation problem, however, as we’ll see in a moment. In the user-mode portion of the parent partition are the Virtual Machine Service (VM Service), which provides facilities to manage virtual machines and their worker processes; a Virtual Machine Worker Process, which is a process within the virtualization stack that represents and services a specific virtual machine running on the system (there is one VM Worker Process for each VM running on the system); and a WMI Provider that provides a set of interfaces for managing virtualization on the system. As mentioned previously, these WMI Providers will be publicly documented on MSDN, so you’ll be able to automate virtualization tasks using scripts if you know how. Together, these various components make up the usermode portion of the virtualization stack. Finally, at the bottom of the kernel portion of the parent partition is the VMBus, which represents a system for sending requests and data between virtual machines running on the system.

Partition 2: Child with Enlightened Guest The second partition from the left in Figure 3-6 shows an “enlightened” guest OS running within a child partition. An enlightened guest is an operating system that is aware that it is running on top of the hypervisor. As a result, the guest uses an optimized virtual machine interface. A guest that is fully enlightened has no need of an emulator; one that is partially enlightened might need emulation for some types of hardware devices. Windows Server 2008 is an example of a fully enlightened guest and is shown in partition 2 in the figure. (Windows Vista is another possible example of a fully enlightened guest.) The Windows Server 2003 guest OS shown in this partition, however, is only a partially enlightened, or “driverenlightened,” guest OS.) By contrast, a legacy guest is an operating system that was written to run on a specific type of physical machine and therefore has no knowledge or understanding that it is running within a virtualized environment. To run within a VM hosted by Windows Server virtualization, a legacy guest requires substantial infrastructure, including a system BIOS and a wide variety of emulated devices. This infrastructure is not provided by the hypervisor but by an external monitor that we’ll discuss shortly. Running in kernel mode within the enlightened guest OS is the Virtualization Service Client (VSC), a “client” component that runs within a child partition and consumes services. The key thing here is that there is one VSP/VSC pair for each device type. For example, say a

Chapter 3

Windows Server Virtualization

27

user-mode application running in partition 2 (the child partition second from the left) wants to write something to a hard drive, which is server hardware. The process works like this: 1. The application calls the appropriate file system driver running in kernel mode in the child partition. 2. The file system driver notifies the VSC that it needs access to hardware. 3. The VSC passes the request over the VMBus to the corresponding VSP in partition 1 (the parent partition) using shared memory and hypervisor IPC messages. (You can think of the VMBus as a protocol with a supporting library for transferring data between different partitions through a ring buffer. If that’s too confusing, think of it as a pipe. Also, while the diagram makes it look as though traffic goes through all the child partitions, this is not really the case—the VMBus is actually a point-to-point inter-partition bus.) 4. The VSP then writes to the hard drive through the storage stack and the appropriate port driver. Microsoft plans on providing VSP/VSC pairs for storage, networking, video, and input devices for Windows Server virtualization. Third-party IHVs will likely provide additional VSP/VSC pairs to support additional hardware. Speaking of writing things to disk, let’s pause a moment before we go on and explain how pass-through disk access works in Windows Server virtualization. Pass-through disk access represents an entire physical disk as a virtual disk within the guest. The data and commands are thus “passed through” to the physical disk via the partition’s native storage stack without any intervening processing by the virtual storage stack. This process contrasts with a virtual disk, where the virtual storage stack relies on its parser component to make the underlying storage (which could be a .vhd or an .iso image) look like a physical disk to the guest. Passthrough disk access is totally independent of the underlying physical connection involved. For example, the disk might be direct-attached storage (IDE disk, USB flash disk, FireWire disk) or it might be on a storage area network (SAN). Now let’s resume our discussion concerning the architecture of Windows Server virtualization and describe the third and fourth partitions shown in Figure 3-6 above.

Partition 3: Child with Legacy Guest In the third partition from the left is a legacy guest OS such as MS-DOS. Yes, there are still a few places (such as banks) that run DOS for certain purposes. Hopefully, they’ve thrown out all their 286 PCs though. The thing to understand here is that basically this child partition works like Virtual Server. In other words, it uses emulation to provide DOS with a simulated hardware environment that it can understand. As a result, there is no VSC component here running in kernel mode.

28

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Partition 4: Child with Guest Running Linux Finally, in the fourth partition on the right is Linux running as a guest OS in a child partition. Microsoft recognizes the importance of interoperability in today’s enterprises. More specifically, Microsoft knows that their customers want to be able to run any OS on top of the hypervisor that Windows Server virtualization provides, and therefore it can’t relegate Linux (or any other OS) to second-class status by forcing it to have to run on emulated hardware. That’s why Microsoft has decided to partner with XenSource to build VSCs for Linux, which will enable Linux to run as an enlightened guest within a child partition on Windows Server 2008. I knew those FOSS guys would finally see the light one day…

Features of Windows Server Virtualization Now that we understand something about how virtualization works (or will work) on Windows Server 2008, let’s look at what it can actually do. Here’s a quick summary: ■

Creates and manage child partitions for both 32-bit (x86) and 64-bit (x64) operating systems.

■

Creates VMs that can use SMP to access 2, 4, or even 8 cores.

■

Creates VMs that use up to 1 TB of physical memory. Windows Server virtualization can do this because it’s built on 64-bit from the ground up. That means 64-bit HV, 64-bit virtualization stack, and so on.

■

Supports direct pass-through disk access for VMs to provide enhanced read/write performance. Storage is often a bottleneck for physical machines, and with virtual disks it can be even more of a bottleneck. Windows Server virtualization overcomes this issue.

■

Supports hot-add access to any form of storage. This means you can create virtual storage workloads and manage them dynamically.

■

Supports dynamic addition of virtual NICs and can take advantage of underlying virtual LAN (VLAN) security.

■

Includes tools for migrating Virtual Server workloads to Windows Server virtualization. This means your current investment in Virtual Server won’t go down the drain.

■

Supports Windows Server 2008 Core as the parent OS for increased security. I said this earlier, but it bears repeating here because it’s important.

■

Supports NAT and network quarantine for VMs, role-based security, Group Policy, utilization counters, non-Microsoft guests, virtual machine snapshots using Volume Shadow Copy Service (VSS), resource control using Windows System Resource Manager (WSRM), clustering, and a whole bunch of other things.

Chapter 3

Windows Server Virtualization

29

To put this all in perspective, take a look at Table 3-1, which provides a comparison between Virtual Server 2005 R2 and Windows Server virtualization. Comparison of Virtual Server 2005 R2 and Windows Server Virtualization Features

Table 3-1 Feature

Virtual Server 2005 R2

Windows Server Virtualization

32-bit VMs

Yes

Yes

64-bit VMs

No

Yes

SMP VMs

No

Up to 8 core virtual machines

Hot-add memory

No

Yes

Hot-add processors

No

Yes

Hot-add storage

No

Yes

Hot-add networking

No

Yes

Max memory per VM

3.6 GM

> 32 GB

Cluster support

Yes

Yes

Scripting support

Using COM

Using WMI

Max number of VMs

64

No limit—depends only on hardware

Management tool

Web UI

MMC snap-in

Live migration support

No

Yes

Works with System Center Virtual Machine Manager

Yes

Yes

Note

Virtual Server 2005 R2 Service Pack 1 will support Intel VT and AMD-V technologies, as well as VSS.

Managing Virtual Machines in Windows Server 2008 At the time of this writing, the MMC snap-in for managing virtual machines that is provided with Windows Server virtualization is still evolving, but I wanted to give you a quick preview here. Figure 3-7 shows the Windows Virtualization Management console for a near-Beta 3 build of Windows Server 2008. The console tree on the left displays the name of the server, while the Details pane in the middle shows a number of virtual machines, most of them in an Off state and two in a Saved state. The Actions pane on the right lets you manage virtualization settings, import virtual machines, connect to a virtual machine, and perform other tasks.

30

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Figure 3-7 Windows Virtualization Management console

So that’s a very brief preview of what’s in store for virtualization in Windows Server 2008 in terms of managing virtual machines. Fortunately we also have some experts on the product team at Microsoft who provide us with some more information concerning this feature and especially the planning issues surrounding implementing Windows Server virtualization in your environment. First, here’s one of our experts talking about using Windows Server virtualization in conjunction with the Windows server core installation option of Windows Server 2008:

From the Experts: Windows Server Virtualization and a Windows Server Core Installation The Windows server core installation option of Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server virtualization are two new features of Windows Server 2008 that go hand in hand. The Windows server core installation option is a new minimal GUI shell-less installation option for Window Server 2008 Standard, Enterprise and Datacenter Editions that reduces the management and maintenance required by an administrator. The Windows server core installation option provides key advantages over a full installation of Windows Server 2008 and is the perfect complement to Windows Server virtualization. Here are a couple of reasons why. ■

Reduced attack surface A Windows server core installation provides a greatly

reduced attack surface because it is tailored to provide only what a role requires. By

Chapter 3

Windows Server Virtualization

31

providing a minimal parent partition, this reduces the need to patch the parent partition. In the past with one workload running per server, if you needed to reboot the server for a patch, it wasn’t ideal, but generally one workload was affected. With Windows Server virtualization, you’re not just running a single workload. You could be running dozens (even hundreds) of workloads in their own virtual machine. If the virtualization server requires a reboot for a patch (and you don’t have a high availability solution in place), the result could be significant downtime. ■

Reduced resource consumption With the parent partition requiring only a

fraction of the memory resources for a Windows server core installation as opposed to a full installation of Windows Server 2008, you can use that memory to run more virtual machines. In short, it is highly recommended that you use Windows Server virtualization in conjunction with a Windows server core installation. —Jeffrey Woolsey Lead Program Manager, Windows Virtualization Next, let’s hear another of our experts on the virtualization team at Microsoft share about how to identify what should be virtualized in your environment and what maybe shouldn’t:

From the Experts: Virtualization Sizing It is very important to understand how to roll out virtualization in your organization and what makes the most sense for your environment and business conditions. So often, some enthusiastic users and organizations start either attempting to virtualize everything or start with their most complex middleware environments. There are no right or wrong first candidates for virtualization but you need to ensure that you have fully thought about the impact of using virtualization in your environment and for the workloads in question. As you think about what to virtualize and how to go about picking the right workloads, the order of deployment, and what hardware capabilities you need, find a model or a set of models that help you conceptualize the end solution. The System Center family of products provides you a set of tools that help simplify some of these issues, and other solutions from vendors like HP provide you tools to help size the deployment environment once you have figured out the candidates and the rollout process.

32

Introducing Windows Server 2008

The next few paragraphs help identify some of the best practices in sizing your virtualization environment. Think of the following as a set of steps that will help you identify what workloads to virtualize and what the deployment schedule should look like. 1. Assessment As with any project, the first step is to fully know about where you are

today and what capabilities you already have in your environment. The last thing you want to do is to sit and re-create the wheel and invest in things you already have in your environment. As you think about assessment, think about assessing all the components you have in your infrastructure, the types of workloads, and interdependencies of the various workloads. Also evaluate all the management assets you already have in your infrastructure and identify the functions that these are performing, such as monitoring, deployment, data protection, security, and so on. These are the easier items to assess, but the more critical one to assess will be the overall process discipline that exists in your organization and how you deal with change in today’s world. While this is a hard factor to quantify, this is critical in evaluating what capacity you have to deploy virtualization. To help you make this assessment from a holistic perspective, there are tools available such as Microsoft’s Infrastructure Optimization Model or Gartner’s IT Maturity Model that you can choose to use. There is one thing a customer once told me that I will never forget–“If someone tells you they have a solution for your problems when you have not identified or told them what your problems are, most likely they are giving you something you already have in a different package–that is, if you are lucky.” 2. Solution Target Once you have identified and assessed your current environment,

find out where you can use virtualization today. All server virtualization solutions today provide these usage scenarios: ❑

Production Server Consolidation, which encompasses all forms of consolidation of systems in existing or new environments.

❑

Test and Development Environments, which addresses the use of virtualization for optimizing the test and dev cycles and not only enables you to leverage the cost saving from hardware needs but also enables easy creation and modification of the environments.

❑

Business Continuance, where your primary motivator is to leverage the fact that virtualization transforms your IT infrastructure to files (in Microsoft’s case a VHD file) to enable new and interesting continuance and disaster recovery solutions.

Chapter 3

Windows Server Virtualization

❑

Dynamic Datacenter, which is a new set of capabilities unleashed by virtualization to now enable you to not only create and manage your environment more efficiently, but provide a new level of capability to be able to dynamically modify the characteristics of the environments for workloads based on usage. The dynamic resource manipulation enables you to take the consolidation benefits and translate it to now making your IT a more agile environment.

❑

Branch Office, which while not being a core solution, is one usage scenario where virtualization helps change how IT systems are deployed, monitored, and managed and helps extend the capabilities of the branch environment to bring in legacy and new application environments under one common infrastructure umbrella.

As you are trying to decide which solution area or areas to target for your virtualization solution, do keep in mind the level of complexity of the solutions and the need for increasing levels of management tools and process discipline. Test and dev environments are the easiest to virtualize and usually can manage to take some downtime in case of hiccups–hence this is a natural start for everyone. Server Consolidation is another area that you can start using virtualization in today. The initial cost savings here are in the hardware consolidation benefits–but the true value of consolidation is seen only when you have figured out how to use a unified management infrastructure. Business continuance and branch scenarios need you to have a management infrastructure in place to help orchestrate these solutions and again to see the true value – you will need to have a certain level of processes outlined. Dynamic datacenter is a complex solution for most customers to fully deploy and this usually applies to a certain subset of the org’s infrastructure–select the workloads that need this type of solution more carefully as adding the SLAs to maintain such a solution should mean that the workload is really critical to the organization. 3. Consolidation Candidates Most users today are deploying virtualization to help

consolidate workloads and bring in legacy systems into a unified management umbrella. In this light, it becomes important to identify which workloads are the most logical ones to consolidate today and what makes sense in the future. There are some workloads that sound attractive for virtualization, but might not be ideal at any stretch because of certain I/O characteristics or purely because they are so big and critical that they easily scale up to or beyond the capabilities of the hardware being thrown at them. Operations Manager or Virtual Machine Manager has a report that is generated called the virtualization candidates report that helps scan your entire IT org and tell you exactly what workloads are ideal for virtualization based on a number of thresholds such as CPU utilization, I/O intensity, network usage, size of the workload, and so on. Based on this report and knowing the

33

34

Introducing Windows Server 2008

interdependencies identified during the assessment phase, you can make intelligent decisions on what workloads to virtualization and when. 4. Infrastructure Planning This is where the rubber meets the road so to speak. Once

you have identified the candidates to virtualize, you need a place to host the virtualized workloads. Tools from companies such as HP (HP Virtualization Sizing Guide) help you identify the type of servers you will need in your environment to host the virtualization solution that you have identified in the previous step. There is one fundamental rule to consider as you are selecting the infrastructure for virtualization–the two biggest limiting factors for virtualization are memory and I/O throughput–so always ensure that you select a x64 platform for your hardware to ensure a large memory access, and always try to get the best disk subsystem either into the system for DAS or good SAN devices. 5. Placement This is not so much an area that is going to affect the sizing of your

environment, but has the potential to impact your sizing decisions in the long run. Here we are referring to the act of taking one of the virtualization candidates and actually deploying it to one of the selected virtualization host systems. The knowledge of interdependencies of the various workloads affects some of how this placement occurs but from a high level, this is more about optimizing the placement for a few selected variables. Virtual Machine Manager has an intelligent placement tool that helps you optimize either to a load balancing algorithm or to a maximizing utilization algorithm. You can alternatively also tweak individual parameters to help optimize your environment based on your business weights of the different parameters. As you size your virtualization environment, also keep in mind the overall manageability factor and how you can scale your management apps to help cover the new environment. Now that you have seen how to size your virtualization environments, keep two things in mind–virtualization is a great technology that can help in multiple levels and scenarios but is still not the panacea for all problems so do take the time to identify your true problems and also remember that you need to look at deploying and managing virtualized environments over a long period of time and hence the need to think about virtualization as a 3-year solution at least. Virtualization is primarily a consolidation technology that abstracts resources and aids aggregation of workloads, so think carefully about how this affects your environment and what steps you need to have in place to avoid disasters and plan for them early. —Rajiv Arunkundram Senior Product Manager, Server Virtualization

Chapter 3

Windows Server Virtualization

35

Finally, an important planning item for any software deployment is licensing. Here’s one of our experts explaining the current licensing plan for Windows virtualization:

From the Experts: Virtualization Licensing One of the most talked about and often most confused areas for virtualization is licensing. Some of this is primarily caused due to the lack of one industry standard way of dealing with licensing and the other cause is that virtualization is a disruptive technology in how companies operate and hence not clear to customers on what the various policies mean in this new world. Microsoft’s licensing goals are to provide customers and partners cost-effective, flexible, and simplified licensing for our products that will be applicable across all server virtualization products, regardless of vendor. To this effect, several changes were put in place in late 2005 to help accelerate virtualization deployments across vendors: ■

Windows server licensing was changed from installation-based licensing to instance-based licensing for server products.

■

Microsoft changed licensing to allow customers to run up to 1 physical and 4 virtual instances with a single license of Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition on the licensed device; and 1 physical and unlimited virtual instances with Windows Server 2003 Datacenter Edition on the licensed device.

■

With the release of SQL Server 2005 SP2, Microsoft announced expanded virtualization use rights to allow unlimited virtual instances on servers that are fully licensed for SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition.

With all these changes, you can now easily acquire and license Windows Server and other technologies in a much more efficient process. Virtualization also adds another level of complexity for licensing with the ability to easily move the images or instances around between machines. This is where licensing from the old era makes it tricky. The simple way to remember and ensure that you are fully licensed is to look at the host systems as the primary license holders with the instances being the deployment front. So if you want to move a workload to a system that has Windows Server Enterprise Edition running and already has 4 instances running, you will need an additional license; if it is lower than 4, you will not need an additional license to make the move happen. Do note that the licensing policies for these apply across virtualization products in the same manner across all server virtualization platforms. —Rajiv Arunkundram Senior Product Manager, Server Virtualization

36

Introducing Windows Server 2008

System Center Virtual Machine Manager 2007 The Virtualization Management Console snap-in that is included with Windows Server virtualization is limited in several ways, and it’s mainly intended for managing virtual machines on a few servers at a time. Large enterprises want infrastructure solutions, however, and not just point tools. System Center Virtual Machine Manager fills this gap and will enable you to centralize management of a large enterprise’s entire virtual machine infrastructure, rapidly provision new virtual machines as needed, and efficiently manage physical server utilization. Plus it’s fully integrated with the Microsoft System Center family of products, so you can leverage your existing skill sets as you migrate your network infrastructure to Windows Server 2008. System Center Virtual Machine Manager runs as a standalone server application, and it can be used to manage a virtualized datacenter that contains hundreds or even thousands of virtual machines in an Active Directory environment. System Center Virtual Machine Manager will be able to manage virtual machines running on both Microsoft Virtual Server 2005 R2 and Windows 2008 Server with Windows Server virtualization installed. You can even deploy System Center Virtual Machine Manager in a fiber-channel SAN environment for performing tasks such as the following: ■

Deploying VMs from your SAN library to a host

■

Transferring VMs from a host to your library

■

Migrating VMs from one host to another host

The administrator console for System Center Virtual Machine Manager is built upon Windows PowerShell, and you can use it to add and manage host machines, create and manage virtual machines, monitor tasks, and even migrate physical machines to virtual ones (something called P2V). System Center Virtual Machine Manager also includes a self-service Web portal that enables users to independently create and manage their own virtual machines. The way this works is that the administrator predetermines who can create virtual machines, which hosts these machines can run on, and which actions users can perform on their virtual machines. At the time of this writing, System Center Virtual Machine Manager is in Beta 1 and supports managing only virtual machines hosted on Virtual Server 2005 R2.

SoftGrid Application Virtualization Finally, another upcoming virtualization technology you should know about is SoftGrid Application Virtualization, which Microsoft took ownership of when it acquired Softricity in July 2006. SoftGrid provides a different kind of virtualization than we’ve been discussing here—instead of virtualizing an entire operating system, it virtualizes only an application. This functionality makes SoftGrid a more fine-grained virtualization technology than Windows

Chapter 3

Windows Server Virtualization

37

Server virtualization. Also, it’s designed not for the server end but for deploying applications to desktops easily and updating them as necessary. Essentially, what SoftGrid can do using its streaming delivery mechanism is to transform any Windows program into a dynamic service that then follows users wherever they might go. These services can then be integrated into Microsoft’s management infrastructure so that they can be configured and managed using standard policy-based methods. At this point, SoftGrid isn’t directly associated with Windows 2008 Server or Windows Server virtualization, but it’s a new Microsoft technology you should be aware of as the virtualization landscape continues to evolve.

Conclusion It would have been nice to have looked in greater depth at how Windows Server virtualization in Windows Server 2008 works. Unfortunately, at the time of this writing the bits aren’t there yet. Still, you have to admit that this is one of the hottest features of Windows Server 2008, both from the perspective of the day-to-day needs of IT professionals and as a prime selling point for Windows Server 2008. I’ve tried to give you a taste of how this new technology will work and a glimpse of what it looks like, but I hope you’re not satisfied with that—I’m not. I can’t wait till all this comes together, and the plain truth of the matter is that in only a few years virtualization will be inexpensive and ubiquitous. So get ready for it now. Bring back the mainframe!!

Additional Reading If you want to find out more about the underlying processor enhancements from Intel and AMD that will support and be required by Windows Server virtualization, check out the following sources: ■

See http://www.intel.com/technology/virtualization/index.htm for information concerning Intel VT technology

■

See http://www.amd.com/us-en/Processors/ProductInformation/ 0,,30_118_8826_14287,00.html for information about AMD-V technology

For information on how Microsoft and XenSource are collaborating to support running Linux on Windows Server 2008, read the following article on Microsoft PressPass: http://www.microsoft.com/presspass/press/2006/jul06/07-17MSXenSourcePR.mspx. The starting point for finding out more about current (and future) Microsoft virtualization products is http://www.microsoft.com/windowsserversystem/virtualserver/default.mspx on Microsoft.com.

38

Introducing Windows Server 2008

For more information about System Center Virtual Machine Manager and how you can join the beta program for this product, see http://www.microsoft.com/windowsserversystem/ virtualization/default.mspx on the Microsoft Web site. From there, you can jump to pages describing Virtual Server 2005 R2, Virtual PC 2007, System Center Virtual Machine Manager, and most likely Windows Server virtualization on Windows Server 2008 in the near future as well. If you’re interested in finding out more about SoftGrid Application Virtualization, see http://www.softricity.com/index.asp, although the Softricity Web site will probably be folded soon into Microsoft.com. Finally, be sure to turn to Chapter 14, “Additional Resources,” if you want to find more resources about Windows Server virtualization in Windows Server 2008. In that chapter, you’ll find links to webcasts, whitepapers, blogs, newsgroups, and other sources of information on this feature and other Microsoft virtualization technologies.

Chapter 4

Managing Windows Server 2008 In this chapter: Performing Initial Configuration Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Using Server Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Other Management Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Additional Resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 I was kidding, of course, when I said we should bring back the mainframe. After all, remember how much fun it was managing those machines? Sitting at a green screen all day long, dropping armfuls of punch cards into the hopper...what fun! At least running an IBM System/360 could be more fun than operating a PDP-11. When I was a university student years ago (decades actually), I worked one summer for the physics department, where there was a PDP-11 in the sub-sub-basement where the Cyclotron was located. I remember sitting there alone one night around 3 a.m. while an experiment was running, watching the lights blink on the PDP and flipping a switch from time to time to read a paper tape. And that was my introduction to the tools used for managing state-of-the-art computers in those days—specifically, lights, switches, and paper tape. Computers have come a long way since then. Besides being a lot more powerful, they’re also a lot easier to manage. So before we examine other new and exciting features of Microsoft Windows Server 2008, let’s look at the new and enhanced tools you can use to manage the platform. These tools range from user interface (UI) tools for configuring and managing servers to a new command-line tool for installing roles and features, tools for remote administration, Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI) enhancements for improved scripted management, Group Policy enhancements, and more.

Performing Initial Configuration Tasks The first thing you’ll notice when you install Windows Server 2008 is the Initial Configuration Tasks screen (shown in Figure 4-1).

39

40

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Figure 4-1 The Initial Configuration Tasks screen

Remember for a moment how you perform your initial configuration of a machine running Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1 or later, where you do this in three stages: 1. During Setup, when you specify your administrator password, network settings, domain membership, and so on 2. Immediately after Setup, when a screen appears asking if you want to download the latest updates from Windows Update and turn on Automatic Updates before the server can receive inbound traffic 3. After you’ve allowed inbound traffic to your server, when you can use Manage Your Server to install roles on your server to make it a print server, file server, domain controller, and so on Windows Server 2008, however, consolidates these various server configuration tasks by consolidating during- and post-Setup tasks together and presenting them to you in a single screen called Initial Configuration Tasks (ICT). Using the ICT you can ■

Specify key information, including the administrator password, time zone, network settings, and server name. You can also join your server to a domain. For example, clicking the Provide Computer Name And Domain link opens System Properties with the Computer Named tab selected.

Chapter 4

Managing Windows Server 2008

41

■

Search Windows Update for available software updates, and enable one or more of the following: Automatic Updates, Windows Error Reporting (WER), and participation in the Customer Experience Improvement Program.

■

Configure Windows Firewall on your machine, and enable Remote Desktop so that the server can be remotely managed using Terminal Services.

■

Add roles and features to your server—for example, to make it a DNS server or domain controller.

In addition to providing a user interface where you can perform these tasks, ICT also displays status information for each task. For example, if a task has already been performed, the link for the task changes color from blue to purple just like an ordinary hyperlink. And if WER has been turned on, the message “Windows Error Reporting on” is displayed next to the corresponding task item. Once you’ve performed the initial configuration of your server, you can click the Print, E-mail Or Save This Information link at the bottom. This opens Internet Explorer and displays a results page showing the settings you’ve configured.

This results page can be found at %systemdrive%\users\\AppData\ Roaming\Microsoft\Windows\ServerManager\InitialConfigurationTasks.html, and it can be saved or e-mailed for reporting purposes.

42

Introducing Windows Server 2008

A few more notes concerning Initial Configuration Tasks: ■

Performing some tasks requires that you log off or reboot your machine. For example, by default when you install Windows Server 2008, the built-in Administrator account is enabled and has no password. If you use ICT to change the name of this account or specify a password, you must log off and then on again for this change to take effect.

■

If Windows Server 2008 detects that it is deployed on a restricted network (that is, quarantined by NAP) when you first log on, the Update This Server section of the ICT displays a new link named Restore Network Access. Clicking this link allows you to review current network access restrictions and restore full network access for your server, and until you do this your server is in quarantine and has only limited network access. The reason that the other two items in this section (Enable Windows Update And Feedback and Download And Install Updates) are not displayed in this situation is that machines in quarantine cannot access Windows Update directly and must receive their updates from a remediation server. For more information about this, see Chapter 10, “Network Access Protection.”

■

OEMs can customize the ICT screen so that it displays an additional section at the bottom that can include an OEM logo, a description, and task links that can launch EXEs, DLLs, and scripts provided by the OEM. Note that OEM task links cannot display status information, however.

■

The ICT is not displayed if you upgrade to Windows Server 2008 from a previous version of Windows Server.

■

The ICT is also not displayed if the following Group Policy setting is configured: Computer Configuration\Administrative Templates\System\Server Manager\Do Not Open Initial Configuration Tasks Windows At Logon

Using Server Manager OK, you’ve installed your server, performed the initial configuration tasks, and maybe installed a role or two—such as file server and DHCP server—on your machine as well. Now what? Once you close ICT, another new tool automatically opens—namely, Server Manager (shown in Figure 4-2). I like to think of Server Manager as “Computer Management on steroids,” as it can do everything compmgmt.msc can do plus a whole lot more. (Look at the console tree on the left in this figure and you’ll see why I said this.)

Chapter 4

Managing Windows Server 2008

43

Figure 4-2 Main page of Server Manager

The goal of Server Manager is to provide a straightforward way of installing roles and features on your server so that it can function within your business networking environment. As a tool, Server Manager is primarily targeted toward the IT generalist who works at medium-sized organizations. IT specialists who work at large enterprises might want to use additional tools to configure their newly installed servers, however—for example, by performing some initial configuration tasks during unattended setup by using Windows Deployment Services (WDS) together with unattend.xml answer files. See Chapter 13, “Deploying Windows Server 2008,” for more information on using WDS to deploy Windows Server 2008. Server Manager also enables you to modify any of the settings you specified previously using the Initial Configuration Tasks screen. For example, in Figure 4-2 you can see that you can enable Remote Desktop by clicking the Configure Remote Desktop link found on the right side of the Server Summary tile. In fact, Server Manager lets you configure additional advanced settings that are not exposed in the ICT screen, such as enabling or disabling the Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration (IE ESC) or running the Security Configuration Wizard (SCW) on your machine.

44

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Managing Server Roles Let’s dig a bit deeper into Server Manager. Near the bottom of Figure 4-2, you can see that we’ve already installed two roles on our server using the ICT screen. We’ll learn more about the various roles, role services, and features you can install on Windows Server 2008 later in Chapter 5, “Managing Server Roles.” For now, let’s see what we can do with these two roles that have already been installed. Clicking the Go To Manage Roles link changes the focus from the root node (Server Manager) to the Roles node beneath it. (See Figure 4-3.) This page displays a list of roles installed on the server and the status of each of these roles, including any role services that were installed together with them. (Role services will be explained later in Chapter 5.)

Figure 4-3 Roles page of Server Manager

The status of this page is updated in real time at periodic intervals, and if you look carefully at these figures you’ll see a link at the bottom of each page that says “Configure refresh.” If you click this link, you can specify how often Server Manager refreshes the currently displayed page. By default, the refresh interval is two minutes.

Chapter 4

Managing Windows Server 2008

45

Selecting the node for the File Server role in the console tree (or clicking the Go To File Server link on the Roles page) displays more information about how this role is configured on the machine (as shown in Figure 4-4). Using this page, you can manage the following aspects of your file server: ■

View events relevant to this role (by double-clicking on an event to display its details).

■

View system services for this role, and stop, start, pause, or resume these services.

■

View role services installed for this role, and add or remove role services.

■

Get help on how to perform role-related tasks.

Figure 4-4 Main page for File Server role

Note the check mark in the green circle beside File Server Resource Manager (FSRM) under Role Services. This means that FSRM, an optional component or “role service” for the File

46

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Server role, has been installed on this server. You probably remember FSRM from Windows Server 2003 R2—it’s a terrific tool for managing file servers and can be used to configure volume and folder quotas, file screens, and reporting. But in Windows Server 2003 R2, you had to launch FSRM as a separate administrative tool—not so in Windows Server 2008. What’s cool about Server Manager is that it is implemented as a managed, user-mode MMC 3.0 snapin that can host other MMC snap-ins and dynamically show or hide them inline based on whether a particular role or feature has been installed on the server. What this means here is that we can expand our File Server node, and underneath it you’ll find two other snap-ins—namely, File Server Resource Manager (which we chose to install as an additional role service when we installed the File Server role on our machine) and Shared Folders (which is installed by default whenever you add the file server role to a machine.) And underneath the FSRM node, you’ll find the same subnodes you should already be familiar with in FSRM on Windows Server 2003 R2. (See Figure 4-5.) And anything you can do with FSRM in R2, you do pretty much the same way in Windows Server 2008. For example, to configure an SMTP server for sending notification e-mails when quotas are exceeded, rightclick on the File Server Resource Manager node and select Properties. (In addition to hosting the FSRM snap-in within Server Manager, adding the FSRM role service also adds the FSRM console to Administrative Tools.)

Figure 4-5 File Server role showing hosted snap-ins for File Server Resource Manager and Shared Folders

Chapter 4

Managing Windows Server 2008

47

Here are a few more important things to know about Server Manager. First, Server Manager is designed to be a single, all-in-one tool for managing your server. In that light, it replaces both Manage Your Server (for adding roles) and the Add/Remove Windows Components portion of Add Or Remove Programs found on previous versions of Windows Server. In fact, if you go to Control Panel and open Programs And Features (which replaced Add Or Remove Programs in Windows Vista), you’ll see a link called Turn Windows Features On And Off. If you click that link, Server Manager opens and you can use the Roles or Features node to add or remove roles, role services, and features. (See Chapter 5 for how this is done.) Also, when Server Manager is used to install a role such as File Server on your server, it makes sure that this role is secure by default. (That is, the only components that are installed and ports that are opened are those that are absolutely necessary for that role to function.) In Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1 or later, you needed to run the Security Configuration Wizard (SCW) to ensure a server role was installed securely. Windows Server 2008 still includes the SCW, but the tool is intended for use by IT specialists working in large enterprises. For medium-sized organizations, however, IT generalists can use Server Manager to install roles securely, and it’s much easier to do than using SCW. In addition, while Server Manager can be used for installing new roles using smart defaults, SCW is mainly designed as a postdeployment tool for creating security policies that can then be applied to multiple servers to harden them by reducing their attack surface. (You can also compare policies created by SCW against the current state of a server for auditing reasons to ensure compliance with your corporate security policy.) Finally, while Server Manager can only be used to add the default Windows roles (or out-of-band roles made available later, as mentioned in the extensibility discussion a bit later), SCW can also be used for securing nondefault roles such as Exchange Server and SQL Server. But the main takeaway for this chapter concerning Server Manager vs. SCW is that when you run Server Manager to install a new role on your server, you don’t need to run SCW afterward to lock down the role, as Server Manager ensures the role is already secure by default. Server Manager relies upon something called Component Based Servicing (CBS) to discover what roles and services are installed on a machine and to install additional roles or services or remove them. For those of you who might be interested in how this works, there’s a sidebar in the next section that discusses it in more detail. Server Manager is also designed to be extensible. This means when new features become available (such as Windows Server Virtualization, which we talked about in Chapter 3, “Windows Server Virtualization”), you’ll be able to use Server Manager to download these roles from Microsoft and install them on your server. Server Manager is designed to manage one server only (the local server) and cannot be used to manage multiple servers at once. If you need a tool to manage multiple servers simultaneously, use Microsoft System Center. You can find out more about System Center products and their capabilities at http://www.microsoft.com/systemcenter/, and it will be well worth your time to do so. In addition, the status information displayed by Server Manager is limited to

48

Introducing Windows Server 2008

event information and whether role services are running. So if you need more detailed information concerning the status of your servers, again be sure to check out System Center, the next generation of the SMS and MOM platforms. Unlike using Computer Management, you can’t use Server Manager to remotely connect to another server and manage it. For example, if you right-click on the root node in Server Manager, the context menu that is displayed does not display a Connect To A Different Computer option. However, this is not really a significant limitation of the tool because most admins will simply enable Remote Desktop on their servers and use Terminal Services to remotely manage them. For example, you can create a Remote Desktop Connection on a Windows Vista computer, use it to connect to the console session on a Windows Server 2008 machine, and then run Server Manager within the remote console session. And speaking of Computer Management, guess what happens if you click Start, right-click on Computer, and select Manage? In previous versions of Windows, doing this opened Computer Management—what tool do you think opens if you do this in Windows Server 2008? Finally, a few more quick points you can make note of: ■

Server Manager cannot be used to manage servers running previous versions of the Windows Server operating system.

■

Server Manager cannot be installed on Windows Vista or previous versions of Microsoft Windows.

■

Server Manager is not available on a Windows server core installation of Windows Server 2008 because the supporting components (.NET Framework 2.0 and MMC 3.0) are not available on that platform.

■

You can configure the refresh interval for Server Manager and also whether the tool is automatically opened at logon by configuring the following Group Policy settings: Computer Configuration\Administrative Templates\System\Server Manager\Do Not Open Server Manager Automatically At Logon Computer Configuration\Administrative Templates\System\Server Manager\ Configure The Refresh Interval For Server Manager

Chapter 4

Managing Windows Server 2008

From the Experts: The Security Configuration Wizard in Windows Server 2008 The Security Configuration Wizard (SCW) reduces the attack surface of Windows Servers by asking the user a series of questions designed to identify the functional requirements of a server. Functionality not required by the roles the server is performing is then disabled. In addition to being a fundamental security best practice, SCW reduces the number of systems that need to be immediately patched when a vulnerability is exposed. Specifically, SCW: ■

Disables unneeded services.

■

Creates required firewall rules.

■

Removes unneeded firewall rules.

■

Allows further address or security restrictions for firewall rules.

■

Reduces protocol exposure to server message block (SMB), LanMan, and Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP).

SCW guides you through the process of creating, editing, applying, or rolling back a security policy based on the selected roles of the server. The security policies that are created with SCW are XML files that, when applied, configure services, Windows Firewall rules, specific registry values, and audit policy. Those security policies can be applied to an individual machine or can be transformed into a group policy object and then linked to an Organizational Unit in Active Directory. With Windows Server 2008 some important improvements have been made to SCW: ■

On Windows Server 2003, SCW was an optional component that had to be manually installed by administrators. SCW is now a default component of Windows Server 2008 which means Administrators won’t have to perform extra steps to install or deploy the tool to leverage it.

■

Windows Server 2008 will introduce a lot of new and exciting functionality in Windows Firewall. To support that functionality, SCW has been improved to store, process, and apply firewall rules with the same degree of precision that the Windows Firewall does. This was an important requirement since on Windows Server 2008 the Windows Firewall will be on by default.

■

The SCW leverages a large XML database that consists of every service, firewall rule and administration option from every feature or component available on Windows Server 2008. This database has been totally reviewed and updated for Windows Server 2008. Existing roles have been updated, new roles have been added to the database, and all firewall rules have been updated to support the new Windows Firewall.

49

50

Introducing Windows Server 2008 ■

SCW now validates all XML files in its database files using a set of XSD files that contains the SCW XML schema. This will help administrators or developers extend the SCW database by creating new SCW roles base on their own requirements or applications. Those XSD files are available under the SCW directory.

■

All SCW reports have been updated to reflect the changes made to the SCW schema regarding support for the new Window Firewall. Those reports include the Configuration Database report, the Security Policy report and the Analysis report that will compare the current configuration of Windows Server 2008 against an SCW security policy.

SCW provides an end to end solution to reduce the attack surface of Windows Server 2008 machines by providing a possible configuration of default components, roles, features, and any third-party applications that provide an SCW role. SCW is not responsible for installing or removing any roles, features, or third-party applications from Windows Server 2008. Instead, Administrators should use Server Manager if they need to install roles and features, or use the setup provided with any third party application. The installation of roles and features via Server Manager is made based on security best practices. While SCW complements well Server Manager, its main value is in the configuration of the core operating system and third-party applications that provide an SCW role. SCW should be used every time the configuration of a default component on Windows Server 2008 needs to be modified or when a third-party application is added or removed. In some specific scenarios, like for remote administration, running SCW after using Server Manager might provide some added value to some specific roles or features. Using SCW after modifying a role or feature through Server Manager is not a requirement, however. –Nils Dussart Program Manager for the Security Configuration Wizard (SCW), Windows Core Operating System Division

ServerManagerCmd.exe In addition to the Server Manager user interface, there is also a command-line version of Server Manager called ServerManagerCmd.exe that was first introduced in the IDS_2 build of Windows Server 2008 (that is, the February CTP build). This command-line tool, which is found in the %windir%\system32 folder, can be used to perform the following tasks: ■

Display a list of roles and features already installed on a machine.

■

Display a list of role services and features that would be installed if you chose to install a given role.

■

Add a role or feature to your server using the default settings of that role or feature.

Chapter 4

Managing Windows Server 2008

■

Add several roles/features at once by providing an XML answer file listing the roles/ features to be installed.

■

Remote roles or features from your server.

51

What ServerManagerCmd.exe can’t do includes the following: ■

Install a role or feature, and change its default settings.

■

Reconfigure a role or feature already installed on the machine.

■

Connect to a remote machine, and manage roles/features on that machine.

■

Manage roles/features on machines running a Windows server core installation of Windows Server 2008.

■

Manage non-OOB roles/features—such as Exchange Server or SQL Server.

Let’s take a look at the servermanagercmd –query command, which displays the list of roles and features currently available on the computer, along with their command-line names (values that should be used to install or remove the role or feature from the command line). When you run this command, something called discovery runs to determine the different roles and features already installed.

After discovery completes (which may take a short period of time), the command generates output displaying installed roles/features in green and marked with “X”.

52

Introducing Windows Server 2008

You can also type servermanagercmd –query results.xml to send the output of this command to an XML file. This is handy if you want to save and programmatically parse the output of this command. Let’s now learn more about ServerManagerCmd.exe from one of our experts at Microsoft:

From the Experts: Automating Common Deployment Tasks with ServerManagerCmd.exe Rolling out a new internal application or service within an organization frequently means setting up roles and features on multiple servers. Some of these servers might need to be set up with exactly the same configuration, and others might reside in remote locations that are not readily accessible by full-time IT staff. For these reasons, you might want to write scripts to automate the deployment process from the command line. One of the tools that can facilitate server deployment from the command line is ServerManagerCmd.exe. This tool is the command-line counterpart to the graphical Server Manager console, which is used to install and configure server roles and features. The graphical and command-line versions of Server Manager are built on the same synchronization platform that determines what roles and features are installed and applies user-specified configurations to the server. ServerManagerCmd.exe provides a set of command-line switches that enable you to automate many common deployment tasks as follows: View the List of Installable Roles and Features You can use the –query command to see a list of roles and features available for installation and find out what’s currently installed. You can also use –query to look up the command-line names of roles and features. These are listed in square brackets [] after the display name. Install and Uninstall Roles and Features You can use the –install and –remove commands to install and uninstall roles and features. One issue to be aware of is that ServerManagerCmd.exe enables you only to install and uninstall. Apart from a few notable exceptions for required settings, you cannot specify configuration settings as you can with the graphical Server Manager console. You need to use other role-specific tools, such as MMC snap-ins and command-line utilities, to specify configuration settings after installing roles and features using ServerManagerCmd.exe. Run in “What-If” Mode After you create a script to set up the server with ServerManagerCmd.exe, you might want to check that the script will perform as expected. Or you might want to see what will happen if you type a specific command with ServerManagerCmd.exe. For these scenarios, you can supply the –whatif switch. This switch tells you exactly what would be

Chapter 4

Managing Windows Server 2008

53

installed and removed by a command or answer file, based on the current server configuration, without performing the actual operations. Specify Input Parameters via an Answer File ServerManagerCmd.exe can operate in an interactive mode, or it can be automated using an answer file. The answer file is specified using the –inputPath switch, where is the name of an XML file with the list of input parameters. The schema for creating answer files can be found in the ServerManagerCmd.exe documentation. Redirect Output to a Results File It is usually a good practice to keep a history of configuration changes to your servers in case you need to troubleshoot a problem, migrate the settings of an existing server to a new server, or recover from a disaster or failure. To assist with record keeping, you can use the resultPath switch to save the results of an installation or removal to a file, where is the name of the file where you want the output to be saved. –Dan Harman Program Manager, Windows Server, Windows Enterprise Management Division You’ll learn more about using ServerManagerCmd.exe for adding roles and features in Chapter 5, but for now let’s move on and look at more tools for managing Windows Server 2008.

Remote Server Administration Tools What if you want to manage our file server running Windows Server 2008 remotely from another machine? We already saw one way you could do this—enable Remote Desktop on the file server, and use Terminal Services to run our management tools remotely on the server. Once we have a Remote Desktop Connection session with the remote server, we can run tools such as Server Manager or File Server Resource Manager as if we were sitting at the remote machine’s console. In Windows Server 2003, you can also manage remote servers this way. But you can also manage them another way by installing the Windows Server 2003 Administration Tools Pack (Adminpak.msi) on a different Windows Server 2003 machine, or even on an admin workstation running Windows XP Service Pack 2. And once the Tools Pack is installed, you can open any of these tools, connect to your remote server, and manage roles and features on the server (provided the roles and features are installed). Is there an Adminpak for Windows Server 2008? Well, there’s an equivalent called the Remote Server Administration Tools (RSAT), which you can use to install selected management tools on your server even when the binaries for the roles/features those tools will manage are not

54

Introducing Windows Server 2008

installed on your server. In fact, the RSAT does Adminpak one better because Adminpak installs all the administrative tools, whereas the RSAT lets you install only those tools you need. (Actually, you can just install one tool from Adminpak if you want to, though it takes a bit of work to do this—see article 314978 in the Microsoft Knowledge Base for details.) What features or roles can you manage using the RSAT? As of Beta 3, you can install management tools for the following roles and features using the RSAT: ■

■

Roles ❑

Active Directory Domain Services

❑

Active Directory Certificate Services

❑

Active Directory Lightweight Directory Services

❑

Active Directory Rights Management Services

❑

DNS Server

❑

Fax Server

❑

File Server

❑

Network Policy and Access Services

❑

Print Services

❑

Terminal Services

❑

Web Server (IIS)

❑

Windows Deployment Services

Features: ❑

BitLocker Drive Encryption

❑

BITS Server Extensions

❑

Failover Clustering

❑

Network Load Balancing

❑

Simple SAN Management

❑

SMTP Server

❑

Windows System Resource Management (WSRM)

❑

WINS Server

How do you install individual management tools using the RSAT? With Windows Server 2008, it’s easy—just start the Add Feature Wizard, and select the RSAT management tools you want to install, such as the Terminal Services Gateway management tool. (See Figure 4-6. Note that installing some RSAT management tools might require that you also install additional features. For example, if you choose to install the Web Server (IIS) management tool from the

Chapter 4

Managing Windows Server 2008

55

RSAT, you must also install the Configuration APIs component of the Windows Process Activation Service [WPAS] feature.)

Figure 4-6 Installing a management tool using the RSAT feature

The actual steps for installing features on Windows Server 2008 are explained in Chapter 5. For now, just note that when you install an RSAT subfeature such as TS Gateway, what this does is add a new shortcut under Administrative Tools called TS Gateway. Then if you click Start, then Administrative Tools, then TS Gateway, the TS Gateway Manager console opens. In the console, you can right-click on the root node, select Connect To TS Gateway Server, and manage a remote Windows Server 2008 terminal server with the TS Gateway role service installed on it without having to enable Remote Desktop on the terminal server. Finally, the Windows Server 2003 Adminpak can be installed on a Windows XP SP2 workstation, which lets you administer your servers from a workstation. Can the RSAT be installed on a Windows Vista machine so that you can manage your Windows Server 2008 machines from there? As of Beta 3, the answer is “not yet.” Plans for how RSAT will be made available for Windows Vista are uncertain at this moment, but it’s likely we can expect something that can do this around or shortly after Windows Vista Service Pack 1. We’ll just have to wait and see.

56

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Other Management Tools There are other ways you can manage Windows Server 2008 besides the tools we’ve discussed so far. Let’s examine these now. Specifically, we’re going to look at the following items: ■

Group Policy

■

Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI)

■

Windows PowerShell

■

Microsoft System Center

Group Policy Group Policy in Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 has been enhanced in several ways, including: ■

Several new areas of policy management, including configuring Power Management settings, blocking installation of devices, assigning printers based on location, and more.

■

A new format for Administrative Templates files called ADMX that is XML-based and replaces the proprietary-syntax ADM files used in previous versions of Windows.

■

Network Location Awareness to enable Group Policy to better respond to changing network conditions and remove the need for relying on ICMP for policy processing.

■

The ability to use local group policy objects, the capability of reducing SYSVOL bloat by placing ADMX files in a central store, and several other new features and enhancements.

A good source of information about Group Policy in Windows Vista (and therefore also in Windows Server 2008, because the platforms were designed to fit together) is Chapter 13, “Managing the Desktop Environment,” in the Windows Vista Resource Kit from Microsoft Press. Meanwhile, while your assistant is running out to buy a couple of copies of that title (I was lead author for that title and my retirement plans are closely tied to the royalties I earn from sales, so please go buy a dozen or so copies), let’s kick back and listen to one of our experts at Microsoft telling us more about post-Vista enhancements to Group Policy found in Windows Server 2008:

Chapter 4

Managing Windows Server 2008

From the Experts: What’s New in Group Policy in Windows Server 2008 The following is a description of some of the Group Policy enhancements found in Windows Server 2008. Server Manager Integration The first noticeable change in Windows Server 2008 is how the Group Policy tools are presented. In past operating systems, other than Windows Vista, an admin would have to go to the Microsoft Web site to download the Group Policy Management Console (GPMC) and install it on every administrative workstation where Group Policy management is performed. In Windows Server 2008, the installation bits are delivered with the operating system. No more downloads, no more wondering where the installation media is—it is just there. A difference in this new environment is how optional Windows components are installed. Windows Server 2008 introduces a new management console for servers called Server Manager. This is the tool that is used to install server roles, as well as optional Windows components. If you choose to go the old-school route and add Windows components from the Add/Remove Control Panel, it will launch Server Manager. Not only do you use Server Manager to install the optional components, but the GPMC console itself is hosted within the Server Manager console. This means all of your administrative tools are kept in one place and are easily discoverable. Of course, you will still be able to find the tools in the common locations, such as Administrative Tools. Search/Filters, Comments, and Starter GPOs These features really enhance the administrative experience around managing and authoring policy. They are, technically, multiple features, but they work well when described as a “feature set,” as they all address the same business problem—difficulty in authoring policy. As you are probably aware, in the Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008 wave of operating systems there are hundreds of new settings to be managed. This means the total number of settings approaches 3000. That is a lot of manageable settings. Even though this provides a ton of value to the IT Professional, it increases the complexity when it comes to actually locating the setting or policy item that you are trying to manage. Microsoft has provided a “settings” spreadsheet that contains all the Group Policy settings in one relatively easy-to-use document, but it really doesn’t solve the problem. Microsoft has received feedback from many IT pros that there needs to be a method within the Group Policy tool itself to make finding the right settings easier. Now with Search and Filters, when you are authoring a policy right in the editor you have a great mechanism to locate the setting you are looking for. You will see a new Filter button in the toolbar, and if you right-click on the Administrative Templates node in the editor you will see a menu item called Filter Options. Filter Options allows you to set the

57

58

Introducing Windows Server 2008

criteria that you are looking to search on. For example, you can narrow your view to only configured items, specific key words, or the system requirements (for example, Internet Explorer 6.0 settings). Filter Options provides a very intuitive interface and has great flexibility to help in locating the settings that you are looking for. Once you set Filter Options and turn on the Filter (global setting), the editor displays only settings that you are targeting. The Group Policy team is really excited to bring these features to you because we know it will reduce some of the administrative burden of what is otherwise a fantastic management technology. You can also filter for settings that have Comments. This is also a new feature introduced in Windows Server 2008. You can now place a comment on any setting that you want. This means when admins are authoring policy, they can document their intentions at author time and other administrators can use that Comment as a search criteria. This feature is incredible at helping Group Policy administrators communicate to themselves, or other administrators, why specific settings are being managed and what the impact of those settings is. The last piece of this feature set is called Starter GPOs. Starter GPOs are a starting point for administration. When a GPO is created, you can still create a blank GPO, or you can choose to create your GPO from one of the pre-existing Starter GPOs. Starter GPOs are a collection of preconfigured Administrative Template settings, complete with comments. You will see a node in the Group Policy Management Console (GPMC) called Starter GPOs. Simply right-click on this node and choose New. You will have a Starter GPO that is available to edit. There is delegation available on the Starter GPO container to ensure that only specific administrators can modify it.. This feature set—Search/Filters, Comments, and Starter GPOs—comes together to greatly enhance the authoring and management experience around Group Policy. It provides ease of authoring and discovering settings, inline documentation of Group Policy settings, and baseline configurations for starting the process. ADMX/ADML ADMX/AMDL files were introduced in Windows Vista to replace the legacy data format of the ADM files that we have become used to. ADMX files are XML files that contain the same type of information that we have become familiar with to build the administrative experience around Administrative Template settings. Using XML makes the whole process more efficient and standardized. ADML files are language-specific files that are critical in a multilanguage enterprise. In the past, all localization was done right within each ADM file. This caused some confusing version control issues when multiple administrators were managing settings in a GPO from workstations using different languages. With ADMX/ADML, all administrators work off of the same GPOs and simply call the appropriate ADML file to populate the editor. Another value associated with ADML/ADMX files is that GPOs no longer contain the ADM files themselves. Prior to Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008, each GPO created

Chapter 4

Managing Windows Server 2008

59

would contain all the ADM files. This was about 4 MB by default. This was a contributing factor in SYSVOL bloat. Take a look at http://www.microsoft.com/GroupPolicy to read more on ADMX/ADML. You can also find the ADMX migration utility to help in moving to this new environment at http://technet2.microsoft.com/windowsserver/en/technologies/featured/gp/ default.mspx. Just a note that ADM and ADMX can coexist; read up on it on one of the sites just referenced. Central Store Related to ADMX files is the Central Store. As was previously stated, ADM files used to be stored in the GPO itself. That is no longer the case. Now the GPO contains only the data that the client needs for processing Group Policy. In Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008, the default behavior for editing is that the editor pulls the ADMX files from the local workstation. This is great for smaller environments with few administrators managing Group Policy, but in larger, more complex environments or environments that need a bit more control, a Central Store has been introduced. The Central Store provides a single instance in SYSVOL that holds all of the ADMX/ADML files that are required. Once the Central Store is set up, all administrators load the appropriate files from the Central Store instead of the local machine. Check out one of the Group Policy MVP’s Central Store Creation Utility at http://www.gpoguy.com/cssu.htm. You can also find more information on the Central Store at http://www.microsoft.com/grouppolicy. Summary Windows Server 2008 and Windows Vista have introduced a lot of new functionality for Group Policy. Administrators will find that these new features for management, along with the around 700 new settings to manage, will increase the ease of use of Group Policy and expand the number of areas that can be managed with policy. –Kevin Sullivan Lead Program Manager for Group Policy, Windows Enterprise Management Division Pretty cool enhancements, eh? Sorry, that’s the Canadian coming out of me, or through me, or channeling through me—whatever.

Windows Management Instrumentation WMI is a core Windows management technology that administrators can use to write scripts to perform administrative tasks on both local and remote computers. There are no specific enhancements to WMI in Windows Server 2008 beyond those included in Windows Vista,

60

Introducing Windows Server 2008

but it’s important to know about the Windows Vista enhancements since these apply to Windows Server 2008 also. Here are a few of the more significant changes to WMI in Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008: ■

Improved tracing and logging

■

Enhanced WMI namespace security

■

WMI namespace security auditing WMI now uses the namespaces system access con-

The WMI service now uses Event Tracing for Windows (ETW) instead of the legacy WMI log files used on previous Windows platforms, and this makes WMI events available through Event Viewer or by using the Wevtutil.exe command-line tool. The NamespaceSecuritySDDL qualifier can now be used to secure any namespace by setting WMI namespace security in the Managed Object Format (MOF) file

trol lists (SACL) to audit namespace activity and report events to the Security event log. ■

Get and Set security descriptor methods for securable objects new scriptable methods to get and set security descriptors have been added to Win32_Printer, Win32_Service, StdRegProv, Win32_DCOMApplicationSetting, and __SystemSecurity.

■

Manipulate security descriptors using scripts The Win32_SecurityDescriptorHelper class now has methods that allow scripts to convert binary security descriptors on securable objects into Win32_SecurityDescriptor objects or Security Descriptor Definition Language (SDDL) strings.

■

User Account Control User Account Control (UAC) affects what WMI data is returned, how WMI is remotely accessed, and how scripts must be run.

What all this basically means is that WMI is more secure and more consistent in how it works in Windows Server 2008, which is good news for administrators who like to write WMI scripts to manage various aspects of their Windows-based networks. Still, from personal experience, I know that writing WMI scripts isn’t always easy, especially if you’re trying to get them to run properly against remote machines. Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 complicate things in this regard because of their numerous security improvements, including User Account Control (UAC). So it’s instructive if we sit back and listen now to one of our experts at Microsoft, who will address this very issue in detail (this sidebar is worth its weight in gold):

From the Experts: WMI Remote Connection Talking about management obviously implies the need to connect remotely to the Windows systems you want to manage. Speaking about remote connection immediately implies security. Management and security are not always easy to combine. It is not rare to see situations where management represents a breach of security, or the other way around; it is not rare either to see security settings preventing the proper management of

Chapter 4

Managing Windows Server 2008

a system. In this respect, WMI is not different from any other technologies; it provides remote management capabilities involving some security considerations. Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 come with a series of new security features. The most important one is called User Account Control (UAC). It is very likely that every administrator in the world will be challenged by the presence of UAC, especially if you use the Local Accounts part of the Administrator group to perform remote access. This is because any token account used in this context is automatically filtered and finally acts as a normal user in the remote system. Therefore, it is wise to consider the various security aspects to properly and securely manage your remote systems. Before looking at the UAC aspects, let step back and look at the requirements to call WMI remotely. This applies to any Windows platform since Windows 2000. We will examine the Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 aspects next. To connect remotely, four conditions must be met: 1. Firewall

Introduced with Windows XP, the Windows Firewall must be properly set up to enable connectivity for the WMI RPC traffic. Usually, you get an “RPC connection failure” if the Windows Firewall is enabled and RPC is disallowed. If you get an “access denied” message, the firewall is not the root cause of the issue. Keep in mind that the firewall is the key component to go through before anything else happens. Before Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008, RPC traffic must be enabled to allow the WMI traffic to go through. With Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008, a dedicated set of Firewall WMI rules is available to enable only WMI traffic. (This can be done with the FW.MSC MMC snap-in, Group Policies, Scripting, or NETSH.EXE.) Note that if you use WMIDiag (available on Microsoft Download Center), it will tell you which NETSH.EXE command to use to configure your firewall properly.

2. DCOM Once the firewall gate is passed, it is time to consider the DCOM security.

The user issuing the remote call must have the right to “Launch and Activate” (which can be viewed and changed with DCOMCNFG.EXE) for both the My Computer and Windows Management and Instrumentation objects. By default, only users who are part of the Administrators group of the remote machine have the right to remotely “Launch and Activate” these DCOM objects. 3. WMI namespace

Once the DCOM security is verified, WMI namespace security comes next. In this case, the user connecting to a remote WMI namespace must have at the minimum the Enable Remote and Enable Account rights granted for the given namespace. By default, only users who are part of the Administrators group of the remote machine have the Enable Remote right granted. (This can be updated with WMIMGMT.MSC.)

61

62

Introducing Windows Server 2008

4. Manageable entity Last but not least, once WMI has accepted the remote request,

it is actually executed against the manageable entity (which could be a Windows Service or a Terminal Server configuration setting, for instance). This last step must also succeed for the WMI operation to succeed. WMI does not add any privilege that the user does not have when issuing the WMI request. (By default, WMI impersonates the calls, which means it issues the call within the security context of the remote user.) So, depending on the WMI operation requested and the rights granted to the remote user, the call might succeed or fail at the level of the manageable entity. For instance, if you try to stop a Windows service remotely, the Service Control Manager requires the user to be an Administrator by default. If you are not, the WMI request performing this operation will fail. This describes the behavior of WMI since Windows 2000. In the light of Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008, things can be slightly different because UAC is enabled by default on both platforms and everything depends on whether you use a local account or a domain account. If you use a local user of the remote machine who is a member of the Local Administrators group, the Administrators membership of the user is always filtered. In this context, DCOM, WMI, and the manageable entity are applying the security restrictions with respect to the filtered token presented. Therefore, with respect to the UAC behavior, the token is a user token, not an administrative token! As a consequence, the Local User is actually acting as a plain user on that remote machine even if it is part of the Local Administrators group. By default, a user does not have the rights to pass the security gates defined earlier (in step 2, 3, and 4). Now that the scene is set, how do you manage a remote Windows Vista machine or 2008 server while respecting the Firewall, UAC, DCOM, WMI, and manageable entity security enforcements? This challenge must be looked at in two different ways: 1. The remote machine is part of a domain.

If the remote machine is part of a domain, it is highly recommended that you use a Domain User part of the Local Administrators group of the remote machine (and not a Local User part of the Local Administrators group). By doing so, you will be a plain Administrator because UAC does not filter users out of the Local Administrators group when the user is a Domain User. UAC only filters Local Users out of the Local Administrators group.

2. Your machine is a workgroup machine. If your machine is in a workgroup environ-

ment, you are forced to use a Local User part of the Local Administrators group to connect remotely. Obviously, because of the UAC behavior, that user is filtered and acts as a plain user. The first approach if you are in a large enterprise infrastructure is to consider the possibility of making this machine part of a domain to use a

Chapter 4

Managing Windows Server 2008

Domain User. If this is not possible because you must keep the machine as part of a workgroup, from this point you have two choices: ❑

You decide to keep UAC active. In this case, you must adjust the security settings of DCOM and WMI to ensure that the Local User has the explicit rights to get remote access. Don’t forget that a best practice is to use a dedicated Local Group and make this Local User a member of that group. In this context, the WMI requests against the manageable entity might work or not depending on the manageable entity security requirements (discussed in step 3). If the manageable entity does not allow a plain user to perform the task requested, you might be forced to change the security at the manageable entity level to explicitly grant permissions to your Local User or Group as well. Note that this is not always possible because it heavily depends on the manageable entity security requirements and security management capabilities of the manageable entity. For the Windows Services example, this can be done with the SC.EXE command via an SDDL string, the Win32_Service WMI class (with the Get/SetSecurityDescriptor methods implemented in Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008), or Group Policies (GPEDIT.MSC). By updating the security at these three levels, you will be able to gracefully pass the DCOM and WMI security gates and stop a Windows Service as a plain user. Note that this customization represents clearly the steps for a granular delegation of the management. Only the service you changed the security for can be stopped by that dedicated user (or group). In this case, you actually define a very granular security model for a specific task. (You can watch the “Running Scripts Securely While Handling Passwords and Security Contexts Properly” webcast at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=39643 to understand this scenario better.) Now it is possible that some manageable entities only require the user to be an Admin (typical for most devices) because there is no possibility to update the security descriptor. In such a case, for a workgroup scenario, only the second option (discussed next) becomes possible. Last but not least, keep in mind that these steps are also applicable in a domain environment to delegate some management capabilities to a group of domain users.

❑

You decide to disable the UAC filtering for remote access. This must be the last-resort solution. It is not an option you should consider right away if you want to maintain your workgroup system with a high level of security. So consider it only after investigating the possibility of making your system part of a domain or after reviewing the security wherever needed. If making your system part of a domain is not possible, you can consider this option. In this case, you must set the registry key in the reference shown below to ZERO on

63

64

Introducing Windows Server 2008

the remote system. Note that you must be an administrator to change that registry key. So you need to do this locally once, before any remote access is made. Note that this configuration setting disables the filtering on Local Accounts only; it does not disable UAC as a whole. [HKLM\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Policies\System]"Local AccountTokenFilterPolicy"=dword:00000001

Once set, the registry key is created and set to ONE, and the Local User remotely accessing the machine will be an administrator (if the user is a member of the Local Administrators group).Therefore, by default, the user will pass the security gates defined in steps 2, 3, and 4. Note that it is required to reboot the machine to get this change activated. –Alain Lissoir Senior Program Manager, Windows Enterprise Management Division (WEMD) Check out Alain’s Web site at http://www.lissware.net.

Windows PowerShell Another powerful tool for automating administrative tasks in Windows Server 2008 is Windows PowerShell, a command-line shell and scripting language. PowerShell includes more than 130 command-line tools (called cmdlets), has consistent syntax and naming conventions, and uses simplified navigation for managing data such as the registry and certificate store. PowerShell also includes an intuitive scripting language specifically designed for IT administration. As of Beta 3, PowerShell is included as an optional feature you can install on Windows Server 2008. PowerShell can be used to efficiently perform Windows Server 2008 administration tasks, including managing services, processes, and storage. PowerShell can also be used to manage aspects of server roles, such as Internet Information Services (IIS) 7.0, Terminal Services, and Active Directory Domain Services. Some of the things you can do with PowerShell on Windows Server 2008 include ■

Managing command-line services, processes, the registry, and WMI data using the get-service, get-process, and get-wmiobject cmdlets.

■

Automating Terminal Services configuration, and comparing configurations across a Terminal Server farm.

■

Deploying and configuring Internet Information Services 7.0 across a Web farm.

■

Creating objects in Active Directory, and listing information about the current domain.

Chapter 4

Managing Windows Server 2008

65

For example, let’s look at the third item in this list—managing IIS 7.0 using PowerShell. But rather than have me explain this, why don’t we listen to one of our experts at Microsoft concerning this?

From the Experts: PowerShell Rocks! Of all the new Microsoft technology coming down the pipe, PowerShell has got to be one of the most exciting (after IIS 7.0 of course). You might wonder why I am so excited about the new scripting shell for Windows. Even if PowerShell is better than Command Prompt on steroids, what does this have to do with my main passion, Web servers and Web applications? Check out the Channel9 video I did with Jeffrey Snover, architect of PowerShell, to get an idea of how cool PowerShell really is (see http://channel9. msdn.com/Showpost.aspx?postid=256994). In the video, we show off a demo we put together for Bob Muglia’s keynote article in TechEd IT Forum this week, which appears to have gone very, very well. Well done, Jeffrey. A long, long, long time ago, when I was in school and even after that, before I came to Microsoft and joined the IIS team, I used Linux and spent my days in BASH and ZSH getting work done. Until now, we sadly never really had the productive power of an interactive shell on Windows. So as a previously heavy user of shells, I have to tell you what I really like about this new shell interface on its own, and then I’ll explain the many ways PowerShell can make work simpler for IIS administrators. OK, first off, in PowerShell you input commands on objects, not text, and PowerShell returns objects and not text. So you can easily pipe commands together in one line. This allows me to input in just one line complicated commands like this one: PS C:\Windows\System32> Get-ChildItem -Path G:\ -Recurse -Include *.mp3 | Where-Object -FilterScript {($_.LastWriteTime -gt "2006-10-01") -and ($_.Name -match "pearl jam")}| Copy -Destination C:\User\bills\Desktop\New_PJ_MP3s

which recursively looks through my entire external hard drive (G:), collects all the “Pearl Jam” mp3s that were recently added, and copies them into a folder on my desktop. Never was I given a text output listing all the mp3s, and I didn’t have to use the Copy command over and over. I just piped all the items to Copy once. Another thing I like so much about PowerShell is how consistent PowerShell commands are. In the preceding example, I used only one Get-ChildItem command, but rest assured if I wanted to get anything else, the command for that would start with Get. Similarly, if we want to stop a process or an application or anything, we always use the Stop command, not kill, not terminate, not halt, just stop.

66

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Finally, I love that PowerShell is extensible. I love this because it means my team can produce a whole set of IIS PowerShell cmdlets to help you manage IIS 6.0, IIS 7.0, and future versions of IIS. You will also be able to submit your IIS PowerShell scriptlets to this community area (coming very soon). Now that I’ve listed my favorite things about this new shell, I’d like to give you a few ways that PowerShell can and will make IIS administration simpler than ever before. The top 5… 1. IIS 7.0 has a new WMI Provider for quickly starting, stopping, creating, removing, and configuring sites and applications. Now use PowerShell to give a list of applications sorted by a particular configuration setting. Then pipe apps with the particular setting into the tasks you were performing before with the WMI Provider. My colleague Sergei Antonov wrote and just published a fantastic article, titled “Writing PowerShell Command-lets for IIS 7.0,” that describes how to write PowerShell cmdlets using our WMI provider. 2. 2. Because IIS 7.0 has a distributed file-based configuration store, you can store your application’s IIS configurations in a web.config file in the application’s directory next to its code and content. Use PowerShell to rapidly XCopy deploy the application to an entire Web farm in one step. 3. IIS 7.0’s new Web.Administration API allows admins to write short programs in .NET to programmatically tackle frequent IIS 7.0 management tasks. Then, because PowerShell completely supports the .NET Framework, use it to pipe IIS objects in and out of these handy bits of code. 4. With IIS 7.0, you can use the new Runtime Status and Control API to monitor the performance of your Web applications. Use PowerShell to monitor performance information at a regular interval of every five minutes, and then have this valuable runtime information displayed to the console or sent to a log file whenever CPU is above 80%. 5. Take advantage of IIS 7.0’s extensibility by writing your own custom request processing module with its own configuration and IIS Manager plug-in. Then write a PowerShell cmdlet to serve as a management interface to expose your custom IIS configuration to the command line and to power your IIS Manager plug-in. For more information on managing IIS 7.0 using PowerShell, see “An Introduction to Windows PowerShell and IIS 7.0,” found at http://www.iis.net/default.aspx?tabid=2& subtabid=25&i=1212. –Bill Staples Product Unit Manager, IIS

Chapter 4

Managing Windows Server 2008

67

Like WMI discussed earlier, Windows PowerShell is a work in progress and is still evolving. For example, Windows PowerShell version 1.0 doesn’t yet have any cmdlets for managing Active Directory, but by using the .NET Framework 2.0 together with PowerShell, you can manage Active Directory even so. Chapter 14, “Additional Resources,” has lots of pointers to where you can find more information about using PowerShell to manage Windows Server 2008. But before you flip ahead to look there, listen to what another expert at Microsoft has to say concerning the raison d’être behind PowerShell:

From the Experts: The Soul of Automation “Civilization advances by extending the number of important operations which we can perform without thinking about them.” Alfred North Whitehead, “Introduction to Mathematics” (1911) English mathematician & philosopher (1861 - 1947) I really understood Whitehead’s point during the great windstorm of 2006 when we lost power in my area for six days. During this time, we were without the benefits of most of the things I took for granted. I was struck by how much time it took to do things that previously I performed without thinking about them. Washing the dishes in the sink by hand took a lot more time than using the dishwasher. There were dozens of things like this. I didn’t mind terribly, but I found myself resenting that I didn’t have time to do as much reading as I usually do. Whitehead’s point is not that civilization advances by us becoming non-thinking idiots. Rather, by increasing the number of things that we don’t have to think about, we free up time to think about new things and solve new problems, and then transform those things into things that we no longer have to think about. And so on and so on. Because I spent time doing dishes means that I didn’t have time to read, which meant that I didn’t get more educated, which would have made it easier to move the ball forward. This is the essence of PowerShell and the soul of automation. In our world, there is no end of interesting and hard problems to think about, and the degree that our tools continue to make us think about the low-level junk is the degree to which we reduce the time that we have to think about the interesting problems. The ball gets moved forward as we adopt better and better tools that do what we want them to do without us having to tell them, and by our getting in the habit of using automation for repeating operations and sharing that automation with others. Huge advances come from the accumulation of small deltas. In David Copperfield, Charles Dickens wrote, “Annual income twenty pounds, annual expenditure nineteen pounds six, result happiness. Annual income twenty pounds, annual expenditure twenty ought and size, result misery.” Einstein said it this way, “The most powerful force in the universe is compound interest.” So the next time you find yourself thinking about

68

Introducing Windows Server 2008

how to do something that you’ve done before, you should take it as an opportunity to invest a little bit and automate the activity so that you don’t have to think about it again. Give the function a good long name so that you can remember it, find it, and recognize it when you see it; then give it an alias so that you can minimize your typing (for example, Get-FileVersionInfo and gfvi). Last but not least, SHARE. Put your script out on a blog or newsgroup or Web site so that others can benefit from your thinking. Newton might have figured out gravity, but if he didn’t share his thoughts with others, he would not have moved the ball forward. OK, so your script is not in the same league as “F=ma,” but share it anyway because “huge advances come from the accumulation of small deltas.” Enjoy! –Jeffrey Snover Partner Architect, Windows Management

Microsoft System Center Finally, the Microsoft System Center family of enterprise management solutions will be supporting management of Windows Server 2008, though at the time of this writing, the date for such support has not been made known to me. System Center is a collection of products that evolved from the earlier Microsoft Systems Management Server (SMS) and Microsoft Operations Manager (MOM) platforms. The plan for the System Center family currently includes the following products: ■

System Center Operations Manager (the next generation of MOM)

■

System Center Configuration Manager (the next generation of SMS)

■

System Center Data Protection Manager

■

System Center Essentials

■

System Center Virtual Machine Manager

■

System Center Capacity Planner

Keep your eye on these products as Microsoft announces its support for Windows Server 2008. You can find out more about System Center at http://www.microsoft.com/systemcenter.

Chapter 4

Managing Windows Server 2008

69

Conclusion Windows Server 2008 can be managed using a number of in-box and out-of-band tools. If you only need to manage a single server, use Initial Configuration Tasks and Server Manager. If you need to do this remotely, enable Remote Desktop on your server. If you need to manage multiple servers roles on different machines, install the Remote Server Administration Tools (RSAT) and use each tool to manage multiple instances of a particular role. And if you need to automate the administration of Windows Server 2008 machines, use ServerManagerCmd.exe, WMI, Windows PowerShell, or some combination of the three.

Additional Resources TechNet has a level 300 webcast called “Installing, Configuring, and Managing Server Roles in Windows Server 2008” that you can download from http://msevents.microsoft.com/cui/WebCastEventDetails.aspx?EventID=1032294712&EventCategory=5&culture=en-US& CountryCode=US (registration required). If you have access to the Windows Server 2008 beta on Microsoft Connect (https://connect. microsoft.com/), you can download the following items: ■

Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Server Manager Lab Companion

■

Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Initial Configuration Tasks Step-By-Step Guide

■

Live Meeting on Server Manager

If you don’t have access to beta builds of Windows Server 2008, you can still test drive Server Manager online using the Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Server Manager Virtual Lab, available at http://msevents.microsoft.com/CUI/WebCastEventDetails.aspx? EventID=1032314461&EventCategory=3&culture=en-IN&CountryCode=IN. A good starting point for exploring the potential of using Windows PowerShell to manage Windows Server 2008 is http://www.microsoft.com/windowsserver/2008/powershell.mspx. Information about Group Policy enhancements in Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 can be found at http://technet2.microsoft.com/WindowsVista/en/library/ a8366c42-6373-48cd-9d11-2510580e48171033.mspx?mfr=true. More information about WMI enhancements in Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 can be found on MSDN at http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-gb/library/aa394053.aspx.

70

Introducing Windows Server 2008

And if you want to find out more about Microsoft System Center, see http://www.microsoft.com/systemcenter/. Finally, be sure to turn to Chapter 14 for more information on the topics in this chapter and also for webcasts, whitepapers, blogs, newsgroups, and other sources of information about all aspects of Windows Server 2008.

Chapter 5

Managing Server Roles In this chapter: Understanding Roles, Role Services, and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Adding Roles and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Additional Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Now that you’ve seen some of the tools you can use to manage Microsoft Windows Server 2008, let’s give them a test drive. Key to managing Windows Server 2008 is understanding the difference between roles, role services, and features. This chapter starts by explaining these differences and then looks at how you can add or remove roles from Windows Server 2008 using some of the tools discussed in the previous chapter.

Understanding Roles, Role Services, and Features A server role (or simply role) is a specific function that your server performs on your network. Examples of roles you can deploy on Windows Server 2008 include File Server, Print Services, Terminal Services, and so on. Many of these roles will be familiar to administrators who work with Windows Server 2003 R2, but a few are new—such as Windows Deployment Services (WDS) and Network Policy and Access Services (NAP/NPS). Most server roles are supported by one or more role services, which provide different kinds of functionality to that role. A good example here is the File Server role, which is supported by the following role services: ■

Distributed File System (DFS)

■

File Server Resource Manager (FSRM)

■

Services for Network File System (NFS)

■

Single Instance Store (SIS)

■

Windows Search Service

■

Windows Server 2003 File Services

71

72

Introducing Windows Server 2008

These role services are optional for the File Server role and can be added to provide enhanced functionality for that role. For example, by adding the File Server Resource Manager role service, you gain access to a console (fsrm.msc) that lets you configure file and volume quotas, implement file screens, and generate reports. The File Server Resource Manager console was first included in Windows Server 2003 R2, and it has basically the same functionality in Windows 2008 Server as it did on the previous platform. We’ll look at how to install this tool later in this chapter. Note also that some role services are supported by additional role services. For example, the Distributed File System role service is supported by these two other services: ■

DFS Namespace

■

DFS Replication

When you choose to install the Distributed File System, Windows Server 2008 automatically selects both of these other services for installation as well, though can you choose to deselect either one of these services if they are not needed on your server. Finally, in addition to roles and roles services, there are things called features that you can install on Windows Server 2008. Features are usually optional, although some roles might require that certain features be installed, in which case you’ll be prompted to install these features if they’re not already installed when you add the role. Optional features are usually Windows services or groups of services that provide additional functionality you might need on your server. Examples of features range from foundational components such as the .NET Framework 3.0 (which contains some sub-features also) to management essentials such as the Remote Server Administration Tools (which we talked about in Chapter 4, “Managing Windows Server 2008”) to legacy roles such as the WINS Server (yes it’s still around if you need it) to Failover Clustering (clustering is a feature, not a role—see Chapter 9, “Clustering Enhancements,” to find out why) and lots of other stuff. In a moment, we’ll look at how to add (install) roles, role services, and features. But first let’s summarize what’s on the menu.

Available Roles and Role Services First let’s look at a list of the different roles you can install on Windows Server 2008, along with brief descriptions of what these roles do and which optional role services are available for each role. We’ll list these server roles in alphabetical order together with the various role services available (or needed) by each role. Note that some role services might be required for a particular role, while other services are optional and should be added only if their functionality is required. The cool thing about Windows Server 2008 is that so little functionality is installed by default. This is intentional, as it increases the security of the platform. For example, if the DHCP Server role is not installed, the bits for the DHCP Server service are not present, which means the server can’t be

Chapter 5

Managing Server Roles

73

compromised by malware attempting to access the server on UDP port 67 or attempting to compromise the DHCP Server service. For even greater protection, a Windows server core installation has even less functionality by default than a full installation of Windows Server 2008, and also has a more limited set of roles you can install—see Chapter 6, “Windows Server Core,” for more details. Anyway, let’s look now at each available role you can install, together with its role services.

Active Directory Certificate Services Active Directory Certificate Services enables creation and management of digital certificates for users, computers, and organizations as part of a public key infrastructure. The following role services are available when you install this role: ■

Certification Authority

■

Certification Authority Web Enrollment Web Enrollment allows you to request certificates, retrieve certificate revocation lists, and perform smart card certificate enrollment using a Web browser.

■

Online Certificate Status Protocol

■

Microsoft Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol Microsoft Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol (MSCEP) Support allows routers and other network devices to obtain certificates.

Certification Authority (CA) issues and manages digital certificates for users, computers, and organizations. Multiple CAs can be linked to form a public key infrastructure.

Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) Support enables clients to determine certificate revocation status using OCSP as an alternative to using certificate revocation lists.

For more information concerning the Active Directory Certificate Services role, see Chapter 7, “Active Directory Enhancements.”

Active Directory Domain Services Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) stores information about objects on the network and makes this information available to users and network administrators. AD DS uses domain controllers to give network users access to permitted resources anywhere on the network. The following role services are available when you install this role (note that the Identity Management for UNIX role service is not available for installation until after you have installed the Active Directory Domain Controller role service): ■

Active Directory Domain Controller

Active Directory Domain Controller enables a server to store directory data and manage communication between users and domains, including user logon processes, authentication, and directory searches.

74

Introducing Windows Server 2008 ■

Identity Management for UNIX

Identity Management for UNIX integrates computers running Windows into an existing UNIX environment and has the following subcomponents. ❑

Server for Network Information Service Integrates Windows and NIS networks by exporting NIS domain maps to Active Directory entries, giving an Active Directory domain controller the ability to act as a master NIS server.

❑

Password Synchronization Automatically changes a user password on the UNIX network when the user changes his or her Windows password, and vice versa. This allows users to maintain just one password for both networks.

❑

Administration Tools Used for administering this feature.

For more information concerning the Active Directory Domain Services role, see Chapter 7.

Active Directory Federation Services Active Directory Federation Services (AD FS) provides simplified, secured identity federation and Web single sign-on (SSO). The following role services are available when you install this role: ■

Federation Service

■

Federation Service Proxy Federation Service Proxy collects user credentials from

Federation Service provides security tokens to client applications in response to requests for access to resources.

browser clients and Web applications and forwards the credentials to the federation service on their behalf. ■

AD FS Web Agents AD FS Web Agents validate security tokens and allow authenticated access to Web resources from browser clients and Web applications. There are two types of agents you can install: ❑

Claims-Aware Agent Enables authentication for applications that use claims directly for authentication.

❑

Windows Token-Based Agent Enables authentication for applications that use traditional Windows security token-based authentication.

For more information concerning the Active Directory Federation Services role, see Chapter 7.

Active Directory Lightweight Directory Services Active Directory Lightweight Directory Services (AD LDS) provides a store for applicationspecific data. For more information concerning this role, see Chapter 7.

Active Directory Rights Management Services Active Directory Rights Management Services (AD RMS) helps protect information from unauthorized use. AD RMS includes a certification service that establishes the identity of

Chapter 5

Managing Server Roles

75

users, a licensing service that provides authorized users with licenses for protected information, and a logging service to monitor and troubleshoot AD RMS. Note that the server must be joined to a domain before you can install this role on it. The following role services are available when you install this role: ■

Active Directory Rights Management Server Rights Management Server helps protect

information from unauthorized use. ■

Identity Federation Support AD RMS can use an existing federated trust relationship between your organization and another organization to establish user identities and provide access to protected information created by either organization. For example, a trust established by Active Directory Federation Services can be used to establish user identities for AD RMS.

For more information concerning the Active Directory Rights Management Services role, see Chapter 7.

Application Server Application Server supports running distributed applications, such as those built with the Windows Communication Foundation or COM+. The following role services are available when you install this role: ■

Application Server Core Application Server Core provides technologies for deploying

and managing .NET Framework 3.0 applications. Web Server (IIS) Support

■

Web Server (IIS) Support enables Application Server to host internal or external Web sites and Web services that communicate over HTTP.

■

COM+ Network Access

■

TCP Port Sharing TCP Port Sharing allows multiple net.tcp applications to share a single TCP port so that they can exist on the same physical computer in separate, isolated processes while sharing the network infrastructure required to send and receive traffic over a TCP port such as port 80.

■

Windows Process Activation Service Support

COM+ Network Access enables Application Server to host and allow remote invocation of applications built with COM+ or Enterprise Services components.

Windows Process Activation Service Support enables Application Server to invoke applications remotely over the network using protocols such as HTTP, Message Queuing, TCP, and named pipes. Subcomponents of this role service include: ❑

HTTP Activation Supports process activation via HTTP.

❑

Message Queuing Activation Supports process activation via Message Queuing.

❑

TCP Activation Supports process activation via TCP.

❑

Named Pipes Activation Supports process activation via named pipes.

76

Introducing Windows Server 2008 ■

Distributed Transactions

Distributed Transactions provides services that help ensure complete and successful transactions over multiple databases hosted on multiple computers on the network. Subcomponents of this role service include: ❑

Incoming Remote Transactions Provides distributed transaction support for applications that enlist in remote transactions.

❑

Outgoing Remote Transactions Provides distributed transaction support for propagating transactions that an application generates.

❑

WS-Atomic Transactions Provides distributed transaction support for applications that use two-phase commit transactions with exchanges based upon the Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP).

Note that installing this server role also requires that you install the Windows Process Activation Service (WPAS) and .NET Framework 3.0 features, together with some of their subcomponents. For more information concerning the Application Server role, see Chapter 12, “Other Features and Enhancements.”

DHCP Server Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Server enables the central provisioning, configuration, and management of temporary IP addresses and related information for client computers. For more information concerning this role, see Chapter 12.

DNS Server Domain Name System (DNS) Server translates domain and computer DNS names to IP addresses. DNS is easier to manage when it is installed on the same server as Active Directory Domain Services. If you select the Active Directory Domain Services role, you can install and configure DNS Server and Active Directory Domain Services to work together. For more information concerning this role, see Chapter 7.

Fax Server Fax Server sends and receives faxes and allows you to manage fax resources such as jobs, settings, reports, and fax devices on this computer or on the network. For more information concerning this role, see Chapter 12.

Chapter 5

Managing Server Roles

77

File Services File Services provides technologies for storage management, file replication, distributed namespace management, fast file searching, and streamlined client access to files. The following role services are available when you install this role: ■

■

Distributed File System

Distributed File System (DFS) provides tools and services for DFS Namespace and DFS Replication. Subcomponents of this role service include: ❑

DFS Namespace Aggregates the files from multiple file servers into a single, global namespace for users.

❑

DFS Replication Enables configuration, management, monitoring, and replication of large quantities of data over the WAN in a scalable and highly efficient manner.

File Server Resource Manager File Server Resource Manager (FSRM) generates

storage reports, configures quotas, and defines file-screening policies. ■

Services for Network File System

■

Single Instance Store Single Instance Store (SIS) reduces the amount of storage required on your server by consolidating files that have the same content into one master copy.

■

Windows Search Service

■

Windows Server 2003 File Services

Services for Network File System (NFS) permits UNIX clients to access files on a server running a Windows operating system.

Windows Search Engine enables fast file searches on this server from Windows Search-compatible clients.

Provides file services for Windows Server 2003. Subcomponents of this role service include: ❑

File Replication Service (FRS) Supports legacy distributed file environments. If you’re running your server in an environment with Windows 2003 replication and you want to use this server to support that, select this option. If you want to enable the latest replication technology, select DFS Replication instead.

❑

Indexing Service Catalogs contents and properties of files on local and remote computers, and provides rapid access to files through a flexible query language.

For more information concerning the File Services role, see Chapter 12.

Network Policy and Access Services Network Access Services provides support for routing LAN and WAN network traffic, creating and enforcing network access policies, and accessing network resources over VPN and dial-up connections. The following role services are available when you install this role: ■

Network Policy Server

Network Policy Server (NPS) creates and enforces organizationwide network access policies for client health, connection request authentication, and network authorization. In addition, you can use NPS as a RADIUS proxy to forward

78

Introducing Windows Server 2008

connection requests to NPS or other RADIUS servers that you configure in remote RADIUS server groups. ■

Routing and Remote Access Services Routing and Remote Access Services (RRAS)

provide remote users access to resources on your private network over virtual private network (VPN) or dial-up connections. Servers configured with Routing and Remote Access Services can provide LAN and WAN routing services to connect network segments within a small office or to connect two private networks over the Internet. Subcomponents of this role service include: ❑

Remote Access Service Enables remote or mobile workers to access private office networks through VPN or dial-up connections.

❑

Routing Provides support for NAT Routers, LAN Routers running RIP, and multicast-capable routers (IGMP Proxy).

■

Health Registration Authority Health Registration Authority validates client requests for health certificates used in Network Access Protection.

■

Host Credential Authorization Protocol

Host Credential Authorization Protocol (HCAP) behaves as a connection point between Cisco Access Control Server and the Microsoft Network Policy Server, allowing the Microsoft Network Policy Server to validate the machine’s posture in a Cisco 802.1X environment.

For more information concerning the Network Access Services role, see Chapter 10, “Network Access Protection.”

Print Services Print Services manages and provides access to network printers and printer drivers. The following role services are available when you install this role: ■

Print Server

Print Server manages and provides access to network printers and printer

drivers. ■

Internet Printing Internet Printing enables Web-based printer management and

allows printing to shared printers via HTTP. ■

LPD Service Line Printer Daemon (LPD) Service provides print services for UNIX-

based computers. For more information concerning the Print Services role, see Chapter 12.

Chapter 5

Managing Server Roles

79

Terminal Services Terminal Services provides technologies that enable access to a server running Windowsbased programs or the full Windows desktop. Users can connect to a terminal server to run programs, save files, and use network resources on that server. The following role services are available when you install this role: ■

Terminal Server Terminal Server enables sharing of Windows-based programs or the full Windows desktop. Users can connect to a terminal server to run programs, save files, and use network resources on that server.

■

TS Licensing TS Licensing manages the Terminal Server client access licenses

(TS CALs) that are required to connect to a terminal server. You use TS Licensing to install, issue, and monitor the availability of TS CALs. ■

TS Session Broker TS Session Broker supports reconnection to an existing session on a terminal server that is a member of a load-balanced TS farm.

■

TS Gateway

■

TS Web Access

TS Gateway provides access to Terminal Servers inside a corporate network from the outside via HTTP. TS Web Access provides access to Terminal Servers via the Web.

For more information concerning the Terminal Services role, see Chapter 8, “Terminal Services Enhancements.”

UDDI Services Universal Description, Discovery, and Integration (UDDI) Services organizes and catalogs Web services and other programmatic resources. A UDDI Services site consists of a UDDI Web Application connected to a UDDI Database. The following role services are available when you install this role: ■

UDDI Services Database UDDI Database provides a store for the UDDI Services catalog and configuration data.

■

UDDI Services Web Application UDDI Web Application provides a Web site where users and Web applications can search and discover Web services in the UDDI Services catalog.

80

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Web Server (IIS) Web Server provides a reliable, manageable, and scalable Web application infrastructure. Because this particular role has a whole lot of role services you can optionally enable, let’s start with the three main ones and then examine additional services that depend on these three services: ■

Web Server

■

Management Tools

■

FTP Publishing Service

Internet Information Services provides support for HTML Web sites and, optionally, support for ASP.NET, classic ASP, and Web server extensions.

Web Server Management Tools enable administration of Web servers and Web sites.

File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Publishing Service provides support for hosting and managing FTP sites.

Now let’s take a closer look at each of these role services with their optional subcomponents. Web Server Role Service When you choose to install the Web Server role service, the following subcomponents are available for installation as well: ■

■

Common HTTP Features

Common HTTP Features provides support for static Web server content such as HTML and image files. Subcomponents of this role service include: ❑

Static Content Serves .htm, .html, and image files from a Web site.

❑

Default Document Permits a specified default file to be loaded when users do not specify a file in a request URL.

❑

Directory Browsing Allows clients to see the contents of a directory hosted on a Web site.

❑

HTTP Errors Allows you to customize the error messages returned to clients.

❑

HTTP Redirection Provides support to redirect client requests to a specific destination.

Application Development

Web Application Support provides infrastructure for hosting applications developed using ASP.NET, classic ASP, CGI, and ISAPI extensions. Subcomponents of this role service include: ❑

ASP.NET Hosts .NET Web applications built using ASP.NET.

❑

.NET Extensibility Provides support for hosting .NET Framework managed module extensions.

❑

Active Server Pages (ASP) Provides support for hosting traditional Web applications built using ASP.

❑

Common Gateway Interface (CGI) Provides support for executing scripts such as Perl and Python.

Chapter 5

■

■

Managing Server Roles

81

❑

Internet Server Application Programming Interface (ISAPI) Extensions Provides support for developing dynamic Web content using ISAPI extensions. An ISAPI extension runs when requested just like any other static HTML file or dynamic ASP file.

❑

Internet Server Application Programming Interface (ISAPI) Filters Provides support for Web applications developed using ISAPI filters. ISAPI filters are files that can be used to modify and enhance the functionality provided by IIS.

❑

Server Side Includes Serves .stm, .shtm, and .shtml files from a Web site.

Health and Diagnostics Health and Diagnostics enables you to monitor and manage server, site, and application health. Subcomponents of this role service include: ❑

HTTP Logging Enables logging of Web site activity on this server.

❑

Logging Tools Enables you to manage Web activity logs and automate common logging tasks.

❑

Request Monitor Shows server, site, and application health.

❑

Tracing Enables tracing for ASP.NET applications and failed requests.

❑

Custom Logging Enables support for custom logging for Web servers, sites, and applications.

❑

ODBC Logging Enables support for logging to an ODBC-compliant database.

Security Security Services provides support for securing servers, sites, applications,

virtual directories, and files. Subcomponents of this role service include: ❑

Basic Authentication Provides support for requiring a valid Windows user name and password to connect to resources.

❑

Windows Authentication Provides support for authenticating clients using NTLM or Kerberos authentication.

❑

Digest Authentication Provides support for authenticating clients by sending a password hash to a Windows domain controller.

❑

Client Certificate Mapping Authentication Provides support for authenticating client certificates with Directory Service accounts.

❑

IIS Client Certificate Mapping Authentication Provides support for mapping client certificates to a Windows user account.

❑

URL Authorization Provides support for authorizing client access to the URLs that compose a Web application.

❑

Request Filtering Provides support for configuring rules to block selected client requests.

❑

IP and Domain Restrictions Provide support for allowing or denying content access based on IP address or domain name.

82

Introducing Windows Server 2008 ■

Performance

Performance Services compress content before returning it to a client. Subcomponents of this role service include: ❑

Static Content Compression Compresses static content before returning it to a client.

❑

Dynamic Content Compression Compresses dynamic content before returning it to a client.

Management Tools When you choose to install the Management Tools role service, the following subcomponents are available for installation as well: ■

IIS Management Console IIS Management Console enables local and remote administration of Web servers using a Web-based management console.

■

IIS Management Scripts and Tools IIS Management Scripts and Tools enables managing Web servers from the command line and automating common administrative tasks.

■

Management Service

■

IIS 6 Management Compatibility

Management Service allows this Web server to be managed remotely from another computer using the Web Server Management Console.

IIS 6 Management Compatibility allows you to use existing IIS 6 interfaces and scripts to manage this IIS 7 Web server. Subcomponents of this role service include: ❑

IIS 6 Metabase Compatibility Translates IIS 6 metabase changes to the new IIS 7 configuration store.

❑

IIS 6 WMI Compatibility Provides support for IIS 6 WMI scripting interfaces.

❑

IIS 6 Scripting Tools Streamlines common administrative tasks for IIS 6 Web servers.

❑

IIS 6 Management Console Provides support for administering remote IIS 6 Web servers from this computer.

FTP Publishing Service When you choose to install the FTP Publishing Service role service, the following subcomponents are available for installation as well: ■

FTP Server

■

FTP Management Console File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Management Console enables administration of local and remote FTP servers.

File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Server provides support for hosting FTP sites and transferring files using FTP.

Note that adding the Web Server (IIS) role requires that you also add the Windows Process Activation Service (WPAS) feature together with these three subcomponents of this feature: ■

Process Model

■

.NET Environment

■

Configuration APIs

Chapter 5

Managing Server Roles

83

For more information concerning this role, see Chapter 11, “Internet Information Services 7.0.”

Windows Deployment Services Windows Deployment Services (WDS) provides a simplified, secure means of rapidly deploying Windows to computers via network-based installation, without the administrator visiting each computer directly or installing Windows from physical media. ■

Deployment Server Deployment Server provides the full functionality of WDS, which you can use to configure and remotely install Windows operating systems. With Windows Deployment Server, you can create and customize images and then use them to reimage computers. Deployment Server is dependent on the core parts of Transport Server.

■

Transport Server Transport Server provides a subset of the functionality of WDS services. It contains only the core networking parts, which you can use to transmit data using multicasting on a standalone server. You should use this role service if you want to transmit data using multicasting but do not want to implement all of WDS services.

For more information concerning the Windows Deployment Services role, see Chapter 12.

Windows SharePoint Services Windows SharePoint Services helps organizations increase productivity by creating Web sites where users can collaborate on documents, tasks, and events and easily share contacts and other information. Note that installing this server role also requires that you install the Web Server role and some of its role services, and also the Windows Process Activation Service (WPAS) and .NET Framework 3.0 features together with some of their subcomponents. Remember, of course, that this book is based on a prerelease version (Beta 3) of Windows Server 2008, so there might be changes to the aforementioned list of roles and role services in RTM.

Available Features Now that we’ve summarized the various roles and role services you can install on Windows Server 2008, let’s examine the different features you can install. Once we’ve done this, we’ll look at how to add roles, role services, and features on a server.

.NET Framework 3.0 Microsoft .NET Framework 3.0 combines the power of the .NET Framework 2.0 APIs with new technologies for building applications that offer appealing user interfaces, protect your customers’ personal identity information, enable seamless and secure communication, and

84

Introducing Windows Server 2008

provide the ability to model a range of business processes. The following are subcomponents of this feature: ■

.NET Framework 3.0 Features Microsoft .NET Framework 3.0 combines the power of the .NET Framework 2.0 APIs with new technologies for building applications that offer appealing user interfaces, protect your customers’ personal identity information, enable seamless and secure communication, and provide the ability to model a range of business processes.

■

XPS Viewer An XML Paper Specification (XPS) document is electronic paper that provides a high-fidelity reading and printing experience. The XPS Viewer allows for the viewing, signing, and protecting of XPS documents.

■

Windows Communication Foundation Activation Components

Windows Communication Foundation (WCF) Activation Components use Windows Process Activation Service (WPAS) Support to invoke applications remotely over the network. It does this by using protocols such as HTTP, Message Queuing, TCP, and named pipes. Consequently, applications can start and stop dynamically in response to incoming work items, resulting in application hosting that is more robust, manageable, and efficient. Subcomponents of this component include: ❑

HTTP Activation Supports process activation via HTTP. Applications that use HTTP Activation can start and stop dynamically in response to work items that arrive over the network via HTTP.

❑

Non-HTTP Activation Supports process activation via Message Queuing, TCP, and named pipes. Applications that use Non-HTTP Activation can start and stop dynamically in response to work items that arrive over the network via Message Queuing, TCP, and named pipes.

Before we continue our look at the various optional features we can install on Windows Server 2008, let’s pause a moment and dig deeper into the improvements of the feature we just mentioned, namely the .NET Framework 3.0. Let’s hear what an expert at Microsoft has to say concerning this:

From the Experts: .NET Framework 101 The .NET Framework is an application development and execution environment that includes programming languages and libraries designed to work together to create Windows client and Internet-based applications that are easier to build, manage, deploy, and integrate with other networked systems. The .NET Framework 3.0 is installed by default on Windows Vista. On Microsoft Windows Server 2008, you can install the .NET Framework 3.0 as a Windows feature using the Roles Management tools.

Chapter 5

Managing Server Roles

The .NET Framework is composed of several abstraction layers. At the bottom is the common language runtime (CLR). The CLR contains a set of components that implement language integration, garbage collection, security, and memory management. Programs written for the .NET Framework execute in a software environment that manages the program’s runtime requirements. The CLR provides the appearance of an application virtual machine so that programmers don’t have to consider the capabilities of the specific CPU that will execute the program. The CLR also provides other important services, such as security mechanisms, memory management, and exception handling. At runtime, the output of application code compiled within the CLR is Microsoft Intermediate Language (MIL). MIL is a language-neutral byte code that operates within the managed environment of the CLR. For developers, the CLR provides lifetime management services and structured exception handling. An object’s lifetime within the .NET Framework is determined by the garbage collector (GC), which is responsible for checking every object to evaluate and determine its current status. The GC traverses the memory tree, and any objects that it encounters are marked as alive. During a second pass, any object not marked is destroyed and the associated resources are freed. Finally, to prevent memory fragmentation and increase application performance, the entire memory heap is compacted. This process automatically prevents memory leaks and ensures that developers don’t have to write code that deals with low-level system resources. On top of the CLR is a layer of class libraries that contain the interface and classes that are used within the framework abstraction layers. This Base Class Library (BCL) is a set of interfaces that define things such as data types, data access, and I/O methods. The BCL is then inherited into the upper layers to provide services for Windows, Web Forms, and Web Services. For example, all the base controls that are used to design forms are inherited from classes that are defined within the BCL. At the core of the BCL is the XML enablement classes that are inherited and used within the entire framework and provide a variety of additional services that include data access. Layered on top of the data access and XML layers and inheriting all of their features is the visual presentation layer of Windows Forms and Web Forms. Residing at the top level of the .NET Framework is the Common Language Specification (CLS), which provides the basic set of language features. The CLS is responsible for defining a subset of the common type system that provides a set of rules that define how language types are declared, managed, and used in the runtime environment. This ensures language interoperability by defining a set of feature requirements that are common in all languages. Because of this, any language that exposes CLS interfaces is guaranteed to be accessible from any other language that supports the CLS. This layer is responsible for guaranteeing that the Framework is language agnostic for any CLScompliant language. For example, both Microsoft Visual Basic .NET and C# are CLS compliant and therefore interoperable.

85

86

Introducing Windows Server 2008

.NET Framework 3.0 is an extension of the existing .NET Framework 2.0 CLR and runtime environment. Designed to leverage the extensibility of the .NET Framework 2.0, it contains several new features but no breaking changes to existing applications. Windows CardSpace (CardSpace) Windows CardSpace is a new feature of Microsoft Windows and the .NET Framework 3.0 that enables application users to safely manage and control the exchange of their personal information online. By design, Windows CardSpace puts the user at the center of controlling his online identities. Windows CardSpace simplifies the online experience by allowing users to identify themselves. Users do this by submitting cryptographically strong information tokens rather than having to remember and manually type their details into Web sites. This approach leverages what is known as an identity selector: when a user needs to authenticate to a Web site, CardSpace provides a special securityhardened UI with a set of information “cards” for the user to choose from. CardSpace visually represents a user’s identity information as an information card. Each information card is controlled by the user and represents one or more claims about their identity. Claims are a set of named values that the issuer of the information card asserts is related to a particular individual. Windows CardSpace supports two types of information cards: personal cards and managed cards. Personal cards are created by the user, and managed cards are obtained from trusted third parties such as the user’s bank, employer, insurance company, hotel chain, and so on. To protect any type of personal information, all information cards are stored on the local computer in a secure encrypted store that is unique to the user login. Each file is encrypted twice to prevent malicious access. Managed cards provide an additional layer of protection, as no personal data is stored on the user’s machine; instead, it is stored by a trusted provider like your bank or credit card provider and is released only as an encrypted and signed token on demand. Windows Presentation Foundation (WPF) Windows Presentation Foundation (WPF) is the next-generation presentation subsystem for Windows. It provides developers and designers with a unified programming model for building rich Windows smart client user experiences that incorporate UI, media, and documents. WPF is designed to build applications for client-side application development and provide either a richer Windows Forms application or a Rich Internet Application (RIA) that is designed to run on the application client workstation. Windows Workflow Foundation Windows Workflow Foundation (WF) is a part of the .NET Framework 3.0 that enables developers to create workflow-enabled applications. Activities are the building blocks of workflow. They are a unit of work that needs to be executed. They can be created by either using code or composing them from other activities. Microsoft Visual Studio contains a set of activities that mainly provide structure—such as parallel execution, if/else, and call Web service. Visual Studio also contains the Workflow Designer that allows for the graphical composition of workflows by placing

Chapter 5

Managing Server Roles

activities within the workflow model. For developers, this feature of the designer can be rehosted within any Windows Forms or ASP.NET application. WF also contains a rules engine. This engine enables declarative, rule-based development for workflows and any .NET application to use. Finally, there is the Workflow Runtime. This is a lightweight and extensible engine that executes the activities that make up a workflow. The runtime is hosted within any .NET process, enabling developers to bring workflow to anything from a Windows Forms application to an ASP.NET Web site or a Windows Service. WF provides a common UI and API for application developers and is used within Microsoft’s own products, such as SharePoint Portal Server 2007. Windows Communication Foundation Modern distributed systems are based on the principles of Service Oriented Architecture (SOA). This type of application architecture is based on loosely coupled and interoperable services. The global acceptance of Web Services has changed how these application components are defined and built. The widespread acceptance has been fueled by vendor agreements on standards and proven interoperability. This combination has helped set Web Services apart from other integration technologies. Windows Communication Foundation (WCF) is Microsoft’s unified framework for building reliable, secure, transacted, and interoperable distributed applications. WCF was completely designed with service orientation in mind. It is primarily implemented as a set of classes on top of the .NET Framework CLR. SOA is an architectural pattern that has many styles. To support this, WCF provides a layered architecture. At the bottom layer, WCF exposes a channel architecture that provides asynchronous, untyped messages. Built on top of this are protocol facilities for secure reliable, transacted data exchange and a broad choice of transport and encoding options. Although WCF introduces a new development environment for distributed applications, it is designed to interoperate with applications that are not WCF based. There are two important aspects to WCF interoperability: interoperability with other platforms, and interoperability with the Microsoft technologies that preceded WCF. The typed programming model or service model exposed by WCF is designed to ease the development of distributed applications and provide developers with experience in using the ASP.NET Web service. .NET Remoting and Enterprise Services are a familiar development experience with WCF. The service model features a straightforward mapping of Web service concepts to the types of the .NET Framework CLR. This includes a flexible and extensible mapping of messages to the service implementation found in the .NET languages. WCF also provides serialization facilities that enable loose coupling and versioning, while at the same time providing integration and interoperability with existing .NET technologies such as MSMQ, COM+, and others. The result of this technology unification is greater flexibility and significantly reduced development complexity.

87

88

Introducing Windows Server 2008

To allow more than just basic communication, WCF implements Web services technologies defined by the WS-* specifications. These specifications address several areas, including basic messaging, security, reliability, transactions, and working with a service’s metadata. Support for the WS-* protocols means that Web services can easily take advantage of interoperable security, reliability, and transaction support required by businesses today. Developers can now focus on business logic and leave the underlying plumbing to WCF. Windows Communication Foundation also provides opportunities for new messaging scenarios with support for additional transports such as TCP and named pipes and new channels such as the Peer Channel. More flexibility is also available with regard to hosting Web services. Windows Forms applications, ASP.NET applications, console applications, Windows services, and COM+ services can all easily host Web service endpoints on any protocol. WCF also has many options for digitally signing and encrypting messages, including support for Kerberos and X.509. –Thom Robbins Director of .NET Platform Product Management

BitLocker Drive Encryption BitLocker Drive Encryption helps to protect data on lost, stolen, or inappropriately decommissioned computers by encrypting the entire volume and checking the integrity of early boot components. Data is decrypted only if those components are successfully verified and the encrypted drive is located in the original computer. Integrity checking requires a compatible trusted platform module.

BITS Server Extensions Background Intelligent Transfer Service (BITS) Server Extensions allow a server to receive files uploaded by clients using BITS. BITS allows client computers to transfer files in the foreground or background asynchronously, preserve the responsiveness of other network applications, and resume file transfers after network failures and computer restarts.

Connection Manager Administration Kit Connection Manager Administration Kit (CMAK) generates Connection Manager profiles using a wizard that guides you through the process of building service profiles that exactly meet your business needs.

Desktop Experience Desktop Experience includes features of Windows Vista, such as Windows Media Player, desktop themes, and photo management. Desktop Experience does not enable any of the Windows Vista features; you must manually enable them.

Chapter 5

Managing Server Roles

89

Failover Clustering Failover Clustering allows multiple servers to work together to provide high availability of services and applications. Failover Clustering is often used for file and print services, as well as database and mail applications.

Internet Printing Client Internet Printing Client allows you to use HTTP to connect to and use printers that are on Web print servers. Internet printing enables connections between users and printers that are not on the same domain or network. Examples of uses include enabling a traveling employee at a remote office site or in a coffee shop equipped with Wi-Fi access to send documents to a printer located at her main office.

Internet Storage Naming Server Internet Storage Naming Server (iSNS) processes registration requests, de-registration requests, and queries from iSCSI devices.

LPR Port Monitor Line Printer Remote (LPR) Port Monitor allows users who have access to UNIX-based computers to print on devices attached to them.

Message Queuing Message Queuing provides guaranteed message delivery, efficient routing, security, and priority-based messaging between applications. Message Queuing also accommodates message delivery between applications that run on different operating systems, use dissimilar network infrastructures, are temporarily offline, or that are running at different times to communicate across heterogeneous networks and systems that might be temporarily offline. MSMQ provides guaranteed message delivery, efficient routing, security, and priority. The following subcomponents are available when you install this feature: ■

Message Queuing Services Message Queuing Services enable applications running at different times to communicate across heterogeneous networks and systems that may be temporarily offline. Message Queuing provides guaranteed message delivery, efficient routing, security, and priority-based messaging between applications. Subcomponents of this component include: ❑

MSMQ Server Provides guaranteed message delivery, efficient routing, security, and priority-based messaging. It can be used to implement solutions for both asynchronous and synchronous messaging scenarios.

90

Introducing Windows Server 2008 ❑

Directory Service Integration Enables publishing of queue properties to the directory, out-of-the-box authentication and encryption of messages using certificates registered in the directory, and routing of messages across Windows sites.

❑

Message Queuing Triggers Enables the invocation of a COM component or an executable, depending on the filters that you define for the incoming messages in a given queue.

❑

HTTP Support Enables the sending of messages over HTTP.

❑

Multicasting Support Enables queuing and sending of multicast messages to a multicast IP address.

❑

Routing Service Routes messages between different sites and within a site.

■

Windows 2000 Client Support Windows 2000 Client Support is required for Message Queuing clients on Windows 2000 computers in the domain.

■

Message Queuing DCOM Proxy Message Queuing DCOM Proxy enables the computer to act as a DCOM client of a remote MSMQ server.

Multipath I/O Microsoft Multipath I/O (MPIO), along with the Microsoft Device Specific Module (DSM) or a third-party DSM, provides support for using multiple data paths to a storage device on Microsoft Windows.

Network Load Balancing Network Load Balancing (NLB) distributes traffic across several servers, using the TCP/IP networking protocol. NLB is particularly useful for ensuring that stateless applications, such as a Web server running Internet Information Services (IIS), are scalable by adding additional servers as the load increases.

Peer Name Resolution Protocol Peer Name Resolution Protocol (PNRP) allows applications to register on and resolve names from your computer so that other computers can communicate with these applications.

Remote Assistance Remote Assistance enables you (or a support person) to offer assistance to users with computer issues or questions. Remote Assistance allows you to view and share control of the user’s desktop to troubleshoot and fix the issues. Users can also ask for help from friends or co-workers.

Chapter 5

Managing Server Roles

91

Remote Server Administration Tools Remote Server Administration Tools (RSAT) enable role and feature management tools on a computer so that you can target them at another 2008 Server machine for remote administration. This feature will not set up the core binaries for the selected components but only their administration tools. Note that the following list of Remote Server Administration Tools is based on the Beta 3 milestone of Windows Server 2008 and that additional tools for managing roles and features may be provided in Release Candidate builds: ■

Role Administration Tools Role administration tools that are not installed by default

in 2008 Server computers. The following role administration tools are available for installation:

■

❑

Active Directory Certificate Services

❑

Active Directory Domain Services

❑

Active Directory Lightweight Directory Services

❑

Active Directory Rights Management Services

❑

DNS Server

❑

Fax Server

❑

File Services

❑

Network Policy and Access Services

❑

Print Services

❑

Terminal Services.

❑

Web Server (IIS)

❑

Windows Deployment Services

Feature Administration Tools Feature administration tools that are not installed by default in 2008 Server computers. The following feature administration tools are available for installation: ❑

BitLocker Drive Encryption

❑

BITS Server

❑

Failover Clustering.

❑

Network Load Balancing

❑

SMTP Server

❑

Simple SAN Management

❑

Windows System Resource Management (WSRM)

❑

WINS Server

92

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Removable Storage Manager Removable Storage Manager (RSM) manages and catalogs removable media and operates automated removable media devices.

RPC Over HTTP Proxy RPC Over HTTP Proxy is a proxy that is used by objects that receive remote procedure calls (RPC) over Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP). This proxy allows clients to discover these objects even if the objects are moved between servers or if they exist in discrete areas of the network for security or other reasons.

Simple TCP/IP Services Simple TCP/IP Services supports the following TCP/IP services: Character Generator, Daytime, Discard, Echo, and Quote of the Day. Simple TCP/IP Services is provided for backward compatibility and should not be installed unless it is required.

SMTP Server SMTP Server supports the transfer of e-mail messages between e-mail systems.

SNMP Services Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Services includes the SNMP Service and SNMP WMI Provider. The following subcomponents are available when you install this feature: ■

SNMP Service SNMP Service includes agents that monitor the activity in network devices and report to the network console workstation.

■

SNMP WMI Provider SNMP Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI) Provider

enables WMI client scripts and applications to get access to SNMP information. Clients can use WMI C++ interfaces and scripting objects to communicate with network devices that use the SNMP protocol and can receive SNMP traps as WMI events.

Storage Manager for SANs Storage Manager for Storage Area Networks (SANs) helps you create and manage logical unit numbers (LUNs) on Fibre Channel and iSCSI disk drive subsystems that support Virtual Disk Service (VDS) in your SAN.

Chapter 5

Managing Server Roles

93

Subsystem for UNIX-based Applications Subsystem for UNIX-based Applications (SUA), along with a package of support utilities available for download from the Microsoft Web site, enables you to run UNIX-based programs, and compile and run custom UNIX-based applications in the Windows environment.

Telnet Client Telnet Client uses the Telnet protocol to connect to a remote telnet server and run applications on that server.

Telnet Server Telnet Server allows remote users, including those running UNIX-based operating systems, to perform command-line administration tasks and run programs by using a telnet client.

TFTP Client Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) Client is used to read files from, or write files to, a remote TFTP server. TFTP is primarily used by embedded devices or systems that retrieve firmware, configuration information, or a system image during the boot process from a TFTP server.

Windows Internal Database Windows Internal Database is a relational data store that can be used only by Windows roles and features, such as UDDI Services, Active Directory Rights Management Services, Windows SharePoint Services, Windows Server Update Services, and Windows System Resource Manager.

Windows Process Activation Service Windows Process Activation Service generalizes the IIS process model, removing the dependency on HTTP. All the features of IIS that were previously available only to HTTP applications are now available to applications hosting Windows Communication Foundation (WCF) services, using non-HTTP protocols. IIS 7.0 also uses Windows Process Activation Service for message-based activation over HTTP. The following subcomponents are available when you install this feature: ■

Process Model The process model hosts Web and WCF services. Introduced with IIS 6.0, the process model is a new architecture that features rapid failure protection, health monitoring, and recycling. Windows Process Activation Service Process Model removes the dependency on HTTP.

■

.NET Environment .NET Environment supports managed code activation in the process model.

94

Introducing Windows Server 2008 ■

Configuration APIs

Configuration APIs enable applications that are built using the .NET Framework to configure Windows Process Activation Service programmatically. This lets the application developer automatically configure Windows Process Activation Service settings when the application runs instead of requiring the administrator to manually configure these settings.

Windows Server Backup Windows Server Backup allows you to back up and recover your operating system, applications, and data. You can schedule backups to run once a day or more often, and you can protect the entire server or specific volumes.

Windows System Resource Manager Windows System Resource Manager (WSRM) is a Windows Server operating system administrative tool that can control how CPU and memory resources are allocated. Managing resource allocation improves system performance and reduces the risk that applications, services, or processes will interfere with each other to reduce server efficiency and system response.

WINS Server Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) provides a distributed database for registering and querying dynamic mappings of NetBIOS names for computers and groups used on your network. WINS maps NetBIOS names to IP addresses and solves the problems arising from NetBIOS name resolution in routed environments.

Wireless Networking Wireless Networking configures and starts the WLAN AutoConfig service, regardless of whether the computer has any wireless adapters. WLAN AutoConfig enumerates wireless adapters and manages both wireless connections and the wireless profiles that contain the settings required to configure a wireless client to connect to a wireless network. Again, please remember that this book is based on a prerelease version (Beta 3) of Windows Server 2008, so there might be changes to the preceding list of features in RTM. For example, in the build that this particular chapter is based on (IDS_2, also known as February 2007 Community Technology Preview), the Group Policy Management Console (GPMC) is not present and there are no RSAT tools present for managing certain roles such as File Server, Network Policy and Access Services, Windows Deployment Services, and so on.

Chapter 5

Managing Server Roles

95

Adding Roles and Features Now that we’ve looked at the various roles, role services, and features that are available in Windows Server 2008, let’s look at how to install them on a server. There are basically three ways to do this: ■

From the Initial Configuration Tasks (ICT) screen

■

Using Server Manager

■

From the command line

What about installing roles and features during setup? Can you configure an unattend.xml file so that a role such as File Server or Network Policy and Access Services is automatically installed after setup finishes? I asked this question of someone on the product team while writing this chapter. The answer I got was “Yes and no,” meaning that it might be possible but would involve “stitching” a lot of things together to make it happen. To understand why this is so, we need to understand a bit about how roles and features are defined “under the hood” in Windows Server 2008, and this involves understanding something called CBS Updates. And no, this has nothing to do with late-breaking news on television… Let’s pause again for a moment and listen to an expert at Microsoft explain the architecture behind roles and features in Windows Server 2008:

From the Experts: Component Based Servicing Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 have a new architecture, called Component Based Servicing (CBS), to capture all the dependencies across binaries, system integrity information per resource, and any customized commands that were needed for servicing to occur. The new architecture provides a unified platform for OS installation and optional component installation and servicing. CBS allows Microsoft to build new SKUs in a more agile way, and the Windows server core installation of Windows Server 2008 is a direct result of moving Microsoft Windows to this new architecture. The flip side of providing this level of componentization is that now there are many more optional components that you can install on Windows Server since fewer components are now installed by default. Another factor that adds complexity is the number of dependencies between these different optional components. Finally, while most of the optional components in Windows Server use the CBS technology, there are a couple of exceptions (such as SharePoint and the Windows Internal Database) that use MSI as their installer technology instead. One can get a glimpse of this complexity by using

96

Introducing Windows Server 2008

tools such as pkgmgr.exe and OCSetup.exe to install optional components. The command to perform a complete install of the Web Server role looks like this: start /w pkgmgr /iu:IIS-WebServerRole;IIS-WebServer;IISCommonHttpFeatures;IIS-StaticContent;IIS-DefaultDocument;IISDirectoryBrowsing;IIS-HttpErrors;IIS-HttpRedirect;IISApplicationDevelopment;IIS-ASPNET;IIS-NetFxExtensibility;IIS-ASP;IIS-CGI;IISISAPIExtensions;IIS-ISAPIFilter;IIS-ServerSideIncludes;IISHealthAndDiagnostics;IIS-HttpLogging;IIS-LoggingLibraries; IIS-RequestMonitor;IIS-HttpTracing;IIS-CustomLogging;IIS-ODBCLogging;IISSecurity;IIS-BasicAuthentication;IIS-WindowsAuthentication;IISDigestAuthentication;IIS-ClientCertificateMappingAuthentication; IIS-IISCertificateMappingAuthentication;IIS-URLAuthorization;IISRequestFiltering;IIS-IPSecurity;IIS-Performance;IIS-HttpCompressionStatic;IISHttpCompressionDynamic;IIS-WebServerManagementTools;IIS-ManagementConsole;IISManagementScriptingTools;IIS-ManagementService;IIS-IS6ManagementCompatibility; IIS-Metabase;IIS-WMICompatibility;IIS-LegacyScripts;IIS-LegacySnapIn;IISFTPPublishingService;IIS-FTPServer;IIS-FTPManagement;WASWindowsActivationService;WAS-ProcessModel;WAS-NetFxEnvironment;WASConfigurationAPI

Server Manager reduces these complexities by grouping optional components into Roles and Features, which are collections of optional components that together address a particular need. Server Manager also automatically handles dependencies between optional components, so that you don’t need to worry about creating a command that is more than a dozen lines long! The different installer technologies are also handled uniformly by Server Manager. Thus, you don’t need to worry about which command to use to install roles and features based on which installer technology they use. Finally, which command do you like better? The one above or this one: servermanagercmd -install Web-Server –allsubfeatures

For more on the Server Manager command-line interface (CLI), see my second sidebar later in this chapter. —Eduardo Melo Lead Program Manager, Windows Enterprise Management Division

Chapter 5

Managing Server Roles

97

Using Initial Configuration Tasks The most obvious way of adding roles and features is to do so from the Initial Configuration Tasks (ICT) screen that is presented to you the first time you log on to Windows Server 2008. We looked at this tool in the previous chapter; now let’s try using it—first to add a role and then to add a feature. We’ll begin by adding the File Server role. Here’s the ICT screen again:

98

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Note that next to “Roles,” it says “None.” This means that we haven’t installed any roles yet on this particular machine. Let’s click the Add Roles link. This starts the Add Roles Wizard (ARW), a simple-to-use tool that walks us through the steps for installing roles on our server. The initial ARW screen looks like this:

Chapter 5

Managing Server Roles

99

Notice that the initial screen of the wizard reminds us to make sure we’ve completed certain precautionary steps before adding roles to our wizard. Clicking Next displays the different roles we can now choose to install:

A big improvement of Windows Server 2008 over previous versions of Windows Server is that you can now choose to install multiple roles at once. Remember the Manage Your Server Wizard in Windows Server 2003? If you wanted to configure your server as both a file server and a print server, you had to walk through the wizard twice to do this. With Windows Server 2008, however, you can multiselect the roles you want to install and you need to walk through the wizard only once. Of course, this might not be 100 percent true because certain roles can have dependencies on other roles—I have to confess that I haven’t tried all 262,143 (218–1) possible combinations of roles in this wizard, so I can’t confirm or deny whether this might be an issue or not. Perhaps the technical reviewer for this book can test this matter thoroughly, provided he feels that Microsoft Press is paying him enough for all the effort involved!

100

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Anyway, let’s select the check box for the File Server role and click Next. When we do this, a screen gives us a short description of the role we selected. We’ll skip this screen and click Next again to display a list of role services we can install together with this role:

Because there are no check boxes preselected on this screen, all the role services available here are optional. So if we wanted to install only the File Server role and nothing else, we could just click Next and finish the wizard. Let’s choose one of these role services, however—namely, the File Server Resource Manager (FSRM) console, a tool for managing file servers that was first introduced in Windows Server 2003 R2.

Chapter 5

Managing Server Roles

101

After we select to install this additional role service to our role, we click Next and get a confirmation screen telling us which role(s) and role service(s) we’re going to install:

What if we decide we want to add another role service, or maybe even an additional role? The nice thing about this wizard is that you can jump to any screen of the wizard simply by selecting its link from the left. But we want to install only one role and one additional service. To do this we click Install and wait awhile for the selected components to install. (This takes some time because we’re dealing with a beta version of the platform.) Note that we aren’t prompted for the source files, which is a nice touch—when you install Windows Server 2008, everything you need to install additional components later is already there on your server. Once the File Server role has been successfully installed, the wizard displays confirmation of this. When you close the wizard and return to the Initial Configuration Tasks screen, the added role is displayed where before it said “None.” (See the first screen shot of this section.) And sure enough, if you select Administrative Tools from the Start menu, you’ll see a shortcut there for launching the File Server Resource Management console.

102

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Adding features is a very similar process, and it uses an Add Feature Wizard (AFW) that you can launch by clicking the Add Features link in the Initial Configuration Tasks screen. The AFW wizard displays a list of optional features you can add to your server:

I won’t bother walking you through this second wizard, as you’re an IT pro, you’re smart—you get wizards. If you do want to try adding a feature, however, you might start by installing Windows Server Backup. Why that feature in particular? Because backups are important— duh!

Chapter 5

Managing Server Roles

103

There is one more thing you might be wondering, however, if you’ve played around with adding roles using ICT. If you click Add Roles once more in ICT to run the ARW again and display the list of roles, you’ll see that the File Server role is grayed out:

In other words, you can’t deselect the File Server role to uninstall it should you want to do this. Why can’t you do this? Well, it’s not called the Add Roles Wizard for nothing! Anyway, we’ll see how to remove roles in a moment, but first let’s move on to another tool for managing roles: Server Manager.

104

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Using Server Manager Adding roles and features using Server Manager is a no-brainer. But before we do this, let’s open Server Manager and view the results of the procedure we just completed, where we added the File Server role and File Server Resource Management console to our server:

Now to add a new role to your server, simply right-click the Roles node (which is selected in the preceding screen shot) and choose Add Roles to launch the Add Roles Wizard. You can also remove roles easily by right-clicking the Roles node and selecting Remove Roles, which launches the (you guessed it) Remove Roles Wizard. In a similar way, you can add or remove role services for a particular role by right-clicking a role (such as File Server displayed here) and choosing either Add Role Services or Remove Role Services from the context menu. And you can add or remove features by right-clicking the Features node and choosing the appropriate option. Finally, by right-clicking the root node (Server Manager), you can add or remove both features and roles. I told you it was a no-brainer.

Chapter 5

Managing Server Roles

105

From the Command Line Something neat that was added in IDS_2, also known as February 2007 Community Technology Preview, is the ability to add or remove roles and features from the command line. This can be done using the ServerManagerCmd.exe command that we talked about in the previous chapter. As we saw, ServerManagerCmd.exe is a powerful tool both for installing and removing roles and also for previewing what components would be installed if you actually decide to add a particular role. I showed you some basic examples of how to use this command in the previous chapter, so here I’m just going to provide you with a few more examples of what this powerful command can do: ■

servermanagercmd –install Web-Server –whatif This command analyzes which specific roles, role services, and features would be installed as part of installing the Web Server role. It compares the list of roles, role services, and features that we know are part of the Web-server role with the list of roles, role services, and features that are already installed on the computer. Only the ones currently not installed are identified as applicable for installation on that particular computer. This functionality really helps you understand the full list of actions that will be performed with the command, without actually making changes to the computer.

■

servermanagercmd –install Web-Server This command is the same as the previous

command without the –whatif flag. So this time it actually installs the Web Server role. ■

servermanagercmd –install Terminal-Services –restart This command installs the Terminal Services role. Given that the installation of this role requires a reboot to complete, the –restart flag is used to automatically restart the machine to complete the role installation. If –restart is not used, you need to restart the computer manually to complete the role installation.

■

servermanagercmd –remove Web-Server

This command removes the Web Server role (assuming it is already installed on the computer). Note that if roles and features that depend on Web Server are installed on the computer (for example, Windows SharePoint Services), they will also be removed from the computer.

■

servermanagercmd –remove Web-Server –resultPath results.xml This command is

the same as the previous command, with the addition of the –resultPath flag. Using this flag, ServerManagerCmd.exe will save the results of the removal operation in an XML file that can then be programmatically parsed. ■

servermanagercmd –inputPath input.xml If you want to install (or remove) multiple roles, role services, and features, a more expedient way to do this is by using the –inputPath option instead of using –install or –remove. This is because these two flags accept only one role, role service, or feature at a time, whereas you can specify as many

106

Introducing Windows Server 2008

items as needed in the input.xml file. Here’s an example of an input.xml file (which can be named anything else if you like) that installs a whole bunch of features (also called OCs for Optional Components) in a single step:



Finally, here’s one more example that’s a bit unique. Normally, you use ServerManagerCmd.exe to install the bits and files associated with a particular role or feature in Windows Server 2008, while any configuration settings associated with that role or feature can be specified later using role-specific or feature-specific tools. But Windows SharePoint Services (WSS) is an exception to this because there are two settings that must be specified as part of the role installation. These two settings determine whether WSS should be installed as a single server deployment or as part of a server farm, and which language should be used for the SharePoint

Chapter 5

Managing Server Roles

107

administration Web site. Here’s how you install the WSS role on your server using ServerManagerCmd.exe and configure these two settings: servermanagercmd -install Windows-SharePoint –setting InstallAsPartOfServerFarm= false–setting Language=de-de Finally, a few words from one of our experts on the product team concerning ServerManagerCmd.exe and its usefulness for adding and removing roles from the command line:

From the Experts: The Server Manager CLI The Server Manager command-line interface (CLI) is one of my favorite features in Server Manager. The Server Manager GUI (console and wizards) provides a consolidated view of the server, including information about server configuration, status of installed roles, and links for adding and removing roles and features. The CLI makes the key pieces of functionality from the Server Manager GUI also available from the command-line prompt, which allows the user to perform tasks such as installing a role and verifying which roles are currently installed on the machine from the command prompt or via scripts. Using remoting technologies such as Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI) and Windows Remote Management (WinRM), you can now start taking advantage of the CLI from a remote machine (your Windows Vista desktop, for example) or manage multiple servers at the same time. Additionally, the CLI takes input and produces output in XML format, which makes it much easier to programmatically “control” the CLI. You might be asking where I am going with this. Well, here is what I want to do: create a lightweight application that I can run on my Windows Vista machine and that allows me to remotely connect (via WMI or WinRM) to my Windows Server 2008 server in my office. After connected to the server, my application would remotely run the CLI with the –query flag and get the list of available roles and features back in an XML file. It would then parse the results from the XML and list back to me the roles and features available on my server, including which roles and features are currently installed on the server. My application GUI would then allow me to select roles and features that I want to install (or remote). After making my selections, the application would again remotely run the CLI (this time using the –install, –remove or most likely the –inputPath flag) so that the roles and features that I specified can be remotely installed (or removed) on my Windows Server 2008 machine. Now I just need to find some spare time to build this application! —Eduardo Melo Lead Program Manager, Windows Enterprise Management Division

108

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Conclusion Adding and removing roles and features is easier and more efficient in Windows Server 2008 than in previous versions of Windows Server. For instance, you can now add or remove roles from the command line, and you can add or remove multiple roles in one step. What goes on underneath the hood is quite complex, but the wizards you can launch from Server Manager and Initial Configuration Tasks make adding and configuring new roles on your server a snap.

Additional Reading The TechNet Webcast titled “Installing, Configuring, and Managing Server Roles in Windows Server 2008” is a good demonstration of how to add roles and features to Windows Server 2008. This Webcast can be downloaded for replay from http://msevents.microsoft.com/cui/WebCastEventDetails.aspx?EventID=1032294712& EventCategory=5&culture=en-US&CountryCode=US. (Registration is required.) By registering for the TechNet Virtual Lab, “Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Beta 2 Server Manager Virtual Lab,” which can be found at http://msevents.microsoft.com/CUI/ WebCastEventDetails.aspx?EventID=1032314461&EventCategory=3&culture=en-IN& CountryCode=IN, you can gain some hands-on experience adding and removing roles using Server Manager. TechNet Virtual Labs are designed to allow IT pros to evaluate and test new server technologies from Microsoft using a series of guided, hands-on labs that can be completed in 90 minutes or less. TechNet Virtual Labs can be accessed online and are free to use. You can find general information concerning them at http://www.microsoft.com/technet/ traincert/virtuallab/default.mspx. Finally, be sure to turn to Chapter 14, “Additional Resources,” for more information on the topics in this chapter and also for webcasts, whitepapers, blogs, newsgroups, and other sources of information about all aspects of Windows Server 2008.

Chapter 6

Windows Server Core In this chapter: What Is a Windows Server Core Installation? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Performing Initial Configuration of a Windows Server Core Server . . . . . . . . . . .118 Managing a Windows Server Core Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Windows Server Core Installation Tips and Tricks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Additional Resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 When you try to install Microsoft Windows Server 2008 manually from media on a system, you’re presented with two installation options to choose from: ■

A full installation of the Microsoft Windows Server 2008 operating system

■

A Windows server core installation of the Windows Server 2008 operating system

Selecting the first option means you get the type of Windows server you’re used to, with its full slate of GUI tools, support for the .NET Framework, and support for a wide range of possible roles and features you can install on your machine. But what if you select the second option? What’s a Windows server core installation of Windows Server 2008? And how does this differ from a full installation of the product? Well, that’s what this chapter is all about—read on!

What Is a Windows Server Core Installation? The best way of learning about the Windows server core installation option is to simply install it and log on. Here’s what you see when you first log on to a Windows server core server.

109

110

Introducing Microsoft Windows Longhorn Server

That’s it? Where’s the task bar and Start menu? There is no task bar or Start menu. How do you start Windows Explorer then? You can’t—the tool is not available in a Windows server core installation. Where’s the Initial Configuration Tasks screen? It’s not there. How can I open Server Manager to add roles and features? Sorry, Server Manager is unavailable on a Windows server core installation. Well, what can I do with this thing then? Am I stuck with only a command prompt to work with? You can do a lot with a Windows server core installation, as we’ll see in a moment. And no, you’re not just stuck with a command prompt. But if you were, would it be bad? Ever hear a Unix admin complain about “being stuck” with having to use the command line to administer a server? Isn’t command-line administration of servers a good thing because it means you can automate complex management tasks using batch files and scripts and there is no graphical UI taking resources away from server tasks? And that’s one of the things that a Windows server core installation is all about—scripted administration of Windows servers in enterprise (and especially datacenter) environments. But why remove the desktop and all the GUI management tools? Doesn’t that cripple the server? Not at all—in fact, just the opposite!

Chapter 6

Windows Server Core

111

Understanding Windows Server Core Windows server core is a “minimal” installation option for Windows Server 2008. What this means is that when you choose this option during setup (or when using unattended setup), Windows Server 2008 installs a minimum set of components on your machine that will allow you to run certain (but not all) server roles. In other words, selecting the Windows server core installation option installs only a subset of the binaries that are installed when you choose the full installation option for Windows Server 2008. Here are some of the Windows Server 2008 components that are not installed when you specify the Windows server core installation option during setup: ■

No desktop shell (which means no glass, wallpaper, or screen savers either)

■

No Windows Explorer or My Computer (we already said no desktop shell, right?)

■

No .NET Framework or CLR (which means no support for managed code, which also means no PowerShell support)

■

No MMC console or snap-ins (so no Administrative tools on the Start menu—whoops! I forgot, no Start menu!)

■

No Control Panel applets (with a few small exceptions)

■

No Internet Explorer or Windows Mail or WordPad or Paint or Search window (no Windows Explorer!) or GUI Help and Support or even a Run box.

Wow, that sounds like a lot of stuff that’s missing in a Windows server core installation of Windows Server 2008! Actually though, it’s not—compare the preceding list to the following list of components that are available on a Windows server core server. First, you’ve still got the kernel. You always need the kernel. Then you’ve got hardware support components such as the Hardware Abstraction Layer (HAL) and device drivers. But it’s only a limited set of device drivers that supports disks, network cards, basic video support, and some other stuff. A lot of in-box drivers have been removed from the Windows server core installation option, however—though there is a way to install out-of-box drivers if you need to, as we’ll see later in this chapter. Next, you’ve still got all the core subsystems that are needed by Windows Server 2008 in order to function. That means you’ve got the security subsystem and Winlogon, the networking subsystem, the file system, RPC and DCOM, SNMP support, and so on. Without these subsystems, your server simply wouldn’t be able to do anything at all, so they’re a necessity for a Windows server core installation. Then you’ve got various components you need to configure different aspects of your server. For example, you have components that let you create user accounts and change passwords, enable DHCP or assign a static IP address, rename your server or join a domain, configure Windows Firewall, enable Automatic Updates, choose a keyboard layout, set the time and date, enable Remote Desktop, and so on. Many of these configuration tasks can be performed

112

Introducing Microsoft Windows Longhorn Server

using various command-line tools included in a Windows server core installation (more about tools in a moment), but a few of them use scripts or expose minimal UI. There are some additional infrastructure components present as well on a Windows server core installation. For instance, you still have the event logs plus a command-line tool for viewing, configuring, and forwarding them using Windows eventing. You’ve got performance counters and a command-line tool for collecting performance information about your server. You have the Licensing service, so you can activate and use your server as a fully licensed machine. You’ve got IPSec support, so your server can securely communicate on the network. You’ve got NAP client support, so your server can participate in a NAP deployment. And you’ve got support for Group Policy of course. Then there are various tools and infrastructure items to enable you to manage your Windows server core server. As we saw in our screen shot earlier, you’ve got the command prompt cmd.exe, so you can log on locally to your server and run various commands from a command-prompt window. In fact, as we saw, a command-prompt window is already open for you when you first log on to a Windows server core server. What happens, though, if you accidentally close this window? Fortunately, a Windows server core installation still includes Task Manager, so if you close your command window you can start another by doing the following: 1. Press CTRL+SHIFT+ESC, to open Task Manager. 2. On the Applications tab, click New Task. 3. Type cmd and click OK. In addition to the command prompt, of course, there are dozens (probably over a hundred, and more when different roles and features are installed) of different command-line tools available on Windows Server 2008 for both full and server core installation options. What I’m talking about is Arp, Assoc, At, Attrib, BCDEdit Cacls, Certutil, Chdir, chkdsk, Cls, Copy, CScript, Defrag, Dir, and so on. A lot of the commands listed in the “Windows Command-Line Reference A–Z,” found on Microsoft TechNet, are available on a Windows server core server— not all, mind you, but a lot of them. You can also enable Remote Desktop on a Windows server core installation, and this lets you connect to it from another machine using Remote Desktop Connection (RDC) and start a Terminal Services session running on it. Once you’ve established your session, you can use the command prompt to run various commands on your server, and you can even use the new Remote Programs feature of RDC 6.0 to run a remote command prompt on a Windows server core server from an administrative workstation running Windows Vista. (We’ll learn more about that soon.) There’s also a WMI infrastructure on your Windows server core server that includes many of the usual WMI providers. This means you can manage your Windows server core server either by running WMI scripts on the local machine from the command prompt or by scheduling their operation using schtasks.exe. (There’s no Task Schedule UI available, however.) Or you can manage your server remotely by running remote WMI scripts against it from another machine. And having WMI on a Windows server core server means that remote UI tools

Chapter 6

Windows Server Core

113

such as MMC snap-ins running on other systems (typically, either a full installation of Windows Server 2008 or an administrator workstation running Windows Vista with Remote Server Administration Tools installed) can connect to and remotely administer your Windows server core server. Plus there’s also a WS-Management infrastructure on a Windows server core installation. WS-Management is a new remote-management infrastructure included in Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008, and involves Windows Remote Management (WinRM) on the machine being managed and the Windows Remote Shell (WinRM) for remote command execution from the machine doing the managing. We’ll talk about remote management of Windows server core servers later in this chapter. Then there are various server roles and optional features you can install on a Windows server core server so that the machine can actually do something useful on your network, like be a DHCP server or a domain controller or print server. We’ll look later at exactly which roles and features are available for installing on a Windows server core server and which roles/features you can’t install. Then there are a few necessary GUI tools that actually are present on a Windows server core server. For example, we already saw that the command prompt (cmd.exe) is available, and so is Task Manager. Another useful tool on a Windows server core server is Regedit.exe, which can be launched either from the command line or from Task Manager. Then there’s Notepad. Notepad?

114

Introducing Microsoft Windows Longhorn Server

Yes, Notepad. The reason for including Notepad on a Windows server core installation option of Windows Server 2008 is simple: Microsoft listens to its customers. I’m not kidding! (Plus I’m serious about Microsoft listening to customers.) During the early stages of developing and testing Windows Server 2008, one of the most common requests from participants in the Microsoft Technology Adoption Program (TAP) for Windows Server 2008 was this: We need a tool on Windows server core servers that we can use to view logs, edit scripts, and perform other essential administrative tasks. Give us Notepad! We want Notepad! Who ever expected that the lowly and oft-maligned Notepad would be so important to administrators who work in enterprise environments? Anyway, before we move on and talk a bit about the rationale behind why Microsoft decided to offer the Windows server core installation option in Windows Server 2008, let’s hear from one of our experts about how the Windows server core product team managed to make this thing work. After all, Windows components have a lot of dependencies with one another and especially with the desktop shell and Internet Explorer, so it will be interesting to hear how they took so many components out of this installation option for the product without causing it to break. Plus we’ll also learn a bit about how we can try to get applications that we need to have running on a Windows server core server running properly. And finally, we’ll learn something about getting Notepad to run properly on a Windows server core server:

From the Experts: Shimming Applications in Windows Server Core The primary goal of the Windows server core installation option is to minimize the disk and servicing footprint. Thus, a number of Windows components—such as Media Player and Internet Explorer—are not installed as part of a Windows server core installation. This means that because of their dependencies on parts of Internet Explorer, the common dialog boxes are not functional in a Windows server core installation. Thus, the file open and save dialog boxes in Notepad, for example, will not work. A Windows server core installation leverages the application compatibility shim infrastructure in Windows to develop a clever solution to this problem. A shim is a thin layer of code that sits between an application and a Windows API. The shimming infrastructure redirects the API call made by the application to the shim code, which can then make some changes to the parameters, call the original API, or do something else entirely. A Windows server core installation installs two shims. The first one is called RegEditImportExportLoadHive and is a specialized shim that allows RegEdit to import and export registry files. The second shim is called NoExplorerForGetFileName. It’s a general shim for file open and save dialog boxes and is currently used by Notepad. This second shim changes some parameters to the API call that displays the file open or save dialog so that the old-style dialog box from pre-Windows 95 is displayed, instead of the new Explorer-style dialog box.

Chapter 6

Windows Server Core

115

The shimming engine allows the end user to apply existing shims to other applications. The tool used to do this is the Application Compatibility Toolkit. Copy the sysmain.sdb database located at %SYSTEMROOT%\AppPatch (or %SYSTEMROOT%\AppPatch\ AppPatch64 on x64 machines) on the Windows server core machine to a Windows Server 2008 machine. Use the Application Compatibility Toolkit to edit the database. Copy the new database back to the Windows server core machine, and install it using sdbinst.exe, located at %SYSTEMROOT%\System32. –Rahul Prasad Software Development Engineer, Windows Core Operating System Division

The Rationale for Windows Server Core The need for something like the Windows server core installation option of Windows Server 2008 is pretty obvious. Windows Server today is frequently deployed to support a single role in an enterprise or to handle a fixed workload. For example, organizations often deploy the DHCP Server role on a dedicated Windows Server 2003 machine to provide dynamic addressing support for client computers on their network. Now think about that for a moment— you’ve just installed Windows Server 2003 with all its various services and components on a solid piece of hardware, just to use the machine as a DHCP server and nothing more. Or maybe as a file server as part of a DFS file system infrastructure you’re setting up for users. Or as a print server to manage a number of printers on your network. The point is, you’ve got Windows Server 2003 with all its features doing only one thing. Why do you need all those extra binaries on your machine then? And think about when you need to patch your system— you’ve got to apply all new software updates to the machine, even though the functionality that many of those updates fix will never actually be used on that particular system. Why should you have to patch IIS on your server if the server is not going to be used for hosting Web sites? And might not having IIS binaries on your server make it more vulnerable even though the IIS component is not actually being used on it or is even installed? The more stuff you’ve got on a box, the more difficult it is to secure (or to be sure that it’s secure) and the more complex it is to maintain. Enter the Windows server core installation option of Windows Server 2008. Now, instead of installing all of Windows Server 2008 on your box while using only a portion of it, you can install a minimal subset of Windows Server 2008 binaries and you need to maintain only those particular binaries. The value proposition for enterprises of the Windows server core installation option is plain to see: ■

Fewer binaries mean a reduced attack surface and, hence, a greater degree of protection for your network.

■

Less functionality and a role-based paradigm also mean fewer services running on your machine and, therefore, again less attack surface.

116

Introducing Microsoft Windows Longhorn Server ■

Fewer binaries also mean a reduced servicing surface, which means fewer patches, making your server easier to service and orienting your patch management cycle according to roles instead of boxes. Estimates indicate that using the Windows server core installation option can reduce the number of patches you need to apply to your server by as much as 50 percent compared with full installations of Windows Server 2008.

■

Fewer roles and features also mean easier management of your servers and enable different members of your IT staff to specialize better according to the server roles they need to support.

■

Finally, fewer binaries also mean less disk space needed for the core operating system components, which is a plus for datacenter environments in particular.

The Windows server core installation option of Windows Server 2008 is all of these and more, and it’s included in the Standard, Enterprise, and Datacenter editions of Windows Server 2008. Windows server core is not a separate product or SKU—it’s an installation option you can select during manual or unattended install. And it’s available on both the x86 and x64 platforms of Windows Server 2008. (It’s not available on IA64 and on the Web edition SKU of Windows Server 2008.) The bottom line? The Windows server core installation option of Windows Server 2008 is more secure and more reliable, and it requires less management overhead than using a full installation of Windows Server 2008 for an equivalent purpose in your enterprise. A Windows server core server provides you with minimal server operating system functionality and a low attack surface for targeted roles. To give you a better idea of the functionality that is (and isn’t) available in the Windows server core installation option, Table 6-1 shows included and excluded roles and Table 6-2 shows included and excluded optional features. Included/Excluded Roles in the Windows Server Core Installation Option of Windows Server 2008

Table 6-1

Roles available

Roles unavailable

Active Directory

Active Directory Certificate Services

Active Directory LDS

Active Directory Federation Services

DHCP Server

Active Directory RMS

DNS Server

Application Server

File Services (includes DFSR and NFS)

Fax Server

Print Services

Network Policy and Access Services

Streaming Media Services

Terminal Services

Windows Server Virtualization

UDDI Services Web Server (IIS) Windows Deployment Services Windows SharePoint Services

Chapter 6

Windows Server Core

117

Table 6-2 Included/Excluded Features in the Windows Server Core Installation Option of Windows Server 2008 Features available

Features unavailable

BitLocker Drive Encryption

.NET Framework 3.0

Failover Clustering

BITS Server Extensions

Multipath I/O

Connection Manager Administration Kit

Removable Storage Management

Desktop Experience

SNMP Services

Internet Printing Client

Subsystem for UNIX-based Applications

Internet Storage Naming Server

Telnet Client

LPR Port Monitor

Windows Server Backup

Message Queuing

WINS Server

Network Load Balancing Peer Name Resolution Protocol Remote Assistance Remote Server Administration Tools RPC over HTTP Proxy Simple TCP/IP Services SMTP Server Storage Manager for SANs Telnet Server TFTP Client Windows Internal Database Windows Process Activation Service Windows System Resource Manager (WSRM) Wireless Networking

118

Introducing Microsoft Windows Longhorn Server

Performing Initial Configuration of a Windows Server Core Server In Chapter 5, “Managing Server Roles,” we saw how to perform the initial configuration of a Windows Server 2008 server using the Initial Configuration Tasks screen. Of course, many of these initial configuration tasks can also be performed using an unattend.xml answer file during an unattended installation. The Windows server core installation option of Windows Server 2008 can also have its initial configuration done in two ways: from the command line after a manual install, or by doing an unattended installation. In this chapter, we’re going to look only at the first method (using the command line after a manual install). For more information on unattended installation of Windows Server 2008, see Chapter 13, “Deploying Windows Server 2008.”

Performing Initial Configuration from the Command Line Some of the initial configuration tasks you will want to perform on a Windows server core server include the following: ■

Set a password for the Administrator account.

■

Set the date, time, and time zone.

■

Configure networking, which might mean assigning a static IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway (unless DHCP is being used) and pointing the DNS settings to a domain controller.

■

Changing the server’s name and joining the domain.

Other initial configuration tasks can include activating your server, enabling Automatic Updates, downloading and installing any available software updates, enabling Windows Error Reporting and the Customer Experience Improvement Program, and so on. Let’s see how to perform some of these tasks.

Changing the Administrator Password There are two ways you can change the Administrator password on a Windows server core server: ■

Press CTRL+ALT+DEL, click Change Password, and enter your old and new password.

■

Type net user administrator * at the command prompt, and enter your new password twice.

Chapter 6

Windows Server Core

119

Setting Date, Time, and Time Zone To set the time zone for your server, type control timedate.cpl at the command prompt. This opens the same Date And Time applet that can be opened from Control Panel in the full installation of Windows Server 2008:

The reason for using a Control Panel applet to do these tasks is simply that it’s easier for admins to do it this way than to try and do it from the command line. And because it’s a task that is likely to be performed only occasionally (even just once), and because there are no dependencies between the Date And Time applet and other system components that have been removed from the Windows server core installation option, the product team decided to leave this in as one of the few GUI tools still available in the Windows server core installation option of Windows Server 2008. Of course, you can also specify these settings in an unattend.xml answer file if you’re performing an unattended installation of your server. And by the way, control.exe by itself doesn’t work on a Windows server core installation. Only the two included .cpls work.

120

Introducing Microsoft Windows Longhorn Server

Before we go further, let’s briefly hear from one of our experts on the Windows Server 2008 product team at Microsoft concerning configuring the Windows server core installation option of Windows Server 2008:

From the Experts: Shell-less vs. GUI-less If you have been working with a Windows server core installation, you might have noticed that there is some GUI support in a Windows server core installation of Windows Server 2008. To be completely accurate, the GUI of a Windows server core server is shell-less, not entirely GUI-less. There are several low-level GUI DLLs that are included because of current dependencies, such as gdi32.dll and shlwapi.dll. In a future release we hope to be able to remove the dependencies and also remove these files. However, including them does provide some advantages for making a Windows server core server easier to manage using the current tools. In Beta 1, we didn’t include any text editor. Although you could remotely connect to a Windows server core server to view logs, edit scripts, and so on, we heard lots of feedback that there should be an on-the-box text editor. Therefore, we added Notepad. However, because of the reduced environment the Windows server core installation option provides, not all of Notepad is functional—for example, help doesn’t work. In addition, the Windows server core installation option also includes two control panels, which you can access using the following commands: ■

Control timedate.cpl

■

Control intl.cpl

Timedate.cpl lets you set the time zone for your server, while intl.cpl lets you change your keyboard for different layouts. –Andrew Mason Program Manager, Windows Server

Chapter 6

Windows Server Core

121

Configuring Networking Now let’s configure networking for our server. First let’s run ipconfig /all and see the server’s current networking settings: C:\Windows\System32>ipconfig /all Windows IP Configuration Host Name . . . . . Primary Dns Suffix Node Type . . . . . IP Routing Enabled. WINS Proxy Enabled.

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

: : : : :

LH-3TBCQ4I1ONRA Hybrid No No

Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection: Connection-specific DNS Suffix Description . . . . . . . . . . (Emulated) Physical Address. . . . . . . . DHCP Enabled. . . . . . . . . . Autoconfiguration Enabled . . . Link-local IPv6 Address . . . . Autoconfiguration IPv4 Address. Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . Default Gateway . . . . . . . . DHCPv6 IAID . . . . . . . . . . DNS Servers . . . . . . . . . .

. : . : Intel 21140-Based PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter . . . . . . . . .

: : : : : : : : :

00-03-FF-27-88-8C Yes Yes fe80::c25:d049:5b0c:1585%2(Preferred) 169.254.21.133(Preferred) 255.255.0.0

67109887 fec0:0:0:ffff::1%1 fec0:0:0:ffff::2%1 fec0:0:0:ffff::3%1 NetBIOS over Tcpip. . . . . . . . : Enabled

Tunnel adapter Local Area Connection*: Connection-specific DNS Suffix Description . . . . . . . . . . Physical Address. . . . . . . . DHCP Enabled. . . . . . . . . . Autoconfiguration Enabled . . . Link-local IPv6 Address . . . . Default Gateway . . . . . . . . DNS Servers . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

: : : : : : : :

isatap.{B4B31F3D-B6C8-4303-BA3C-5A54B05F2FDD} 00-00-00-00-00-00-00-E0 No Yes fe80::5efe:169.254.21.133%3(Preferred)

fec0:0:0:ffff::1%1 fec0:0:0:ffff::2%1 fec0:0:0:ffff::3%1 NetBIOS over Tcpip. . . . . . . . : Disabled

Note that ipconfig /all displays two network interfaces on the machine: a physical interface (NIC) and an ISATAP tunneling interface. Before we can use netsh.exe to modify network

122

Introducing Microsoft Windows Longhorn Server

settings, we need to know which interface we need to configure. To determine this, we’ll use the netsh interface ipv4 show interfaces command as follows: C:\Windows\System32>netsh interface ipv4 show interfaces Idx --2 1

Met MTU State Name --- ----- ----------- ------------------20 1500 connected Local Area Connection 50 4294967295 connected Loopback Pseudo-Interface 1

From this, we can see that our physical interface Local Area Connection has index number 2 (first column). Let’s use this information to set the TCP/IP configuration for this interface. Here’s what we want the settings to be: ■

IP address: 172.16.11.162

■

Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

■

Default gateway: 172.16.11.1

■

Primary DNS server: 172.16.11.161

■

Secondary DNS server: none

To do this, we can use two netsh.exe commands as follows: C:\Windows\System32>netsh interface ipv4 set address name="2" source=static address=172.16.11.162 mask=255.255.255.0 gateway=172.16.11.1 C:\Windows\System32>netsh interface ipv4 add dnsserver name="2" address=172.16.11.161 index=1

Now let’s run ipconfig /all again and check the result: C:\Windows\System32>ipconfig /all Windows IP Configuration Host Name . . . . . Primary Dns Suffix Node Type . . . . . IP Routing Enabled. WINS Proxy Enabled.

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

: : : : :

LH-3TBCQ4I1ONRA Hybrid No No

Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection: Connection-specific DNS Suffix Description . . . . . . . . . . (Emulated) Physical Address. . . . . . . . DHCP Enabled. . . . . . . . . . Autoconfiguration Enabled . . . Link-local IPv6 Address . . . .

. : . : Intel 21140-Based PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter . . . .

: : : :

00-03-FF-27-88-8C No Yes fe80::c25:d049:5b0c:1585%2(Preferred)

Chapter 6 IPv4 Address. . . . Subnet Mask . . . . Default Gateway . . DNS Servers . . . . NetBIOS over Tcpip.

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

: : : : :

Windows Server Core

123

172.16.11.162(Preferred) 255.255.255.0 172.16.11.1 172.16.11.161 Enabled

Tunnel adapter Local Area Connection*: Connection-specific DNS Suffix Description . . . . . . . . . . Physical Address. . . . . . . . DHCP Enabled. . . . . . . . . . Autoconfiguration Enabled . . . Link-local IPv6 Address . . . . Default Gateway . . . . . . . . DNS Servers . . . . . . . . . . NetBIOS over Tcpip. . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

: : : : : : : : :

isatap.{B4B31F3D-B6C8-4303-BA3C-5A54B05F2FDD} 00-00-00-00-00-00-00-E0 No Yes fe80::5efe:172.16.11.162%3(Preferred) 172.16.11.161 Disabled

So far, so good. Let’s move on.

Changing the Server’s Name Next let’s change the name of our server. When you install a Windows server core server manually from media, the server is assigned a randomly generated name. We want to change that, and we can use netdom.exe to do this. First let’s see what the current name is, and then let’s change it to DNSSRV because we’re planning on using this particular machine as a DNS server on our network: C:\Windows\System32>hostname LH-3TBCQ4I1ONRA C:\Windows\System32>netdom renamecomputer %computername% /NewName:DNSSRV This operation will rename the computer LH-3TBCQ4I1ONRA to DNSSRV. Certain services, such as the Certificate Authority, rely on a fixed machine name. If any services of this type are running on LH-3TBCQ4I1ONRA, then a computer name change would have an adverse impact. Do you want to proceed (Y or N)? y The computer needs to be restarted in order to complete the operation. The command completed successfully.

We can restart the server using the shutdown /r /t 0 command. Once the machine is restarted, typing hostname shows that the server’s name has been successfully changed: C:\Windows\System32>hostname DNSSRV

124

Introducing Microsoft Windows Longhorn Server

Joining a Domain Now let’s join our server to our domain. We’ll use netdom.exe again to do this, and we’re going to join our server to a domain named contoso.com. Here’s how we do this: C:\Windows\System32>netdom join DNSSRV /domain:CONTOSO /userd:Administrator / passwordd:* Type the password associated with the domain user: The computer needs to be restarted in order to complete the operation. The command completed successfully.

Again, we’ll use shutdown /r /t 0 to restart the machine. Once it’s restarted, we’ll log on as a domain admin this time and use netdom.exe again to verify that our server has established a secure channel to the domain controller.

Chapter 6

Windows Server Core

125

Activating the Server To activate our server, we can use a built-in script named slmgr.vbs found in the %windir%\System32 directory. (This script is also in Windows Vista and in full installations of Windows Server 2008, and it can be run remotely from those platforms to activate a Windows server core installation.) Typing cscript slmgr.vbs /? shows the available syntax for this command: C:\Windows\System32>cscript slmgr.vbs /? Windows Software Licensing Management Tool Usage: slmgr.vbs [MachineName [User Password]] [] MachineName: Name of remote machine (default is local machine) User: Account with required privilege on remote machine Password: password for the previous account Global Options: -ipk Install product key (replaces existing key) -upk Uninstall product key -ato Activate Windows -dli [Activation ID | All] Display license information (default: current license) -dlv [Activation ID | All] Display detailed license information (default: current license) -xpr Expiration date for current license state Advanced Options: -cpky Clear product key from the registry (prevents disclosure attacks) -ilc Install license -rilc Re-install system license files -rearm Reset the licensing status of the machine -dti Display Installation ID for offline activation -atp Activate product with user-provided Confirmation ID

Let’s first use the –xpr option to display the expiration date for the current license state: C:\Windows\system32>cscript slmgr.vbs -xpr Microsoft (R) Windows Script Host Version 5.7 Copyright (C) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Initial grace period ends 3/31/2007 1:13:00 AM

126

Introducing Microsoft Windows Longhorn Server

Now let’s use –dli to display more info concerning the server’s current license state: C:\Windows\system32>cscript slmgr.vbs -dli Microsoft (R) Windows Script Host Version 5.7 Copyright (C) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Name: Windows(TM) Server 2008, ServerEnterpriseCore edition Description: Windows Operating System - Windows Server 2008, RETAIL channel Partial Product Key: XHKDR License Status: Initial grace period Time remaining: 14533 minute(s) (10 day(s))

Now let’s activate the server using the –ato option: C:\Windows\system32>cscript slmgr.vbs -ato Microsoft (R) Windows Script Host Version 5.7 Copyright (C) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Activating Windows(TM) Server 2008, ServerEnterpriseCore edition (f00d81ce-df2c-47cb-a359-36d652296e56) ... Product activated successfully.

Finally, let’s try the –xpr and –dli options again and see the result: C:\Windows\system32>cscript slmgr.vbs -xpr Microsoft (R) Windows Script Host Version 5.7 Copyright (C) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. The machine is permanently activated.

C:\Windows\system32>cscript slmgr.vbs -dli Microsoft (R) Windows Script Host Version 5.7 Copyright (C) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Name: Windows(TM) Server code name “Longhorn”, ServerEnterpriseCore edition Description: Windows Operating System - Server code name “Longhorn”, RETAIL channel Partial Product Key: XHKDR License Status: Licensed

Enabling Automatic Updates To enable Automatic Updates on our server, we’ll use another built-in script named scregedit.wsf. This script is unique to the Windows server core installation option of Windows Server 2008, and it’s one of the few binaries on a Windows server core server that is

Chapter 6

Windows Server Core

127

not found on a full installation of Windows Server 2008. To view the syntax of this script, type cscript scregedit.wsf /? at the command prompt: C:\Windows\System32>cscript scregedit.wsf /? Microsoft (R) Windows Script Host Version 5.7 Copyright (C) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Automatic Updates - Manage Automatic Windows Updates These settings can be used to configure how Automatic Updates are applied to the Windows system. It includes the ability to disable automatic updates and to set the installation schedule. /AU [/v][value] /v View the current Automatic Update settings value value you want to set to. Options: 4 - Enable Automatic Updates 1 - Disable Automatic Updates

Windows Error Reporting Settings Windows can send descriptions of problems on this server to Microsoft. If you choose to automatically send generic information about a problem, Microsoft will use the information to start working on a solution. This setting might be overridden by the following Group Policy: Key : Software\Policies\Microsoft\Windows\Windows Error Reporting\Consent, Value : DefaultConsent /ER [/v][value] /v View the current Windows Error Reporting settings value value you want to set to. Opt-in 2 3 1 -

Settings: Automatically send summary reports (Recommended) Automatically send detailed reports Disable Windows Error Reporting

For more information on what data information is collected, go to http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=50163

Terminal Service - Allow Remote Administration Connections This allows administrators to connect remotely for administration purposes. /AR [/v][value] /v View the Remote Terminal Service Connection setting value (0 = enabled, 1 = disabled)

Terminal Service - Allow connections from previous versions of Windows

128

Introducing Microsoft Windows Longhorn Server This setting configures CredSSP based user authentication for Terminal Service connections /CS

[/v][value] /v View the Terminal Service CredSSP setting value (0 = allow previous versions, 1 = require CredSSP)

IP Security (IPSEC) Monitor - allow remote management This setting configures the server to allow the IP Security (IPSEC) Monitor to be able to remotely manage IPSEC. /IM [/v][value] /v View the IPSEC Monitor setting value (0 = do not allow, 1 = allow remote management)

DNS SRV priority - changes the priority for DNS SRV records This setting configures the priority for DNS SRV records and is only useful on Domain Controllers. For more information on this setting, search TechNet for LdapSrvPriority /DP [/v][value] /v View the DNS SRV priority setting value (value from 0 through 65535. The recommended value is 200.)

DNS SRV weight - changes the weight for DNS SRV records This setting configures the weight for DNS SRV records and is useful only on Domain Controllers. For more information on this setting, search TechNet for LdapSrvWeight /DW [/v][value] /v View the DNS SRV weight setting value (value from 0 through 65535. The recommended value is 50.)

Command Line Reference This setting displays a list of common tasks and how to perform them from the command line. /CLI

Chapter 6

Windows Server Core

129

First let’s see what the current setting for Automatic Updates is on the machine: C:\Windows\system32>cscript scregedit.wsf /au /v Microsoft (R) Windows Script Host Version 5.7 Copyright (C) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\WindowsUpdate\Auto Update AUOptions Value not set.

Looks like Automatic Updates is not yet configured, so let’s enable it: C:\Windows\system32>cscript scregedit.wsf /au 4 Microsoft (R) Windows Script Host Version 5.7 Copyright (C) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Registry has been updated.

Now let’s verify by using our previous command: C:\Windows\system32>cscript scregedit.wsf /au /v Microsoft (R) Windows Script Host Version 5.7 Copyright (C) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\WindowsUpdate\Auto Update AUOptions View registry setting. 4

Note that on a Windows server core server you can configure Automatic Updates only to download and install updates automatically. You can’t configure it to download updates and prompt you to install them later. There are other initial configuration tasks we could do, but let’s move on. Actually, let’s hear first from one of our experts concerning a configuration task that’s not easy to do from the command line:

From the Experts: Configuring Display Resolution Although there is no tool on a Windows server core server to allow you to change your display resolution, you can configure this by using an unattend file. However, it is possible to change the display resolution so that you can run at a higher resolution than what you might have ended up with at the end of setup. Doing this requires editing the registry; however, if you pick a resolution your video card or monitor cannot display, you might have to reinstall—although you should still be able to boot and remotely modify the settings in the registry.

130

Introducing Microsoft Windows Longhorn Server

To do this, you need to open regedit.exe and navigate to the following location:

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Video Under this will be a list of GUIDs, and you need to determine which one corresponds to your video card/driver. You might have to experiment to determine the right one. Under the GUID, you can set

\0000\DefaultSettings.XResolution \0000\DefaultSettings.YResolution to the resolution you would like to use. If these don’t exist, you can create them. You must log off and log back on again for the change to take effect. Be careful doing this because if you specify an unsupported display resolution, you might need to reinstall your machine or remotely connect to the registry from another computer to change it, and remotely reboot. –Andrew Mason Program Manager, Windows Server

Managing a Windows Server Core Server Once we’ve performed initial configuration of our Windows server core server, we can then add roles and optional features so that it can provide needed functionality to our network. In this section, we’re going to examine how to perform such common tasks, and we’ll also look at different ways of managing a Windows server core server, including using the following: ■

Local administration from the command prompt

■

Remote administration using Terminal Services

■

Remote administration using Remote Server Administration Tools

■

Remote administration using Group Policy

■

Remote administration using WinRM/WinRS

Local Management from the Command Line When we log on to the console of a Windows server core server, a command prompt appears. From this command prompt, we can do a lot of things: ■

Run common tools such as netsh.exe and netdom.exe to perform various tasks, as we saw previously.

■

Use special tools such as oclist.exe and ocsetup.exe to install roles and optional features on our server to give it more functionality.

Chapter 6

Windows Server Core

131

■

Run in-box scripts such as slmgr.vbs and scregedit.wsf, as we saw earlier, to perform certain kinds of tasks.

■

Create our own scripts using Notepad, and run them using Cscript.exe and the supported WMI providers.

■

Use the WMI command line (WMIC) to do almost anything from the command line that you can do by writing WMI scripts.

As we mentioned before, however, one thing you can’t do is run PowerShell commands to administer your server. The reason for this omission is that PowerShell is managed code that requires the .NET Framework in order to work, and the .NET Framework is not included in the Windows server core installation option. Why? Because the .NET Framework has dependencies across the whole spectrum of different Windows components, and leaving it in would have increased the size of the Windows server core installation option until it was very nearly the size of a full installation of Windows Server 2008. For future versions of the Windows server core installation, however, a slimmed-down .NET Framework might be available that can provide PowerShell cmdlet functionality without the need of increasing the footprint significantly. But we’ll have to see, as that’s something that would happen after RTM. Note that you can however use PowerShell remotely to manage a Windows server core installation if the script strictly uses only WMI commands and not cmdlets. Let’s look how to perform two important tasks from the command line: adding server roles and adding optional features.

Installing Roles Let’s start by seeing what roles are currently installed on our server and what roles are available to install. We’ll use the oclist.exe command to do this: C:\Windows\System32\>oclist Use the listed update names with Ocsetup.exe to install/uninstall a server role or optional feature. Adding or removing the Active Directory role with OCSetup.exe is not supported. It can leave your server in an unstable state. Always use DCPromo to install or uninstall Active Directory. =========================================================================== Microsoft-Windows-ServerCore-Package =========================================================================== Not Installed:BitLocker Not Installed:BitLocker-RemoteAdminTool Not Installed:ClientForNFS-Base Not Installed:DFSN-Server Not Installed:DFSR-Infrastructure-ServerEdition Not Installed:DHCPServerCore Not Installed:DirectoryServices-ADAM-ServerCore Not Installed:DirectoryServices-DomainController-ServerFoundation

132

Introducing Microsoft Windows Longhorn Server Not Not Not Not Not Not Not Not

Not Not Not Not Not Not Not

Installed:DNS-Server-Core-Role Installed:FailoverCluster-Core Installed:FRS-Infrastructure Installed:MediaServer Installed:Microsoft-Windows-MultipathIo Installed:Microsoft-Windows-RemovableStorageManagementCore Installed:NetworkLoadBalancingHeadlessServer Installed:Printing-ServerCore-Role | |--- Not Installed:Printing-LPDPrintService | Installed:ServerForNFS-Base Installed:SIS Installed:SNMP-SC Installed:SUACore Installed:TelnetClient Installed:WindowsServerBackup Installed:WINS-SC

Note that the oclist.exe command displays information about both roles and features installed and not installed on the machine. We can see from the command output that the DNS Server role is not presently installed on the machine. We can also verify this by typing net start in the command line: C:\Windows\System32>net start These Windows services are started: Application Experience Background Intelligent Transfer Service Base Filtering Engine COM+ Event System Computer Browser Cryptographic Services DCOM Server Process Launcher DHCP Client Diagnostic Policy Service Diagnostic System Host Distributed Transaction Coordinator DNS Client Group Policy Client IKE and AuthIP IPsec Keying Modules...

Chapter 6

Windows Server Core

133

In fact, the only DNS binaries presently installed are those for the DNS client: C:\Windows\System32>dir dns*.* Volume in drive C has no label. Volume Serial Number is FC68-BDF4 Directory of C:\Windows\system32 02/09/2007 02/09/2007 02/09/2007

10:00 PM 163,840 dnsapi.dll 09:59 PM 24,064 dnscacheugc.exe 10:00 PM 84,480 dnsrslvr.dll 3 File(s) 272,384 bytes 0 Dir(s) 27,578,523,648 bytes free

Now let’s install the DNS Server role using the ocsetup.exe command as follows: C:\Windows\System32>start /w ocsetup DNS-Server-Core-Role

After a short while, the command prompt appears again. The reason we used the /w switch with start is because that way control is not returned to the command prompt until the ocsetup command finishes its work. (By the way, note that ocsetup is case sensitive.) Now if we type oclist, we should see that the DNS Server role has been added to our server: C:\Windows\System32\>oclist ... Not Installed:DirectoryServices-ADAM-ServerCore Not Installed:DirectoryServices-DomainController-ServerFoundation Installed:DNS-Server-Core-Role Not Installed:FailoverCluster-Core Not Installed:FRS-Infrastructure ...

We can also see that three additional binaries for DNS are now present on the server: C:\Windows\System32>dir dns*.* Volume in drive C has no label. Volume Serial Number is FC68-BDF4 Directory of C:\Windows\system32 03/20/2007 02/09/2007 02/09/2007 02/09/2007 02/09/2007 02/09/2007 02/09/2007

11:59 PM dns 11:42 AM 484,864 dns.exe 10:00 PM 163,840 dnsapi.dll 09:59 PM 24,064 dnscacheugc.exe 11:42 AM 162,816 dnscmd.exe 11:42 AM 13,312 dnsperf.dll 10:00 PM 84,480 dnsrslvr.dll 6 File(s) 933,376 bytes 1 Dir(s) 27,576,926,208 bytes free

134

Introducing Microsoft Windows Longhorn Server

And if we type net stop dns, we can now stop the DNS Server service without getting an error because the service is now present on the machine. Now that our machine is a DNS Server, we can use the dnscmd.exe command to further configure this role if we want from the command line. Installing other server roles is similar to what we just did and uses the ocsetup.exe command, with the exception being that the process installs the Active Directory role. This is because Dcpromo.exe in Windows Server 2008 now installs the Active Directory binaries during promotion and uninstalls the binaries during demotion, so you should not use ocsetup.exe to add or remove the Active Directory role as then the promotion/demotion will not take place and your server may not function correctly. Anyway, to add or remove the Active Directory role, you therefore have to use the dcpromo.exe tool, but you also have to run it in unattended mode because the GUI form of this tool (the Active Directory Installation Wizard) can’t run on a Windows server core server because of the lack of a desktop shell to run it in. The syntax for running dcpromo.exe in unattended mode is dcpromp /unattend:unattend.txt, and a sample unattend.txt file you could use (or further customize) for doing this is as follows: [DCInstall] ReplicaOrNewDomain = Domain NewDomain=Forest NewDomainDNSName = contoso.com AutoConfigDNS=Yes DNSDelegation=Yes DNSDelegationUserName=dnsuser DNSDelegationPassword=p@ssword! RebootOnSuccess = NoAndNoPromptEither SafeModeAdminPassword = p@ssword!

For more information on using dcpromo in unattended mode, type dcpromo /?:unattend at the command prompt.

Installing Optional Features Installing optional features is very similar to installing roles. Type oclist to display a list of installed and uninstalled features and to determine the internal name of each feature. For example, the Failover Cluster feature is named FailoverCluster-Core, and we need to use this internal form of the name when we run ocsetup to install this feature. You can also remove features by adding an /uninstall switch to your ocsetup command. You can remote roles that way too, but be sure to stop the role’s services before you remove the role.

Chapter 6

Windows Server Core

135

Other Common Management Tasks There are lots of other common management tasks you might need to perform on a Windows server core server. The following is just a sampling of some of these tasks. First, you can add new hardware to your server. Windows server core servers include support for Plug and Play. So if your new device is PnP and there’s an in-box driver available for your device, you can just plug the device in and the server will recognize it and automatically install a driver for it. But we did mention earlier that the Windows server core server installation option of Windows Server 2008 does not include that many in-box drivers. So what do you do if your device is not supported by an in-box driver because of its date of manufacture? In that case, follow this procedure: 1. Copy the driver files from the driver media for the device to a temporary directory on your server. 2. Change your current directory to this temporary directory, and type pnputil –i –a .inf at the command prompt. 3. Reboot your server if prompted to do so. Note that if you want to find what drivers are currently installed on your server, you can type sc query type= driver at a command prompt. What if you want to install some application on your server? First of all, beware—any application that has a GUI might not function properly when you install it. Obviously, that means we can’t install Microsoft Exchange Server, Microsoft SQL Server, or other Windows Server System products on a Windows server core server, because these products all have GUI management tools (and more importantly, a Windows server core server is missing a lot of components needed by these products such as the .NET Framework for running managed code). What kinds of applications might you want to install on a Windows server core server? The usual stuff—antivirus agents, network backup agents, system management agents, and so on. Most agents like this are GUI-less and should install fine and work properly on a Windows server core server. And the Windows Installer service is yet another feature that’s still present on a Windows server core server—and if you need to install an agent manually, you should try and do so in quiet mode using msiexec.exe with the /qb switch to display the basic UI only. For example, you can do this by typing msiexec /qb at the command prompt. If you need to configure Windows Firewall, the NAP client, or your server’s IPSec configuration, you can use netsh.exe to do this. I won’t go into all the details here, as you can just check TechNet for the proper netsh.exe syntax to use for each task. What about patch management? We already described how to enable Automatic Updates on the server, and if you have Windows Server Update Service (WSUS) deployed, you can manage patches for your server using that as well. For Windows server core servers that you want

136

Introducing Microsoft Windows Longhorn Server

to manually perform patch management on, however, you can use the wusa.exe command to install and remove patches from the command prompt. To do this, first download the patch from Windows Update and expand to get the .msu file. Then copy the .msu file to your server, and type wsua .msu /quiet at the command prompt to install the patch. You can also remove installed patches from your server by typing pkgmgr /up /m:.cab /quiet at the command prompt. Let’s hear more about patch management on a Windows server core installation of Windows Server 2008 from one of our experts:

From the Experts: Servicing Windows Server Core When using Windows server core, the new minimal installation option for Windows Server 2008, a common topic of discussion is servicing. First a little background and then some methods to make dealing with patches easier. With Windows Server 2008, each patch that is released contains a set of applicability rules. When a patch is sent to a server, either by Windows Update or another automated servicing tool, the servicing infrastructure examines the patch to determine if it applies to the system based on the applicability rules. If not, it is ignored and nothing is changed on the server. If you have already downloaded a set of patches and want to determine if they apply to a Windows server core installation, you can do the following: 1. Run wusa . 2. If the dialog box that appears asks if you want to apply the patch, click No. This means that the patch applies, and you should move on to the next step. Otherwise, the dialog box will state that the patch doesn’t apply and you can ignore the patch. 3. Run wusa /quiet to apply the patch. After applying patches, you can run either the wmic qfe command or systeminfo.exe to see what patches are installed. –Andrew Mason Program Manager, Windows Server What else can you do in terms of managing your Windows server core installation of Windows Server 2008? Lots! For example, if you need to manage your disks and file system on your server, you can use commands such as diskpart, defrag, fsutil, vssadmin, and so on. And if you need to manage permissions and ownership of files, you can use icacls. You can also manage your event logs from the command line using the wevtutil.exe command, which is new in Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008. This powerful command can be used to query your event logs for specific events and to export,

Chapter 6

Windows Server Core

137

archive, clear, and configure your event logs as well. For example, to query your System log for the most recent occurrence of a shutdown event having source USER32 and event ID 1074, you can do this: C:\Windows\system32>wevtutil qe System /c:1 /rd:true /f:text / q:*[System[(EventID=1074)]] Event[0]: Log Name: System Source: USER32 Date: 2007-03-20T22:26:36.000 Event ID: 1074 Task: N/A Level: Information Opcode: N/A Keyword: Classic User: S-1-5-21-3620207985-2970159875-1752314906-500 User Name: DNSSRV\Administrator Computer: DNSSRV Description: The process C:\Windows\system32\shutdown.exe (DNSSRV) has initiated the restart of computer DNSSRV on behalf of user DNSSRV\Administrator for the following reason: No title for this reason could be found Reason Code: 0x840000ff Shutdown Type: restart Comment:

To create and manage data collectors for performance monitoring, you can use the logman.exe command. You can also use the relog.exe command to convert a performance log file into a different format or change its sampling rate. And you can use the tracerpt.exe command to create a remote from a log file or a real-time stream of performance-monitoring data. To manage services, you can use the sc command, which is a very powerful command that provides even more functionality than the Services.msc snap-in. What else can you do? Lots. Let’s move on now to remote management.

Remote Management Using Terminal Services You can also manage Windows server core servers from another computer using Terminal Services. To do this, you first have to enable Remote Desktop on your server, and because we can’t right-click on Computer and select Properties to do this, we’ll have to find another way. Here’s how—use the scregedit.wsf script we looked at previously. The syntax for performing this task is cscript scregedit.wsf /ar 0 to enable Remote Desktop and cscript scregedit.wsf / ar 1 to disable it again. To view your current Remote Desktop settings, type cscript scregedit.wsf /ar /v at a command prompt. Note that in order to allow pre-Windows Vista

138

Introducing Microsoft Windows Longhorn Server

versions of the TS client to connect to a Windows server core installation, you need to disable the enhanced security by running the cscript scregedit.wsf /cs 0 command. Once you’ve enabled Remote Desktop like this, you can connect to your Windows server core server from another machine using Remote Desktop Connection (mstsc.exe) and manage it as if you were logged on interactively at your server’s console. In this figure I’m logged on to a full installation of Windows Server 2008 and have a Terminal Services session open to my remote Windows server core server to manage it.

There’s more! Later in Chapter 8, “Terminal Services Enhancements,” we’ll describe a new feature of Terminal Services in Windows Server 2008 that lets you remote individual application windows instead of entire desktops. Let’s hear now from one of our experts concerning how this new Terminal Services functionality can be used to make managing Windows server core servers easier.

Chapter 6

Windows Server Core

139

From the Experts: Enabling Remote Command Line Access on Server Core There are several ways to administer a Windows server core installation, ranging from using the local console to remote administration from a full Windows Server 2008 server using MMC. A really cool mechanism is to manage the Windows server core installation using Terminal Services RemoteApp to make the command line console available. This allows command-line administration without having to be physically present at the box, and without having a full-blown terminal server session. (After all, a Windows server core installation does not need the full desktop; it just needs the console, and Terminal Services RemoteApp is perfect for this.) A full Windows Server 2008 machine is necessary, along with the Windows server core installation that is to be administered. On the Windows Server 2008 machine, add the Terminal Server Role using the Server Manager administrative tool. Only the Terminal Server role itself is needed, not the TS Licensing role, TS Session Broker role, TS Gateway role, or TS Web Access role. After the TS role is installed, start MMC and add the TS RemoteApp Manager snap-in, providing the name of the Windows server core machine to the snap-in. Once the snap-in is installed, connect to the Windows server core machine and click Add Remote Apps. Navigate to the %SYSTEMROOT%\System32 folder using the administrative share, select cmd.exe, and complete the wizard. Select the cmd.exe entry in the RemoteApp pane, click Create .rdp File, and follow the wizard to save the RDP file. Ensure that TS is enabled on the Windows server core machine. (Use the scregedit.wsf script.) You can now copy the RDP file to any client machine and connect to the Windows server core installation through it. The console will be integrated into the task bar of the client, like a local application. For more information on Terminal Services and TS RemoteApp, please see Chapter, “Terminal Services Enhancements.” –Rahul Prasad Software Development Engineer, Windows Core Operating System Division And here’s another expert from the product team at Microsoft sharing some additional tips on managing Windows server core servers using Terminal Services:

From the Experts: Tips for Using Terminal Services with Windows Server Core When you’re using Terminal Services in a Windows server core server without the GUI shell, some common tasks require you to do things a little differently. Logging off of a Terminal Services Session On a Windows server core server, there is no Start button and therefore no GUI option to log off. Clicking the X in the corner of the Terminal Services window disconnects your

140

Introducing Microsoft Windows Longhorn Server

session, but the session will still be using resources on the server. To log off, you need to use the Terminal Services logoff command. While in your Terminal Services session, you simply run logoff. If you disconnect your session, you can either reconnect and use logoff, use the logoff command remotely, or use the Terminal Services MMC to log off the session. Restarting the Command Prompt When logged on locally, if you accidentally close the command prompt you can either log off and log on, or press CTRL+ALT+DEL, start Task Manager (or just press CTRL+SHIFT+ESC), click file, and run cmd.exe to restart it. You can also configure the Terminal Services client to have the Windows keys pass to the remote session when not maximized so that you can use CTRL+SHIFT+ESC to start task manager and run cmd.exe. Working with Terminal Services Sessions If you ever need to manage Terminal Services sessions from the command line, the query command is the tool to use. Running query sessions (which can also be used remotely) will tell you what Terminal Services sessions are active on the box, as well as who is logged in to them. This is handy if you need to restart the box and want to know if any other administrators are logged on. Query has some other useful options, and there are a variety of other Terminal Services command-line tools. –Andrew Mason Program Manager, Windows Server

Remote Management Using the Remote Server Administration Tools Although you can manage file systems, event logs, performance logs, device drivers, and other aspects from the command line, there’s no law that says you have to. For example, the syntax for wvetutil.exe is quite complex to learn and understand, especially if you want to use this tool to query event logs for specific types of events. It would be nice if you could just use Event Viewer to display, query, and filter your event logs on a Windows server core server. You can! But you have to do it remotely from another computer running either Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008 and with the appropriate Remote Server Administration Tools (RSAT) installed on it. We talked about RSAT earlier in Chapter 4, “Managing Windows Server 2008,” and it’s basically the Windows Server 2008 equivalent of the Adminpak.msi server tools on previous versions of Windows Server. So if you want to use MMC snap-in tools to administer a Windows server core server from a Windows Vista computer or a machine running a full installation of Windows Server 2008, you might or might not need to install the RSAT on this machine because both Windows Vista and full installations of Windows Server 2008 already include many MMC snap-in tools that can be accessed from the Start menu using Administrative

Chapter 6

Windows Server Core

141

Tools. Event Viewer is one such built-in tool, and here it is running on a full installation of Windows Server 2008, showing the previously mentioned shutdown event in the System event log on our remote Windows server core server.

Remote Administration Using Group Policy Another way of remotely administering Windows server core servers is by using Group Policy. For example, although the netsh advfirewall context commands can be used to configure Windows Firewall, doing it this way can be tedious. It’s much easier to use the following policy setting: Computer Configuration\Windows Settings\Security Settings\Windows Firewall With Advanced Security By creating a GPO that targets your Windows server core servers, either by placing these servers in an OU and linking the GPO to that OU or by using a WMI filter to target the GPO only at Windows server core servers, you can remotely configure Windows Firewall on these machines using Group Policy. For example, you can use the OperatingSystemSKU property of the Win32_OperatingSystem WMI class to determine whether a given system is running a Windows server core installation of Windows Server 2008 by checking for the following return values: ■

12 – Datacenter Server Core Edition

■

13 – Standard Server Core Edition

■

14 – Enterprise Server Core Edition

142

Introducing Microsoft Windows Longhorn Server

You can use this property in creating a WMI filter that causes a GPO to target only Windows server core servers.

Remote Management Using WinRM/WinRS Finally, you can also manage Windows server core servers remotely using the Windows Remote Shell (WinRS) included in Windows Vista and the full installation of Windows Server 2008. WinRS uses Windows Remote Management (WinRM), which is Microsoft’s implementation of the WS-Management protocol developed by the Desktop Management Task Force (DMTF). WinRM was first included in Windows Server 2003 R2 and has been enhanced in Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008. To use the Windows Remote Shell to manage a Windows server core server, log on to the Windows server core server you want to remotely manage and type WinRM quickconfig at the command prompt to create a WinRM listener on the machine: C:\Windows\System32>WinRM quickconfig WinRM is not set up to allow remote access to this machine for management. The following changes must be made: Create a WinRM listener on HTTP://* to accept WS-Man requests to any IP on this machine. Make these changes [y/n]? y WinRM has been updated for remote management. Created a WinRM listener on HTTP://* to accept WS-Man requests to any IP on this machine.

Now on a different machine running either Windows Vista or the full installation of Windows Server 2008, type winrs –r: , where is your Windows server core server and is the command you want to execute on your remote server. Here’s an example of the Windows Remote Shell at work: C:\Users\Administrator>winrs -r:DNSSRV "cscript C:\Windows\System32\slmgr.vbs -dli" Microsoft (R) Windows Script Host Version 5.7 Copyright (C) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Name: Windows(TM) Server Windows Server 2008, ServerEnterpriseCore edition Description: Windows Operating System - Windows Server 2008, RETAIL channel Partial Product Key: XHKDR License Status: Licensed

You can also run WinRM quickconfig during unattended installation by configuring the appropriate answer file setting for this service.

Chapter 6

Windows Server Core

143

Windows Server Core Installation Tips and Tricks Finally, let’s conclude this chapter with a list of 101 things (well, not really 101) you might want to know about or do with a Windows server core installation of Windows Server 2008. Some of these are tips or tricks for configuring or managing a Windows server core server; others are just things you might want to make note of. They’re all either interesting, useful, or both. Here goes.... First, if you want quick examples of a whole lot of administrative tasks you can perform from the command line, just type cscript scregedit.wsf /cli at the command prompt: C:\Windows\System32\>cscript scregedit.wsf /cli Microsoft (R) Windows Script Host Version 5.7 Copyright (C) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. To activate: Cscript slmgr.vbs –ato To use KMS volume licensing for activation: Configure KMS volume licensing: cscript slmgr.vbs -ipk [volume license key] Activate KMS licensing cscript slmgr.vbs -ato Set KMS DNS SRV record cscript slmgr.vbs -skma [KMS FQDN] Determine the computer name, any of the following: Set c Ipconfig /all Systeminfo Rename the Server Core computer: Domain joined: Netdom renamecomputer %computername% /NewName:new-name /UserD:domain-username /PasswordD:* Not domain joined: Netdom renamecomputer %computername% /NewName:new-name Changing workgroups: Wmic computersystem where name="%computername%" call joindomainorworkgroup name="[new workgroup name]" Install a role or optional feature: Start /w Ocsetup [packagename] Note: For Active Directory, run Dcpromo with an answer file. View role and optional feature package names and current installation state: oclist Start task manager hot-key: ctrl-shift-esc

144

Introducing Microsoft Windows Longhorn Server

Logoff of a Terminal Services session: Logoff To set the pagefile size: Disable system pagefile management: wmic computersystem where name="%computername%" set AutomaticManagedPagefile=False Configure the pagefile: wmic pagefileset where name="C:\\pagefile.sys" set InitialSize=500,MaximumSize=1000 Configure the timezone, date, or time: control timedate.cpl Configure regional and language options: control intl.cpl Manually install a management tool or agent: Msiexec.exe /i [msipackage] List installed msi applications: Wmic product Uninstall msi applications: Wmic product get name /value Wmic product where name="[name]" call uninstall To list installed drivers: Sc query type= driver Install a driver that is not included: Copy the driver files to Server Core Pnputil –i –a [path]\[driver].inf Determine a file’s version: wmic datafile where name="d:\\windows\\system32\\ntdll.dll" get version List of installed patches: wmic qfe list Install a patch: Wusa.exe [patchame].msu /quiet Configure a proxy: Netsh winhttp proxy set [proxy_name]:[port] Add, delete, query a Registry value: reg.exe add /? reg.exe delete /? reg.exe query /?

Now here are a bunch of random insights into and tips for running a Windows server core installation of Windows Server 2008: The SMS 2005 and MOM 2005 agents should run fine on Windows server core servers, but for best systems management functionality you probably want to use the upcoming Microsoft System Center family of products instead.

Chapter 6

Windows Server Core

145

You can deploy the Windows server core installation option using Windows Deployment Services (WDS) just like the full installation option of Windows Server 2008. It’s the same product—just a different setup option to choose. To install the Windows server core installation option on a system, the system needs a minimum of 512 MB RAM. That’s not because Windows server core servers need that much RAM, however—in fact, they need just over 100 MB of RAM to run with no roles installed. But the setup program for installing Windows Server 2008 requires 512 MB or more of memory or setup will fail. You can install the Windows server core installation option on a box with 512 MB RAM and then after installation pull some of the RAM, but at the time of this writing, this procedure is not supported. The Windows server core installation option uses much less disk space than a full installation of Windows Server 2008. We’re talking roughly 1 MB vs. 5 MB here, and that shows you how much stuff has been pulled out of Windows server core to slim it down. When patching Windows server core servers, you actually don’t need to presort patches into those that apply to the Windows server core installation option and those that don’t apply. Instead, you can just go ahead and patch, and only updates that apply to Windows server core servers will actually be applied. You can manage Windows server core servers remotely using the RSAT, but you can’t install the RSAT on Windows server core to manage the server locally. The Windows server core installation option does support Read Only Domain Controllers (RO DC). This support makes Windows server core servers ideal for branch office scenarios, especially with BitLocker installed as well. You won’t get any User Account Control (UAC) prompts if you log on to a Windows server core server as a nonadministrator and try to perform an administrative task. Why not? UAC needs the desktop shell to function. One way of seeing how slimmed-down Windows server core is is to compare the number of installed and running services on the two platforms. Table 6-3 shows a rough comparison, assuming no roles have been installed. Comparison of default number of services for server core installation vs. full installation

Table 6-3

Feature compared

Server core

Server

Number of services installed by default

~40

~75

Number of services running by default

~30

~50

If you’re trying to run the Windows Remote Shell from another machine and use it to manage a Windows server core server and it doesn’t work, you might not have the right credentials on the Windows server core server to manage it. If this is the case, first try connecting to the

146

Introducing Microsoft Windows Longhorn Server

Windows server core server from your machine using the net use \\\ipc$ / u:\ command using a user account that has local admin privileges on the Windows server core server. Then try running your WinRS commands again. Note that this tip also applies to using MMC admin tools to remotely manage a Windows server core installation since the MMC doesn’t let you specify different credentials for connecting remotely. If you’re trying to use Computer Management on another machine to manage the disk subsystem on your Windows server core server using Disk Management and you can’t, type net start vds at the command prompt on your Windows server core server to start the Virtual Disk Service on the server. Then you should be able to manage your server’s disks remotely using Disk Management. If you’ve enabled Automatic Updates on your Windows server core server and you want to check for new software updates immediately, type wuauclt /detectnow at the command prompt. And yes, the Windows server core installation option does support clustering. A clustered file server running on Windows server core servers would be cool. Our last tip will be provided by one of our experts:

From the Experts: What Time Is It? Here is a flash back to the old MS-DOS days. Because Windows server core does not have the system tray, there is no clock. If you are used to having the time available on the screen, you can add it to your prompt in the command prompt window. Entering the following: prompt [$t]$s$p$g

will display: [14:27:06.28] C:\users\default>

–Andrew Mason Program Manager, Windows Server

Chapter 6

Windows Server Core

147

Conclusion We’re used to Microsoft piling features into products, not stripping features out of them. The Windows server core installation option of Windows Server 2008 is a new direction Microsoft is pursuing in its core product line, but it’s a direction being driven by customer demand. When I said that Microsoft listened to their customers, I was serious. And Windows server core is a good example of this.

Additional Resources You’ll find a brief description of the Windows server core installation of Windows Server 2008 at http://www.microsoft.com/windowsserver/Windows Server 2008/evaluation/overview.mspx. By the time you read this chapter, this page will probably be expanded or the URL will redirect you to somewhere that has a lot more content on the subject. If you have access to the Windows Server 2008 beta program on Microsoft Connect (http:// connect.microsoft.com), you can get some great documentation from there, including these: ■

Microsoft Windows Server Code Name 2008 Server Core Step-By-Step Guide

■

Live Meeting on Server Core

■

Live Chat on Server Core

There’s also a TechNet Forum where you can ask questions and help others trying out the Windows server core installation option of Windows Server 2008. See http://forums.microsoft.com/TechNet/ShowForum.aspx?ForumID=582&SiteID=17 for this forum. (Windows Live registration is required.) There’s a Windows server core blog on TechNet that is definitely something you won’t want to miss. See http://blogs.technet.com/server_core/. Finally, be sure to turn to Chapter 14, “Additional Resources,” for more sources of information concerning the Windows server core installation option, and also for links to webcasts, whitepapers, blogs, newsgroups, and other sources of information about all aspects of Windows Server 2008.

Chapter 7

Active Directory Enhancements In this chapter: Understanding Identity and Access in Windows Server 2008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Active Directory Domain Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 Active Directory Lightweight Directory Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Active Directory Certificate Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 Active Directory Federation Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Active Directory Rights Management Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Additional Resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Active Directory and its related services form the foundation for enterprise networks running Microsoft Windows, and the new features and enhancements to Active Directory and its related services in Windows Server 2008 are numerous. This chapter takes a look at these enhancements and at the direction in which Active Directory and its related services are heading as an integrated identity and access platform for enterprises—that is, as a platform for provisioning and managing network identity.

Understanding Identity and Access in Windows Server 2008 Before we jump in and examine the various enhancements to Active Directory and its related services in Windows Server 2008, however, let’s first step back a bit and get the big picture of how Active Directory and its related services have been evolving since they were first introduced in Windows 2000 Server and what these services are becoming in Windows Server 2008 and beyond. It’s important to understand this big picture, as otherwise the many improvements to Active Directory and related services in Windows Server 2008 might seem like a miscellaneous grab-bag of changes without much in common. But they have a lot in common as we’ll shortly see.

Understanding Identity and Access So why is identity and access (IDA) important to enterprises? Think for a moment about what goes on when a user on your network needs access to confidential business information stored on a server. Tony is in the Marketing department, and he needs access to a product 149

150

Introducing Windows Server 2008

specification so that he can work on a marketing presentation for a customer. The document containing the specification is stored on a server on the company’s network, and Tony tries to open the document so that he can cut and paste information contained in it into his presentation. To safeguard such specifications, you’d like your IDA infrastructure to do the following: 1.

Determine who the user is who wants to use the document.

2.

Grant the user the appropriate level of access to the document.

3.

Protect confidential information contained in the document.

4.

Maintain a record of interaction concerning the user’s accessing of the document.

For example, you might want to restrict access to product specifications to full-time employees (FTEs) only and provide read-only access to users in the Marketing department so that they can view but not modify specifications. You might also want to prevent Marketing department users from copying and pasting text from specifications into other documents. And you might want an audit trail showing the day and time that the user accessed the specification. The challenge of implementing an IDA solution that can do all of this becomes even greater once you start extending the boundaries of your enterprise with “anywhere access” devices, Web services, and collaboration tools like e-mail and instant messaging. It becomes even more complicated once you have to start applying the IDA process not just to FTEs but also to contractors, temps, customers, and external partners. The challenge is to build an IDA solution that can handle all these different scenarios, and Microsoft has steadily been working toward this goal since Active Directory was first released with Windows 2000 Server. Let’s briefly summarize the evolution of Microsoft’s IDA solution, beginning with Windows 2000 Server and working up to the current platform for Windows Server 2003 R2 and then to Windows Server 2008 and beyond.

Identity and Access in Windows 2000 Server Active Directory directory service is a Windows-based directory service that was first introduced in Windows 2000 Server. Active Directory directory service stores information about various kinds of objects on a network—such as users, groups, computers, printers, and shared folders—and it makes this information available to users who need to access these resources and administrators who need to manage them. Active Directory provides network users with controlled access to permitted resources anywhere on the network using a single logon process. Active Directory directory service also provides administrators with an intuitive, hierarchical view of the network and its resources, and it provides a single point of administration for all network objects. Windows 2000 Server also included a separate component, called Certificate Services, that can be used to set up a certificate authority (CA) for issuing digital certificates as part of a Public Key Infrastructure (PKI). These certificates can be used to provide authentication for users and computers on your network to secure e-mail, provide Web-based authentication,

Chapter 7

Active Directory Enhancements

151

and support smart-card authentication. Certificate Services also provides customizable services for issuing and managing certificates for your enterprise. What’s important to understand here is that in Windows 2000 Server, Active Directory directory service and Certificate Services are two separate components that are not integrated together. In other words, the two services are managed separately and have policy implemented differently. In addition to these two built-in IDA services, Microsoft also released an out-of-band service for Windows 2000 Server called Microsoft Metadirectory Services (MMS). In its final version, MMS 2.2 was an enterprise metadirectory that enterprises could use to integrate all their various directories together into a single consolidated central repository. MMS 2.2 consisted of one or more metadirectory servers, management agents, and the connected directories, and it provided users with access to this consolidated information via Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP). The goal of MMS 2.2 was to provide enterprises with a provisioning solution that could be used to effectively provide consistent identity management across many different databases and directories. For example, if you had both an Active Directory directory service infrastructure and a Lotus Notes infrastructure and you wanted Active Directory directory service users to be able to look up e-mail addresses from the Lotus Notes directory, MMS 2.2 could make this possible. MMS 2.2 could also simplify the deployment of Active Directory directory service for enterprises that already had information about employees or customers stored in other directories by enabling real-time synchronization of information from these directories into Active Directory directory service. Finally, MMS 2.2 could also be used to simplify the migration and consolidation of multiple directories into Active Directory directory service.

Identity and Access in Windows Server 2003 Although these Windows 2000 Server offerings did meet the needs of some enterprises, they were still provided as separate services and MMS was even a totally separate product. Customers wanted something more integrated, and they also wanted additional IDA features, such as document rights protection and role-based authorization. In addition to making improvements to how Active Directory directory service and Certificate Services work and how they are managed, Microsoft added a new feature called Authorization Manager to Windows 2003 Server that provided role-based authorization for users of line-of-business applications. Although Active Directory directory service by itself provides object-based access control using ACLs, the role-based access control (RBAC) provided by Authorization Manager enables permissions to be managed in terms of the different job roles users might have. Authorization Manager works by providing a set of COM-based runtime interfaces that enables an application to manage and verify a client’s requests to perform operations using the application. Authorization Manager also includes an MMC snap-in that application administrators can use to manage different user roles and permissions. Another IDA service that Microsoft released for Windows Server 2003 is Windows Rights Management Service (RMS), an information-protection technology that works with RMSenabled applications to help businesses safeguard valuable digital information from

152

Introducing Windows Server 2008

unauthorized use whether online or offline and whether inside the firewall or outside the firewall. Windows RMS was also designed to help organizations comply with a growing number of regulatory requirements that mandated information protection, including the U.S. Sarbanes-Oxley Act, the Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act, the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA), and others. To use Windows RMS, enterprises can create centralized custom usage policy templates, such as “Confidential – Read Only,” that can work with any RMS-enabled client and can be directly applied to sensitive business information such as financial reports, product specifications, or e-mail messages. Implementing Windows RMS requires an Active Directory directory service infrastructure, a PKI, and Internet Information Services—all of which are included in Windows Server 2003. In addition, RMS-enabled client applications such as Microsoft Office 2003 and Internet Explorer are needed, plus Microsoft SQL Server to provide the underlying database for the service. While these additional IDA services and add-ons for Active Directory directory service were being released, Microsoft also released a follow-up to MMS 2.2 called Microsoft Identity Integration Server (MIIS) 2003, which provides a centralized service that stores and integrates identity information for organizations with multiple directories. It also provides a unified view of all known identity information about users, applications, and resources on a network. MIIS 2003 is designed for life-cycle management of identity and access to simplify the provisioning of new user accounts, strong credentials, access policies, rights management policies, and so on. MIIS 2003 is available in two versions. First, there’s Microsoft Identity Integration Server 2003 SP1, Enterprise Edition, which includes support for identity integration/directory synchronization, account provisioning/deprovisioning, and password synchronization and management. And second, there’s Identity Integration Feature Pack 1a for Microsoft Windows Server Active Directory, a free download that provides the same functionality as Microsoft Identity Integration Server 2003 SP1, Enterprise Edition (identity integration/directory synchronization, account provisioning/deprovisioning, and password synchronization) but only between Active Directory directory service, Active Directory Application Mode (ADAM), and Microsoft Exchange Server 2000 and later. Enterprises that need to interface with repositories other than Active Directory, ADAM, or Exchange Server, however, must use MIIS 2003, Enterprise Edition, rather than the free Feature Pack version.

Identity and Access in Windows Server 2003 R2 With the R2 release of Windows Server 2003, Microsoft added two more IDA services to the slate of various services already available on Windows Server 2003 either as in-box services, downloadable add-ons, or separate server products built upon Active Directory directory services. These two new IDA services are Active Directory Application Mode and Active Directory Federation Services. Active Directory Application Mode (ADAM) is essentially a standalone version of Active Directory directory service that is designed specifically for use with directory-enabled

Chapter 7

Active Directory Enhancements

153

applications. ADAM does not require or depend upon Active Directory forests or domains, so you can use it in a workgroup scenario on standalone servers if desired—you don’t have to install it on a domain controller. In addition, ADAM stores and replicates only applicationrelated information and does not store or replicate information about network resources, such as users, groups, or computers. And because ADAM is not an operating system service, you can even run multiple instances of ADAM on a single computer, with each instance of ADAM supporting a different directory-enabled application and having its own directory store, assigned LDAP and SSL ports, and application event log. ADAM is provided as an optional component of Windows Server 2003 R2, but there’s also a downloadable version that can be installed on either Windows Server 2003 or Windows XP. Active Directory Federation Services (ADFS) is another optional component of Windows Server 2003 R2 that provides Web single sign-on (SSO) functionality to authenticate a user to multiple Web applications over the life of a single online session. ADFS works by securely sharing digital identity and entitlement rights across security and enterprise boundaries, and it supports the WS-Federation Passive Requestor Profile (WS-F PRP) Web Services protocol. ADFS is tightly integrated with Active Directory, and it can work with both Active Directory directory services and ADAM. Using ADFS, an enterprise can extend its existing Active Directory infrastructure to the Internet to provide access to resources that are offered by trusted partners across the Internet. These trusted partners can be either external third parties or additional departments or subsidiaries within the enterprise.

Identity and Access in Windows Server 2008 Looking back over this evolution of Active Directory–based IDA services since Windows 2000 Server, we have the following IDA solution for the current platform Windows Server 2003 R2: ■

Active Directory directory services and Certificate Services—two core services that can be deployed separately or together.

■

Authorization Manager, ADAM, and ADFS—separate optional components that require Active Directory directory services. (Authorization Manager also requires Certificate Services.)

■

MIIS 2003, which is available both as a separate product or as a free Feature Pack (depending on whether or not you need to synchronize with non-Microsoft directory services).

■

Windows Rights Management Service (RMS), which is available as an optional download from the Microsoft Download Center.

Microsoft’s vision with Windows Server 2008 (and beyond) is to consolidate all these various IDA capabilities into a single, integrated IDA solution built upon Active Directory. This consolidation picture as of Beta 3 of Windows Server 2008 is as follows.

154

Introducing Windows Server 2008

As shown in the following diagram, there are four key integrated IDA components present in Windows Server 2008: ■

Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) and Active Directory Lightweight Directory Services (AD LDS), which provide the foundational directory services for domain-based and standalone network environments.

■

Active Directory Certificate Services (AD CS), which provides strong credentials using PKI digital certificates.

■

Active Directory Rights Management Services (AD RMS), which protects information contained in documents, e-mails, and so on.

■

Active Directory Federation Services (AD FS), which eliminates the need for creating and maintaining multiple separate identities.

AD CS

AD RMS

AD FS

AD DS/LDS

Note the following rebranding of IDA services in Windows Server 2008: ■

Active Directory directory services is now known as Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS).

■

Active Directory Application Mode is now called Active Directory Lightweight Directory Services (AD LDS).

■

Certificate Services is now called Active Directory Certificate Services (AD CS).

■

Windows Rights Management Services is now named Active Directory Rights Management Services (AD RMS).

■

Finally, Active Directory Federation Services (ADFS) is still called Active Directory Federation Services (AD FS) but now includes an extra space in the abbreviation.

And for identity life-cycle management, Microsoft also plans on releasing a follow-up to MIIS 2003 called Identity Lifecycle Manager (ILM) 2007 in mid-2007. Initially, ILM 2007 will run on Windows Server 2003, Enterprise Edition. ILM 2007 builds on the metadirectory and user-provisioning capabilities in MIIS 2003 by adding new capabilities for managing strong credentials such as smart cards and by providing an integrated approach that pulls together metadirectory, digital certificate and password management, and user provisioning across Microsoft Windows platforms and other enterprise systems. Microsoft is also working on the next version of ILM, which is codenamed Identity Lifecycle Manager “2.” This version is planned for release around the same time as Windows Server 2008, but it will install separately. Before we go any further, let’s hear from one of our experts at Microsoft concerning plans for ILM “2” as an identity-management solution for Windows Server 2008:

Chapter 7

Active Directory Enhancements

155

From the Experts: Identity Lifecycle Manager “2” Identity Lifecycle Manager “2” is the codename for Microsoft’s identity management solution for Windows Server 2008. The principles behind Identity Lifecycle Manager “2” are that identity is everywhere and it can be managed how you want it to be. Identity Is Everywhere Identity Lifecycle Manager “2” provides a plethora of ready-to-deploy self-service identity and access solutions. Users can manage their own information and that of their staff, and navigate through the organizational hierarchy. They can reset their own passwords, provision their own smart cards, and retrieve their certificates. They can create security groups and distribution lists, request access to one another’s groups, and manage approval. Best of all, they can do all of this right from within their Office applications and Windows desktops. So, with Identity Lifecycle Manager “2,” if you want to request to join a group, you can do that right within Outlook. And when you are asked to approve an action by another user, the Approve and Reject buttons are right there in the approval request mail. And if you forget your password and need to reset it, you can do so right where you are most likely to find that you have forgotten it: at the Windows log-in prompt. All the facilities of Identity Lifecycle Manager “2” are also available from a central portal, hosted within Windows SharePoint Services. Identity Is Managed How You Want It to Be Identity Lifecycle Manager “2” lets you manage identity your way by allowing you to accurately model your business processes and attach them to identity and access events. Modeling your unique business procedures around identity and access management processes is meant to be something that each staff member can do for themselves, without having to depend on programmers to do it for them. Thus, Identity Lifecycle Manager “2” provides a simple graphical user interface for modeling your business procedures—the Identity Lifecycle Manager “2” Process Designer. Moreover, you don’t have to deploy any special software onto your user’s desktops for them to be able to use the Process Designer. The Process Designer is fully incorporated within the Identity Lifecycle Manager “2” portal, which is a Windows SharePoint Services 3 application. So all that users of the Process Designer need to access the designer is their browser. The three fundamental types of processes that you can model in Microsoft Identity Lifecycle Manager “2” are authentication processes, approval processes, and action processes. Indeed, within Identity Lifecycle Manager “2,” processing proceeds by first executing your authentication processes, then your approval processes, and finally your action processes. Authentication processes are for confirming a user’s identity. The steps in an authentication process challenge the user for credentials. This process can also include several steps to define a multifactor authentication process required for more

156

Introducing Windows Server 2008

sensitive operations. Both the built-in authentication activities and your custom ones can leverage the Windows GINA and Windows Vista Credential Provider technologies to challenge users for their credentials at the Windows log-in prompt. This is a desirable option, because then users are challenged to prove their identity precisely where they expect to be challenged. A second core type of process in the process model of Microsoft Identity Lifecycle Manager “2” is the approval process. Approval processes are for confirming that a user has permission to perform a requested operation. Typically, an approval process involves sending an e-mail message to the owner of a resource asking them to confirm that a user has permission to perform some requested operation on that resource. Identity Lifecycle Manager “2” allows users to respond to those approval requests right from within Outlook, which is precisely where a user would naturally want to be able to do so. Another type of activity in an approval process is one that requires users to submit a business justification for an operation they want to perform. In Identity Lifecycle Manager “2,” approval processes can involve any activities that a user might have to complete before being allowed to proceed with an operation. The enabling power of Identity Lifecycle Manager “2” is that it gives you the freedom to determine how you want to gather approvals for users’ actions. Then it surfaces the approvals on the end users’ desktops, inside an appropriate application context where they would expect to find them—saving the user from having to go elsewhere to manage permissions. The third and final core type of process in the process model of Microsoft Identity Lifecycle Manager “2” is the action process. Action processes define what happens as a consequence of an operation. A simple example is just having a notification sent to the owner of a resource to inform the owner of a change. A more interesting and, indeed, more common type of activity to perform as a consequence of an identity management operation is an entitlement activity. Thus, you might define a process that, as a consequence of assigning a user to a particular group, allocates a parking permit in the correct lot and issues the appropriate card key for the user’s building. The point is that Identity Lifecycle Manager “2” action processes are truly a blank slate. On that blank slate, you get to define how actions on objects within Identity Lifecycle Manager “2” propagate out to the identity stores and resources of your enterprise. We’ve said that the principal idea is that you get to define processes that model the identity management procedures of your enterprise and that you get to attach those processes to identity and access events. Up to this point, we have discussed quite a lot about the processes. Now let us turn to the subject of attaching those processes to events.

Chapter 7

Active Directory Enhancements

157

Events are the triggers that cause Identity Lifecycle Manager “2” processes to be executed. So, in attaching a process to an event, you are defining the circumstances under which the process will be executed. In the nomenclature of Identity Lifecycle Manager “2,” we refer to this as mapping a process to an event. We provide a simple user interface for accomplishing it. You identify the process that you have created using the Process Designer, and then you specify the event to which you want to attach the process. So what is an event in Identity Lifecycle Manager “2?” Well, an event is something that happens to a set of one or more objects. For example, you might update the cost center assigned to a particular team of people, or you might update the office telephone number of a single individual. Both constitute examples of events. Another example is the addition of a person to a team—in that case, there is an event for the person being added, as well as an event for the team that the person is joining. Because an event is something that happens to a set of one or more objects, when you map a process to an event, you must identify the set of objects to which the event is expected to occur. Identity Lifecycle Manager “2” gives you considerable power to identify the sets of objects. You get to define the rules by which objects are included in sets. Those rules can be as rich and complex or as bare and simple as you want them to be. You can define them so as to include any number of objects in a set, and any variety of types of objects as well. Once you have defined rules to identify a set of objects, you can select the events on those objects that you want to serve as triggers for your processes. There are two types of events in Identity Lifecycle Manager “2” that can trigger your processes: request events and transition events. Request events are events by which the data of an object or set of objects is retrieved or manipulated. So, included in the category of request events are create, read, update, and delete events. Transition events occur when an object moves in or out of a set of objects. So, in the earlier example of a person joining a team, there is a transition for that person in being included in the group and a transition for the group in having that person join. All in all, the authentication, approval, and action processes that you compose using approval actions, notification actions, and entitlement actions in the Process Designer can be mapped to any request or transition event on any set of objects that you identify via your rules. We believe that this simple model of designing processes and then mapping those processes to events gives you tremendous power to manage the identity life cycle of your organization. Whatever identity-related occurrences that you can imagine happening in your enterprise can be represented as events within Identity Lifecycle Manager “2,” and then you can describe processes to handle those events—processes that confirm the identity of the person initiating the event, that confirm the person’s permission to initiate the event, or that define the consequences. Crucially, you get to define

158

Introducing Windows Server 2008

those processes as models representing the business policies and procedures that uniquely govern the identity-related assets of your enterprise. Microsoft Identity Lifecycle Manager “2” is built on the Windows Communication Foundation, Windows Workflow Foundation, and Windows SharePoint Services 3 technologies, and it exposes a thoroughly standards-based API that implements WS-Transfer, WS-ResourceTransfer, WS-Enumeration, and WS-Trust. –Donovan Follette Identity and Access Developer Evangelist, Windows Server Evangelism After reading all this, you hopefully understand now the big picture of what Microsoft’s vision is for identity and access, and how Active Directory in Windows Server 2008 fits into this picture. Now it’s time to look at each piece of this picture and learn about the new features and enhancements to Active Directory in Windows Server 2008. We’ll begin with core improvements to AD DS/LDS.

Active Directory Domain Services Let’s look at four enhancements to Active Directory in Windows Server 2008: ■

AD DS auditing enhancements

■

Read-only domain controllers

■

Restartable AD DS

■

Granular password and account lockout policies

There are other improvements as well, including some changes to the user interface for managing Active Directory and also to the Active Directory Installation Wizard. But we’ll focus here on the three enhancements just mentioned, as they’re big gains for many enterprises.

AD DS Auditing Enhancements The first enhancement we’ll look at is AD DS auditing. In the current platform, Windows Server 2003 R2 (and in Windows Server 2008 also), you can enable a global audit policy called Audit Directory Service Access to log events in the Security event log whenever certain operations are performed on objects stored in Active Directory. Enabling logging of objects in Active Directory is a two-step process. First, you open the Default Domain Controller Policy in Group Policy Object Editor and enable the Audit Directory Service Access global audit policy found under Computer Configuration\Windows Settings\Security Settings\Local Policies\Audit Policy.

Chapter 7

Active Directory Enhancements

159

Then you configure the system access control list (SACL) on the object or objects you want to audit. For example, to enable Success auditing for access by Authenticated Users to User objects stored within an organizational unit (OU), you do the following: 1.

Open Active Directory Users and Computers, and make sure Advanced Features is selected from the View menu.

2.

Right-click on the OU you want to audit, and select Properties.

3.

Select the Security tab, and click Advanced to open the Advanced Security Settings for the OU.

4.

Select the Audit tab, and click Add to open the Select User, Computer or Group dialog.

5.

Type Authenticated Users, and click OK. An Auditing Entry dialog opens for the OU.

6.

In the Apply Onto list box, select Descendant User Objects.

7.

Select the Write All Properties check box in the Select column.

160

Introducing Windows Server 2008

8.

Click OK to return to Advanced Security Settings for the OU, which should now show the new SACL you configured.

9.

Close all dialog boxes by clicking OK as needed.

Chapter 7

Active Directory Enhancements

161

Now if you go ahead and change a property of one of the user accounts in your OU—for example, by disabling an account—an event should be logged in the Security log with event ID 4662 and source Directory Service Access to indicate that the object was accessed.

So far, this is the same in Windows Server 2008 as in previous versions of Windows Server. What’s new in Windows Server 2008, however, is that while in previous Windows Server platforms there was only one audit policy (Audit Directory Service Access) that controlled whether auditing of directory service events was enabled or disabled, in Windows Server 2008 this policy has been divided into four different subcategories as follows: ■

Directory Service Access

■

Directory Service Changes

■

Directory Service Replication

■

Detailed Directory Service Replication

162

Introducing Windows Server 2008

One of these subcategories—Directory Service Changes—has been enhanced to provide the ability to audit the following changes to AD DS objects whose SACLs have been configured to enable the objects to be audited: ■

Objects that have had an attribute modified will log the old and new values of this attribute in the Security log.

■

Objects that are newly created will have the values of their attributes at the time of creation logged in the Security log.

■

Objects that are moved from one container to another within a domain will have their old and new locations logged in the Security log.

■

Objects that are undeleted will have the location to which the object has been moved logged in the Security log.

The usefulness of this change should be obvious to administrators concerned about maintaining an audit trail of changes made to Active Directory, and auditing actions like these is an important part of an overall IDA strategy for an organization. For instance, using the Security log and filtering for a particular User object, you can now track in detail all changes to the attributes of that object over the entire lifetime of the object. When you enable Success auditing for the Audit Directory Service Access global audit policy (and this policy has Success auditing enabled for it by default within the Default Domain Controllers Policy), the effect of this is to also enable Success auditing for the first of the four subcategories (Directory Service Access) described earlier, which audits only attempts to access directory objects. If you need to, however, you can selectively enable or disable Success and/or Failure auditing for each of these four auditing subcategories individually by using the Auditpol.exe command-line tool included in Windows Server 2008. For example, if you wanted to enable Success auditing for the second subcategory (Directory Service Changes) so that you can maintain a record of the old and new values of an object’s attribute when the value of that attribute is successfully modified, you can do so by typing auditpol /set /subcategory:“directory service changes” /success:enable at a command prompt on your domain controller. If we do this in the preceding example and then enable the user account we disabled previously, three new directory service audit events are added to the Security log.

Chapter 7

Active Directory Enhancements

163

The first (earliest) of these events is 4662, indicating the User object has been accessed, while the second event (5136) records the old value of the attribute modified and the third event (also 5136) records the new value of the attribute. Table 7-1 lists the possible event IDs for Directory Service Changes audit events. Table 7-1

Event IDs for Directory Service Changes Audit Events

Event ID

Meaning

5136

An attribute of the object has been modified.

5137

The object was created.

5138

The object has been undeleted.

5139

The object has been moved within the domain.

In addition to enabling you to track the history of an object this way, Windows Server 2008 also gives you the option of setting flags in the Active Directory schema to specify which attributes of an object you want to track changes for and which attributes you don’t want to track changes for. This can be very useful because tracking changes to objects can lead to a whole lot of audit events and your Security log can fill up awfully fast.

164

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Read-Only Domain Controllers Another new feature of AD DS in Windows Server 2008 is the Read-Only Domain Controller (RODC), a domain controller that hosts a read-only replica of the AD database. The main rationale for RODCs (apart from nostalgia for the BDCs of good old NT4 days) is to provide a solution for branch offices that have inadequate physical security. For example, a corporate headquarters probably has the resources to adequately protect their domain controllers against theft or other physical dangers—at least, they better have such resources. Small branch offices, however, might not have the facilities, budget, or expertise to ensure a domain controller present there would be physically secure. One solution to this problem might be to not have a domain controller at all at your branch office and just have users there authenticate over a WAN link with a domain controller at headquarters. The problem with this approach is if the WAN link is too slow, unreliable, or saturated with other forms of traffic. The result could be unacceptably slow logons for users or difficulty logging on at all. If your WAN link is unsuitable, the other option is to place a domain controller at your branch office and have users there authenticate locally while the DC itself replicates with DCs at headquarters to ensure its directory database is always up to date. The problem with this approach, however, is that domain controllers are the heart and soul of your Windows-based network because they contain all the accounts for all the users and computers on your network. So if the domain controller at your branch office somehow got stolen (perhaps by some clever social engineering like, “Hi, I’ve come to clean your domain controller, can you show me where it is?”), your whole network should be considered compromised and your only viable solution is to flatten everything and rebuild it all from scratch. And those are the only two solutions today for branch offices using domain controllers running Windows Server 2003—authenticate over the WAN or risk placing a domain controller at your branch office. RDOC, however, solves this dilemma by providing a secure way to have a domain controller at your branch office. The only requirement for using RDOC is that the domain controller that holds the PDC Emulator FSMO role on your network has to be running Windows Server 2008. Once this is the case and you’ve deployed an RDOC at your branch office, changes made to the directory on your normal (writable) domain controllers replicate to the RDOC, but nothing replicates in the opposite direction. That’s because the directory database of a RDOC is read-only, so you can’t write anything to it locally—it has to receive all changes to its database via replication from another (writable) domain controller. (RDOCs can’t replicate with each other either, so there’s no point having more than one RDOC at a given site—plus it could cause inconsistent logon experiences for users if you did do this.) So RDOC replication is completely unidirectional—and this applies to DFS replication traffic as well. RDOCs also advertise themselves as the Key Distribution Center (KDC) for the branch office where they reside, so they handle all requests for Kerberos tickets from user and computer accounts at the remote site. RDOCs don’t store user or computer credentials in their directory database, however; so when a user at the branch office tries to log on, the RDOC contacts a

Chapter 7

Active Directory Enhancements

165

writable DC at the hub site to request a copy of the user’s credentials. How the hub DC responds to the RDOC’s request depends on how the Password Replication Policy is configured for that RDOC. If the policy says that the user’s credentials can be replicated to the RDOC, the writable DC does this, and the RDOC caches the credentials for future use (until the user’s credentials change). The result of all this is that RDOCs generally have few credentials stored on them. So if an RDOC somehow gets stolen (remember the DC cleaning guy), only those credentials are compromised and replacing them is much less work than rebuilding your entire directory from scratch. Another feature of RDOCs is that a domain administrator can delegate the local administrator role for an RDOC to an ordinary domain user. This can be very useful for smaller branch offices that have no full-time expert IT person on site. So if you need to load a new driver into your DC at a remote site, you can just give instructions to your “admin” by phone on how to do this. The admin is simply an ordinary user who can follow instructions, and delegating RDOC admin rights to him doesn’t enable him to perform any domain-wide administrative tasks or log on to a writable DC at headquarters—the damage he can do is limited to wrecking only the RDOC. Let’s hear now from a Microsoft MVP and directory services expert concerning some enhancements that have been made to dcpromo.exe in Windows Server 2008 and how these enhancements relate to deploying RODCs:

From the Experts: New Active Directory Setup Wizard (dcpromo.exe) When you want to install Active Directory, you have to use the Active Directory Setup Wizard (dcpromo.exe). It provides you with some possibilities and assumes that you have a proper design written down and you know what you want to accomplish. However, we have received many support calls and questions on the Internet because Active Directory and DNS were not set up in a way that reflects best practices. Considering the vast amount of installations of Active Directory, it’s very clear that it’s far easier to find the Active Directory Installation Wizard on the server operating system than it is to find best practices or good consultancy. Common support issues included having the wrong FSMO-Roles together on the same system, not enough Global Catalog servers, or issues in the DNS-Design that were leading to logons over the WAN lines. In Windows Server 2008, Microsoft has put a huge effort into changing dcpromo.exe. Now it is reflecting best practices. You get a normal mode if you just want to quickly install Active Directory, and you get an advanced mode if you want to do any special configurations. Dcpromo is leveraging best practices, and it provides a lot of additional tasks. It’s checking the FSMO roles for you, and it recommends whether to automatically move the Infrastructure Master if necessary. It allows you to enable the Global Catalog on a new domain controller. It is checking the DNS infrastructure, and it allows you to automatically create forwarders and delegations. Also, dcpromo enables you to choose

166

Introducing Windows Server 2008

your replication partner for the initial replication so that you can make sure to target a specific DC. In addition, dcpromo supports the new Read Only Domain Controller (RODC) in multiple ways. You are either able to precreate a RODC-Account in your domain and delegate a site admin to join the RODC to the domain, or you are able to fully install the RODC while selecting whether it should also be a Global Catalog server a DNS-server, or both. Last but not least, dcpromo finally supports unattended installations from the command line without an answer script. Simply run dcpromo /?:unattend to figure out what parameters you have to script the installation of your Windows Server 2008 Active Directory Domain Controller. –Ulf B. Simon-Weidner MVP for Windows Server—Directory Services author, consultant, speaker, and trainer Finally, because domain controllers often host the DNS Server role as well (because DNS is the naming system used by AD), the RDOCs need a special read-only form of DNS Server running on them also. To learn more about this feature, however, let’s listen to another one of our experts at Microsoft:

From the Experts: Advanced Considerations for DNS on RODCs in Branch Office Sites When installing a Windows Server 2008 Read Only Domain Controller (RODC) at a branch office site, using the Active Directory Installation Wizard or the DCPromo command-line tool, you are prompted to specify a DNS domain for the Active Directory domain that you are joining the RODC to during promotion. During this process, you are prompted with DNS Server installation options. A DNS Server is required to locate domain controllers and member computers in an Active Directory domain, at both the hub site and the local branch office site. The default option is to install a DNS Server locally on the RODC, which replicates the existing AD-integrated zone for the domain specified and adds the local IP address in the DNS Server list of the domain controller local DNS Client setting. As a best practice, Microsoft recommends that client computers have Dynamic DNS updates turned on by default and that DHCP Servers be used to configure the DNS Server list. Similarly for branch office sites, clients should be configured to use Dynamic DNS updates, and you should set the Primary DNS Server or use DHCP to set the DNS Server list to direct clients to the DNS Server running on the RODC.

Chapter 7

Active Directory Enhancements

167

If there is only one DNS Server and RODC running at the branch office site, Microsoft recommends that client computers also point to a DNS Server running on a domain controller at the hub site. This can be done either by configuring clients with an Alternate DNS Server for the hub-site DNS Server or by configuring DHCP Servers to set the DNS Server list to first the local DNS Server and then the remote DNS Server at the hub site. The DNS Server on the RODC should be the first DNS Server in the list to optimize resolution performance for branch office clients. In larger branch office scenarios, if setting up two or more RODCs at a site, you are provided the default option to install DNS Server locally on all the RODCs. Within the same site, the RODCs do not replicate directly with each other. The RODCs rely mainly on replication with domain controllers at the hub site during scheduled intervals to refresh local data in the directory. Hence, a branch office DNS Server on an RODC receives updated DNS zone data during the normal replication cycle from a hub-site domain controller connected to the local RODC. In addition to replication from the hub site, DNS Servers on RODCs also attempt to replicate local data after receiving a client update request. The branch office DNS Server redirects the client to a hub-site DNS Server on a domain controller that is writable and can process the update. Shortly thereafter, it attempts to contact a hub-site domain controller to update its local copy of the data with the changed record. Any other branch office DNS Server on RODCs at the site do not attempt to obtain a local copy of the single record update because they did not receive the original client update request. This mechanism has the advantage of allowing an updated client record to be resolved quickly within the branch office, without necessitating frequent and large replication requests for all domain data from the hub site. If network connectivity is lost, or no domain controller at the hub site is able to provide the updated record data to the DNS Server in the branch office, the record will be available locally only after the next scheduled replication from the hub-site domain controllers, and it will be available to all RODCs at the branch office site. As a consequence of a DNS Server’s attempt to replicate individual records between replication cycles, if DNS zone data is stored across multiple RODCs, the local branch office records might accumulate some incongruities. To ensure a high level of consistency for DNS data, the recommendation is to configure all client computers at the branch office site with the same DNS Server list—for example, by using DHCP. If, however, in the more rare case that timely resolution of local branch office client records is absolutely critical, to avoid any inconsistencies for resolution, you can install DNS Servers on all RODCs at the site, but point clients only to a single DNS Server. –Moon Majumdar Program Manager, DNS (Server and Client) and DC Locator, Directory and Service Team

168

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Restartable AD DS Another new feature of AD DS in Windows Server 2008 is the ability to restart the Active Directory directory services without having to restart your domain controller in Directory Services Restore Mode. In previous versions of Windows Server, when you wanted to do some maintenance task on a domain controller—such as performing offline defragmentation of the directory database or performing an authoritative restore of the Active Directory directory service database—you had to restart your domain controller in Directory Services Restore Mode by pressing F8 during startup and selecting this from the list of startup options. You then logged on to your domain controller by using the local Administrator account specified previously when you ran the Active Directory Installation Wizard (dcpromo.exe) on your machine to promote it from a member server to a domain controller. Once logged on in Directory Services Restore Mode, you could perform maintenance on your domain controller and clients couldn’t authenticate with it during your maintenance window. Having to reboot a domain controller like this to perform maintenance operations resulted in longer downtime for clients who needed to be authenticated by your domain controller. To reduce this downtime window, AD DS has been re-architected in Windows Server 2008. Instead of rebooting your machine and logging on in Directory Services Restore Mode, you simply stop the Domain Controller service by using the Services snap-in (shown in Figure 7-1) or typing net stop ntds at a command line, perform your maintenance tasks while still logged on as a domain admin, and when you’re finished start this service again using the snap-in or the net start ntds command. Stopping and starting the Domain Controller service like this also has no effect on other services such as the DHCP Server service that might be running on your domain controller.

Figure 7-1 You can now stop and start the Domain Controller (NTDS) service without rebooting your domain controller and logging on in Directory Services Restore Mode

Chapter 7

Active Directory Enhancements

169

While domain controllers running previous versions of Windows Server had two Active Directory directory service modes (normal mode and Directory Services Restore Mode), domain controllers running Windows Server 2008 now have three possible modes or states they can be running in: ■

AD DS Started

■

Directory Services Restore Mode This state is still available on domain controllers running Windows Server 2008 through the F8 startup options, and it’s unchanged from how it worked in Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003.

■

AD DS Stopped

This is the normal state when the NTDS service is running and clients can be authenticated by the domain controller. This state is similar to how AD directory services worked in Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003.

This is the new state for domain controllers running Windows Server 2008. A domain controller running in this state shares characteristics of both a domain controller running in Directory Services Restore Mode and a member server that is joined to a domain. For example, as in Directory Services Restore Mode, a domain controller running in the AD DS Stopped state has its directory database (Ntds.dit) offline. And similar to a domain-joined member server, a domain controller running in this state is still domain-joined, and users can log on interactively or over the network by using another domain controller. But it’s a good idea not to let your domain controller remain in the AD DS Stopped state for an extended period of time because not only will it be unable to service user logon requests, it also will be unable to replicate with other domain controllers on the network.

Granular Password and Account Lockout Policies New in Beta 3 of Windows Server 2008 is the ability to have multiple password policies and account lockout policies in a domain. To learn about this particular feature, let’s hear from a Microsoft MVP and directory services expert:

From the Experts: Granular Password Policies in Windows Server 2008 If you want to deploy multiple password policies in your forest, the domain has always been the boundary for this. This was confusing for many customers because you are able to change passwords in every Group Policy Object (GPO). However, remember that password settings (and account lockout settings) are configured in the Computer Settings part of the GPO. They apply only to computer objects, and therefore, to local accounts on those computer objects. An exception to this rule is policies that are linked to the domain head (the top node of the domain). GPOs linked here that hold password

170

Introducing Windows Server 2008

settings are the administrative interface for the password and account lockout settings for domain objects. Actually, they are written back to attributes on the domain head object and take effect from there. Domain controllers that receive a password change request compare the settings on the domain head with the password, and they either allow the password change or deny it. So it’s important to understand that password and account lockout settings are maintained on the domain head in Active Directory. You also need to keep in mind that Group Policies are only the administrative interface and that password settings configured in any GPO linked to any other OU or site are applied only to the local user accounts of the computer object to which the policy applies. So, in the past, password and account lockout settings were limited to the domain and we were able to apply only one setting per domain. If we wanted to have different password policies, we were required to deploy multiple domains. This has been changed in Windows Server 2008. Active Directory is extended, and the password settings validation on the domain controllers have been extended so that we are able to configure multiple password and account lockout settings for each domain now. How are they administered? Not via GPO—as mentioned before, GPO has been only an administrative interface. So the new fine-grained password policies are configured as new objects in the domain and are linked to either groups or users in the domain. If you want to experiment with this, simply use ADSIEdit.msc. Expand the Password Settings Container underneath the System Container in the domain, right-click, and select New. You are prompted to fill in the following mandatory attributes, which define password and account lockout policies: ■

msDS-PasswordSettingsPrecendence This attribute is just a virtual number you can make up. (Be sure you leave some space in the numbering for future use.) It defines which password settings take effect if multiple settings apply to the same object (user or group, but settings on the user always take precedence over settings on the group). This will usually reflect on the “level” of the settings object. For example, if you have stronger settings, they have a lower value, and if you have higher settings, you’re probably assigning a higher precedence to them.

■

msDS-PasswordReversibleEncryptionEnabled This attribute is Boolean and defines whether you want to store the passwords of the accounts (that is, specify to whom the password settings object applies) in reversible encryption or not. The default and best practice is to set this value to FALSE.

■

msDS-PasswordHistoryLength This setting defines how many old passwords the user cannot reuse again (to prevent the user from changing the password back and forward to the same one or changing it multiple times until he’s able to reuse his old password). The domain default is to not allow the last 24 passwords of that user.

Chapter 7 ■

Active Directory Enhancements

171

msDS-PasswordComplexityEnabled This attribute is also a Boolean and defines whether the password needs to be complex (that is, it has at least three of the following character sets applied: lower letters, capital letters, numbers, symbols, or unicode characters). The domain default and best practice is to turn it on (TRUE).

■

msDS-MinimumPasswordLength This attribute defines the minimum length of a password in characters. The domain default is seven characters long.

■

msDS-MinimumPasswordAge The msDS-MinimumPasswordAge attribute does just what its name suggests—it defines the minimum age for passwords. The minimum age is necessary to prevent a user from changing her password x amount of times on the same day until she exceeds the Password History limit and can change the password back to the same value as before. This is a negative number that you can compile or decompile, using the scripts at http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms974598.aspx as a guideline. (The domain default is 1 day, which equals -864000000000.)

■

msDS-MaximumPasswordAge This attribute is just the opposite of the previous one. It defines when you have to change your password. It is also a negative number just like the previous one. (The domain default is 42 days, which equals -36288000000000.)

■

msDS-LockoutThreshold Defines how many failed attempts at entering a password a user can have before the user object will be locked. (The domain default is 0, which equals “Don’t lock out accounts after invalid passwords.”)

■

msDS-LockoutObservationWindow This attribute determines at which time the bad password counter should be reset. (The domain default is 6 minutes, which equals -18000000000.)

■

msDS-LockoutDuration This attribute determines how long a password should be locked. (The domain default is 6 minutes, which equals -18000000000.)

After you create your own password settings object (PSO), you have to link it to a user or group. I recommend, for administrative purposes, always linking it to groups instead of to users. (Otherwise, it will get messy and hard to administer.) To link the PSO to a group or user, you simply change its msDS-PSOAppliesTo attribute to the distinguished name of the group or user (for example, cn=Administrators,cn=Users,dc=example,dc=com). This is a multivalued attribute, so you are able to link the same PSO to multiple groups or users. For administrative purposes, there are also two attributes that help you determine which password policies are applied to which users or groups. On the group or user, you will find the msDS-PSOApplied attribute, which is actually the back link of the msDS-PSOAppliesTo attribute and lists all PSOs that are directly linked to this object.

172

Introducing Windows Server 2008

To help you figure out which PSO is the effective one, there’s the constructed attribute msDS-ResultantPSO, which shows you which PSO is effective for the object in question. At the beta stage that is current at the writing of this book, this is a new feature that lacks adequate administrative support in the graphical user interface. However, you are able to administer it easily using ADSIEdit.msc. And Joe Richards, a Directory Services MVP who wrote Active Directory command line tools such as ADFind and ADMod, has created a new command-line utility named PSOMgr.exe, which helps you create and link PSOs. You’ll find it at www.joeware.net. –Ulf B. Simon-Weidner MVP for Windows Server—Directory Services author, consultant, speaker, and trainer

Active Directory Lightweight Directory Services Another feature of Active Directory in Windows Server 2008 is the new built-in Active Directory Lightweight Directory Services (AD LDS) server role. Well, actually it’s not new because this is essentially the same Active Directory Application Mode (ADAM) feature that was available as an out-of-band download for Windows Server 2003 and Windows XP. What’s new is mainly that this directory service is now available as an in-box role that can be added to your Windows Server 2008 server using the Role Manager tool described in Chapter 4, “Managing Windows Server 2008,” instead of it needing to be downloaded from the Microsoft Download Center as in previous versions of Windows. So AD LDS is basically just ADAM, but what’s ADAM? ADAM (we’ll call it by its new name now, AD LDS) is basically a stripped-down version of AD DS that supports a lot of the features of AD DS (multimaster replication, application directory partitions, LDAP over SSL access, the ADSI API) but doesn’t store Windows security principals (such as domain user and computer accounts), domains, global catalogs, or Group Policy. In other words, AD LDS gives you all the benefits of having a directory but none of the features for managing resources on a network. Instead, AD LDS is designed to support applications that need a directory for storing their configuration and data instead of storing these in a database, flat file, or other form of repository. Examples of directory-enabled LOB apps that could use AD LDS include CRM and HR applications or global address book apps. Because such apps often require schema changes in order to work with AD DS, a big advantage of AD LDS is that you can avoid having to make such changes to your AD DS schema, as making mistakes when you modify your AD DS schema can be costly—think flatten and rebuild everything from scratch! And it’s particularly useful also if your directory-enabled LOB apps will be made available to customers or partners over an extranet or VPN connection because using AD LDS instead of AD DS in this scenario means you don’t have to risk exposing your domain directory to nondomain users and computers. Once you’ve added the AD LDS role in Server Manager, to use this feature you create an AD LDS instance. An AD LDS instance is an application directory that is independent of your

Chapter 7

Active Directory Enhancements

173

domain-based AD DS and can run on either a member server or a domain controller if desired. (There’s no conflict when running AD DS and AD LDS on the same machine as long as the two directories use a different LDAP path and different LDAP/SSL ports for accessing them. And you can even run multiple AD LDS instances on a single machine—for example, one instance for each LOB app on the machine—without conflict as long as their paths and ports are unique.) Let’s quickly walk through creating a new AD LDS instance and show how you can manage it: 1.

After installing the AD LDS role on your server, select the Active Directory Lightweight Directory Services Setup Wizard from Administrative Tools on your Start menu. This launches a wizard for creating a new instance of AD LDS on the machine:

2.

Select the A Unique Instance option, and click Next. Then specify a name for the new instance (using only alphanumeric characters and the dash in your name):

174

Introducing Windows Server 2008

3.

Click Next, and specify LDAP and SSL ports for accessing your instance:

4.

Click Next, and either allow the application to create its own directory partition when you install the application or type a unique distinguished name (DN) for the new application partition you are going to create:

5.

Click Next, and in the following wizard pages specify the location where data and recovery files for the partition will be stored, the service account under whose context the AD LDS instance will be running, and the user or group who will have administrative privileges for managing your instance. After completing these steps, you’ll be asked to select from a list of default LDIF files you can import to add specific functionality to your instance:

Chapter 7

6.

Active Directory Enhancements

175

Click Next to confirm your selections, and then click Finish to run the wizard and create the instance.

Once you’ve created your new AD LDS instance, you can manage it using ADSI Edit, an MMC snap-in available from Active Directory Lightweight Directory Services under Administrative Tools. To do this, open ADSI Edit, right-click on the root node, and select Connect To. When the Connection Settings dialog opens, specify the DN for the connection point to your instance (which was CN=CRM,DC=CONTOSO,DC=COM in our example) and click the Advanced button to specify the LDAP port (50000 in our example) for connecting to the instance:

176

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Clicking OK then opens your AD LDS instance in ADSI EDIT. Then you can navigate the directory tree and view and create or modify objects and their attributes in your application directory partition as needed to support the functionality of your directory-enabled LOB app.

Active Directory Certificate Services Let’s move on and briefly describe improvements to Active Directory Certificate Services (AD CS) in Windows Server 2008. We’ll focus on the following key improvements: ■

Improvements to certificate Web enrollment support

■

Support for Network Device Enrollment Service to allow network devices such as routers to enroll for X.509 certificates

■

Support for the Online Certificate Status Protocol to easily manage and distribute certificate revocation status info

■

The inclusion of PKIView for monitoring the health of Certification Authorities (CAs)

There are other improvements as well for AD CS—such as new Group Policy settings—but we’ll pass over these for now because they’ll be well documented once Windows Server 2008 RTMs. But we will also hear from the AD CS product group concerning some other enhancements to AC CS in Windows Server 2008.

Certificate Web Enrollment Improvements Enrollment is the process of issuing and renewing X.509 certificates to users and computers when a PKI has been deployed in your enterprise. Users and computers belonging to an Active Directory domain can take advantage of a mechanism called autoenrollment, which

Chapter 7

Active Directory Enhancements

177

allows them to automatically enroll domain-joined computers when they boot and domain users when they log on. Windows Server 2003 also includes a Certificate Request Wizard to enable domain users to request a new certificate manually when they need to. Users and computers that are not domain joined or that run a non-Microsoft operating system can use Web enrollment instead. Web enrollment is built on top of Internet Information Services and allows a user to use a Web page to request a new certificate or renew an existing one over an Internet or extranet connection. What’s changed with this feature in Windows Server 2008 is that the old XEnroll.dll ActiveX control for the Web enrollment Web application has now been retired for both security and manageability reasons. In its place, a new COM control named CertEnroll.dll is now used, which is more secure than the old control but whose use can pose some compatibility issues in a mixed environment. For reasons of time, we can’t get into these compatibility issues here, but see the “Additional Resources” section at the end of this chapter for more information on this topic.

Network Device Enrollment Service Support Another enhancement in AD CS in Windows Server 2008 is the inclusion of built-in support for the Network Device Enrollment Service (NDES). Let’s listen to one of our experts at Microsoft briefly describe this new feature (and see the “Additional Resources” section at the end of the chapter for links to more information on the subject):

From the Experts: Network Device Enrollment Service Network Device Enrollment Service is one of the optional components of the Active Directory Certificate Services (AD CS) role. This service implements the Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol (SCEP). SCEP defines the communication between network devices and a Registration Authority (RA) for certificate enrollment. SCEP enables network devices that cannot authenticate to enroll for x.509 certificates from a Certification Authority (CA). At the end of the transactions defined in this protocol, the network device will have a private key and associated certificate that are issued by a CA. Applications on the device can use the key and its associated certificate to interact with other entities on the network. The most common usage of this certificate on a network device is to authenticate the device in an IPSec session. –Oded Shekel Program Manager, Windows Security

Online Certificate Status Protocol Support Another new feature of AD CS in Windows Server 2008 is support for the Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP). In a traditional PKI, such as one implemented using Certificate

178

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Services in Windows Server 2003, certificate revocation is handled by using certificate revocation lists (CRLs). There has to be a way of revoking certificates that expire or are compromised; otherwise, a PKI system won’t be secure. CRLs provide a way of doing this by enabling clients to download a list of revoked certificates from a CA to ensure the certificate they’re trying to verify (for example, a certificate belonging to a server the client is trying to connect to) is valid. Unfortunately, once a lot of certificates have been revoked in an enterprise, the CRL can become quite large and have an impact on performance when authenticating over slow WAN links or during peak traffic times, like the beginning of the workday when everyone is trying to log on to the network at the same time. To improve performance in checking for revoked certificates and increase the scalability of a PKI system, Windows Server 2008 includes an optional Online Certificate Status Protocol role service you can install on a server by adding the Active Directory Certificate Services role using Server Manager. OCSP provides an Online Responder that can receive a request to check for revocation of a certificate without the client having to download the entire CRL. This speeds up certificate revocation checking and reduces the network bandwidth used for this process, which can be especially helpful when such checking is done over slow WAN links. AD CS in Windows Server 2008 even supports Responder arrays, in which multiple OCSP Online Responders are linked together to provide fault tolerance, increased scalability, or functionality needed for geographically dispersed PKI deployments. OCSP support is described in more detail in one of the links in the “Additional Resources” section at the end of this chapter. Meanwhile, let’s hear from one of our experts at Microsoft concerning this new feature:

From the Experts: Online Responder The Online Responder server rule implements the server component of the Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP). OCSP uses Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) and allows a relying party to submit a certificate status request to an OCSP responder. This returns a definitive, digitally signed response indicating the certificate status. The Microsoft Online Responder was built with scalability, performance, security, and manageability in mind. It includes the following two components: Online Responder Web Proxy Cache

■

First and foremost, this component is the service interface for the Online Responder. It is implemented as an Internet Server API (ISAPI) Extension hosted by Microsoft Windows Internet Information Services (IIS).

■

Online Responder Service

This component is a Microsoft Windows NT service (ocspsvc.exe) that is running with NETWORK SERVICE privileges.

–Oded Shekel Program Manager, Windows Security

Chapter 7

Active Directory Enhancements

179

Enterprise PKI and CAPI2 Diagnostics Monitoring the health of CAs in an enterprise PKI deployment is important to prevent problems from arising and to troubleshoot issues when they arise. The Windows Server 2003 Resource Kit included a tool called PKI Health that could be used to display the status of each CA in a chain of CAs; in Windows Server 2008, this tool has been renamed Enterprise PKI (PKIView) and has been re-implemented as an MMC snap-in. Using PKIView, enterprise PKI admins can check the validity or accessibility status of authority information access (AIA) locations and certificate revocation list (CRL) distribution points (CDPs) for multiple CAs within an enterprise that has a Windows Server–based PKI deployed:

PKIView isn’t the only way of troubleshooting problems with a Windows Server 2008–based PKI, however. Another useful tool is CAPI2 Diagnostics, which is described in the next sidebar contributed by one of our experts:

From the Experts: Troubleshooting PKI Problems on Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 Microsoft Windows Vista and Microsoft Windows Server 2008 have a new feature— CAPI2 Diagnostics—that can help you with PKI troubleshooting. This feature enables administrators to troubleshoot PKI problems by collecting detailed information about certificate chain validation, certificate store operations, and signature verification. In case of errors in PKI-enabled applications, detailed information—such as the low-level API results and errors, objects retrieved, and status flags raised at different steps—is available in the logs. This functionality can help reduce the time required to diagnose problems. For troubleshooting purposes, enable CAPI2 logging, reproduce the problem, and use the data in the logs to identify the root cause. To enable logging, follow these steps: 1. Open the Event Viewer, and go to Application And Services Logs\Microsoft\ Windows\CAPI2 to get the CAPI2 channel.

180

Introducing Windows Server 2008

2. Right-click Operational, and select Enable Log to enable CAPI2 Diagnostics logging. 3. To save the log to a file, right-click Operational and select the Save Events As option. You can save the log file in the .evtx format (which can be opened through the Event Viewer) or in XML format. 4. If there is data present in the logs before you reproduce the problem, it is recommended that you clear the logs before the repro. This allows only the data relevant to the problem to be collected from the saved logs. To clear the logs, right-click Operational and select the Clear Log option. 5. The default size for the event log is 1 MB. For CAPI2 Diagnostics, the logs tend to grow in size quickly, and it is recommended that you increase the log size to at least 4 MB to capture relevant events. To increase the log size, right-click Operational and select the Properties option. In the log properties, increase the maximum log size. To learn more about CAPI2 Diagnostics, check out the whitepaper titled “Troubleshooting PKI Problems on Windows Vista” at http://www.microsoft.com/ downloads/details.aspx?FamilyID=FE8EB7EA-68DA-4331-9D38-BDBF9FA2C266& displaylang=en. –Yogesh Mehta Program Manager, Windows Security

Other AD CS Enhancements Finally, let’s briefly hear from one of our experts on the product team at Microsoft concerning two more enhancements to AD CS in Windows Server 2008. Our first sidebar outlines some important changes to V3 certificate templates and the cryptographic algorithms they support in Windows Server 2008 (and in Windows Vista):

From the Experts: V3 Certificate Templates One important change in Windows Server 2008 and Windows Vista is the support for CNG (Suite-B). With Suite-B algorithms, it is possible to use alternate and customized cryptographic algorithms for encryption and signing certificates. To support these algorithms, a new certificate template version was added—V3. A V3 certificate template is enhanced in the following ways: ■

Support for asymmetric algorithms implemented by a Key Service Provider (KSP) for CNG. By default, Windows implements the following algorithms: DSA, ECDH_P256, ECDH_P384, ECDH_P521, ECDSA_P256, ECDSA_P384, ECDSA_P521, and RSA.

Chapter 7

Active Directory Enhancements

181

■

Support for hash algorithms implemented by a KSP. By default, Windows implements the following algorithms: MD2, MD4, MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384, and SHA512.

■

A discrete signature (PKCS#1 V2.1) can be required for certificate requests. Activating this option forces a client that uses the certificate autoenrollment functionality or enrolls a certificate through the Certificates MMC snap-in to generate a certificate request that carries a discrete signature. Selecting this option does not mean that a certificate that is issued from this template also carries a discrete signature. The setting applies to the certificate request only. Also, the setting is not relevant for certificate requests that are created with the certreq.exe command-line tool.

■

The Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) algorithm can be specified to encrypt private keys while they are transferred to the CA.

■

For machine templates, read permissions on the private key can be added to the Network Service so that services such as IIS have permission to use certificates and keys that are available in the computer’s certificate store. In previous versions of Windows, manually adjusting permissions on the computer’s certificate store is required.

■

The list of asymmetric algorithms is filtered based on the template purpose in the Request Handling tab.

–Oded Shekel Program Manager, Windows Security And our second sidebar describes the new restricted enrollment agent functionality in Windows Server 2008’s implementation of Enterprise CA:

From the Experts: Restricted Enrollment Agent Enrollment agents are one or more authorized individuals within an organization. The enrollment agent needs to be issued an Enrollment Agent certificate, which enables the agent to enroll for certificates on behalf of users. Enrollment agents are typically members of the corporate security, IT security, or help desk teams because these individuals have already been trusted with safeguarding valuable resources. In some organizations, such as banks that have many branches, help desk and security workers might not be conveniently located to perform this task. In this case, designating a branch manager or other trusted employee to act as an enrollment agent is required. The Windows Server 2003 Enterprise CA does not provide any configurable means to control enrollment agents except from enrollment agents’ certificates enforcement. The enrollment agent certificate is a certificate containing the Certificate Request Agent application policy extension (OID=1.3.6.1.4.1.311.20.2.1).

182

Introducing Windows Server 2008

The restricted enrollment agent is a new functionality that allows limiting the permissions that enrollment agents have for enrolling on behalf of other users. On a Windows Server 2008 Enterprise CA, an enrollment agent can be permitted for one or many certificate templates. For each certificate template, you can configure which users or security groups the enrollment agent can enroll on behalf of. You cannot constrain an enrollment agent based on a certain Active Directory organizational unit (OU) or container. As mentioned previously, you must use security groups. Note that the restricted Enterprise enrollment agent is not available on a Standard CA. –Oded Shekel Program Manager, Windows Security

Active Directory Federation Services Active Directory Federation Services (AD FS) is another important part of the overall IDA solution provided by Windows Server 2008. AD FS is designed to address a situation that is common in business nowadays—a partner or client that resides on a different network has to access a Web application exposed by your own organization’s extranet. In a typical scenario, the client has to enter secondary credentials to this when she tries to access a Web page on your extranet. That’s because the client’s credentials on her own network might not be compatible or might not even be known by the directory service running on your own network. AD FS is designed to eliminate the need for entering such secondary credentials by providing a mechanism for supporting single sign-on (SSO) between different directories running on different networks. AD FS does this by providing the ability to create trust relationships between the two directories that can be used to project a client’s identity and access rights from her own network to networks belonging to trusted business partners. By deploying one or more federation servers in multiple organizations, federated business-to-business (B2B) partnerships can also be established to facilitate B2B transactions between trusted partners. To deploy AD FS, at least one of the networks involved must be running either AD DS or AD LDS. AD FS has been around since Windows Server 2003 R2, but it has been enhanced in several ways in Windows Server 2008. For example, AD FS is now easier to install and configure in Windows Server 2008 because it can be added as a server role using Server Manager. AD FS is also easier to administer in Windows Server 2008, and the process of setting up a federated trust between two organizations by exporting and importing policy files is now simpler and more robust. Finally, AD FS now includes improved application support and is more tightly integrated with Microsoft Office SharePoint Services 2007 and also the Active Directory Rights Management Services (AD RMS) component of Windows Server 2008. Let’s learn some more about the improved import/export functionality in AD FS in Windows Server 2008 from some of our product group experts:

Chapter 7

Active Directory Enhancements

183

From the Experts: Using Import/Export Functionality to More Efficiently Create Federation Trusts There’s no doubt about it. Setting up a federation trust between two organizations can be a daunting task because of the many sequential steps involved in manually setting up both partners for successful AD FS communications. In this scenario, both administrators are equally responsible for entering in values and addresses (that is, URIs, URLs, and claims) within the AD FS snap-in that are unique to their company’s federation environment. Once this initial setup phase has been completed, each administrator must then provide these values to the administrator in the other organization so that a federation trust can be properly established. Even when these values are sent to the intended partner administrator, there is the distinct possibility that an administrator can accidentally type in a value incorrectly and inadvertently cause himself or herself many hours of headaches trying to locate the source of the problem with the new trust. In Windows Server 2008, improvements have been made that allow partner administrators to export their generic trust policy and partner trust policy into a small xml file format that can easily be forwarded via e-mail to a partner administrator in another organization. The generic trust policy contains the Federation Server Display Name, URI, Federation Server Proxy URL, and any verification certificate information; whereas the partner trust policy file also includes information about each of the claims. With this in mind, the second-half of the federation trust can then be quickly established by importing the partner’s trust policy and mapping the claims. This “export and e-mail” process adds the following benefits for the partner administrator who receives the xml file: ■

Expedites the process of establishing a federation trust because the administrator can choose to import the contents of the xml file in the Add Partner Wizard and simply click through the wizard pages to verify that the imported settings are suitable

■

Eliminates the additional step of importing the account verification certificate because the import process does this automatically

■

Provides for easy claim mapping

■

Eliminates the possibility of manual typing errors

You can test-drive this new functionality by walking through the Windows Server 2008 version of the AD FS Step-by-Step Guide. –Nick Pierson Technical Writer of CSD (Connected System Division) UA team –Lu Zhao Program Manager, Active Directory Federation Service –Aurash Behbahani Software Design Engineer, Active Directory Federation Service

184

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Another new feature of AD FS in Windows Server 2008 is the ability to use Group Policy to prevent setting up unauthorized federation servers in your domain. Here’s how some of our experts at Microsoft describe this enhancement:

From the Experts: Limiting Federation Service Deployment Using Group Policy In Windows Server 2003 R2, AD FS did not provide control mechanisms that prevented users from installing or configuring their own federation service. In Windows Server 2008, AD FS administrators can now turn on Group Policy settings that prevent unauthorized federation servers in their domain. This new setting helps to satisfy the needs of an IT department when they want to enforce compliance or legal process requirements. Once the Group Policy setting has been enabled, the value DisallowFederationService is inserted into the registry key on each federation server in that domain. Before an AD DS domain-joined computer running the Windows Server 2008 operating system can install the Federation Service server role, the server first checks to make sure that the Don’t Allow Non-authorized Federation Servers In This Domain Group Policy setting is enabled. If this setting is enabled, the installation of the Federation Service will fail. If it is not enabled, which is the default setting, installation of a Federation Service will be allowed and the installed Federation Service will function normally. The registry key value is checked only when the trust policy file is loaded, so there might be a delay between when the update appears that brings down the policy and when the Federation Service observes the policy. By default, the policy is read when a file change notification is received and also once every hour. Note that this feature applies only to Windows Server 2008 federation servers and does not affect new or existing installations of a Federation Service in Windows Server 2003 R2. –Lu Zhao Program Manager, Active Directory Federation Service –Nick Pierson Technical Writer of CSD (Connected System Division) UA team Finally, AD FS can be integrated with AD CS, but when problems occur with this scenario you need to know how to troubleshoot them. Here are some more of our experts explaining how to do this:

Chapter 7

Active Directory Enhancements

185

From the Experts: Troubleshooting Certificate Revocation Issues Certificate issues are among the top five AD FS troubleshooting hot spots for the product support team here at Microsoft. One particular AD FS-related certificate issue centers on a known routine process that checks for the validity of a certificate by comparing it to a CA-issued list of revoked certificates. This process, in the world of PKI, is known as certificate revocation list (CRL) checking. The revocation verification setting configured for an account partner on a federation server is used by the federation server to determine how revocation verification will be performed for tokens sent by that account partner. The revocation verification setting of the federation server itself, configured on the Trust Policy node of the AD FS snap-in, is used by the federation server and by any AD FS Web agent bound to the federation server to determine how the revocation verification process will be performed for the federation server’s own token signing certificate. The verification process will make use of CRLs imported on the local machine or that are available through the CRL Distribution Point. When troubleshooting certificate issues, it is important to be able to quickly disable revocation checking to help you locate the source of the problem. For example, this can be helpful in deployment scenarios where there are no CRLs available for the tokensigning certificates. To help troubleshoot CRL-checking issues, the AD FS product team has provided a method within the AD FS snap-in in Windows Server 2008 where you can adjust or disable how revocation checking behaves within the scope of a federation service. For example, you can set revocation checking to check for the validity of all the certificates in a certificate chain or only the end certificate in the certificate chain. –Nick Pierson Technical Writer of CSD (Connected System Division) UA team –Lu Zhao Program Manager, Active Directory Federation Service –Aurash Behbahani Software Design Engineer, Active Directory Federation Service –Marcelo Mas Software Design Engineer in Testing, Active Directory Federation Service

186

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Active Directory Rights Management Services The last (but certainly not least) IDA component in Windows Server 2008 that we’ll look at is Active Directory Rights Management Service (AD RMS). As we mentioned at the beginning of this chapter, AD RMS is the follow-up to Windows RMS. Windows RMS is an optional component for the Windows Server 2003 platform that can be used to protect sensitive information stored in documents, in e-mail messages, and on Web sites from unauthorized viewing, modification, or use. AD RMS is designed to work together with RMS-enabled applications such as the Microsoft Office 2007 System and Internet Explorer 7.0, and it also includes a set of core APIs that developers can use to code their own RMS-enabled apps or add RMS functionality to existing apps. AD RMS works as a client/server system in which an AD RMS server issues rights account certificates that identify trusted entities such as users and services that are permitted to publish rights-protected content. Once a user has been issued such a certificate, the user can assign usage rights and conditions to any content that needs to be protected. For example, the user could assign a condition to an e-mail message that prevents users who read the message from forwarding it to other users. The way this works is that a publishing license is created for the protected content and this license binds the specified usage rights to the piece of content. When the content is distributed, the usage rights are distributed together with it, and users both inside and outside the organization are constrained by the usage rights defined for the content. Users who receive rights-protected content also require a rights account certificate to access this content. When the recipient of rights-protected content attempts to view or work with this content, the user’s RMS-enabled application sends a request to the AD RMS server to request permission to consume this content. The AD RMS licensing service then issues a unique use license that reads, interprets, and applies the usage rights and conditions specified in the publishing licenses. These usage rights and conditions then persist and are automatically applied wherever the content goes. AD RMS relies upon AD DS to verify that a user attempting to consume rights-protected content has the authorization to do so. AD RMS has been enhanced in several ways in Windows Server 2008 compared with its implementation in Windows Server 2003. These enhancements include an improved installation experience whereby AD RMS can be added as a role using Server Manager; an MMC snap-in for managing AD RMS servers rather than the Web-based interface used in the previous platform; self-enrollment of the AD RMS cluster without the need of Internet connectivity; integration with AD FS to facilitate leveraging existing federated relationships between partners; and the ability to use different AD RMS roles to more effectively delegate the administration of AD RMS servers, policies and settings, rights policy templates, and log files and reports.

Chapter 7

Active Directory Enhancements

187

Conclusion Identity and access is key to how businesses communicate in today’s connected world. Active Directory in Windows Server 2008 is a significant advance in the evolution of a single, unified, and integrated IDA solution for businesses running Windows-based networks that need to connect to other businesses that are running either Windows or non-Windows networks. Keeping the big picture for IDA in mind helps us to see how all these various improvements to Active Directory work together to provide a powerful platform that can unleash the power of identity for your enterprise. I know, the Marketing Police are knocking at my door after that last sentence and they want to get me for that one. But whether it sounds like marketing gobbledygook or not, it’s true!

Additional Resources The starting point for finding information about all things IDA on Microsoft platforms is http://www.microsoft.com/ida/. Although this link currently redirects you to http://www.microsoft.com/windowsserver2003/technologies/idm/default.mspx, I have a feeling this will change as Windows Server 2008 approaches RTM. The Windows Server 2008 main site on Microsoft.com also has a general overview called “Identity and Access in Windows Server Longhorn” that you can read at http://www.microsoft.com/windowsserver/longhorn/ida-mw.mspx. By the time you read it, there probably will be more details on the site than there are at the time of writing this. You can also find a developer-side overview of the directory, identity, and access services included in Windows platforms (including Windows Server 2008) on MSDN at http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-us/library/aa139675.aspx. If you have access to the Windows Server 2008 beta program on Microsoft Connect (http://connect.microsoft.com), you can get a lot of detailed information about AD DS, AD CS, AD FS, and so on. First, you’ll find the following Step-By-Step guides (and probably others will be there by the time you read this): ■

Installing, Configuring, and Troubleshooting OCSP

■

Auditing Active Directory Domain Services Changes

■

Active Directory Domain Services Backup and Recovery

■

Planning, Deploying, and Using a Read-Only Domain Controller

■

Restartable Active Directory

188

Introducing Windows Server 2008 ■

Certificate Settings

■

Active Directory Rights Management Services

■

Identity Federation with Active Directory Rights Management Services

■

Active Directory Domain Services Installation and Removal

■

Active Directory Federation Services

Be sure also to turn to Chapter 14, “Additional Resources,” for more sources of information concerning the Windows server core installation option, and also for links to webcasts, whitepapers, blogs, newsgroups, and other sources of information about all aspects of Windows Server 2008.

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements In this chapter: Core Enhancements to Terminal Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 Terminal Services RemoteApp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Terminal Services Web Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Terminal Services Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Terminal Services Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Other Terminal Services Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 Additional Resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Terminal Services has been available on the Microsoft Windows platform since the days of Windows NT 4.0. So most readers of this book (all seasoned IT pros, I’ll bet) have some familiarity with it as a group of technologies that provides access to the full Windows desktop from almost any computing device, including other Windows computers, Mobile PC devices, thin clients, and so on. When you access a terminal server from one of these devices, the server is doing all the hard work of running your applications, while a protocol named Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP) sends keyboard and mouse input from client to server and displays information in return. In addition to enabling administrators to run programs remotely like this, Terminal Services also lets administrators remotely control Windows computers that have Remote Desktop (a Terminal Services feature) enabled on them. Anyway, if you work in a medium-sized organization, you likely have at least one Windows terminal server running either Windows 2000 Server or Windows Server 2003. And larger enterprises likely have a whole farm of them load-balanced together. Either way, you need to take a good hard look at what improvements are coming to Terminal Services in Windows Server 2008, and that’s what this chapter is about. Because this book is brief and covers so many different new features and enhancements found in Windows Server 2008, I’m going to assume you’re already familiar with basic Terminal Services concepts and terminology, including Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP), the two Terminal Services clients (Remote Desktop Connection and the Remote Desktop Web Connection ActiveX control), the two Terminal Service modes (Remote Desktop for Administration and the Terminal Server role), and Terminal Services Session Broker—plus

189

190

Introducing Windows Server 2008

various other things, such as console session, client resource redirection, and the different tools (MMC snap-ins, Group Policy, WMI scripts) you can use to configure and manage Terminal servers and their clients. If you’re not up to speed on any of these topics, you can find a good overview a whitepaper titled “Technical Overview of Windows Server 2003 Terminal Services,” which is available from http://go.microsoft.com/?linkid=2606110. Another good general source of information concerning Terminal Services is the Windows Server 2003 Terminal Services Technology Center found at http://www.microsoft.com/windowsserver2003/ technologies/terminalservices/default.mspx. Or you can just buy a mainframe if you find your server room too quiet for your liking. (See Chapter 3, “Windows Server Virtualization,” for why we need to bring back the mainframe—remember those days? You can probably get one at a bargain on eBay.) Because there have been so many enhancements to Terminal Services in Windows Server 2008, we’ll need a roadmap to navigate this chapter. So here’s a quick list of the new and enhanced features we’re going to cover: ■

Core Enhancements to Terminal Services

■

Terminal Services RemoteApp

■

Terminal Services Web Access

■

Terminal Services Gateway

■

Terminal Services Easy Print

■

Terminal Services Session Broker

■

Terminal Services Licensing

■

Terminal Services WMI Provider

■

Deploying Terminal Services

■

Other Terminal Services Enhancements

Before we start looking at these enhancements, however, be warned—I’m not just going describe their features. I’ll also provide you with tons of valuable insights, recommendations, and troubleshooting tips from the people who are bringing you Terminal Services in Windows Server 2008. In other words, you’ll hear from members of the Terminal Services product team themselves! Well, that’s not a warning, is it? Do you warn your kids at the end of June by saying, “Warning, summer vacation ahead?”

Core Enhancements to Terminal Services Windows Server 2008 has a number of core improvements in how Terminal Service works. Most of the improvements we’ll look at were first introduced in Windows Vista, but for some

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

191

of these enhancements to work in Windows Vista you need Windows Server 2008 running on the back end as your terminal server. Many of these improvements center around changes to the Remote Desktop Connection client that comes with Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008, so let’s begin there. After that, we’ll look at some core changes on the server side that change some of the ways Terminal Services operates and that terminal server admins need to know about. Finally, we’ll briefly look at how to install Terminal Services, and then move on to other new features such as TS Gateway, TS Web Access, and TS RemoteApp.

Remote Desktop Connection 6.0 On previous versions of Windows, there were effectively two Terminal Services clients: ■

Remote Desktop Connection, a Win32 client application that is the “full” Terminal Services client and is included in Windows XP and Windows Server 2003. You could also download a version of this client (msrdpcli.exe) that could be installed on earlier Windows versions to provide similar functionality.

■

Remote Desktop Web Connection, an ActiveX control you could download from a Web page running on IIS and then use to connect over the Internet to a terminal server. Remote Desktop Web Connection has slightly less functionality than the full Terminal Services client but is easy to deploy—just download it using a Web browser and you can open a Terminal Services session within your Web browser.

Starting with Windows Vista, however (and in Windows Server 2008 too), this ActiveX control has been integrated into the Remote Desktop Connection client, so there is only one client now and users don’t have to download anything to access terminal servers over the Internet. This is good because some organizations might have security policies in place that prevent users from downloading ActiveX controls onto their client machines. This new version 6.0 client (which is also available for Windows XP Service Pack 2—see article 925876 in the Microsoft Knowledge Base for more info) provides a number of significant improvements in the areas of user experience and security. Let’s look at security first.

Network Level Authentication and Server Authentication Remote Desktop Connection 6.0 (let’s shorten this to RDC 6.0) supports Network Level Authentication (NLA), a new authentication method that authenticates the user, the client machine, and server credentials against each other. This means client authentication is now performed before a Terminal Services session is even spun up and the user is presented with a logon screen. With previous RDC clients, the Terminal Services session is started as soon as the user clicks Connect, and this can create a window of opportunity for malicious users to perform denial of services attacks or steal credentials via man-in-the-middle attacks.

192

Introducing Windows Server 2008

To configure NLA, open the System item from Control Panel, click Remote Settings, and select the third option as shown here:

The other security enhancement in RDP 6.0 is Server Authentication, which uses Transport Layer Security (TLS) and enables clients to be sure that they are connecting to the legitimate terminal server and not some rogue server masquerading as the legitimate one. To ensure Server Authentication is used on the client side, open RDC and on the Advanced tab select the Don’t Connect If Authentication Fails (Most Secure) setting from the drop-down list box (the default setting is Warn Me If Authentication Fails).

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

193

You can also configure Server Authentication using the Terminal Services Configuration snapin. Using Network Level Authentication together with Server Authentication can help reduce the threat of denial of service attacks and man-in-the-middle attacks.

Display Improvements RDC 6.0 also provides users with a considerably enhanced user experience in the area of display improvements. For one thing, Terminal Services sessions now support a maximum display resolution of 4096 × 2048. (Boy, I wish I had a monitor that supported that!) And although before only 4:3 display resolution ratios were supported, now you can define custom resolutions like 16:9 or 16:10 to get the more cinematic experience supported by today’s widescreen monitors. Setting a custom resolution can be done from the RDC UI or by editing a saved .rdp file using Notepad or by starting RDC from a command line using switches—that is, typing mstsc /w:width /h:height at a command prompt. Another display improvement is support for spanned monitors—that is, spreading the display across multiple monitors. Note that to do this you have to make sure that all your monitors have the same resolution configured and their total resolution doesn’t exceed 4096 × 2048. Additionally, you can span monitors only horizontally, not vertically (better for the neck, actually) using the /span switch. A third display improvement is that RDC now supports full 32-bit color depth, which means that users can now experience maximum color quality when running applications in Terminal Services sessions. Personally, I can’t tell the difference between True Color (24-bit) and Highest Quality (32-bit), but I suppose someone who works with Photoshop can quickly notice the difference. To get 32-bit color, you need to configure it both on the client (on the Display tab of the RDC properties) and on the terminal server, which must be running Windows Server 2008. Or you can configure 32-bit color from the server by opening the Terminal Services Configuration snap-in and double-clicking on the RDP connection you want to configure (like the default RDP-Tcp connection). Then switch to the Client Settings tab of the connection’s properties dialog box and change the color depth to 32 bits per pixel. In fact, 32-bit color is now the default; this is because for typical higher-color applications, such as IE and PowerPoint, the new compression engine in RDP6 typically sends less data over the network in 32-bit color mode rather than in 24-bit color mode. If you need high color you should consider 15-bit, 16-bit, and 32-bit color before you consider 24-bit. Yet another display enhancement is support for ClearType in Terminal Services sessions. This feature of RDC 6.0 is known as font smoothing because it makes the fonts of displayed text a lot easier to read. You can enable this on RDC by selecting the Font Smoothing check box on the Experience tab.

194

Introducing Windows Server 2008

To ensure font smoothing is enabled on the server side of your Windows Server 2008 terminal server, open Appearance And Personalization from Control Panel, click Personalization, click Windows Color And Appearance, click Effects, and make sure ClearType is selected. Let’s now hear from one of our experts at Microsoft concerning the new font-smoothing feature of Terminal Services in Windows Server 2008.

From the Experts: Pros and Cons of Font Smoothing ClearType is a Microsoft font smoothing technique that improves the readability of text on LCD screens. With the proliferation of LCD screens and the release of Windows Vista and Microsoft Office 12, ClearType has become very important. Most of the fonts available in Vista and Office 12 are tuned for ClearType and look ugly when it is turned off. For these reasons, the Terminal Services team decided to give the end user the option to turn on ClearType. You can get ClearType in RDP 6.0 by going to the Experience tab and selecting Enable Font Smoothing. But the high fidelity of ClearType comes at a cost. Normally (with font smoothing disabled), fonts are remoted (sent across the wire) as glyphs. Remote Desktop Protocol remotes glyphs efficiently and caches them to reduce bandwidth consumption. With ClearType enabled, fonts are remoted as bitmaps and not as glyphs. Remote Desktop Protocol does not remote these bitmaps efficiently, resulting in increased bandwidth consumption. From our initial internal testing, we found that the impact of enabling ClearType for text editing/scrolling scenarios could range from 4 to 10 times the bandwidth consumed when the scenario was run with ClearType disabled. –Somesh Goel Software Development Engineer in Test, Terminal Services

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

195

Display Data Prioritization I’m separating out this feature from the other display-related improvements because it’s related both to display experience and to network utilization. In previous versions of RDC, you could be doing stuff on your remoted desktop when you decided to print a long document or transfer a large file, and then suddenly your keyboard/mouse responded sluggishly and your display became jerky and slow to update. What was happening? The file or print operation was consuming most of the available bandwidth between your client machine and the terminal server, and as a result, the RDP stuff (keyboard, mouse, display info) was having trouble getting through. RDC 6.0 solves this problem by using a new feature called display data prioritization, which automatically controls virtual channel traffic so that your keyboard, mouse, and display data is given a higher priority than other virtual channel traffic (such as the file and print data). The result of this prioritization is that your mouse and keyboard won’t become sluggish and your display won’t be adversely affected when you perform bandwidth-intensive actions like this. The default setting for display data prioritization in Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 is 70% allocated for display/input data and 30% for everything else. This ratio can be adjusted by modifying certain DWORD registry values located under the HKLM\SYSTEM\ CurrentControlSet\Services\TermDD registry key on your terminal server. The values you can tweak are these: ■

Setting FlowControlDisable to 1 disables display data prioritization, and all requests are then handled on a first-in-first-out (FIFO) basis.

■

FlowControlDisplayBandwidth specifies the relative priority for display/input data; its default value is 70, and its maximum value is 255.

■

FlowControlChannelBandwidth specifies the relative priority for all other data; its default value is 30, and its maximum value is 255.

■

Setting FlowControlChargePostCompression to 0 means that flow control calculates bandwidth allocation based on precompression bytes, although setting it to 1 uses postcompression bytes. (The default is 0.)

The key values you probably want to tweak are FlowControlDisplayBandwidth and FlowControlChannelBandwidth, as it’s the ratio between these two values (not their absolute values) that defines the display data prioritization ratio for your server.

Desktop Experience RDC 6.0 also enhances the user’s desktop experience by offering the option to provide users with desktop themes, photo management, Windows Media Player, and other desktop experiences provided by Windows PCs. Previous versions of Terminal Services didn’t provide this. Instead, users who use RDP to connect to terminal servers were presented with a Windows Server 2008 desktop look and feel that couldn’t be customized using themes,

196

Introducing Windows Server 2008

while popular applications such as Windows Media Player were also unavailable for them to use. To get the full desktop experience in a Terminal Services session, however, you need both RDC 6.0 on the client plus Windows Server 2008 as your terminal server. To enable desktop experience on the server, log on to your terminal server as administrator, start Server Manager, right-click the Features node, and select Add Feature from the context menu. When the Add Feature Wizard appears, select the check box beside Desktop Experience and continue through the wizard. After that, you need to start the Themes service on your server and configure the theme you want users to have in their sessions. Note that you don’t have to do anything on the client side, as support for the full desktop experience is built into the RDC 6.0 client.

Desktop Composition This enables the full Windows Aero desktop experience with its translucent windows, thumbnail-sized taskbar button window previews, and Flip 3D to be remoted. Desktop composition requires that client computers be running Windows Vista and that they have hardware that can support the full Aero experience. Remote desktop composition is supported only in two instances: ■

Remote Desktop to a Windows Server running terminal services in single user mode

■

Remote Desktop to a Windows Vista host machine

To enable desktop composition, first configure desktop experience on the terminal server, and then configure the server to use the Windows Vista theme. Then on the client, open the RDP properties, switch to the Experience tab, and select the Desktop Composition check box.

Plug and Play Device Redirection Framework RDC 6.0 also supports redirection of specific Plug and Play (PnP) devices in Terminal Services sessions, and it includes inbox support for redirection of Windows Portable Devices—that is, media players based on the Media Transfer Protocol (MTP) and digital cameras based on the Picture Transfer Protocol (PTP). PnP device redirection is designed to allow applications to access PnP devices seamlessly, regardless of whether they run locally or remotely, and it works with both full Terminal Services remote desktop sessions and with TS Remote App. When you launch your Terminal Services session, the redirected PnP device is automatically installed in the remote session, and PnP notifications and AutoPlay popups will appear in the remote session. The redirected device is scoped to that particular remote session only and is not accessible from any other session, either remote or console, on the remote computer. To enable PnP device redirection on the client, open the RDP properties, select the Local Resources tab, click More, and select the appropriate check boxes.

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

197

Selecting the Devices That I Plug In Later check box lets you see PnP devices get installed on the remote machine when you plug the PnP device into your local machine while the Terminal Services session to is active. Or you can enable PnP device redirection from the server by opening the Terminal Services Configuration snap-in, double-clicking on the RDP connection you want to configure, switching to the Client Settings tab, and selecting the Supported Plug And Play Devices check box. Once the redirected PnP device is installed on the remote machine, the device is available for use within your Terminal Services session and can be accessed directly from applications running on the server, such as RemoteApp programs you have launched from your client machine. Note that PnP device redirection doesn’t work over cascaded terminal server connections. How does PnP device redirection work under the hood? Let’s gain some insight by listening to another one of our Microsoft experts who works on the Terminal Services team:

From the Experts: Inside the PnP Device Redirection Framework One new feature in Microsoft Windows Vista was support for redirecting certain Plug and Play devices over a Remote Desktop Connection. Windows Server 2008 now adds this functionality to server scenarios. Although Windows Server 2008 includes only inbox support for Windows Portable Devices and Point of Service for .NET 1.11 devices, the PnP Device Redirection Framework is generic enough to support a variety of devices. PnP device redirection works by redirecting I/O request packets (IRPs). This approach provides several advantages. The server needs only a generic redirected device driver, rather than requiring a function driver for each device a client could possibly redirect.

198

Introducing Windows Server 2008

This also protects the server from possible instability caused by problematic third-party device drivers. On the client, IRP redirection allows local applications to continue to use a device while it is being redirected, and the same device can also be redirected to several simultaneous remote sessions. When a new connection is established with device redirection enabled, terminal server creates a proxy device node on the server for each device being redirected. Windows then starts WUDFhost.exe, which then loads usbdr.dll to act as the driver for each redirected device. One instance of WUDFhost.exe can support multiple devices, which improves terminal server’s scalability. When a server-side application calls NtCreateFile on a redirected device, usbdr.dll forwards this call over the RDP connection. On the client, Remote Desktop Connection then calls NtCreateFile on the real device and returns the result to the server. Additional I/O operations are handled in a similar manner. A generic redirected device driver is included, but special handling is needed for certain types of devices. For example, a digital camera needs to be identified as such so that the Windows Shell can provide the appropriate user interface. Likewise, additional information is needed about portable media players so that Windows Media Player will recognize that it can synchronize with the device. If the redirected device is a Point of Service for .NET device, additional steps are taken to enable it with Microsoft Point of Service for .NET 1.11. Third parties can add support for redirecting their devices as well, provided several requirements are met. It is recommended that redirected device drivers be based on the User-Mode Device Framework, although this is not strictly required. The driver’s INF file needs several additional sections to support the redirected version of the device. Windows Server 2008 includes the file ts_generic.inf, which can be included in driver INF files to easily add specific support for redirection. Including ts_generic.inf instructs Windows Server 2008 to use usbdr.dll as the device driver during a Terminal Services session, and usbdr.dll will automatically forward all operations to the client-side device driver. The relevant sections can be referenced using Include= and Needs= directives in the driver’s new sections describing the device in redirected scenarios. These added sections might also provide additional hints to optimize the driver under redirection, as was done for Windows Portable Devices and Point of Service for .NET devices. –Eric Holk Software Design Engineer, Terminal Services

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

199

Microsoft POS for .NET Device Redirection RDC 6.0 also supports redirection of Microsoft Point of Service (POS) for .NET 1.1 devices. Microsoft POS for .NET 1.1 is a class library that provides an interface for .NET applications to allow them to communicate with and run POS peripheral devices—for example, bar-code scanners, biometrics devices, and magnetic card readers. Note that Microsoft POS for .NET 1.1 device redirection is supported only for x86-based terminal servers running Windows Server 2008.

Terminal Services Easy Print Another enhanced device redirection feature of Windows Server 2008 is Terminal Services (TS) Easy Print. This enhancement greatly improves printer redirection by eliminating the need for administrators to install any printer drivers on the terminal server while guaranteeing client printer redirection and the availability of printer properties for use in remote sessions. TS Easy Print leverages the new XPS print path used in Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008, and here’s another of our product team experts to tell us more about it:

From the Experts: Inside TS Easy Print In the past, to successfully redirect a given printer, the proper driver needed to be installed on both the TS client machine and TS server machine. As many customers have experienced, the requirement of having the TS server host a matching printer driver caused configuration problems on the server. Simply put, this requirement had to go. As a result, TS Easy Print presents a printing redirection solution that is “driverless.” The only driver required is the TS Easy Print system that comes installed by default. The implementation of this solution comes in two pieces. The first piece is presenting the user with printing preferences through the UI so that he can configure the print job on any arbitrary printer. Instead of creating some server-side UI that shows the bare minimum of preferences users need (such as number of copies, landscape vs. portrait, and so on) and applying this UI to all printers, the TS Easy Print driver acts as a proxy and redirects all calls for the UI to the actual driver on the client side. When the user goes to edit preferences for a print job on a redirected printer, the TS client launches this UI from the local machine on top of the remote session. As a result, the user sees the same detailed printer-specific UI (ensuring that all printer options are available to the user) he would see if he were printing something locally. This is what creates the more “consistent printing experience.” The user’s selected preferences are then redirected to the server for use when printing.

200

Introducing Windows Server 2008

The second piece is the ability to send a print job from the server to the client and reliably print the job. To do so, we take advantage of Microsoft’s new document format, XPS. When redirecting print jobs, on the server, we create an XPS file using the preferences the user has selected, send the XPS file to the client, and, with the help of other printing components, print the job on the appropriate printer. The biggest advantage to using the XPS format is that it provides a high-quality print rendering system that is agnostic to the printer the job will actually be printed on. –Zardosht Kasheff Software Design Engineer, Terminal Services

Single Sign-On for Domain-joined Clients A key enhancement of Terminal Services in Windows Server 2008 is the ability to allow users with domain accounts to log on once and gain access to the terminal server without being asked to enter their credentials again. This new feature is called single sign-on (SSO), and it can work with both password-based logons and smart card logons. It’s designed to make it easier for enterprises to run business applications using terminal servers—users can use SSO when running either the full Remote Desktop or individual RemoteApp programs. I don’t know about you, but I hate having to enter my password twice—I hate passwords, too, because I have so many of them to remember. Smart cards are great because all you need to remember is your PIN, but I have several smart cards, which means several PINs, which means I hate PINs too. What a world we live in! Anyway, to implement Terminal Services SSO, you need both Windows Vista on the client side and Windows Server 2008 running on the back end for your terminal server. Plus you need an Active Directory domain environment. Enabling SSO is a two-step process that requires configuring authentication on the Terminal Server and then configuring the client to allow default credentials to be used for logging on to your terminal servers. To enable SSO on the terminal server, open the Terminal Services Configuration snap-in, double-click on the RDP connection you want to configure, switch to the General tab, and make sure either Negotiate or SSL (TLS 1.0) is selected for Security Layer. (The default is Negotiate.) Configuring SSO on the client can be done using Group Policy by enabling the Computer Configuration\Administrative Templates\System\Credentials Delegation\Allow Delegating Default Credentials policy setting and adding your terminal servers to the list of servers for this policy.

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

201

To configure clients for SSO to a TS Gateway server, you need to enable the User Configuration\Administrative Templates\Windows Components\Terminal Services\TS Gateway\Set TS Gateway Server Authentication Method policy setting and set it to Use Locally Logged-On Credentials. And, if you do this, you should also select the Allow Users To Change This Setting check box as shown here:

The reason behind this check box is that TS Gateway supports Group Policy settings slightly differently than other Windows components. Normally, Group Policy settings are enforced so that end users can’t change them. But when Group Policy is enabled for TS Gateway and this check box is selected, end users can change the way they authenticate with the TS Gateway server, for example, by using another user account to authenticate with the TS Gateway server. So enabling this setting as described above while also selecting this check box means that the TS Gateway admin is only suggesting the setting instead of enforcing it.

Other Core Enhancements There are other core enhancements to how Terminal Services works in Windows Server 2008, and to hear an explanation of these changes let’s listen to another of our experts from the Terminal Server team at Microsoft. First, here’s a description of an under-the-hood change in how the core Terminal Services engine works in Windows Server 2008.

202

Introducing Windows Server 2008

From the Experts: Terminal Services Core Engine Improvements In Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008, we did a bunch of improvements to the core TS engine. The core engine (termsrv.dll) was split into two components: lsm.exe (the core session manager component), and the termsrv.dll (which takes care of remote connectivity). LSM stands for Local Session Manager. It’s one of the core system processes started during boot, and it does session management. LSM also interacts with other key system components—such as smss.exe, winlogon.exe, logonui.exe, csrss.exe, and win32k.sys— to make sure that the rest of the OS is in sync with session management operations, loading the appropriate graphics driver, unloading the driver during session disconnect, and so on. The LSM manages all connections and provides Vista with features such as Fast User Switching (FUS) even if Remote Desktop isn’t enabled. The Termsrv service (termsrv.dll running inside svchost.exe) hosts the listener, which talks to a kernel-mode TDI driver to listen for incoming connection requests. It also does a bunch of session arbitration, interacts with License Server, supports Media Center extender sessions, talks to RDP layers in the protocol stack, and also communicates with LSM. Because of this, when someone needs to turn off remote connections, it can be done without turning off Fast User Switching (FUS), which enables multiple users to use the machine locally without a user ever having to log off! This is because LSM takes care of all the session management functionality needed by FUS. The other significant benefit here is security—only LSM runs with system privilege, and all the termsrv.dll code runs with network service privilege, which is at a much lesser privilege level. Only one-third of the old Termsrv code runs in LSM; hence, this is significant attack surface reduction when compared to Windows XP and Windows Server 2003. –Sriram Sampath Development Lead, Terminal Services The next sidebar deals with the impact that session 0 isolation has for those developing Terminal Services applications. Session 0 isolation is a new feature of Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 that is designed to enhance the security of the platform. In previous versions of Windows, all services run in Session 0 together with user applications, and this poses a security risk because services run with elevated privileges and are therefore targets for malware trying to elevate privilege level. In Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008, however, services are now isolated in session 0 while user applications run in other sessions, which means that services are protected from attacks caused by exploiting faulty application code. This design change affects how applications should be developed to run on terminal servers. Let’s listen to our expert explain this issue:

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

203

From the Experts: Session 0 Isolation and App Development Tips In Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008, session 0 is reserved for running System services—no interactive user logon is permitted in session 0 (called the console session in Windows Server 2003—that is, the session at the physical keyboard and mouse). One of the primary reasons for sandboxing services in their own session is for security—services, such as LocalSystem, usually run under very high privilege, and user apps run with far lesser privilege. However, if both of these run in the same interactive session, the lowerprivilege apps can easily attack the higher-privilege services. The most common way to do this is by using something called shatter attacks, which exploit the UI thrown by some services—for example, an error message UI or a status message UI. Because services run in their own session, service writers and app developers should follow these guidelines: ■

Don’t assume in your code that apps will run in session 0, and don’t assume that apps and services will run in the same session. For example, if your service created an event (which was not prefixed with the Global\ flag), don’t assume that your app will be able to see the event (or wait on it) automatically. Explicitly create named objects with the Global\ flag if you plan to use this model.

■

To determine whether the app is running in a physical console session, some apps these days check whether they are running in session ID 0. This is plain wrong to do, even in Windows XP and Windows Server 2003, but the fact of the matter is that some apps still do this. The correct way to do this check is to find the current session ID of the application using the ProcessIdToSessionId API. Then use the WTSGetActiveConsoleSessionId API to find the session ID of the physical console session; then check whether both of them are the same.

■

If the services want to display a UI (say, a status message), the best way to do it is to use the CreateProcessAsUser API and create a process in the target user’s session. This process should run with the same privileges of the logged-on user.

■

If the services need to interact with the app, the best way to design it is through a regular client-server mechanism—for example, the service and the app in a different session could communicate through a protocol such as RPC or COM, and the app could do the work in the user session on behalf of the service.

–Sriram Sampath Development Lead, Terminal Services Actually, this whole concept of Terminal Services sessions is worth digging into further, as there are some additional significant changes in how Terminal Services works in Windows Server 2008 compared with Windows Server 2003. What is a Terminal Services session, anyway? What possible states can a session have? What happens when a session disconnects

204

Introducing Windows Server 2008

and you try to reconnect to your terminal server? How does licensing work with Terminal Services sessions? (We’ll also look at Terminal Services licensing in more detail later in this chapter.) What’s the difference between a user session and an administrative session? What happens when contention occurs—that is, when your session limit is exceeded and you try to connect to another session? And how has the effect of the /console switch changed in Windows Server 2008 for Terminal Services sessions given the session 0 isolation feature described in the previous sidebar? These are all fascinating questions that have been bugging me for a while—and here comes another expert from the Terminal Services team to explain! Let’s listen and learn:

From the Experts: Understanding the Console Session This sidebar describes in detail the changes to the console session in Windows Server 2008. Sessions and Their States Whenever a user logs on to a machine (locally or remotely), he gets an interactive session. A session is a defined space which contains a collection of running processes representing the system or the user and his desktop and applications. Each session is identified by an ID. In Windows Server 2008, the first interactive user session is session 1, whether the user is logged on to the local terminal or connected remotely. The session IDs then increment as more users log on to the server. The session IDs are reused as users log off and previous sessions are terminated. The session, during its lifetime, transits through various states. The most interesting states are active and disconnected. If a user is actively working in the session, the session is in an active state. And if the user is not connected to the session while his application is still running, the session is in a disconnected state. Terminals—Local and Remote Whenever a session is in an active state, the session is attached to a set of input and output devices (keyboard, mouse, monitor, and so on). This set of devices will be referred to as the terminal for the purposes of this discussion. The terminal can be a local terminal—that is, the keyboard, mouse, and monitor, are physically connected to the server. The terminal can be a remote terminal—that is, the session on the server is bound to a keyboard, mouse, and monitor on the client machine. The remote terminal is also associated with a connection. The connection is an object that contains information about the remote connection—the protocol, stack drivers, listener, session extension drivers, and so on.

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

205

When the session is disconnected, it is not attached to any terminal. When the remote session (or rather, connection) is disconnected, the remote terminal and connection objects are destroyed. The local terminal, on the other hand, is never destroyed permanently. When the session at the local terminal gets disconnected, a new “console session” is created and a new local terminal is attached to that session. In this case, although the session is not in active state, it is attached to a terminal. Such a session is said to be in a connected state. For example, if you list the sessions that occur while no one is logged on to a local terminal, you will notice the session state of “console” session is reported as connected (this is displaying the CTRL+ALT+DEL screen). Session Reconnection The disconnected sessions might get reattached to different terminals, local or remote, when reconnect happens. The following example illustrates the sequence of events that takes place during a disconnect and reconnect scenario that involves logon at a local terminal: 1. When a user logs on to the local terminal, a session (session 1) is attached to the local terminal and is in the active state. The session local terminal is displayed on the local terminal; the name of the session is “console.” 2. When the user disconnects (or locks) the session, the session gets disconnected. At this point, session 1 is not attached to any terminal. When the local terminal is terminated, it creates a new session (session 2) that represents the local terminal (displaying the CTRL+ALT+DEL screen). A new local terminal is created and is attached to session 2. Session 2 is now in connected state. The session 1 remains in disconnected state. The name “console” is now assigned to session 2. 3. When the same user connects remotely to the server, a new remote terminal is created. By default, each user is restricted to single session. Because this user already had a disconnected session, his new remote terminal gets attached to the already existing session (session 1). Session 1 state changes to the active state with a remote terminal attached to it. 4. When the user disconnects the session, the remote terminal is destroyed and session 1 remains in the disconnected state. 5. Session 1 terminates only when the user initiates logoff or the administrator forcefully logs off that session using admin tools. Meaning and Purpose of /console and /admin In Windows Server 2003, the “console” is a special session with ID 0. This session is always bound to the local terminal. When a user logs on to the local terminal, he or she gets logged on to session 0. This session is never terminated unless the machine is shut down. There are certain things that could be done only in session 0. For example, several applications ran well only in console session. Several services ran only in session 0 and popped up UI, which could be viewed only by logging on to the local terminal (or session 0).

206

Introducing Windows Server 2008

The purpose of the /console switch in Windows Server 2003 is to connect remotely to the local terminal, specifically session 0. This is needed by administrators to install and execute those applications or view pop-ups given by services or simply to get back to the session on the local terminal. Also, it is the only way to administer the server remotely without consuming a TS CAL when Terminal Server is installed. In Windows Server 2008, session 0 is not an interactive session anymore; it hosts only services. The “console” session is the one that is bound to the local terminal. However, there is no single session that acts as “console” at all times. The session bound to a local terminal may be logged off or disconnected and a new session will be created and associated with the local terminal. At any point, whatever session is associated with the local terminal is named as “console” session. In Windows Server 2008, there is no need to connect remotely to this session called “console” because all sessions with remote terminals have the same capabilities as the session that is on the local terminal. For the applications that used to run only in session 0 before, fixes will be provided through shims by the OS App Compat component. The UI popped up in the services session (session 0) by legacy services will be available for viewing by a separate feature called “session 0 viewer.” In addition, the /console switch has been repurposed in Windows Server 2008 to administer the server without consuming a TS CAL, and because there is no longer a need to connect to the “console” session, this switch has been changed in Windows Server 2008 to /admin. In Windows Server 2003, when the /console switch is used to connect to the server, the user is connected to session 0. This behavior is applicable to both Remote Administration mode and Terminal Server mode. In Windows Server 2008, when the TS role is installed, the /admin switch either results in the creation of a new session or it reconnects to any existing session. In Remote Administration mode, /admin has no effect. In Windows Server 2003, when /console is not used, the user gets a new session even if he or she already has a session on the local terminal—no matter what the “Restrict user to single session” policy says. In Windows Server 2008, whether or not /admin is specified, the user will be reconnected to the existing session if the “Restrict user to single session” policy is set (this is the default). Remote Administration Sessions Using /admin When the TS role is installed, remote connections initiated using mstsc.exe consume a TS CAL. To administer the machine remotely without consuming a TS CAL, you can use the /admin switch (for example, mstsc /admin). By using /admin, you can have a maximum of two administrative sessions—just as the remote administration mode works— including the one on the local terminal. The /admin switch has no effect in remote administration mode.

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

207

There is a difference in the permissions needed to obtain an administrative session at the local terminal vs. at the remote terminal using /admin. To obtain administrative sessions remotely using /admin, the user must be part of the Remote Desktop Users group and should be listed in SD_CONSOLE. By default, only administrators are part of this ACL as well as the Remote Desktop Users group. The SD_CONSOLE ACL can be modified by administrators using WMI to provide more users with privileges to have administrative sessions using /admin. There is no UI to do this because, normally, there should be no need to change this. To obtain the administrative session at the local terminal the user needs to have the interactive user logon right (which is the highlighted policy below in secpol.msc):

Differences between Administrative Sessions and User Sessions There are a few behavioral differences between administrative sessions and user sessions: ■

For administrative sessions, the time zone is not redirected, even if it is enabled, whereas for the user sessions it is. This essentially means time-zone redirection is not available in Remote Administration mode because there are no CAL sessions.

■

The administrative sessions are exempted from the “Deny User Permissions To Log On To Terminal Server” policy in the Terminal Services profile of the user.

For example, if this check box is selected for any user, he cannot connect remotely by using mstsc without /admin. However, if the same user is listed in the SD_CONSOLE or is part of the administrators group, he can connect remotely using /admin.

208

Introducing Windows Server 2008 ■

The administrative sessions are exempted from the drain mode. If the server is in drain mode, you will not be able to connect remotely without /admin, unless you have an existing session on the server. However, you can connect by using /admin regardless of whether you have the required permissions.

■

The administrative sessions are exempted from the maximum session limit configured on the server (note that there still can be only two active /admin sessions at one time).

■

When the limit on number of administrative sessions is exceeded, the contention is handled by allowing the new user to negotiate with existing users (described below). There is no contention handling for CAL sessions. You can connect remotely as long as you have a valid CAL.

Changing an Administrative Session to a User Session (or Vice Versa) When a user connects to a server remotely using /admin, a remote terminal is created that consumes no TS CAL. When the user disconnects the session, the terminal is destroyed; however, the session is still an administrative session consuming no TS CAL. Now, when the same user connects to the server remotely again without using /admin, a new remote terminal is created. This remote terminal is connected to the existing session and consumes a TS CAL. This means, for example, that the session will no longer be listed in session contention UI when the maximum number of active administrative type sessions is exceeded. Contention Handling In Windows Server 2003, in Remote Administration mode, you can have a total of three sessions, regardless of their state. This can be one session at the local terminal and two remote sessions, or two remote sessions without /console and one with /console. In Windows Server 2003, in Remote Administration mode, when the number of sessions exceeds three, the fourth session gets an error message saying “Maximum number of sessions exceeded.” In Windows Server 2003, in Terminal Server mode, you can have a maximum of one remote connection for administration purposes that does not consume a CAL. If anyone is already logged on to the console, that user must be logged off. In Windows Server 2008, you can have a maximum of two active sessions (local or remote) for administration purposes. When a third user attempts to logon to an administrative session (for example, when a user initiates a remote connection using /admin or logs on to the local terminal) while two administrators are active, the user gets a dialog

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

209

in which she can request that existing users disconnect. The dialog looks like this (in this example, Admin1 and Admin2 are the active users using administrative sessions):

The check box for forcibly disconnecting an existing user does not exist if the new user is not a member of the administrators group. When you select a user in this dialog, the selected user gets a disconnect request similar to the one in Windows XP or Windows Vista clients; if the user does not respond, they will be disconnected after 30 seconds (the session is not logged off). The list of users contained in this contention UI does not include users who are using normal user sessions. Only those sessions that are created at the local terminal or at the remote terminal using /admin are listed in this UI. Note that while there can be maximum of 2 active sessions (local or remote), there can be multiple disconnected sessions coexisting on the server. –Mahesh Lotlikar Software Development Engineer, Terminal Services

Installing and Managing Terminal Services Before we end our discussion of core Terminal Services enhancements in Windows Server 2008 and move on to talk about other new Terminal Services features in this platform, let’s talk briefly about installing and managing the Terminal Services role. For small and mid-sized organizations, your friend here is Server Manager, which we introduced previously in Chapter 4, “Managing Windows Server 2008.” When you use the Add Roles Wizard to add the Terminal Services role, you’re presented with the following five role services: ■

Terminal Server Installs core Terminal Server functionality, and lets you share either the full desktop as in previous versions of Terminal Server or individual applications using the new TS RemoteApp feature. See the upcoming “Terminal Services RemoteApp” section for more information.

210

Introducing Windows Server 2008 ■

TS Licensing Lets you install a Terminal Services Licensing Server for managing

Terminal Server CALs. See the upcoming “Terminal Services Licensing” section for more information. ■

TS Session Broker The new name in Windows Server 2008 for the Terminal Services Session Directory feature of Windows Server 2003. See the upcoming “Other Terminal Services Enhancements” section for more information.

■

TS Gateway

■

TS Web Access Lets clients access terminal servers via the Web and start applications using a Web browser. See the upcoming “Terminal Services Web Access” section for more information.

Lets clients use HTTPS to securely access terminal servers on internal networks from outside clients over the Internet. See the upcoming “Terminal Services Gateway” section for more information.

You can choose one or more of these role services to install on your machine. Note that choosing TS Gateway or TS Web Access prompts you to install the Web Server (IIS) role and some additional features if these have not already been installed. Note also that choosing TS Gateway prompts you to install the Network Policy And Access Services role if this has not already been installed. For additional information on how to install roles and features, see Chapter 5, “Managing Server Roles.”

Unattended Setup of Terminal Services Larger organizations, however, will want to perform an unattended setup of Windows Server 2008 terminal servers. You can find more information about deploying Windows Server 2008 in Chapter 13, “Deploying Windows Server 2008.” For now, let’s hear from another of our experts from the Terminal Services product team concerning performing an unattended setup of the Terminal Services role. Isn’t it great how the product team took time out of their busy schedule to contribute these “From the Experts” sidebars to provide us with insights and share their expertise with us? Here’s our next sidebar:

From the Experts: Unattend.xml Settings for the Terminal Services Role This sidebar describes the Terminal Services settings that can be specified in your Unattend.xml answer file and applied during unattended installation. Thanks to Kevin London and Ajay Kumar for providing some of the descriptions of the settings covered here. Don’t forget that the recommended way to author answer files is to create them in Windows System Image Manager (Windows SIM). If you use one at all, you use a manually authored answer file and validate the answer file in Windows SIM to verify that it works. Because available settings and default values can change from time to time, you must revalidate your answer file when you reuse it. For information on Windows SIM,

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

211

please refer to http://technet2.microsoft.com/WindowsVista/en/library/d9f7c27ef4d0-40ef-be73-344f7c7626ff1033.mspx. Enabling Remote Connections (fDenyTSConnections) This setting is specified in the answer file to enable Remote Desktop using unattended installation: Component name: "Microsoft-Windows-TerminalServices-LocalSessionManager" Setting: fDenyTSConnections Possible values: false or true Default: true

If the value is true, Remote Desktop is enabled. If it’s false or the setting is not specified, Remote Desktop is disabled by default. If you want to enable Remote Desktop and if you use Windows Firewall, along with this setting, you need to enable a firewall exception for Remote Desktop. For the details on adding a firewall exception, refer to http://technet2.microsoft.com/WindowsVista/en/ library/aadfdd06-7e68-4c56-928e-f943d3cc4a421033.mspx. User Authentication Setting (UserAuthentication) This setting specifies how users are authenticated before the Remote Desktop Connection is established. If you do not specify this setting, by default you won’t be able to remotely connect to the machine from computers that do not run Remote Desktop with Network Level Authentication. Component name: "Microsoft-Windows-TerminalServices-RDP-WinStationExtensions" Setting: UserAuthentication Possible values: 0 or 1 Default: 1

The value 0 specifies that user authentication using Network Level Authentication is not required before the Remote Desktop Connection is established. This value corresponds to the following option in the system properties Remote tab:

212

Introducing Windows Server 2008

If this setting is not specified or if the specified value is 1, user authentication using Network Level Authentication is not required. This corresponds to the following option in the system properties Remote tab:

Security Layer Setting (SecurityLayer) This setting specifies how servers and clients authenticate each other before a Remote Desktop Connection is established. Component name: "Microsoft-Windows-TerminalServices-RDP-WinStationExtensions" Setting: UserAuthentication Possible Values: 0 or 1 or 2 Default: 1

This setting corresponds to the following options in the General tab of rdp-tcp properties in tsconfig:

The value 0 results in the RDP Security Layer option being selected during unattended installation. It means that the Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP) is used by the server and client for authentication before a Remote Desktop Connection is established. The value 1 results in the Negotiate option being selected. This is also the default option if this setting is not specified in the answer file. It means that the server and client negotiate the method for authentication before a Remote Desktop Connection is established. The value 2 results in the SSL (TLS 1.0) option being selected during unattended installation. It means that the Transport Layer Security (TLS) protocol is used by the server and client for authentication before a Remote Desktop Connection is established. Licensing Mode Setting (LicensingMode) This setting is applicable only when the Terminal Server role is installed. It specifies the licensing mode. Component name: "Microsoft-Windows-TerminalServices-RemoteConnectionManager" Setting: LicensingMode Possible Values: 2 or 4 or 5 Default: 5

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

213

This setting corresponds to the following UI option in the server configuration:

The value 2 means the licensing mode is “Per Device”; the value 4 means “Per User”; and the value 5 means “Not yet configured.” Disable Allow List Setting (fDisabledAllowList) This setting allows you to specify whether or not the unlisted applications are allowed to be used in single app mode. Component name: "Microsoft-Windows-TerminalServices-Publishing-WMIProvider" Setting: fDisabledAllowList Possible values: false or true Default: false

The value true means all the unlisted applications are allowed to be launched as an initial program. The value false means only unlisted applications are allowed to be launched as an initial program. Scope of License Server Automatic Discovery (Role) This configuration setting decides the scope of the License Server automatic discovery. Component name: "Microsoft-Windows-TerminalServices-LicenseServer" Setting: Role Possible values: 0 or 1 Default: 0

When this value is set to 1 and the License Server is installed on a domain machine, the License Server discovery scope is set to Forest. If it’s set to zero and the License Server is installed on a domain machine, the discovery scope is set to Domain. If it’s set to zero and the License Server is installed on a workgroup machine, the discovery scope of the License Server is set to Workgroup. You cannot set this setting to 1 on a workgroup. All other values are invalid, and a default value of zero will be used if an invalid value is provided. Also, if you have set the role setting to 1 on a domain machine—that is, the discovery scope is set to Forest—the admin needs to publish the License server in Active Directory after an unattended setup is complete. While applying unattended settings, we can modify only License Server registry settings and we cannot actually publish the License Server in Active Directory because Enterprise admin credentials are required to publish

214

Introducing Windows Server 2008

the License Server there. We have introduced two new ways in Beta 3 to publish the License Server after installation: ■

The first way is to use the new License Server configuration dialog in TS Licensing Manager (the admin console for TS License Server). Following are the steps to publish a License Server through TS Licensing Manager: 1. Connect to License Server. 2. Right-click on Server, and choose Review Configuration in the menu. 3. If the License Server is configured to be in the Forest discovery scope and it is not published, the configuration dialog will show the appropriate message. There will be a Publish button as well on this dialog if the condition in the previous sentence holds true. Just click the button and License Server will be published. 4. The TS Licensing Manager needs to be launched with Enterprise admin credentials for publishing to succeed.

■

The other process involves using the WMI method Win32_TSLicenseServer:: Publish(). You need to run this API under Enterprise admin credentials.

TS Licensing Database Folder (DBPath) This setting allows you to specify the folder in which the TS licensing data files will be stored. Component name: "Microsoft-Windows-TerminalServices-LicenseServer" Setting: DBPath Default: %SystemRoot%\System32\LServer

TS Web Access Web Site This setting allows you to set the TS Web Access to a nondefault Web site. Component name: "TSPortalWebPart" Setting: WebSite Default: Empty

TS Web Client Web Site This setting allows you to set the TS Web client to a nondefault Web site. Component name: "Microsoft-Windows-TerminalServices-WebControlExtension" Setting: WebSite Default: Empty

–Mahesh Lotlikar Software Development Engineer, Terminal Services

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

215

Managing Terminal Services Managing Terminal Services is a snap using the new Server Manager console we examined earlier in Chapter 4. Figure 8-1 shows the Terminal Services role management tools available in Server Manager after adding the Terminal Services role with the Terminal Server role service, as described earlier in this section. Additional snap-ins for managing features such as TS Gateway and TS Web Access will be displayed if these role services are also installed on the machine.

Figure 8-1 Main page of Terminal Services role in Server Manager

From the main page of the Terminal Services role in Server Manager, you can add or remove role services for this role, start and stop services, and view event log information involving Terminal Services. From there, you can select any of the sub-nodes beneath the Terminal Services role node and view information or configure settings relating to that role service. For example, Figure 8-2 shows the Terminal Services Configuration node selected, which displays key configuration settings for your terminal server. From this page, you can create a new connection using the Terminal Services Connection Wizard, double-click on an existing connection such as the default RDP-Tcp connection and configure its properties, or edit key Terminal Services settings displayed in the lower part of the details pane in the middle of the console.

216

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Figure 8-2 Main page of Terminal Services Configuration snap-in

Terminal Services RemoteApp Let’s move on now and discuss some other new features and enhancements of Terminal Services in Windows Server 2008. One of the biggest improvements in the area of experience features is Terminal Services RemoteApp, which enables users to access standard Windowsbased programs from anywhere by running them on a terminal server instead of directly on their client computers. In previous versions of Terminal Services, you could remote only the entire desktop to users’ computers. So when a user wanted to run a program remotely on the terminal server, she typically double-clicked on a saved .rdp file that the administrator previously distributed to her. This connected her to the terminal server, and after logging in (or being automatically logged in using saved credentials), a remote desktop would appear on her computer with a pin at the top pinning the remote desktop to her local (physical) desktop. The user could then run applications remotely on the terminal server from within her remote desktop, or she could minimize the remote desktop if she wanted to run applications on her local computer using her physical desktop. In other words, the user had two desktops. Needless to say, some users found this confusing, and I can hear the tired help desk person responding to the user’s call by asking, “Which desktop are you looking at now?” and the user responding “Huh?” TS RemoteApp solves this problem (and makes the lives of harried help desk staff easier) by allowing users to run Terminal Services applications directly on their physical desktop. So instead of having to switch between two desktops, the user sees the RemoteApp program (the program that is running remotely on the terminal server instead of on her local

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

217

computer) sitting right there on her desktop, looking just like any other locally running program. Figure 8-3 shows an example of two programs running on a user’s desktop: one of them a RemoteApp program, and the other one running locally on the user’s computer.

Figure 8-3 Local and RemoteApp programs running simultaneously on a user’s desktop

Can you tell which program is the remote one running on the terminal server and which is running locally? I’ll give you a clue—the Desktop Experience feature that we mentioned earlier in this chapter hasn’t been installed on the terminal server. Figured it out yet? That’s right, the client computer is running Windows Vista. The left copy of Microsoft Paint is running locally on the computer, while the right copy of Paint is running on the terminal server as a RemoteApp program. Both copies of Paint (the local program and the RemoteApp program) are running on the same desktop, which is the user’s normal (that is, local or physical) desktop—the new TS RemoteApp feature of Windows Server 2008 Terminal Services at work! Let’s see how we can make this work.

Using TS RemoteApp First, we’ll open Server Manager and select the TS RemoteApp Manager node under Terminal Services. (We could also open TS RemoteApp Manager from Administrative Tools.)

218

Introducing Windows Server 2008

TS RemoteApp Manager lets us specify which programs our Terminal Services users will be able to run remotely on their normal desktops. Right now, we have no programs on the Allow list, so let’s click Add RemoteApp in the Action pane at the right. This launches the RemoteApp Wizard. Clicking Next presents us with a page that allows us to choose which installed programs we want to add to the RemoteApp programs list. We’ll choose Paint.

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

219

Clicking Next and then Finish causes Paint to be added to the RemoteApp programs list with default settings. (We’ll examine these defaults in a moment.)

220

Introducing Windows Server 2008

If we select Paint in the center (Details) pane and click Properties in the Action pane, we see the default settings for running this RemoteApp program:

What these default settings indicate are that users will not be allowed to add their own command-line arguments when running Paint. (This is usually a good idea, though as far as I know, Paint doesn’t have any command-line switches.) The settings also indicate that the RemoteApp program will automatically be made available to users through Terminal Services Web Access (though we actually haven’t added that role service yet to our terminal server). In addition, we could change the name of the RemoteApp program to something other than “Paint” if we want users to know that they’re running the RemoteApp version of the program and not the version installed on their local computer—let’s not do this though as it’s more fun to confuse the user. (I’m talking like a jaded administrator here.) Anyway, once we’ve added Paint to the RemoteApp programs list, how do we actually enable the user to run the RemoteApp program? To do this, we need to deploy a package containing the RemoteApp information for Paint to our users. We can package our RemoteApp program in two ways: as a Windows Installer file or as a Remote Desktop Protocol file. Let’s use the Windows Installer file approach because as administrators we’re used to deploying Windows Installer packages to client computers using Group Policy.

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

221

Start by selecting Paint in our RemoteApp programs list, and then click Create Windows Installer Package in the Action pane. This starts the RemoteApp Wizard again, but after you click Next the wizard displays the following page instead of the previous one:

By default, we see that our Windows Installer package (which will actually be created with the extension .rap.msi, with RAP presumably standing for RemoteApp Package) will be saved at C:\Program Files\Packaged Programs. We could elect to save it there, or we could save it on a network share instead, which is likely the better choice. This page of the wizard also lets us customize the terminal server settings (server name, port, and authentication settings), specify that the package is digitally signed to prevent tampering, or specify Terminal Services Gateway settings if we’re using this feature. (We’ll talk about this later.)

222

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Accepting the default and clicking Next brings us to this wizard page:

Note that by default the RemoteApp program is going to be added to the user’s Start menu in a folder named RemoteApps. (We’ll see that in a moment.) By selecting the check box at the bottom of this page, we can also cause the RemoteApp program to launch whenever the user double-clicks on a file extension like .bmp that is associated with the program. Click through now to finish the wizard.

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

223

Now we just need to deploy the .rap.msi package by using Group Policy. I won’t show the details because we’re all pretty familiar with this procedure, so let’s just say we’ve deployed our package to our client computers and the package has been installed on these computers. Now when the user clicks Start and then Programs, the RemoteApp program can be seen on the Start menu:

Now we select Paint under RemoteApp, and the following appears:

224

Introducing Windows Server 2008

We’re also prompted for our user credentials because it’s the first time we’re running this RemoteApp program from our terminal server. After having our credentials authenticated, the following appears:

Once the RemoteApp is running, if we also start a copy of Paint locally from Accessories, then we’ve come full circle to our earlier screen shot, where we had two copies of Paint running, one showing the Vista theme (local mspaint.exe) and the other Classic Windows (remote mspaint.exe). We’re done! One more thing—what if we did have the Desktop Experience feature installed on our terminal server? In that case, both copies of Paint on our desktop would look identical. How could we tell then whether or not we’re using TS RemoteApp to run one of these copies? Try Task Manager—opening Task Manager displays the two copies of Paint that are running:

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

225

Notice that the remote version of Paint is clearly marked this way. Now right-click on the remote Paint application and select Go To Process. The Process tab now opens, and we see that mstsc.exe (in other words, RDC 6.0) is the actual process hosting our remote copy of Paint:

What do you think would happen if we start another remote copy of Paint? We’d have three Paint windows on our desktop, one local and two remote—but how many mstsc.exe processes would we see running on the Processes tab? Take a guess and then try it yourself to see whether you guessed right. See Chapter 13 for more information on trying out Windows Server 2008 for yourself.

Benefits of TS RemoteApp Now that we’ve examined the new RemoteApp feature of Terminal Services in Windows Server 2008, what do you think the benefits are? Several come to my mind: ■

No more user confusion over why they need to have two desktops instead of one. And that’s not to forget the gratitude your help desk staff will have for you.

■

A great new method for easily deploying new applications to users—that is, using small (generally less than 100-KB) .rap.msi files deployed using Group Policy software distribution.

■

Less work for you as administrator because you no longer have to configure entire remote desktops for users but only RemoteApp programs, and this you can easily do using a wizard.

226

Introducing Windows Server 2008 ■

No more getting caught up in the argument of whether Terminal Services is for rich clients or thin clients—RDP 6.0 together with RemoteApp makes every client rich.

What are some best practices for using TS RemoteApp? Well first, if you have some programs that are intended to work together—that is, they share data by embedding or linking using DDE—it’s a good idea to run these RemoteApp programs from the same terminal server instead of dividing the programs up onto different terminal servers. That way, the experience for users will be enhanced, and they will see better integration between different programs when they run them. And second, you should put different programs on different terminal servers if you have application compatibility issues between several programs or if you have a single heavy-use application that could result in users filling the capacity of one of your terminal servers. (Use the x64 architecture instead of x86, however, if you want much greater capacity for your terminal servers.)

Terminal Services Web Access Terminal Services Web Access (or simply TS Web Access) is another Terminal Services feature that has been enhanced in Windows Server 2008. The previous version of Terminal Services in Windows Server 2003 includes a feature called Remote Desktop Web Connection, which is an ActiveX control that provides essentially the same functionality as the full Terminal Services client but is designed to deliver it using a Web-based launcher. By embedding this ActiveX control in a Web page hosted on Internet Information Services (IIS), you enable a user to access the Web page using a Web browser such as Internet Explorer, download and install the ActiveX control, and initiate a session with a remote terminal server. The user’s computer does not require RDC—instead, the TS session runs within the user’s Web browser using ActiveX functionality. Remote Desktop Web Connection was limited, however, to running entire remote desktop sessions, not individual applications. In addition, the user had to be able to download and install the ActiveX control to connect to and start a session with the terminal server. And if the security policy on the user’s computer prevented him from downloading and/or installing ActiveX controls, he was out of luck and couldn’t use Remote Desktop Web Connection. Windows Vista, together with Windows Server 2008, enhances Remote Desktop Web Connection functionality in two basic ways. First, the RDC 6.0 client has this ActiveX control built into it, so users no longer need to download and install an ActiveX control to start a Terminal Services session within a Web browser—at least, they don’t have to do this if their client computer is running Windows Vista (which includes RDC 6.0) or if they are running Windows XP SP2 and have the RDC 6.0 update for Windows XP installed. (The RDC 6.0 update for Windows XP is described in KB 925876 and is available from the Microsoft Download Center or via Windows Update.) And second, TS Web Access integrates with the TS RemoteApp feature, allowing users to go to a Web page, view a list of available RemoteApp programs they can run, click an icon link for a particular RemoteApp program, and run that program on their computer. In fact, TS Web

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

227

Access includes a default Web page that you can use for deploying RemoteApp programs from a Web page. This default page consists of a frame together with a customizable Web Part that displays the list of RemoteApp programs within the user’s Web browser. And if you don’t want to use this default Web page, you can add the Web Part into a Microsoft Windows SharePoint Services site. Once a RemoteApp program has been started from the default Web page, the application appears as if it is running on the local computer’s desktop just like with the TS RemoteApp feature described previously. In addition, if the user starts more than one RemoteApp program from the Web page and these programs are all running on the same terminal server, all the RemoteApp programs will run within the same Terminal Services session.

Using TS Web Access Let’s take a quick look at how to make TS Web Access work. First you need to add the TS Web Access role service to a server running Windows Server 2008, and when you do this you’re also required to add the Web Server (IIS) role to your server, plus a feature called Windows Process Activation Service (WPAS). Once you’ve installed TS Web Access, you next need to specify a data source to use to populate the list of RemoteApp programs that will be displayed within the Web Part. Note that IIS can populate the list of RemoteApp programs displayed within the Web Part from either a local or an external data source, plus this list is dynamically updated so that if you add another application to the RemoteApp programs list in TS RemoteApp Manager, it will be displayed to the user the next time she opens the default Web page for TS Web Access. In other words, the Windows Server 2008 machine on which you add the TS Web Access role service (and hence, also IIS 7.0) doesn’t need to have the core Terminal Server role service installed on it as well. Thus, you could have one or more terminal servers for remotely running applications, and a single IIS 7.0 server that has TS Web Access installed on it to provide a way for users to access your terminal servers from a Web page and run RemoteApp programs on your terminal servers. The data source for populating the Web Part can be a specific terminal server, which causes all applications on the RemoteApp programs list on the terminal server to be made available for all users. In other words, using this approach means that all users will see the same list of RemoteApp programs when they view the page that has the Web Part embedded in it. Before we look at how to configure the data source, let’s jump ahead and actually try TS Web Access. Remember from our previous discussion of TS RemoteApp earlier in this chapter that, by default, when you add an application to the RemoteApp programs list using the TS RemoteApp Manager snap-in, the application is also made available for users to access via TS Web Access (even if TS Web Access has not been installed at that point). So you’ve already made Paint available using TS RemoteApp, which means the application should also be available to users via TS Web Access.

228

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Let’s check: from a Windows Vista client computer to which we’ve logged on using a domain user (non-admin) account, let’s open Internet Explorer and go to the URL http:///ts where is the name (hostname or FQDN) or IP address of our terminal server. When we open this URL and enter our credentials (and optionally save them in CredMan for future reuse), we see the following Web page:

Note the icon for Paint that is visible within the Web Part. If we click on this icon and respond to a couple of security dialogs (some of these security hurdles will likely go away between now and RTM to make the user’s experience even smoother), we see the same Connecting RemoteApp window followed by a “Do you trust the computer you are connecting to?” dialog (unless we previously selected the check box to not display that dialog any more). Then, once we’ve been authenticated and RDC have successfully connected to the terminal server, a remote copy of Paint appears running on our desktop—just as before with the TS RemoteApp feature. Note that Paint runs right on our desktop, not within our Web browser. What if you are an administrator and you want to configure the data source for TS Web Access? You might have noticed that when you installed the TS Web Access role service to your Windows Server 2008 machine that it didn’t add any TS Web Access sub-node under

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

229

Terminal Services in Server Manager. That’s because TS Web Access is really just an IIS application, which means you configure it using the Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager console. (See Chapter 11, “Internet Information Services 7.0,” for more information concerning IIS.) But you actually don’t need to do this here—instead, you can configure your data source using your Web browser! Just follow the same steps as shown earlier, but this time instead of specifying domain user credentials from a Windows Vista client computer, open Internet Explorer on your TS Web Access server and use your local Administrator credentials. (Alternatively, you can open IE either locally or remotely and specify credentials that belong to the TS Web Access Administrators local group on the TS Web Access server.) Once you do this, the Web page we just saw is displayed again, but with one significant difference:

Note the Configuration button that was displayed when we accessed this page as an ordinary user. Of course, the UI might change to some degree by RTM, and this chapter is currently being written using a near-Beta 3 build of Windows Server 2008, but the basic idea of how TS Web Access is deployed, configured, and used should stay pretty much the same. And if you want users to be able to securely access this TS Web Access Web page over the Internet, you can deploy the new TS Gateway feature of Windows Server 2008 to help ensure that users’ remote

230

Introducing Windows Server 2008

connections over the Internet to your terminal servers are secure. We’ll learn more about TS Gateway later in this chapter. Finally, if your client computer is running an older version of Windows, or if it is running Windows XP SP2 but doesn’t have the RDC 6.0 update installed on it, you can still access an entire remote desktop on the terminal server from within your Web browser by opening the URL http:///tsweb instead of http:///ts. By doing this, you can use Remote Desktop Web Connection on your client computer, download and install the ActiveX control needed, and run a separate remote desktop on top of your physical desktop. Now let’s learn some more about administering this feature from one of our experts on the Terminal Services team at Microsoft. First, let’s look at how we can increase the number of remote desktops available to any terminal server on our network. We’ll hear again from our expert on the team concerning this and see that the procedure involves editing the registry so that all the usual warnings apply concerning this:

From the Experts: Setting Up Multiple Remote Desktops for TS Web Access to Discover The RemoteApp manager has only a setting to show the desktop connection for the Terminal Server that the RemoteApp manager is connected to. But you can easily have an arbitrary number of desktops connected to any server in your network. First, for desktops to be available you have to make sure the TS Web Access (TSWA) site is set up in the Terminal Server mode. That is, it should be pointed at a single Terminal Server. There are then two tasks you need to accomplish to make a new desktop available for TSWA: create a registry entry for the new desktop, and create an RDP file that represents the connection settings for the desktop. You can use the WMI interface or manually create the entries, but I will discuss how to manually create the entries. Also, remember you must be an administrator on the Terminal Server box while making these changes. First, create the registry key for the new desktop. All desktop registry keys are located in HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows NT\CurrentVersion\ Terminal Server\TSAppAllowList\RemoteDesktops. Create a new key with the name of the desktop—for example, server1.mycorp.net. Inside this new registry key, you need to create the following values: 1. Create IconPath as a REG_SZ. This should be the fully qualified path to either the executable or dll that contains the icon you want to use or the path to the icon file itself. If it is an icon file, it must end in .ico. If you leave this empty, the mstsc client icon will be used instead.

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

231

2. Create IconIndex as a REG_DWORD. This should be the index of the icon in the file specified by IconPath. If you use an icon ID instead of an index, it needs to be negative. For example: –2 specifies the icon with an ID of 2, while 2 specifies the third icon in the file. (The index starts at 0.) 3. Create Name as a REG_SZ. This will be the name shown to the users that visit the TSWA site. 4. Create ShowInTSWA as a REG_DWORD. Set this to 1 or the desktop will not be shown in the TSWA site. Next, the RDP file needs to be created for the desktop. The easiest way to do this is to open up the mstsc client. Apply the settings that you want to use, and save this from the client as the name of the registry key that you created under the RemoteDesktops registry key. In this example, you want to save it as server1.mycorp.net.rdp. This file needs to be moved to %WINDIR%\RemotePackages\RemoteDesktops, and all users need to be able to read the RDP file. Once this is done, the desktop will show up in the TSWA site (though there might be some lag time until the cache expires or is reset by an administrator of the TSWA site). –Kevin London Software Design Engineer, Terminal Services Next, here’s how you can move the Web site for TS Web Access in IIS from the Default Web Site to some other Web site running on your IIS server should you need to do this:

From the Experts: Changing TS Web Access from the Default Web Site You might want to have TSWA on a non-default Web site because you might want to use a nonstandard port to connect to TSWA. Or you might have other reasons to move TSWA to a non-default Web site. Several steps need to be done before installing TSWA to accomplish this task, but they are easy and straightforward: 1. Install IIS. 2. Start the management console for IIS. 3. Right-click on the top-level node and click Add Website. 4. Give it a name, and note that you need to use a nonstandard port or a different NIC.

232

Introducing Windows Server 2008

5. Create the registry key HKLM\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Terminal Server Web Access Website (which is a REG_SZ), and set this to the name specified in step 4. 6. Install the TS WebAccess role. After you complete this procedure, TS Web Access will be created on a non-default Web site. –Kevin London Software Design Engineer, Terminal Services

Benefits of TS Web Access What are some possible benefits of using TS Web Access? How about really simple application deployment? (“Hey user, go to this Web page and click this icon and Excel will open.”) We’re talking about a technology that is ideal for low-complexity scenarios. Plus it can be customized to use with SharePoint, which is enormously popular in the enterprise environment nowadays. How should you best implement this feature? Use it mainly if you have a single terminal server, as it’s really not intended for multiserver scenarios. That’s about it.

Terminal Services Gateway Another new feature of Windows Server 2008 is Terminal Services Gateway (or TS Gateway), which is designed to provide authorized users with secure, encrypted access over the Internet to terminal servers on your internal corpnet. In other words, a salesperson arriving at a hotel in Hong Kong could open his Windows Vista laptop to bring it out of sleep mode, connect to the Internet using a hot spot in the lobby, and launch a RemoteApp program on his machine that actually runs far away on a Terminal Server hidden behind your company’s perimeter firewall at headquarters in New York. Or, depending on how your administrator has defined its resource authorization policies, the user might be able to access the remote desktop of his own desktop computer in New York, provided Remote Desktop has been enabled on it. And if the remote user is an administrator, he could access the remote desktop of any servers within his internal corpnet (provided Remote Desktop is enabled on them) and securely manage those servers and do whatever tasks he needs to perform on them. All I can say concerning this TS Gateway feature is what Edward Norton said in one of my favorite movies, Rounders: “Wow. Wow. A lot of action. A lot of action.” And you can do all this without having to use a virtual private network (VPN) connection. Plus this will work regardless of the type of perimeter firewall your company has set up, or even if your business is using Network Address Translation (NAT). As Figure 8-4 illustrates, all

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

233

it takes to make all this work is that your perimeter firewall has to allow TCP port 443 so that HTTP SSL traffic can pass through from the outside. 1. Client contacts TS Web Access 2. Tunnel established to TS Gateway 3. AD and NPS checked 4. Connection complete

Vista RDC (TS) client

AD/ISA/NAP policy rules

TS Gateway AD/ISA/NAP checked RDP over HTTP/S established to host

Terminal Servers or XP / Vista

User browses to TS Web Access TS Web access Internet

Perimeter network

Internal network

Figure 8-4 How TS Gateway works

As this figure illustrates, TS Gateway works by enabling tunneling of RDP traffic over HTTPS (HTTP with SSL encryption). The client computer at the left is attempting to connect to the terminal servers at the right that are hidden behind a pair of firewalls with a perimeter network subnet in between them. The TS Gateway is sitting between the firewalls on the screened subnet, and when the incoming RDP over HTTP traffic reaches the external firewall, the firewall strips off the HTTP part and passes the RDP packets to the TS Gateway. The TS Gateway can then use the Network Policy Server to verify whether the user is allowed to connect to the terminal server, and will use Active Directory to authenticate the remote user. Once the user is authenticated, she can access the internal terminal servers and run RemoteApp programs on them as described previously in this chapter. TS Gateway will support NAP so that when a remote client computer tries to connect to a terminal server on your internal corpnet, the remote client first has to undergo the required health check to make sure it has the latest security updates installed, has an up-to-date antivirus signature, has its host firewall enabled, and so on. After all, you don’t want unhealthy (read: infected with worms and other malware) remote computers to be able to connect to your internal terminal servers and infect your whole network! One thing to note, however, is that NAP will not be able to perform remediation for unhealthy clients connecting

234

Introducing Windows Server 2008

through TS Gateway—it simply blocks them from accessing your internal terminal servers. In addition, device redirection is blocked for remote clients connecting via TS Gateway (though best practice is actually to block such redirection on your terminal servers and not on your TS Gateway). An alternative to placing your TS Gateway on the perimeter network is to put it on your corpnet—that is, behind your internal firewall. Then place an SSL terminator in your perimeter network to forward incoming RDP traffic securely to your TS Gateway. Either way you implement this, however, one advantage of this new feature is that you don’t need to worry about using an SSL VPN any longer and all the headaches associated with getting this working properly. This integration with Network Access Protection (NAP) is an important aspect of TS Gateway because many mid- and large-sized organizations that will deploy Windows Server 2008 will probably do so because of NAP (and also, of course, because of the many enhancements in Terminal Services on the new platform). (We’ll be covering NAP in Chapter 10, “Implementing Network Access Protection.”) Before we go any further, let’s hear from one more of our experts:

From the Experts: Better Together: TS Gateway, ISA Server, and NAP Terminal Services–based remote access has long been used as a simpler, lower-risk alternative to classical layer 2 VPN technologies. Whereas the layer 2 VPN has often provided “all ports, all protocols” access to an organization’s internal network, the Terminal Services approach restricts connectivity to a single well-defined port and protocol. However, as more and more capability has ascended the stack into RDP (such as copy/paste and drive redirection), the potential attack vectors have risen as well. For example, a remote drive made available over RDP can present the same kinds of security risks as one mapped over native CIFS/SMB transports. With the advent of TS Gateway, allowing workers to be productive from anywhere has never been easier. TS Gateway also includes several powerful security capabilities to make this access secure. In addition to its default encryption and authentication capabilities, TS Gateway can be combined with ISA Server and Network Access Protection to provide a secure, manageable access method all the way from the client, through the perimeter network, to the endpoint terminal server. Combining these technologies allows an organization to reap the benefits of rich RDP-based remote access, while mitigating the potential exposure this access can bring. ISA Server adds two primary security capabilities to the TS Gateway solution. First, because it can act as an SSL terminator, it allows for more secure placement of TS Gateway servers. Because ISA can be the Internet-facing endpoint for SSL traffic, the TS Gateway itself does not need to be placed within the perimeter network. Instead,

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

235

the TS Gateway can be kept on the internal network and the ISA Server can forward traffic to it. However, if ISA were simply performing traffic forwarding, it would be of little real security benefit. Thus, the second main security value ISA brings to the solution is pre-authentication capabilities. Rather than simply terminating SSL traffic and forwarding frames on to the TS Gateway, ISA authenticates users before they ever contact the TS Gateway, ensuring that only valid users are able to communicate with it. Using ISA as the SSL endpoint and traffic inspection device allows for better placement of TS Gateway resources and ensures that they receive only inspected, clean traffic from the Internet. Although ISA Server provides important network protection abilities to a TS Gateway solution, it does not address client-side threats. For example, users connecting to a TS Gateway session might have malicious software running on their machines or be noncompliant with the organization’s security policy. To mitigate against these threats, TS Gateway can be integrated with Network Access Protection to provide enforcement of security and healthy policies on these remote machines. NAP is included in Windows Server 2008 and can be run on the same machine as TS Gateway, or TS Gateway can be configured to use an existing NAP infrastructure running elsewhere. When combined with TS Gateway, NAP provides the same policy-based approach to client health and enforcement as it does on normal (not RDP-based) network connections. Specifically, NAP can control access to a TS Gateway based on a client’s security update, antivirus, and firewall status. For example, if you choose to enable redirected drives on your terminal servers, you might require that clients have antivirus software running and up to date. NAP allows organizations to ensure that computers connecting to a TS Gateway are healthy and compliant with its security policies. –John Morello Senior Program Manager, Windows Server Division One other thing about ISA is that it does inspect the underlying HTTP stream when being accessed over port 80, and although this is not RDP/HTTP inspection, it does afford additional protection from anything that might try to piggyback on the HTTP connection itself.

Implementing TS Gateway Implementing TS Gateway on a server running Windows Server 2008 requires that you add the TS Gateway role service for the Terminal Services role. When you do this using Server Manager, you are prompted to add the following roles and features as well (if they are not already installed): ■

Network Policy and Access Server role (specifically, the Network Policy Server role services)

■

Web Server (IIS) role (plus various role services and components)

■

RPC Over HTTP Proxy feature

236

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Note that for smaller environments, it’s all right to install TS Gateway and the Network Policy Server (NPS) on the same Windows Server 2008 machine. Larger enterprises, however, will probably want to separate these two different role services for greater isolation and manageability. Adding the TS Gateway role service also requires that you specify a server certificate for your server so that it can use SSL to encrypt network traffic with Terminal Services clients. A valid digital certificate is required for TS Gateway to work, and you have the choice during installation of this role to import a certificate (for example, a certificate from VeriSign if you want clients to be able to access terminal servers running on your corpnet from anywhere in the world via the Internet), create a self-signed certificate (good for testing purposes), or delay installing a certificate until later:

After importing a certificate for your server, you’re given the option of creating authorization policies now or doing so later using the TS Gateway Management console. There are two kinds of authorization policies you need to create: ■

Connection authorization policies

■

Resource authorization policies These are policies that grant access to your terminal servers only to users whom you have specified.

These are policies that enable remote users to access your network based on conditions you have specified.

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

237

Finally, the Add Role Services Wizard indicates which additional roles and role services will be installed for the Network Policy and Access Server and Web Server (IIS) roles (if these roles and role services are not installed already). And finally you’re done. Once your TS Gateway is set up, you can configure it by creating additional connections and resource authorization policies. For example, you could create a resource authorization policy (RAP) to specify a group of terminal servers on your internal corpnet that you want the TS Gateway to allow access to by authorized remote clients:

When you create and configure connection authorization policies, you specify which security groups of users they apply to and, optionally, which groups of computers as well. You also specify whether authorization will use smart cards, passwords, or both. When you create and configure resource groups, you define a collection of resources (for example, terminal servers) that remote users will be allowed to access. You can specify these resources either by selecting a security group that contains the computer accounts of these computers, by specifying individual computers using their names (hostname or FQDN) or IP addresses, or by allowing remote users to access any computer (client or server) on your internal network that has Remote Desktop enabled on it. You need to create both connection and resource authorization policies for TS Gateway to do its job. Finally, the Monitoring node in the TS Gateway Management console lets you monitor connections happening through your TS Gateway and disconnect them if needed.

Benefits of TS Gateway Why is TS Gateway a great feature? It gives your users remote access to fully firewalled terminal servers on your corpnet, and it does so without any of the headache of having to configure a VPN connection to those servers. That’s not to say that VPNs aren’t still useful, but if users don’t need a local copy of data, network bandwidth is limited, or the amount of application data that needs to be transferred is large, you’ll likely get better performance out of using TS Gateway than trying to let your users VPN into your corpnet to access your terminal servers.

238

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Best practices for deploying this feature? Use a dedicated TS Gateway (it can coexist with Outlook RPC/HTTP), and consider placing it behind Microsoft Internet and Acceleration Server (ISA) rather than using a simple port-based firewall.

Terminal Services Licensing Let’s move on and talk briefly about Terminal Services Licensing (or TS Licensing) and also hear from more of our experts on the Terminal Services team at Microsoft. The job of TS Licensing is to simplify the task of managing Terminal Services Client Access Licenses (TS CALs). In other words, TS Licensing helps you ensure your TS clients are properly licensed and that you aren’t purchasing too many (or too few) licenses. TS Licensing manages clients that are unlicensed, temporarily licensed, and client-access (that is, permanent) licensed clients, and it manages licenses for both devices and users that are connecting to your terminal servers. The TS Licensing role service in Windows Server 2008 supports terminal servers that run both Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2003. Device-based TS Licensing basically works like this: When a client tries to connect to a terminal server, the terminal server first determines whether the client requires a license (a TS CAL). If the client requires a license, the terminal server contacts your TS Licensing server (usually a separate machine, but for small environments this could also be the terminal server) and requests a license token, which it then forwards to the client. Meanwhile, the TS Licensing server keeps track of all the license tokens you’ve installed on it to ensure your environment complies with licensing requirements. Note that if a client requires a permanent license token, your TS Licensing server must be activated. (Nonactivated TS Licensing servers can issue only temporary tokens.) A new feature of TS Licensing in Windows Server 2008 is its ability to track issuance of TS PerUser CALs. If your terminal server is configured to use Per-User licensing mode, any user attempting to connect to it must have a TS Per-User CAL. If the user doesn’t, the terminal server will contact the license server to obtain a CAL for her, and administrators can track the issuance of these CALs by using the TS Licensing management tool. Note that TS Per-User CAL tracking and reporting requires an Active Directory infrastructure. To learn more about managing licensing servers, let’s hear now from our experts. First let’s learn how to configure TS Licensing after this role service has been installed:

From the Experts: Configuring Terminal Server License Server After Installation TS Licensing Manager, the admin console for Terminal Server License Server, can now find configuration-related issues with a Terminal Server License Server. It displays the License Server configuration status under a new column, Configuration, in the list view. If there are some issues with the License Server configuration, the configuration status will be set to Review.

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

239

TS Licensing Manager also allows the admin to view the current License Server configuration settings in detail. The admin can choose Review Configuration from the right-click menu for a License Server, which opens the configuration dialog. The License Server configuration dialog displays the following information: ■

TS License Server Database Path

■

Current scope for the license server

■

Membership of the Terminal Server License Server group at the Active Directory Domain Controller. During installation of the TS Licensing role on a domain machine, the setup tries to add the License Server in the Terminal Server License Server group at the Active Directory Domain controller, for which it requires domain administrator privileges. Membership to this group enables the License Server to track Per-User license usage.

■

Status of the global policy License Server Security Group (TSLS). If this policy is enabled and the Terminal Server Computers group is not created, a warning message will be displayed. If the policy is disabled, no message/status will be displayed.

Admins can take corrective actions if some License Server configuration issues are found. The License Server configuration dialog allows an administrator to take the following actions: ■

Change the License Server scope.

■

If the License Server scope is set to Forest and the License Server is not published in Active Directory, the License Server configuration dialog shows a warning message to the administrator and allows the administrator to publish the License Server in Active Directory.

■

Add to the TSLS group in AD.

■

If the License Server Security Group Group Policy is enabled and the Terminal Server Computers local group is not created, the License Server configuration dialog displays the warning message and allows the administrator to create the Terminal Server Computers local group on the License Server.

–Ajay Kumar Software Design Engineer, Terminal Services

240

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Next, let’s learn how revocation of TS CALs works in Windows Server 2008. CAL revocation can be done only with Per-Device CALs, not Per-User ones, and there are some things you need to know about how this works before you begin doing it. Here’s what our next expert has to say concerning this:

From the Experts: CAL Revocation on Terminal Services License Server CAL Revocation is supported only for Windows Server 2008 TS Per-Device CALs. Terminal Services License Server’s automatic CAL reclamation mentioned later in this sidebar applies only to Per Device CALs. Per-Device CALs are issued to clients for a certain validity period, after which the CAL expires. If the client accesses the terminal server often, the validity of the CAL is renewed accordingly before its expiration. If the client does not access the terminal server for a long time, the CAL eventually expires. The Terminal Services License Server reclaims all the expired CALs periodically with its automatic CAL reclamation mechanism. Occasionally, an administrator might need to transfer a Per-Device CAL from the client back into the free license pool on the License Server (a process referred to as reclaiming or revoking) when the original client has been permanently removed from the environment and one needs to reallocate the CAL to a different client. Historically, there was no way to do it. An administrator would have had to wait until the CAL expired or lost its validity and was automatically reclaimed by its mechanism. So it was desired to have the License Server support a mechanism to reclaim or revoke CALs. Using the new Revoke CAL option in TS Licensing Manager, administrators can now reclaim issued CALs and place them back into a free license pool on the License Server. An administrator has to also select the specific client whose CAL needs to be revoked. But there are certain restrictions on the number of CALs that can be revoked at a given time. This is a restriction imposed by the License Server to prevent misuse. The restriction can be stated as follows: At any given point in time, the number of LH PD CALs in a revoked state cannot exceed 20 percent of the total number of LH PD CALs installed on the License Server. A CAL goes into a revoked state right after revocation, and its state is cleared when it goes past its original expiration date. One can see the list of CALs in the revoked state in the TS Licensing Manager tool by observing the Status column in the client list view. When the administrator has exceeded this limit, he is given a date when further revocation is possible.

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

241

Note that TS CALs should not be revoked to affect concurrent licensing. TS CALs can only be revoked when it is reasonable to assume that the machine they were issued to will no longer participate in the environment, for example, when the machine failed. Client machines, no matter how infrequently they may connect, are required to have a TS CAL at all times. This also applies for per user licensing. –Harish Kumar Poongan Shanmugam Software Design Engineer in Test, Terminal Services Finally, let’s dig into some troubleshooting stuff and learn how we can diagnose licensing problems for terminal servers. Our expert will look at four different troubleshooting scenarios in this next sidebar:

From the Experts: Running Licensing Diagnosis on a Terminal Server The Licensing Diagnosis tool is now integrated into the Terminal Services Configuration MMC snap-in (TSConfig.msc). This tool on the terminal server, in conjunction with the TS Licensing Manager’s Review Configuration option on the License Server, can be useful in finding problems arising because of a misconfigured TS Licensing setup. The Diagnostic tool does not report all possible problems in all possible scenarios during diagnosis. However, it collates the entire TS Licensing information of Terminal Services and the License Servers at a single place and identifies common licensing configuration errors. Upon launch of the Licensing Diagnosis tool, it first makes up a list of License Servers that the terminal server can discover via auto-discovery and also those that can be discovered via manual specification by using either the Use The Specified License Servers option in TSConfig.msc (registry-by-pass) or the Use The Specified Terminal Services License Servers Group Policy. It then contacts each License Server in turn to gather its configuration details, such as the activation state, License Key Pack information, relevant Group Policies, and so on. For this to work properly, we need to make sure that the Licensing Diagnosis tool has been launched with credentials that have administrator privileges on the License Servers. If needed, use the Provide Credentials option to specify appropriate credentials for each License Server individually at run time. Then the terminal server’s licensing settings—such as the licensing mode, Group Policies, and so on— are analyzed and compared, together with the License Servers information, to summarize common TS Licensing problems. A summary of diagnostic messages, with the possible resolution steps, is provided by this tool at the end of diagnosis. We can understand how the tool can be used by considering some sample scenarios.

242

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Case 1: Basic Diagnosis The terminal server has just been set up, and the licensing mode of the server has remained in Not Yet Configured mode. No other Licensing settings have been done on the TS, and a License Server has not been set up. Within the grace period of 120 days, TS has allowed connection to clients. Past the grace period, the administrator observes that the clients are no longer able to connect. The administrator launches the diagnostic tool and finds that two diagnostic messages are reported. One message is that the TS mode needs to be configured to either Per-User or Per-Device mode, and the other is that no License Servers have been discovered on the terminal server. The administrator now sets the TS licensing mode to PerDevice mode using TSConfig.msc. (If the TS licensing mode is set up using the Set The Terminal Services Licensing Mode Group Policy, the Licensing tab in TSConfig.msc is disabled.) A License Server is also set up by the administrator in the domain. When rerunning the tool, it now reports that the License Server needs to be activated and License Key Packs of the required TS mode need to be installed on the License Server. And so on. Case 2: Advanced Diagnosis Cases The Terminal Services License Server Security Group Policy has been enforced on the domain. The administrator has not added the TS computer name into the Terminal Server Computers local group on the License Server. When the Licensing Diagnosis tool is launched, it displays a diagnostic message indicating that licenses cannot be issued to the given terminal server because of the Group Policy setting. This can be corrected by using the Review Configuration option in TS Licensing Manager to create the TSC group, and TS can be added to the group using the Local Users And Groups MMC snap-in. If the License Server computer name is not a member of the Terminal Server License Servers local group in the Active Directory Domain Controller of the TS’s domain, peruser licensing and per-user license reporting will not work. In such case, when the Licensing Diagnosis tool is opened on TS, the Per-User Reporting And Tracking field in the License Server Configuration Details panel indicates that per-user tracking is not available. This can be corrected by using the Review Configuration option in TS Licensing Manager to add the License Server computer name into the Terminal Server License Servers group. Case 3: License Server Discovery Diagnosis on the Terminal Server During License Server setup, the administrator selected to install the License Server in the Forest Discovery Scope. But as the administrator ran the installation without the required Active Directory privileges, the License Server did not get published in the Active Directory licensing object. When the Licensing Diagnosis tool is launched on the TS, it is unable to discover the License Server. For diagnosing discovery problems, the administrator can initially specify the License Server by manually configuring it in the

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

243

Use The Specified License Servers option in TSConfig.msc so that the License Server shows up in the diagnostic tool. When rerunning the Licensing Diagnosis tool, the administrator notices that the License Server’s discovery scope is visible in the License Server Configuration Details section. The discovery scope shows up as Domain Scope, instead of Forest Scope. This can be corrected by using the Review Configuration option in TS Licensing Manager and exercising the Change Scope option to set the License Server discovery scope to Forest Scope. Case 4: Licensing Mode Mismatch Diagnosis The terminal server is configured in Per-Device licensing mode, but the administrator has installed Per-User licenses on the License Server. On launching the Licensing Diagnosis tool, a diagnostic message shows that the appropriate type of licenses are not installed on the License Server, indicating a potential mode mismatch problem. –Harish Kumar Poongan Shanmugam Software Design Engineer in Test, Terminal Services For a look at how one can use WMI to manage licensing for terminal servers, see the “Terminal Services WMI Provider” section upcoming.

Other Terminal Services Enhancements Finally, let’s briefly talk about three other features of Terminal Services in Windows Server 2008: ■

WMI Provider for scripted management of Terminal Services features

■

Integrating Windows System Resource Manager with Terminal Services

■

Terminal Services Session Broker

Terminal Services WMI Provider Windows Server 2008 and Windows Vista have many enhancements to WMI compared with previous versions of Microsoft Windows, and we’ve already covered these enhancements earlier in Chapter 4. Let’s hear from our experts on the Terminal Services team concerning these WMI enhancements, including some tips on how to use WMI for managing Terminal Services:

244

Introducing Windows Server 2008

From the Experts: Using the TS WMI Provider The TS WMI (tscfgwmi) provider offers a rich set of class templates that allows a TS server to be configured remotely or locally. For it to work properly, however, several things need to happen: 1. By default, only user accounts that are part of the administrators group are allowed to read and write WMI properties and methods. 2. There is a User Account Control (UAC) consideration if you use the TS WMI provider locally. Run the script or application that uses TS WMI as an elevated process. If you receive a message that says, “Access Denied (0x80041003), Unspecified Error (0x80004005),” most likely you’re using the TS WMI provider with a protected administrator and the process or application is not being elevated. If you are using the TS WMI provider remotely, the user account needs to be a domain user that is part of the local administrators group on the remote machine. 3. If you are using the TS WMI provider remotely, make sure the following firewall exceptions are selected: ❑

If the remote machine is in TS Remote Administration mode: File And Printer Sharing, Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI)

❑

If the remote machine is in TS Application mode: Terminal Services

If firewall exceptions are not properly configured, the return error code HRESULT can be WBEM_E_ACCESS_DENIED (0x80041003), RPC Server Is Unavailable (Win32 0x800706ba). 4. 4. Note that in Win2k3/XP, the TS WMI provider is grouped in the root/cimv2 namespace. In Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008, it is grouped in the root/cimv2/TerminalServices namespace. WMI security impersonation level wbemImpersonationLevelImpersonate and security authentication level wbemAuthenticationLevelPktPrivacy settings are also required for Windows Vista/ Windows Server 2008. If an incorrect namespace is specified, the return error code HRESULT is WBEM_E_INVALID_NAMESPACE (0x8004100E). TS WMI is also the abstraction layer of the Terminal Services Configuration UI tool (TSConfig.msc). Essentially, TSConfig is a UI tool that uses TS WMI to do the actual work. This also means that TS WMI can be used to troubleshoot errors when using TSConfig. For example, if you get an “Unspecified error” message when using TSConfig, you need to set the Remote Control Setting by writing a small script with TS WMI that uses the Win32_TSRemoteControlSetting class template. If you get the same error with the script, most likely it is a UAC issue.

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

245

Other Tips Wbemtest.exe (which comes with Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008 at %windir%\System32\Wbem) is a great tool to use if you want to find out more information about a particular WMI class template and which WMI class templates are available. It can be used to query all class templates within a namespace. It is also able to show a brief description of what a particular property or method does. For example, to list all available class templates for the namespace TerminalServices, follow these steps: 1. Open a cmd shell running as administrator. 2. Type wbemtest. 3. Click the Connect button, connect to the namespace root\cimv2\TerminalServices, select Packet Privacy under Authenticationlevel, and click the Connect button. 4. Under Method Invocation Options, select the Use Amended Qualifiers check box. 5. Click the Enum Classes button, leave the Enter Superclass Name edit box empty, select the Recursive option, and then click the OK button. A Query Result dialog will show up with all the class templates under the TerminalServices namespace. Now if you want to know more about remote control settings, all you need to do is double-click on the Win32_TSRemotecontrolSetting within the Query Result list, and a new Object Editor dialog will show up. Clicking on the Show MOF button will give you a brief description concerning each of the Win32_TSRemotecontrolSetting properties and methods. For more info on Wbemtest, see http://technet2.microsoft.com/WindowsServer/en/ library/28209472-b3ed-4b96-a6dd-c43ffdd913691033.mspx?mfr=true. And please visit http://blogs.msdn.com/ts/archive/2006/10/03/Terminal-Services-_2800_TS_2900_Remote-Configuration-Primer-Part-1.aspx for a quick primer on the TS WMI provider. –Soo Kuan Teo Software Development Engineer in Test, Terminal Services And here’s a sidebar from another expert concerning another new feature of Windows Server 2008—the ability to use WMI to track Terminal Services licensing:

From the Experts: Monitoring TS Licensing Using WMI Up until Windows Server 2003, TS Licensing did not have a way to dynamically monitor the usage of licenses. With the WMI providers introduced in Windows Server 2008, you can write scripts that track the number of licenses issued to devices or users. No more worrying about being caught unaware—write a script, put it in as a scheduled task for whatever interval you want the monitoring to happen, and track license usage.

246

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Here are the WMI providers that you can use for tracking Per-Device and Per-User CAL usage: ■

For tracking Per-Device license usage, you need to query all the instances of key packs installed on the License Server. To do this, query all instances of Win32_TSLicenseKeyPack. Within each instance, you can get the count of issued vs. available licenses using the properties TotalLicenses and AvailableLicenses.

■

For tracking Per-User license count, you can query the most recent report generated or create one if it does not exist. To generate a report, call the static method GenerateReport on the class Win32_TSLicenseReport. This method returns a file name that you can use to go through the details. You can also enumerate existing reports by enumerating instances of the Win32_TSLicenseReport class. The report names are generated based on the date and time. Choose the latest from the set, and then look at the properties InstalledLicenses and LicenseUsageCount to get a number for how many licenses were used up for Per-User licensing.

–Aruna Somendra Program Manager, Terminal Services

Windows System Resource Manager Windows System Resource Manager (WSRM) is an optional feature of Windows Server 2008 that can be used to control how CPU and memory resources are allocated to applications, services, and processes running on a computer. WSRM is not a feature of Terminal Services, but if you install it on a terminal server you can control allocation of such resources for Terminal Services users and sessions. WSRM works by using resource allocation policies to manage how computer resources (memory and CPU) are allocated to processes running on the machine. When you install the WSRM feature on a terminal server, you have a choice of two policies you can use: ■

Equal_Per_User

■

Equal_Per_Session

This means that CPU allocation is divided on an equal-shares basis among all users, and any processes created by the user are able to use as much of the user’s total CPU allocation as might be necessary.

This policy is new to Windows Server 2008 and means that each user session with its associated processes gets an equal share of the CPU resources of the system.

The usefulness of the new Equal_Per_User resource allocation policy in a Terminal Services environment where WSRM is being used is when you have multiple sessions running for the same user. For example, say you have two sessions running for the same user, and another session running for a second user. In this case, the first two sessions will get same amount of CPU resources allocated as the third session. By contrast, if the Equal_Per_Session policy is being

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

247

used, the first user will get twice the CPU resources as the second user. Note, however, that the default setting in Windows Server 2008 is for Terminal Services users to be restricted to running only a single session. (You can configure this restriction from the main page of the Terminal Services Configuration snap-in in Server Manager.)

Terminal Services Session Broker Terminal Services Session Broker (TS Session Broker) is the new Windows Server 2008 name for what used to be called Terminal Services Session Directory, a feature that allows users to automatically reconnect to a disconnected session in a load-balanced Windows Server 2003 terminal server farm. The session directory maintains a list of sessions indexed by user name and terminal server name. It enables the user, after disconnecting a session, to reconnect to the same terminal server where the disconnected session resides so that she can resume working in that session. Furthermore, this reconnection process will work even if the user connects from a different client computer than the one used to initiate the session. In Windows Server 2003, load balancing for terminal servers can be provided by using either the built-in Network Load Balancing (NLB) component or a third-party load balancing solution. As terminal servers become more and more mission-critical for hosting business applications, doing this becomes more and more important. By combining NLB with Terminal Services Session Directory, Windows Server 2003 terminal server farms can thus provide scale-out capability and also help ensure business continuity. In Windows Server 2008, Terminal Services Session Directory is now called TS Session Broker and includes out-of-the-box load-balancing capability designed to replace Microsoft NLB; however, Session Broker will continue to work with both NLB and third-party solutions. In addition, while Session Directory required the Enterprise or higher SKU of Windows Server 2003, TS Session Broker is available even in the Standard Edition of Windows Server 2008. Enabling TS Session Broker is done using the Terminal Services Configuration snap-in. Double-click the Member Of Farm In TS Session Broker link at the bottom of the center Details pane to open a Properties sheet. Then, on the TS Session Broker tab, select the check box labeled Join A Farm In TS Session Broker and fill in the remaining details (you need to do this on all terminal servers in your farm).

248

Introducing Windows Server 2008

With Windows Server 2008, there are two key deployment scenarios for Session Broker: ■

Session Broker Load Balancing

■

Third-party Load Balancing (or MS NLB)

Session Broker provides a simple-to-deploy load balancing solution for small scale deployments. Create a DNS record for the farm that contains the IP address of the terminal servers in the farm. DNS (or DNS round robin) will direct the initial connection to a server in the farm; however, Session Broker will perform the actual load balancing and direct the user to the least loaded terminal server in the farm (based on number of Windows sessions). The TS Client provides basic failover support for the initial connection, and in the case of a server failure, will automatically try the next entry in the DNS record after a 20 second time-out. Session Broker is capable of detecting server failures and not direct users to a server that is down. Alternatively, NLB or another connection routing mechanism can be used in place of DNS.

Session Broker can be deployed in the same configuration as Windows Server 2003 Session Directory, using any third-party hardware load balancers.

Finally, with the regular stream of patches and application updates admins are faced with these days, it can be difficult to find a time when a terminal server can be brought offline without interrupting user experience. Starting with Beta 3 of Windows Server 2008, the new Server Draining feature enables planned maintenance for TS Session Broker load balancing farms without interruption of user experience. The following sidebar explains more.

Chapter 8

Terminal Services Enhancements

249

From the Experts: Terminal Server Draining Administrators typically would like to drain their servers to apply security update patches and keep the machine up to date. In this scenario, they would try to prevent new users from logging on to the server; at the same time, they would want to get current users actively using the machine to save their work and log off in a phased manner. In Windows Server 2003, a very primitive form of server draining is supported by using a command-line tool called chglogon.exe. The chglogon.exe /disable switch prevents any new logons from occurring in the machine. However, it also prevents users who already have disconnected sessions from reconnecting to their disconnected sessions enabling them to log off gracefully and save their work. In Windows Server 2008, server draining is introduced. This can be enabled by using a command-line tool (new flags to chglogon.exe), using the Terminal Services Configuration tool, and also via WMI. When a server is put in drain mode, new logons are not allowed, but users who already have a disconnected session are allowed to reconnect. In addition, for remote administration purposes, administrators who connect with the /admin switch are allowed to log on, even if drain mode is set. This mode is supported only when the TS role is installed. We expect that this enhanced drain support will enable IT administrators to patch their servers in a way that causes minimal trouble to all the remote users. Before taking the server down for patching and installing updates, administrators can enable drain mode and then send a message that prompts users to save their work and log off in a day or two! Also, we have relevant events logged in the Windows event log when somebody is not allowed to log on because the server is in drain mode. We recommend that administrators check the event log for relevant events to determine whether drain mode was indeed the cause for someone to be denied logon from a remote site. –Sriram Sampath Development Lead, Terminal Services

Conclusion As we’ve seen in this chapter, Terminal Services has been greatly enhanced in Windows Server 2008 with new features such as TS RemoteApp, TS Web Access, and TS Gateway—plus lots of security, manageability, and user experience improvements too numerous to list here and many of which we’ve described. In my mind, Windows Server 2008 has changed the whole meaning of Terminal Services from a platform for providing remote access to different types of

250

Introducing Windows Server 2008

clients (thin/fat, Windows/non) to a powerful and secure application-deployment platform that enterprises can use to provide remote users with access anywhere and anytime. The evolution of this platform is remarkable—I can’t wait to see what there will be in future versions!

Additional Resources You’ll find a brief overview of Terminal Services features in Windows Server 2008 at http://www.microsoft.com/windowsserver/2008/evaluation/overview.mspx. By the time you read this chapter, this site will probably redirect you to something with a lot more content. If you have access to the Windows Server 2008 beta program on Microsoft Connect (http://connect.microsoft.com), you can get some great Terminal Services documents from there, including: ■

Windows Server 2008 Terminal Services RemoteApp Step-by-Step Guide

■

Windows Server 2008 Terminal Services TS Gateway Server Step-by-Step Setup Guide

■

Windows Server 2008 Terminal Services TS Licensing Step-by-Step Setup Guide

Plus you’ll also find chats there, saved Live Meeting presentations, and lots of other useful stuff, with more being added all the time. There’s also a TechNet Forum where you can ask questions and help others trying out the Terminal Services features; see http://forums.microsoft.com/TechNet/ShowForum.aspx? ForumID=580&SiteID=17 for this forum. (Windows Live registration is required.) The Terminal Services Team Blog is definitely something you won’t want to miss. See http://blogs.msdn.com/ts/. Finally, be sure to turn to Chapter 14, “Additional Resources,” for more sources of information concerning new Terminal Services features, and also for links to webcasts, whitepapers, blogs, newsgroups, and other sources of information about all aspects of Windows Server 2008.

Chapter 9

Clustering Enhancements In this chapter: Failover Clustering Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Network Load Balancing Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Additional Resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Don’t tell my local bookstore, but I don’t shop there anymore—even though I’m frequently seen browsing the shelves. Instead, I browse the latest titles while sitting in one of the comfortable chairs the bookstore generously provides its customers (big mistake on their part) and when I find a book that interests me, I make a note of the title, author, and ISBN. Then, when I get home, I order the book from an online bookstore. Shhh—don’t tell my local bookstore I do this, otherwise they might bar me from using their comfy chairs next time I visit them. Online bookstores and similar sites have changed the way I do much of my shopping. But what if an online bookstore ran their entire Web site on a single server and that server died? Chaos! Frustration!! Lost business!!! I might even go back to my local bookstore and buy from there! What keeps sites like these always available is clustering. A single server is a single point of failure for your business, and when that server goes down so does your revenue. The same goes for a single source of storage, a single network link, or even having all your computing resources located at a single geographical site. Fault-tolerant technologies such as RAID can mitigate the risk of storage failures, while redundant network links can reduce the impact of a network failure. And data backup and archival solutions are essential if you want to ensure continuity of your business after a catastrophe. But it’s also important to implement clustering technologies if you want to fully protect your business against downtime and ensure high availability to customers. A cluster is simply a collection of nodes (servers) that work together in some fashion to ensure high availability for your applications. Clusters also provide scalability for applications because they enable you to bring additional nodes into your cluster when needed to support increased demand. And since the days of Microsoft Windows NT 4.0, there have been two types of clustering technologies supported by Microsoft Windows: server clusters and Network Load Balancing (NLB). 251

252

Introducing Windows Server 2008

First, let’s look at server clusters. Originally code-named “Wolfpack” when the technology was first developed, server clusters provide failover support for long-running applications and other network services, such as file, print, database, or messaging services. Server clusters ensure high availability for these services because when one node in your cluster dies, other nodes take over and assume the workload of the failed node and continue servicing client requests to keep your applications running. In Windows NT 4.0, server clusters were known as the Microsoft Cluster Services (MSCS); in Windows 2000 Server, this feature was renamed Server Clusters. Now in Windows Server 2008, we call this technology Windows Server Failover Clustering (WSFC) or simply Failover Clustering, which communicates clearly the purpose of this form of clustering and how it works. Then there’s Network Load Balancing, which was originally called Windows Load Balancing Service (WLBS) in Windows NT 4.0. This form of clustering technology was renamed Network Load Balancing (NLB) in Windows Server 2003, which is still the name for this technology in Windows Server 2008. NLB provides a highly available and scalable environment for TCP/IP services and applications by distributing client connections across multiple servers. Another way of saying this is that NLB is a network driver that balances the load for networked client/server applications by distributing client connections across a set of servers. NLB is especially great for scaling out stateless applications running on Web servers when the number of clients is growing, but you can also use it to ensure the availability of terminal servers, media servers, and even VPN servers. Let’s look at the improvements the Windows Server team has made to these two clustering technologies in Windows Server 2008. As with everything in this book, the new features and enhancements I’m going to describe here are subject to change before RTM. And who knows? Maybe after you read this you’ll want to go out, buy Windows Server 2008, and start your own online bookstore! Well, maybe not—the competition is already pretty stiff in that market.

Failover Clustering Enhancements Let’s start with improvements to Failover Clustering, as the most significant changes have occurred with this technology. Here’s a quick list of enhancements, which we’ll unpack further in a moment: ■

A new quorum model that lets clusters survive the loss of the quorum disk.

■

Enhanced support for storage area networks and other storage technologies.

■

Networking and security enhancements that make clusters more secure and easier to maintain.

■

An improved tool for validating your hardware configuration before you try to deploy your cluster on it.

■

A new server paradigm that sees clustering as a feature rather than as a role.

■

A new management console that makes setting up and managing clusters a snap.

Chapter 9

Clustering Enhancements

■

Improvements to other management tools, including the cluster.exe command and WMI provider.

■

Simplified troubleshooting using the Event logs instead of the old cluster.log.

253

But before we look at these enhancements in detail, let me give you some insight into why Microsoft has implemented them in Windows Server 2008.

Goals of Clustering Improvements Why is Microsoft making all these clustering improvements in Windows Server 2008? For their customers. I know, you’re IT pros and you want to read the technical stuff. And you probably wish the Marketing Police would step in and put me in jail for making a statement like that. But think about it for a moment—it’s you who are the customer! At least, you are if you are an admin for some company. So what have been your complaints with regard to Microsoft’s current (Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise and Datacenter Edition) version of server clustering technology? Well, perhaps you’ve said (or thought) things similar to the following: “Why do I have to assign one of my 26 available drive letters to the quorum resource just for cluster use? This limits how many instances of SQL I can put on my cluster! And why does the quorum in the Shared Disk model have to be a single point of failure? I thought the whole purpose of server clusters was to eliminate a single point of failure for my applications.” “Why do we as customers have to be locked in to a single vendor of clustering hardware whose products are certified on the Hardware Compatibility List (HCL) or Windows Server Catalog? I found out I couldn’t upgrade the firmware driver on my HBA because it’s not listed on the HCL so it’s unsupported, argh. So I called my vendor and he says I’ll have to wait months for the testing to be completed and their Web site to be updated. Maintaining clusters shouldn’t be this hard!” “Why is it so darned hard to set up a cluster in the first place? I was on the phone with Microsoft Premier Support for hours until the support engineer finally helped me discover I had a cable connected wrong—plus I forgot to select the third check box on the second property sheet of the first node’s configuration settings on the left side of the right pane of the cluster admin console.” “We had to hire a high-priced clustering specialist to implement and configure a cluster solution for our IT department because our existing IT pros just couldn’t figure this clustering stuff out. They kept asking me questions like, “What’s the difference between IsAlive and LooksAlive?”, and I kept telling them, “I don’t understand it either!” Why can’t they make it so simple that an ordinary IT pro like me can figure it out?”

254

Introducing Windows Server 2008

“I want to create a cluster that has one node in London and another in New York. Is that possible? Why do you say, ‘Maybe’?” And here’s my favorite: “All I want to do is set up a cluster that will make my file share highly available. I’m an experienced admin who’s got 100 file servers and I’ve set up thousands of file shares in the past, so why are clusters completely different? Why do I have to read a 50-page whitepaper just to figure out how to make this work?” OK, I think I’ve probably got your attention by now, so let’s look at the enhancements. I’m assuming that as an experienced IT pro you already have some familiarity with how server clustering works in Windows Server 2003, but if not you can find an overview of this topic on the Microsoft Windows Server TechCenter. See the “Server Clusters Technical Reference” found at http://technet2.microsoft.com/WindowsServer/en/library/8ad36286-df8d-4c53-9aee7a9a073c95ee1033.mspx?mfr=true.

Understanding the New Quorum Model For Windows Server 2003 clusters, the entire cluster depends on the quorum disk being alive. Despite the best efforts of SAN vendors to provide highly available RAID storage, sometimes even they fail. On Windows Server 2003, you can implement two different quorum models: the shared disk quorum model (also sometimes called the standard quorum model or the shared quorum device model), where you have a set of nodes sharing a storage array that includes the quorum resource; and the majority node set model, where each node has its own local storage device with a replicated copy of the quorum resource. The shared disk model is far more common mainly because a very high percentage of clusters are 2-node clusters. In Windows Server 2008, however, these two models have been merged into a single hybrid or mixed-mode quorum model called the majority quorum model, which combines the best of both these earlier approaches. The quorum disk (which now is referred to as a witness disk) is now no longer a single point of failure for your cluster as it was in the shared disk quorum model of previous versions of Windows server clustering. Instead, you can now assign a vote to each node in your cluster and also to a shared storage device itself, and the cluster can now survive any event that involves the loss of a single vote. In other words—drum roll, please—a two-node cluster with shared storage can now survive the loss of the quorum. Or the loss of either node. This is because each node counts as one vote and the shared storage device also gets a vote, so losing a node or losing the quorum amounts to the same thing—the loss of one vote. (Actually, technically the voting thing works like this: Each node gets one vote for the internal disk where the cluster registry hive resides and the “witness disk” gets one vote because a copy of the cluster registry is also kept there. So not every disk a node brings online equates to a vote. Finally, the file share witness gets one vote even though a copy of the cluster registry hive is not kept there.)

Chapter 9

Clustering Enhancements

255

Or you can configure your cluster a different way by assigning a vote only to your witness disk (the shared quorum storage device) and no votes for your nodes. In this type of clustering configuration, your cluster will still be operational even if only one node is still online and talking to the witness. In other words, this type of cluster configuration works the same way as the shared disk quorum model worked in Windows Server 2003. Or if you aren’t using shared storage but are using local (replicated) storage for each node instead, you can assign one vote to each node so that as long as a majority of nodes are still online, the cluster is still up and any applications or services running on it continue to be available. In other words, this type of configuration achieves the same behavior as the majority node set model worked on the previous platform and it requires at least three nodes in your cluster. In summary, the voting model for Failover Clustering in Windows Server 2008 puts you in control by letting you design your cluster to work the same as either of the two cluster models on previous platforms or as a hybrid of them. By assigning or not assigning votes to your nodes and shared storage, you create the cluster that meets your needs. In other words, in Windows Server 2008 there is only one quorum model and it’s configurable by assigning votes the way you choose. There’s more. If you want to use shared storage for your witness, it doesn’t have to be a separate disk. (The file share witness can’t be a DFS share, however.) It can now simply be a file share on any file server on your network (as shown in Figure 9-1) and one file server can even function as a witness for multiple clusters. (Each cluster requires its own share, but you can have a single file server with a number of different shares, one for each cluster.) This approach is a good choice if you’re implementing GeoClusters (geographically dispersed clusters), something we’ll talk about in a few moments. File server with shared folder

Node 1

Node 2

Figure 9-1 Majority quorum model using a file share witness

256

Introducing Windows Server 2008

A few quick technical points need to be made: ■

If you create a cluster of at least two nodes that includes a shared disk witness, a \Cluster folder that contains the cluster registry hive will be created on the witness.

■

There are no longer any checkpoint files or quorum logs, so you don’t need to run clussvc –resetquorumlog on startup any longer. (In fact, this switch doesn’t even exist anymore in Windows Server 2008.)

■

You can use the Configure Quorum Settings wizard to change the quorum model after your cluster has been created, but you generally shouldn’t. Plan your clusters before you create them so that you won’t need to change the quorum model afterwards.

Understanding Storage Enhancements Now let’s look at the storage technology enhancements in Windows Server 2008, many of which result from the fact that Microsoft has completely rewritten the cluster disk driver (clusdisk.sys) and Physical Disk resource for the new platform. First, clustering in Windows Server 2008 can now be called “SAN friendly.” This is because Failover Clustering no longer uses SCSI bus resets, which can be very disruptive to storage area network operations. A SCSI reset is a SCSI command that breaks the reservation on the target device, and a bus reset affects the entire bus, causing all devices on the bus to become disconnected. Clustering in Windows 2000 Server used bus resets as a matter of course; Windows Server 2003 improved on that by using them only as a last resort. Windows Server 2008, however, doesn’t use them at all—good riddance. Another improvement this provides is that Failover Clustering never leaves your cluster disks (disks that are visible to all nodes in your cluster) in an unprotected state that can affect the integrity of your data. Second, Windows Server 2008 now supports only storage technologies that support persistent reservations. This basically means that Fibre Channel, iSCSI, and Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) shared bus types are allowed. Parallel-SCSI is now deprecated. Third—and this might seem like a minor point—the quorum disk no longer needs a drive letter because Failover Clustering now supports direct disk access for your quorum resource. This is actually a good thing because drive letters are a valuable commodity for large clusters. You can, however, still assign the quorum a drive letter if you need to do so for some reason. Fourth, Windows Server 2008 supports GUID Partition Table (GPT) disks. These disks support partitions larger than 2 terabytes (TB) and provide improved redundancy and recoverability, so they’re ideal for enterprise-level clusters. GPT disks are supported by Failover Clustering on all Windows Server 2008 hardware platforms (x86, x64, and IA64) for both Enterprise and Datacenter Editions.

Chapter 9

Clustering Enhancements

257

Fifth, new self-healing logic helps identify disks based on multiple attributes and self-heals the disk if found by any attribute. There’s a sidebar coming up in a moment where an expert from the product team will describe this feature in more detail. And in addition, new validation logic helps preserve mount point relationships and prevent them from breaking. Sixth, there is now a built-in mechanism that helps re-establish relationships between physical disk resources and logical unit numbers (LUNs). The operation of this mechanism is similar to that of the Server Cluster Recovery Utility tool (ClusterRecovery.exe) found in the Windows Server 2003 Resource Kit. Seventh (and probably not finally) there are revamped chkdsk.exe options and an enhanced DiskPart.exe command. Did I mention the improved Maintenance Mode that lets you give temporary exclusive access to online clustered disks to other applications? Or the Volume Shadow Copy Services (VSS) support for hardware snapshot restores of clustered disks? Or the fact that the cluster disk driver no longer provides direct disk fencing functionality (disk fencing is the process of allowing/disallowing access to a disk), and that this change reduces the chances of disk corruption occurring? Oh yes, and concerning dynamic disks, I know there has been customer demand that Microsoft include built-in support for dynamic disks for cluster storage. However, this is not included in Windows Server 2008. Why? I would guess for two reasons: first, there are already third-party products available, such as Symantec Storage Foundation for Windows, that can provide this type of functionality; and second, there’s really no need for this functionality in Failover Clusters. Why? Because GPT disks can give you partitions large enough that you’ll probably never need to worry about resizing them—plus if you do need to resize a partition on a basic disk, you can do so in Windows Server 2008 using the enhanced DiskPart.exe tool included with the platform, which now allows you to shrink volumes in addition to being able to extend them. The bottom line for IT pros? You might need to upgrade your storage gear if you plan on migrating your existing Windows server clusters to Windows Server 2008. That’s because some hardware will simply not be upgradable and you can’t assume that what worked with Windows Server 2003 will work with Windows Server 2008. In other words, there won’t be any grandfathering of storage hardware support for qualified Windows server clustering solutions that are currently listed in the Windows Server Catalog. But I’ll get to the topic of qualifying your clustering hardware in a few moments.

258

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Now here’s the sidebar I mentioned earlier.

From the Experts: Self-Healing Cluster Storage The storage stack and how shared disks are managed as well as identified has been completely redesigned in Windows Server 2008 Failover Clustering. In Windows Server 2008, the Cluster Service still uses the Disk Signature located in the Master Boot Record of the disk to identify disks, but in addition it also now leverages SCSI Inquiry data to identify disks as well. The Disk Signature is located in sector 0 of the disk and is actually data on the disk, but data on the disk can change for a variety of reasons. SCSI Inquiry data is an attribute of the LUN provided by the storage array. The new mechanism in 2008 is that if for any reason the Cluster Service is unable to identify the disk based on the Disk Signature, it then searches for the disk based on the SCSI Inquiry data. If the disk is found, the Cluster Service then self-heals and updates its entry for the disk signature. In the same respect, if the disk is found by the Disk Signature and the previously known SCSI Inquiry data has changed, the Cluster Service self-heals, updates its known value, and brings the disk online. The big win in the end is that disks are now identified based on multiple attributes, the service is flexible enough to deal with a variety of failures of modifications, and such failures will not result in downtime. This is a big win and will resolve one of the top supportability issues in previous releases. There might be extreme situations where both the Disk Signature and the SCSI Inquiry data for a LUN change—for example, in the case of a complete disaster recovery. To handle this situation, a new recovery tool has been built into the product in 2008. If a disk is in a Failed or Offline state because it cannot identify the disks (which is a condition that is identified by Event ID 1034 in the System event log), perform the following steps. Open the Failover Cluster Management snap-in (CluAdmin.msc), right-click the Physical Disk resource, and select Properties. At the bottom of the General tab, find and click the Repair button. A list is displayed of all the disks that are shared but not clustered yet. The Repair action allows you to specify which disk this disk resource should control, and it allows you to rebuild the relationship between logical disks and the cluster physical disk resources. Once you select the newly restored disk, the properties are updated and you can bring the disk online so that it can be used again by highly available services or applications. –Elden Christensen Program Manager, Windows Enterprise Server Products

Chapter 9

Clustering Enhancements

259

Understanding Networking and Security Enhancements If you’ve picked up a copy of the Microsoft Windows Vista Resource Kit (Microsoft Press, 2007), you’ll have already read a lot about the new TCP/IP networking stack in Windows Vista. (If you haven’t picked up a copy of this title yet, why haven’t you? How am I supposed to retire if the books I’ve been involved with don’t earn royalties?) Windows Server 2008 is built on the same TCP/IP stack as Windows Vista, so all the features of this stack are present here as well. The Cable Guy has a good overview of these features in one of his columns, found at http://www.microsoft.com/technet/community/columns/cableguy/cg0905.mspx. One implication of this is that Failover Clustering in Windows Server 2008 now fully supports IPv6. This includes both internode network communications and client communications with the cluster. If you’re thinking of migrating your IPv4 network to IPv6 (or if you have to do so because of government mandates or for industry compliance), there’s a good overview chapter on IPv6 deployment in the Windows Vista Resource Kit. (Did I mention royalties?) Another really nice networking enhancement in Failover Clustering is DHCP support. This means that cluster IP addresses can now be obtained from a DHCP server instead of having to be assigned manually using static addressing. Specifically, if you’ve configured the servers that will become nodes in your cluster so that they receive their addresses dynamically, all cluster addresses will also be obtained dynamically. But if you’ve configured your servers with static addresses, you’ll need to manually configure your cluster addresses as well. At the time of this writing, this works only for IPv4 addresses, however, and I don’t know if there are any plans for IPv6 addresses to be assigned dynamically to clusters before RTM—though DHCPv6 servers are supported in Windows Server 2008. (See Chapter 12, “Other Features and Enhancements,” for more information on DHCP enhancements in Windows Server 2008.) Another improvement in networking for Failover Clusters is the removal of all remaining legacy dependencies on the NetBIOS protocol and the standardizing of all name resolution on DNS. This change eliminates unwanted NetBIOS name resolution broadcast traffic and also simplifies the transport of SMB traffic within your cluster. Another change involves moving from the use of RPC over UDP for cluster heartbeats to more reliable TCP session-oriented protocols. And IPSec improvements now mean that when you use IPSec to safeguard communication within a cluster, failover is almost instantaneous from the client’s perspective. And now Network Name resources can stay up if only one IP address resource is online—in previous clustering implementations, all IP address resources had to be online for the Network Name to be available to the client. Finally—and this can be a biggie for large enterprises—you can now have your cluster nodes reside in different subnets. And that means different nodes can be in different sites—really different sites that are geographically far apart! This kind of thing is called Geographically Dispersed Clusters (or GeoClusters for short) and although a form of GeoClusters was supported on earlier Windows server platforms, you had to use technologies such as Virtual LANs (VLANs) to ensure that all the nodes in your cluster appeared on the same IP subnet,

260

Introducing Windows Server 2008

which could be a pain sometimes. In addition, support for configurable heartbeat time-outs in Windows Server 2008 effectively means that there are no practical distance limitations on how far apart Failover Cluster nodes can be. Well, maybe you couldn’t have one node at Cape Canaveral, Florida, and another on Olympus Mons on Mars, but it should work if one node is in New York while another is in Kalamazoo, Michigan. In addition, the cluster heartbeat, which still uses UDP port 3343, now relies on UDP unicast packets (similar to the Request/ Reply process used by “ping”) instead of less reliable UDP broadcasts. This also makes GeoClusters easier to implement and more reliable than before. (By default, Failover Clustering waits five seconds before considering a cluster node as unreachable, and you can view this and other settings by typing cluster . /prop at a command prompt.) Let’s hear an expert from Microsoft add a few more insights concerning GeoClusters.

From the Experts: Dispersing Failover Cluster Nodes One of the restrictions placed on previous versions of Failover Clusters (in Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000 Server, and Windows Server 2003) was that all members of the cluster had to be located on the same logical IP subnet—for example, communications among all the cluster nodes could not be routed across different networks. Although this was not much of a restriction for clusters that were centrally located, it proved to be quite different for IT professionals who wanted to implement geographically dispersed clusters that were stretched across multiple sites as part of a disaster recovery scenario. As described later in this chapter in the “From the Experts: Validating a Failover Cluster Configuration” sidebar, cluster solutions were required to be listed in the Windows Server Catalog. A subset of that listing is the Geographically Dispersed category. Geographically dispersed cluster solutions are typically implemented by third-party hardware vendors. With the exception of Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 deployed as a 2-Node Cluster Continuous Replication (CCR) cluster, there is no “out-of-the-box” data replication implementation available from Microsoft for geographic clusters. In addition to the storage replication requirement, there were networking requirements as well. Because of the restriction previously stated regarding the nodes having to reside on the same logical subnet, organizations implementing geographic clusters had to configure VLANs that stretched between geographic sites. These VLANs also had to be configured to guarantee a maximum round-trip latency of no more than 500 milliseconds. Allowing Windows Server 2008 Failover Cluster nodes to reside on different subnets now does away with this restriction. Accommodating this new functionality required a complete rewrite of the cluster network driver and a change in the way cluster Network Name resources were configured. In previous versions of Failover Clusters, a Network Name resource required a dependency on at least one IP Address resource. If the IP address resource failed to come

Chapter 9

Clustering Enhancements

261

online or failed to stay online, the Network Name resource also failed. Even if a Network Name resource depended on two different IP Address resources, if one of those IP Address resources failed, the Network Name resource also failed. In the Windows Server 2008 Failover Cluster feature, this has changed. The logic that is now used is no longer an AND dependency logic but an OR dependency logic. (This is the default, but it can be changed.) Now a Network Name resource that depends on IP Address resources that are supported by network interfaces configured for different networks can come online if at least one of those IP Address resources comes online. Being able to locate cluster nodes on different networks has been one of the most highly requested features by those using Microsoft high-availability technologies. Now we can accommodate that request in Windows Server 2008. –Chuck Timon, Jr. Support Engineer, Microsoft Enterprise Support, Windows Server Core Team

Other Security Improvements Failover Clustering also includes security improvements over previous versions of Failover Clusters. The biggest change in this area is that the Cluster Service now runs within the security context of the built-in LocalSystem account instead of a custom Cluster Service Account (CSA), a domain account you needed to specify in order to start the service on previous versions of Windows Server. This change means you no longer have to prestage user accounts for your cluster, and also that you’ll have no more headaches from managing passwords for these accounts. It also means that your cluster is more protected against accidental account changes—for example, when you’ve implemented or modified a Group Policy and the CSA gets deleted or has some of its privileges removed by accident. Another security enhancement is that Failover Clustering relies exclusively on Kerberos for authentication purposes—that is, NTLM is no longer internally leveraged. This is because the cluster nodes now authenticate using a machine account instead of a user account. There are other security enhancements, but let’s move on.

Validating a Clustering Solution A significant change in Microsoft’s approach to qualified hardware solutions for clustering is that it is moving away from the old paradigm of certifying whole cluster solutions in the HCL or the Windows Server Catalog. Microsoft is now providing customers with tools that enable them to self test and verify their solutions. Not that you should try to mix and match hardware from different vendors to build your own home-grown Failover Cluster solutions—Microsoft is just trying to make the model more flexible, not to encourage you to start duct-taping your clusters together. Anyway, what this means is that Failover Clustering solutions are now defined by “best practices” and self testing, not by static listings on some Web site. Of course,

262

Introducing Windows Server 2008

you still have to buy hardware that has been certified by the Windows Logo Program, but you no longer need to buy a complete solution from a single vendor (although it’s still probably a good idea to do this in most cases). So what you would generally now do when implementing a Failover Clustering solution would be the following: 1. Buy your servers, storage devices, and network hardware, and then connect everything together the way you want to for your specific clustering scenario. (Note that all components must have a Designed For Windows logo.) 2. Enable the Failover Clustering feature on each server that will function as a node within your cluster. (See Chapter 5, “Managing Server Roles,” for information on how to enable features in Windows Server 2008. Note that Failover Clustering is a feature, not a role— this is because Failover Clustering is designed to support roles such as File Server, Print Server, DHCP Server, and so on.) 3. Run the new Validate tool (shown in Figure 9-2) to verify whether your hardware (and the way it’s set up) is end-to-end compatible with Failover Clustering in Windows Server 2008. Note that depending on the type of clustering solution you’ve set up, it can sometimes take a while (maybe 30 minutes) for all the built-in validation tests to run.

Figure 9-2 Initial screen of Validate A Configuration Wizard

Here’s a sidebar, written by an expert at Microsoft, that provides detailed information about this new Validate tool. Actually it’s not so new—it’s essentially the same ClusPrep.exe tool (actually called the Microsoft Cluster Configuration Validation Wizard) that’s available from the Microsoft Download Center, and it can be run against server clusters running on Windows 2000 Server SP4 or later to validate their configuration. However, the tool is now integrated into the Failover Clustering feature in Windows Server 2008.

Chapter 9

Clustering Enhancements

263

From the Experts: Validating a Failover Cluster Configuration Microsoft high-availability (HA) solutions are designed to provide applications, services, or both to end users with minimal downtime. To achieve this, Microsoft requires the hardware running high-availability solutions be qualified that they have been tested and proven to work correctly. Hardware vendors are required to download a test kit from the Microsoft Windows HCL and upload test results for their solutions before they are listed as Cluster Solutions in the Windows Server Catalog. Users depend on the vendors to test and submit their solutions for inclusion in the Windows Server Catalog. A user can request that a vendor test and submit a specific solution for inclusion in the catalog, but there are no guarantees this will be done. This sometimes leaves users with little choice for clustering solutions on current Windows platforms. Beginning with Windows Server 2008 Failover Clustering, however, the qualification process for clusters will change. Microsoft will still require that the hardware or software meet the requirements set forth in the Windows Logo Program for Windows Server 2008, but users will have more control over the choices they can make. Once the hardware is properly configured in accordance with the vendor’s specifications, all the user has to do is install the correct version of the server software (Windows Server 2008 Enterprise or Datacenter Edition), join the servers to an Active Directory–based domain, and add the Windows Server 2008 Failover Clustering feature. With the feature installed on all nodes that will be part of the cluster, connectivity to the storage verified, and the disks properly configured, the first step is to open the Failover Cluster Management snap-in (located in Administrative Tools) and select Validate A Configuration located in the Management section in the center pane of the MMC 3.0 snap-in. The Validate A Configuration process is wizard-based, as are most of the configuration processes in Windows Server 2008 Failover Clustering. (See the “From the Experts: Simplifying the User Experience” sidebar later in this chapter.) After entering the names for all the servers in the Select Servers Or A Cluster screen and accepting all the defaults in the remaining screens, the validate process runs and a Summary report is presented once the process completes. This report can be viewed in the last screen of the Validate A Configuration Wizard, or it can be viewed inside Internet Explorer as an MHTML file by selecting View Report. Each time Validate is run, a copy of this report is placed in the %systemroot%\cluster\reports directory on all nodes that were tested. (All cluster configuration reports are stored in this location on every node of the cluster.)

264

Introducing Windows Server 2008

The cluster validation process consists of a series of tests that verify the hardware configuration, as well as some aspects of the OS configuration on each node. These tests fall into four basic categories: Inventory, Network, Storage, and System Configuration. ■

Inventory These tests literally take a basic inventory of all nodes being configured. The inventory tests collect information about the system BIOS, environment variables, host bus adapters (HBAs), memory, operating system, PnP devices, running processes and services, software updates, and signed and unsigned drivers.

■

Network The network tests collect information about the network interface card (NIC) configuration (for example, whether there is more than one NIC in each node), IP configuration (for example, static or DHCP assigned addresses), communication connectivity among the nodes, and whether the firewall configuration allows for proper communication among all nodes.

■

Storage The storage area is probably where most failures will be observed because of the more stringent requirements placed on hardware vendors and on the restrictions on what will and will not be supported in Windows Server 2008 Failover Clustering. (For example, parallel SCSI interfaces will no longer be supported in a cluster.) The storage tests first collect data from the nodes in the cluster and determine what storage is common to all. The common storage is what will be considered potential cluster disks. Once these devices have been enumerated, tests

Chapter 9

Clustering Enhancements

265

are run to verify disk latency, proper arbitration for the shared disks, proper failover of the disks among all the nodes in the cluster, the existence of multiplearbitrations scenarios, file system, the use of the MS-MPIO standard (if multipath software is being used), that proper SCSI-3 SPC3 commands are being adhered to (specifically Persistent Reservations, or PR, and Unique Disk IDs), and simultaneous failover scenarios. ■

System Configuration This final category of tests verifies the nodes are members of the same Active Directory domain, the drivers being used are signed, the OS versions and service pack levels are the same, the services that the cluster needs are running (for example, the Remote Registry service), the processor architectures are the same (note that you cannot mix X86 and X64 nodes in a cluster), and that the processor architectures all have the same software updates installed.

The configuration tests report a status of Success, Warning, or Failed. The ideal scenario is to have all tests report Success. This status indicates the configuration should be able to run as a Windows Server 2008 Failover Cluster. Any tests that report a status of Failed have to be addressed and the validation process needs to be run again; otherwise, the configuration will not properly support Windows Server 2008 Failover Clustering (even if the cluster creation process completes). Tests that report a status of Warning indicate that something in the configuration is not in accordance with cluster best practices and the cluster should be evaluated and potentially fixed before actually deploying the cluster in a production environment. An example is if one or more nodes tested had only one NIC installed. From a clustering perspective, that arrangement equates to a single point of failure and should be corrected. An added benefit of having a validation process incorporated into the product is that it can be used to assist in the troubleshooting process should a problem arise. The cluster validation process can be run against an already configured cluster. Either all the tests can be run or a select group of tests can be run. The only restriction is that for the storage tests to be run, all physical disk resources in the cluster must be placed in an Offline state. This will necessitate an interruption in services to the clients. Incorporating cluster validation functionality into the product empowers the end user not only by allowing them to verify their own configuration locally, but by also providing them a set of built-in troubleshooting tools. –Chuck Timon, Jr. Support Engineer, Microsoft Enterprise Support, Windows Server Core Team

266

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Tips for Validating Clustering Solutions Here are a few tips on getting a successful validation from running this tool: ■

If you’re going to use domain controllers as nodes, use domain controllers. If you’re going to use member servers instead, use member servers. You can’t do both for the same cluster or validation will fail. (Note that Microsoft generally discourages customers from running clustering on domain controllers.)

■

All the servers that will be nodes in your cluster need to have their computer accounts in the same domain and the same organizational unit.

■

All the servers in your cluster need to be either 32-bit systems or 64-bit systems; you can’t have a mix of these architectures in the same cluster (and you can’t combine x64 and IA64 either in the same cluster).

■

All the servers in your cluster need to be running Windows Server 2008—you can’t have some nodes running earlier versions of Windows.

■

Each server needs at least two network adapters, with each adapter having a different IP address that belongs to a separate subnet on which all the servers reside.

■

If your Fibre Channel or iSCSI SAN supports Multipath I/O (MPIO), a validation test will check to see whether your configuration is supported. (See Chapter 12 for more information about MPIO.)

■

Your cluster storage needs to use the Persistent Reserve commands from the newer SCSI-3 standard and not the older SCSI-2 standard.

And here are a couple of best practices to follow as well. If you ignore these, you might get warnings when you run the validation tool: ■

Make sure all the servers in your cluster have the same software updates (including service packs, hotfixes, and security updates) applied to them or you could experience unpredictable results.

■

Make sure all drivers on your servers are signed properly.

Chapter 9

Clustering Enhancements

267

Setting Up and Managing a Cluster Once you’ve added the Failover Cluster feature on the Windows Server 2008 servers that you’re going to use as your cluster nodes and you have validated your clustering hardware and network and storage infrastructure, you’re ready to create your cluster. Creating a cluster is much easier in Windows Server 2008 than in previous versions of Windows Server. For example, in Windows Server 2003 you had to create your cluster first using one node and then adding the other nodes one at a time. Now you can add all your nodes at once when you create your cluster. To create your new cluster, you open the Failover Clustering Management console from Administrative Tools, right-click on the root node, and select Create A Cluster. Then you simply follow the steps presented in the Create A Cluster Wizard by specifying your server names, typing a name for your cluster (following standard naming conventions) to define the Client Access Point (CAP) for your cluster, specifying static IP address information (which is needed only if DHCP is not being used by your nodes), and then clicking Finish. An XML report is generated after you’ve finished, and you can view it later from the %windir%\cluster\reports directory if you need to. (The report is saved on every node in the cluster.) Note that when you’re specifying the names of servers for your cluster, the number of nodes you can specify depends on your processor architecture. Specifically, clusters on x64 hardware support up to 16 nodes, while only 8 nodes are supported on both x86 and IA64 architectures. This is true whether you’re using the Enterprise or Datacenter edition of Windows Server 2008. (Failover Clustering is not supported on the Standard or Web Edition.) Once you’ve created your cluster, you’re ready to manage it. Figure 9-3 shows the Failover Cluster Management console for a cluster of two nodes. You can use this tool to change the quorum model, make applications and\or services highly available, configure cluster permissions (including a new feature that lets you audit access to your cluster if auditing has been enabled on your servers), and perform other common cluster management tasks. In fact, you can now use this new MMC console to manage multiple clusters at once—something you couldn’t do with the previous version of the tool, which looked like an MMC console but really wasn’t. (But you can’t manage server clusters running on earlier versions of Windows using the new Failover Cluster Management console.) In addition, you can use the cluster.exe command to manage your cluster from the command line (but again you can’t use the new cluster.exe command to manage clusters running on previous Windows platforms). And finally, you can use the clustering WMI provider to automate clustering management tasks using scripts.

268

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Figure 9-3 Managing a cluster using the Failover Cluster Management snap-in

Of course, the real purpose of setting up a cluster is to be able to use it to provide high availability for your network applications and services. But before we look at that, let’s hear what an expert at Microsoft has to say about the new MMC snap-in for managing clusters.

From the Experts: Simplifying the User Experience Failover Clusters in previous versions of the Windows operating system were difficult for many users to configure and maintain. A primary design goal for Windows Server 2008 Failover Clustering was to make it easier for the IT generalist to implement high availability. To achieve this goal required that changes be made to both the user interface (UI) and to the process for configuring the cluster and the associated highly available applications and services. The Cluster Administration tool in previous versions of the operating system was a pseudo-MMC snap-in. You could not open a blank MMC console and add it as a valid snap-in. Once the Cluster Administration console was open, it was not very intuitive. It was not easy to understand the default resource group configuration (with the possible exception of the default Cluster Group), and it took a little bit of trial and error to figure out how to configure high availability. This level of complexity has changed in Windows Server 2008. The Failover Cluster Management interface is a true MMC 3.0 snap-in. When the feature is installed, the snap-in is placed in the Administrative Tools

Chapter 9

Clustering Enhancements

269

group. It can also be added into a blank MMC snap-in along with other tools. The Windows Server 2008 Failover Cluster manager cannot be used to manage clusters in previous versions of Windows and vice versa. The Failover Cluster Management snap-in consists of three distinct panes. The left pane provides a listing of all the managed clusters in an organization if they have been added in by the user. (All Windows Server 2008 clusters can be managed inside one snap-in). The center pane displays information based on what is selected in the left pane, and the right pane lists actions that can be executed based on what is selected in the center pane. If the Failover Cluster Management snap-in has been added to a noncluster node (must be added as a feature called “Remote Server Administration Tools”), the user needs to manually add each cluster that will be managed. If the Failover Cluster Management snap-in is opened on a cluster node, a connection is made to the cluster service if it is running on the local node. The cluster that is hosted on the node is listed in the left pane. The cluster configuration processes have also changed significantly in Windows Server 2008. One of those processes, cluster validation, has already been discussed. (See the “From the Experts: Validating a Failover Cluster Configuration” sidebar.) Once a cluster configuration has passed validation, the next step is to create a cluster. Like the cluster validation process, the process for creating a cluster is also wizard-based. All major configuration changes in a Windows Server 2008 Failover Cluster are made using a wizardbased process. Users are stepped through a process in an orderly fashion. Information is requested and information is provided until all the required information has been gathered, and then the requested task is executed and completed in the background. Administrators can now accomplish in simple three-step wizards what used to be very long, complex, and error-prone tasks in previous versions. For each wizard-based process, a report is generated when the process completes. As with other reports, a copy is placed in the %systemroot%\cluster\reports subdirectory of each node in the cluster. Incorporating the innovative features listed here should make deploying and managing Windows Server 2008 Failover Clusters much easier for IT shops of any size. –Chuck Timon, Jr. Support Engineer, Microsoft Enterprise Support, Windows Server Core Team

Creating a Highly Available File Server A common use for clustering is to provide high availability for file servers on your network, and you can now achieve this goal in a straightforward manner using Failover Clustering in Windows Server 2008. Let me quickly walk you through the steps, and if you’re testing Windows Server 2008 Beta 3 you can try this on your own. (See Chapter 13, “Deploying Windows Server 2008,” for more information on setting up a test environment for Windows Server 2008.)

270

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Here’s all you need to do to configure a two-node file server cluster instance on your network: First, add the Failover Clustering feature to both of your servers, which must of course be running Windows Server 2008. See Chapter 5 for information about how to add features and roles to servers. Now run the Validation tool to make sure your cluster solution satisfies the requirements for Failover Clustering in Windows Server 2008. Make sure you have a witness disk (or file share witness) accessible by both of your servers. Now open the Failover Cluster Management console, and click Configure A Service Or Application in the Actions pane on the right. This starts the High Availability Wizard. Click Next, and select File Server on the Select Service Or Application screen of the wizard.

Click Next, and specify a Client Access Point (CAP) name for your cluster (again following standard naming conventions). Then specify static IP address information if DHCP is not being used by your servers. If your servers are connected to several networks and you’re using static addressing, you need to specify an address for each subnet because the wizard assumes you want to ensure that your file server instance will be highly available for users on each connected subnet. Click Next again, and select the shared disks on which your file share data will be stored. Then click through to finish the wizard. Now return to the Failover Cluster Management console, where you can bring your new file server application group online.

Chapter 9

Clustering Enhancements

271

The middle pane displays the CAP name of the file server instance (which is different from the CAP name of the Failover Cluster itself that you defined earlier when you created your cluster) and the shared storage being used by this instance. The Action pane on the right gives you additional options, such as adding a shared folder, adding storage, and so on. If you click Add A Shared Folder, the Create A Shared Folder Wizard starts. In this wizard, you can browse to select a folder on your shared disk and then share this folder so that users can access data stored on your file server. And in Windows Server 2008, you can also easily create new file shares on a Failover Cluster by using Explorer—something you couldn’t do in previous versions of Windows server clustering. And that’s basically it! You now have a highly available two-node file server cluster that your users can use for centrally storing their files. Who needs a dedicated clustering expert on staff when you’ve deployed Windows Server 2008? Here are a few additional tips on managing your clustered file share instance. First, you can also manage your cluster using the cluster.exe command-line tool. For example, typing cluster . res displays all the resources on your cluster together with the status of each resource. This functionality includes displaying your shared folders in UNC format—for example, \\\. In addition, typing cluster .res < file_server_instance > /priv displays the Private properties of your file server instance (for example, your Network Name resource), while cluster .res < file_server_instance > /prop displays its Public properties.

272

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Another new feature of clustered file servers in Windows Server 2008 is scoping of file shares. This feature is enabled by default, as can be seen by viewing the ScopedName setting when you display the Private properties of your Network Name resource. Scoping restricts what can be seen on the server via a NetBIOS connection—for example, when you type net view \\ at the command prompt, where CAP_name is the Network Name resource of your Failover Cluster, not one of your file server instances. On earlier Windows clustering platforms, running this command displayed all the shares being hosted on your cluster. However, in Windows Server 2008 you don’t see anything when you run this command because shared folders are scoped to your individual file server instances and not to the Failover Cluster itself. Instead, you can see the shares that have been scoped against a specific file server instance by typing net view \\ at your command prompt. Finally, you can also enable Access Based Enumeration (ABE) on the shared folders in your file server cluster. ABE was first introduced in Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1, and it was designed to prevent domain users from being able to see files and folders within network shares unless they specifically had access permissions for those files and folders. (If you’re interested, ABE works by setting the SHARE_INFO_1055 flag on the shared folder using the NetShareSetInfo API, which is described on MSDN.) To enable ABE for a shared folder on a Windows Server 2008 file server cluster, just open the Advanced Settings dialog box from the share’s Properties page and select the Enable Access Based Enumeration check box.

Chapter 9

Clustering Enhancements

273

One final note concerning creating a highly available file server: One of the really cool things that was added in Beta 3 is Shell Integration. This means you can now just open up Explorer and create file shares as you normally would, and Failover Clustering is smart enough that it will detect if the share is being created on a clustered disk. And if so, it will then do all the right things for you by creating a file share resource on your cluster. So admins who are not cluster savvy don’t need to worry—just manage file shares on clusters as you would for any other file server!

Performing Other Cluster Management Tasks You might need or want to perform lots of other management tasks using the management tools (snap-ins, the cluster.exe command, and WMI classes) for Failover Clustering. The following paragraphs provide a quick list of a few of these tasks, and I’m sure you can think of more. First, you’ll probably need to replace a physical disk resource when the disk fails. This task can be done as follows: Initialize the new disk using the Disk Management snap-in found under the Storage node in Server Manager. (See Chapter 4, “Managing Windows Server 2008,” for more information on Server Manager.) Then partition it and assign it a drive letter. Now open the Failover Cluster Management console, right-click on the failed disk resource, select Properties, click Repair, and specify the replacement disk. Then bring the disk online and change the drive letter back to the original one. Now you can bring your cluster back online. And this process works even if the disk being replaced is your shared quorum disk! Second, if you’re already running server clusters on Windows Server 2003 and you’re thinking of migrating them to Windows Server 2008, a new Cluster Migration Tool will be included in Failover Clustering that can help you to migrate a cluster configuration from one cluster (either Windows Server 2008 or an earlier platform) to another (running Windows Server 2008). This tool copies both resources and cluster configurations and is fairly easy to use, but you can’t perform a rolling upgrade—for example, you can’t migrate one node at a time from the old cluster to the new one. And you can’t have a Failover Cluster that contains a mix of nodes running Windows Server 2008 and nodes running earlier Windows platforms. Finally, you’ll also want to know how to monitor and troubleshoot cluster issues. On earlier clustering platforms, you had to use a combination of the standard Windows event logs (Application, System, and so on) together with the cluster.log file found in the %systemroot%\cluster folder. Plus there were some additional configuration logs under %systemroot%\system32\LogFiles\Cluster that you could use to try and diagnose

274

Introducing Windows Server 2008

cluster problems. In Windows Server 2008, however, cluster logging has changed significantly. Let’s listen now to one of our experts at Microsoft as he explains these changes:

From the Experts: Failover Cluster Logging in Windows Server 2008 In Windows Server 2008, cluster logging has been changed. The cluster log implemented in previous versions of server clustering, which was located in the %windir%\cluster directory, is no longer there. As a result of the new Windows Eventing model implemented in Windows Server 2008, the cluster logging process has evolved. Critical cluster events will still be registered in the standard Windows System event log; however, a separate Operational Log has also been created. This log will contain informational events that pertain to the cluster, an example of which is shown here:

Chapter 9

Clustering Enhancements

275

The Operational Log is a standard Windows event log (.evtx file format) and can be viewed in the Windows Event Viewer. In the Event Viewer, the log can be found under Applications and Services Logs\Microsoft\Windows\FailoverClustering:

276

Introducing Windows Server 2008

The “live” cluster log, on the other hand, cannot be viewed inside the Windows Event Viewer. As a result of the new Eventing model implemented in Windows Server 2008, and the requirement for the cluster log to be a “running” record of events that occur in the cluster, the cluster log has now been implemented as a “tracing” session. Information about this tracing session can be viewed using the “Reliability and Performance Monitor” snap-in as shown in these two screen shots:

Chapter 9

Clustering Enhancements

277

The log is in Event Trace Log (.etl) format and can be parsed using the tracerpt command-line utility that comes in the operating system. The ClusterLog.etl.xxx file(s) are located in the same directory as the Operational Log i.e. %windir%\system32\ winevt\logs. There can be multiple ClusterLog.etl files in this location. Each log, by default, can grow to 40 MB in size (configurable) before a new one is created. Additionally, a new log will be created every time the server reboots. As mentioned, the tracerpt command-line utility can be used to parse these log files as shown here:

Additionally, the cluster.exe CLI has been modified so the cluster log can be generated for all nodes in the cluster or a specific node in the cluster. Here is an example:

278

Introducing Windows Server 2008

These logs can be read using Notepad:

–Chuck Timon, Jr. Support Engineer, Microsoft Enterprise Support, Windows Server Core Team

Network Load Balancing Enhancements Let’s conclude this chapter with a brief look at enhancements to Network Load Balancing (NLB) in Windows Server 2008. This particular list of new features and enhancements is shorter than others in this chapter. First, although the overall architecture and functionality of NLB remains the same as far as deploying and managing this feature are concerned, the picture under the hood is quite different: the NLB driver has essentially been rewritten to conform with the new NDIS 6.0 filter driver model used in Windows Server 2008. As shown in Figure 9-4, the NLB driver is a kernel-mode driver that runs on each server in an NLB cluster, and this is essentially the same as in previous versions of Windows Server.

Chapter 9

Clustering Enhancements

279

NLB servers

Ethernet switch App

App Internet

TCP/IP NLB Driver

Clients

NIC

Peer communication

Figure 9-4 How NLB works

The biggest reason for rewriting the NLB driver from scratch is that now the NLB driver is an NDIS 6.0 lightweight filter module. This means that it’s a cleaner, lighter, and faster driver when compared with the NDIS 5.1 intermediate driver that NLB had in Windows Server 2003. One of the most valued improvements done in Windows Server 2008 was to provide full IPv6 support for NLB servers. In other words, IPv6 nodes can now join an NLB cluster and IPv6 traffic can be load-balanced between nodes. There is also support now for multiple dedicated IP addresses (DIPs). This also means that NLB clusters can now have multiple IPv6 DIPs in addition to the support for multiple virtual IP addresses (VIPs) that existed in previous versions. Another helpful improvement has to do with consolidated management using Network Load Balancing Manager—you no longer need to work with the network configuration user interface on every single node of the cluster. This welcome change will ultimately minimize NLB configuration problems. NLB Manager is also more reliable because of WMI enhancements that enable auto recovery of the repository when it becomes corrupted or accidentally deleted. Other NLB enhancements include the following: ■

Improved DoS attack protection for interested apps. Using a public callback interface, NLB can notify applications of SYN attacks so that steps can be taken to remediate the problem.

280

Introducing Windows Server 2008 ■

Support for a rolling upgrade of NLB clusters from Windows Server 2003 to Windows Server 2008.

■

Support for unattended installation of NLB.

■

Support for NLB in Server Core.

Let’s end this chapter with a couple of insights from experts at Microsoft regarding new features and enhancements to NLB in Windows Server 2008. First let’s learn how you can use the public WMI provider to add health monitoring and dynamic load balancing to applications running on your NLB cluster:

From the Experts: Add Health Monitoring to Your NLB App! The Network Load Balancing (NLB) service does not monitor the health of your application. Instead, it allows the application developer to determine how healthy a loadbalanced application is. Since each application has its own notion of load and health, measuring and monitoring these quantities is best achieved by the application itself. By using collected measurements from your application and NLB’s public WMI provider, it is a relatively simple task to add load and health monitoring to your load-balanced application. If your application has a service that runs on each node of the NLB cluster, or a service that runs on a single (master) node that can communicate with the other nodes in the cluster, this service can double as a monitoring service that periodically queries each node for performance data and application-specific load and health information. Queries for performance data can be made locally or remotely using WMI. For example, you can query a particular node for its CPU load or the number of active TCP connections (the latter can also be determined by running the nlb params command locally and parsing the output). Queries for application-specific data can be made locally or remotely using the application’s protocol. For example, you can send a request to a particular node targeted at the port the application is listening on and measure the amount of time it takes to get a response. Even if your load-balanced application does not have its own service to issue these queries from–this is generally true of Web sites that run on Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) or some other web server–you can still gather load and health data by writing a script that periodically issues queries to each node. A VBScript script running in a loop on one node, for example, can issue WMI or application-specific queries to every other node in the cluster. The ultimate goal is to gather enough data to determine how healthy and loaded each instance of the application is. Once you have gathered all the appropriate load and health metrics from each node, you need to act on this information. If you find that a given node has become unresponsive— either because the application instance is experiencing problems or the machine itself has died—you may want to remove this node from the NLB cluster. You can do this by

Chapter 9

Clustering Enhancements

281

executing the DrainStop or Stop method on the instance of the MicrosoftNLB_Node class running on that node (refer to MSDN documentation of the MicrosoftNLB_Node class). Keep in mind that these operations will affect all traffic being handled by the node and will eventually remove it from the cluster. If the problem is confined to a particular port or virtual IP address-port combination, you can use the Drain/DrainEx or Disable/ DisableEx methods to drain or disable the affected port rule instead. Once the problem goes away or the machine has been recovered, you can use the Enable/EnableEx methods to resume traffic handling on a per-port rule basis, or the Start method to restart cluster operations on a previously stopped node. Congratulations—you have added a simple but effective health monitoring scheme to your load-balanced application! It may not always be the case that you want to drain or disable all traffic associated with a port rule. For example, you may find that a given application instance is responsive but severely overloaded, in which case the best course of action might be to temporarily reduce the amount of load it is configured to handle, and restore this amount only after things have subsided. You can achieve this by adjusting the LoadWeight property of the MicrosoftNLB_PortRuleEx class running on that node (refer to MSDN documentation of the MicrosoftNLB_PortRuleEx class). By changing this quantity, you can decrease/ increase the amount of future traffic handled by the node on that port rule. Congratulations—you have added a simple but effective dynamic load balancing scheme to your load-balanced application! By monitoring the health of your application across the cluster, and making appropriate adjustments to the load handled by each node, you will increase the overall responsiveness, reliability, and performance of your load-balanced application – all in a way that makes sense to your app. –Siddhartha Sen Software Design Engineer, Clustering & High Availability Group, Windows Server And last but not least, here are some helpful troubleshooting tips when you have Network Load Balancing deployed in your environment:

From the Experts: Tips on Troubleshooting NLB Issues If you see that some of your clients are not getting serviced by NLB hosts, you can take the following steps to isolate the issue: 1. The first thing to check is whether the application running on top of all hosts in a cluster is behaving as expected. When a application running on top of a host dies, NLB doesn’t automatically move the traffic to a different host in the cluster. The trick to narrow down the problem is to first see if you see the issue with one node

282

Introducing Windows Server 2008

NLB cluster (stop all other hosts and then the one being tested). If you can isolate the host, try to reproduce the problem without NLB bound. 2. Next start Network Load Balancing Manager from a client/host that has access to all the hosts in the cluster. If Network Load Balancing Manager gives you any errors, try to fix them. The errors shown by Network Load Balancing Manager can be fixed most of the time by reapplying the last known configuration on the host one connects. This can be done by right-clicking on the cluster name in Network Load Balancing Manager, selecting cluster properties, and clicking OK. 3. Make sure next that all the port rules you want are correct by re-verifying your port rules. To do this, right-click the cluster, select cluster properties, and take a look at the Port Rules tab. Many times rules are incorrectly defined, so make sure you read the description about how various port rules behave and be sure you understand the difference between single affinity, no affinity, diabled rules, rules with different weight, default host rules, and so on. 4. The next step in troubleshooting would be to check whether the information shown by Network Load Balancing Manager is consistent with the output of command-line utilities like the nlb params and nlb display commands. 5. The next step in triaging would be to make sure each host in the cluster is seeing all the incoming traffic. This can be done by sending ICMP ping commands to the cluster from a few clients. If ping works then also make sure you can connect to other services (RPC, WMI, and so on) on each host. This can be done by starting Network Monitor on each host. Network Monitor can be downloaded from http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?FamilyID=AA8BE06D-4A6A4B69-B861-2043B665CB53&displaylang=en. You should see client traffic received on each host. In your network capture you should also see NLB heartbeats (an Ethernet broadcast packet with the bytes 0x886f after the source address in the Ethernet frame) being exchanged among the hosts. If traffic is being handled by only one host, make sure that your switch has not learned the MAC address of the cluster. –Amit Date Software Design Engineer in Test, Clustering & High Availability Group, Windows Server

Chapter 9

Clustering Enhancements

283

Conclusion Clustering improvements are manifold in Windows Server 2008, making the platform ideal for running applications and services that need to be highly available to support your business. I found it fun learning about these new features, and I hope you’re as excited about them as I am. Now let’s move on to another hot feature of Windows Server 2008—namely, (Cough! Cough!) Network Access Protection. I should have taken my zinc tablets while I was finishing this chapter around 4 a.m., and I think I’m coming down with a sore throat. We IT pros just work way too hard, don’t we?

Additional Resources There’s a brief overview of the new features and enhancements in Failover Clustering in Windows Server 2008 on the Microsoft Web site at http://www.microsoft.com/windowsserver/ longhorn/failover-clusters.mspx. I think by the time you have this book in your hands, this page will likely be fleshed out some more, so keep it bookmarked. If you’ve signed up for the Longhorn beta on Microsoft Connect, you’ll find several useful resources there, including a Live Meeting on Clustering, a Step By Step guide titled “Configuring a Two-Node File Server Failover Cluster,” another Step By Step guide called “Configuring Network Load Balancing with Terminal Services,” a live chat on clustering, and probably more. Finally, be sure to turn to Chapter 14, “"Additional Resources,” for more information on Failover Clustering and NLB, and also references to webcasts, whitepapers, blogs, newsgroups, and other sources of information about all aspects of Windows Server 2008.

Chapter 10

Network Access Protection In this chapter: The Need for Network Access Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Understanding Network Access Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Understanding the NAP Architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 A Walkthrough of How NAP Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Implementing NAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 Troubleshooting NAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339 Additional Resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 Before we dig into this feature, let me tell you a brief background story concerning this book. Why write a book about a beta version of a product? Won’t a book like this become obsolete once the final release version of the product appears? Probably, yes. After all, at the time of writing this particular chapter, Microsoft Windows Server 2008 has not quite reached Beta 3, so features are bound to change between now and RTM. Doesn’t that mean that this is basically a “throwaway” book? I suppose that’s true of many books like this. But why would Microsoft throw away money to have this published? The answer’s simple—to help get customers ready for what’s coming. Whenever Microsoft is in the process of developing a major new platform—a new Microsoft Windows client or server operating system, a new release of Microsoft Visual Studio, the .NET Framework, and so on—they like to produce a book like this describing a prerelease version of the product. And usually these books are throwaways—that is, IT pros read them and learn about the capabilities of the product, and when the final release of the product appears, Microsoft publishes other books on the product such as an Administrator’s Companion, a Pocket Consultant, a Resource Kit, and so on. Usually, after the IT pros buy these additional titles, they toss away the “beta book” because they figure it’s no longer useful. Well, as you’ve probably noticed by now, this book is different. Why? Because it’s more than just an overview—it’s got real meat in it. That is, it has insights and recommendations from the experts at Microsoft who are actually developing Windows Server 2008 and its different features. For instance, in this chapter alone you’ll find sidebars contributed by eight different members of the Network Access Protection (NAP) team at Microsoft, including program

285

286

Introducing Windows Server 2008

managers, software design engineers, and software development engineers. And these sidebars are deep, they’re technical, and they’re full of meat you can chew on. I mean, how many IT pros are vegans, really? Dropping the silly metaphors, what I really mean is that even after Windows Server 2008 RTMs and other great books about it are published by Microsoft Press, you’ll still want to keep this particular book on your shelf and refer back to it whenever you need to draw on the insights that the product team has contributed to this and other chapters. Am I tooting my own horn too much? Not really—I’m tooting a “long horn” actually! But even if I am shamelessly promoting myself and my book, what’s wrong with that? How do you think The Donald earned his first billion, anyway? Certainly not by making puns on product names, I guess. Let’s move on to NAP.

The Need for Network Access Protection Protecting the network is the number one challenge of most organizations today. What makes this difficult for many organizations is that many different kinds of users need to access their networks, including full-time employees who work on desktop computers, mobile sales professionals who need to VPN into corpnet using their laptops, teleworkers who use their desktop computers to work from home, consultants and other “guests” who come on site and need to connect their laptops to either LAN drops or wireless access points, business partners who need access via the extranet, and so on. Many of these computers need to be domainjoined, but others are not and therefore don’t have Group Policy applied when users log on. And not all of these computers are running the latest version of Microsoft Windows—in fact, some of them might not be running Windows at all! Some of these computers will have a personal firewall enabled and configured, which might be either the Windows Firewall or some third-party product. Others might have no firewall at all on them. Most will have antivirus software installed on them, but some of these might not have downloaded the latest AV signature files from their vendor. Client computers that are permanently connected to corpnet will likely have the latest service packs, hotfixes, and security patches installed, but guest computers and machines that are not domain-joined might be lacking some patches. The overall effect of all this is that today’s enterprise network is a dangerous place to live. If you are a network administrator and a machine wants to connect to your network, either via a LAN drop or access point or RAS or VPN connection, how do you know it’s safe to let it do so? What if you allow an “unhealthy” machine—one missing the latest security updates or with its firewall turned off or with an outdated AV signature file—to connect to your network? You might be jeopardizing your network’s integrity. How can you prevent this from happening? How can you make sure only machines that are “healthy” are allowed to access your network? And what happens when an unhealthy machine does try to connect? Should you bump him off immediately, or is it possible to “quarantine” the machine and help it become healthy enough so that it can be allowed in?

Chapter 10

Network Access Protection

287

Understanding Network Access Protection There are already solutions around that can do some of these things. Some of them are homegrown. For example, one organization I’m familiar with uses a DHCP registration system that links MAC addresses to user accounts stored in Active Directory to control which machines have access to the network. But homegrown solutions like this tend to be hard to manage and difficult to maintain, and they can sometimes be circumvented—for example, by using a static IP address configuration that allows access to a subnet scoped by DHCP. Vendors also have their own solutions to this problem, and Microsoft has one for Windows Server 2003 called Network Access Quarantine Control, but although this solution can enhance the security of your network if implemented properly, it has its limitations. For example, although Network Access Quarantine Control can perform client inspection on machines trying to connect to the network, it’s only intended to do so for remote access connections. Basically, what Network Access Quarantine Control does is delay normal remote access to a private network until the configuration of the remote computer has been checked and validated by a quarantine script. And it’s the customers themselves who must write these scripts that perform the compliance checks because the exact nature of these scripts depends upon the customer’s own networking environment. This can make Network Access Quarantine Control challenging to implement. Other vendors, such as Cisco Systems, have developed their own solutions to the problem, and Cisco’s solution is called Network Access Control (NAC). NAC is designed to enforce security policy compliance on any devices that are trying to access network resources. Using NAC, you can allow network access to devices that are compliant and trusted, and you can restrict access for devices that are noncompliant. NAC is both a framework that includes infrastructure to support compliance checks based on industry-common AV and security management products, and a product called NAC Appliance that you can drop in and use to build your compliance checking, remediation, and enforcement infrastructure. Network Access Protection (NAP) in Windows Server 2008 is another solution, and it’s one that is rapidly gaining recognition in the enterprise IT community. NAP consists of a set of components for both servers (Windows Server 2008 only) and clients (Windows Vista now, Windows XP soon), together with a set of APIs that will be made public once Windows Server 2008 is released. NAP is not a product but a platform that is widely supported by over 100 different ISVs and IHVs, including AV vendors like McAfee and Symantec, patch management companies like Altiris and PatchLink, security software vendors like RSA Security, makers of security appliances including Citrix, network device manufacturers including Enterasys and F5, and system integrators such as EDS and VeriSign. Those are all big names in the industry, and the number of vendors supporting NAP is increasing daily. And that’s not marketing hype, it’s fact—and it’s important to IT pros like us because we want a platform like NAP to support our existing enterprise networks, which typically already have products and solutions from many of the vendors I just listed.

288

Introducing Windows Server 2008

What NAP Does If you want a short definition of NAP, it’s this: NAP is a platform that can enforce compliance by computing devices with predetermined health requirements before these devices are allowed to access or communicate on a network. By itself, NAP is not designed to protect your network and is not intended to replace firewalls, AV products, patch management systems, and other protection elements. Instead, it’s designed to work together with these different elements to ensure devices on your network comply with policy that you have defined. And by devices I mean client computers (Windows Vista and soon Windows XP as well), servers running Windows Server 2008, PDAs running Windows Mobile (soon), and eventually also computers running other operating systems such as Linux and the Apple Macintosh operating system (using NAP components developed by third-party vendors). Let’s unpack this a bit further. NAP supplies an infrastructure (components and APIs) that provides support for the following four processes: ■

Health policy validation NAP can determine whether a given computer is compliant or not with a set of health policy requirements that you, the administrator, can define for your network. For example, one of your health requirements might be that all computers on your network must have a host-based firewall installed on them and enabled. Another requirement might be that all computers on your network must have the latest software updates installed on them.

■

Network access limitation

■

Automatic remediation NAP can automatically remediate noncompliant computers that are attempting to access the network. For example, say you have a laptop that doesn’t have the latest security updates installed on it. You try to connect to corpnet, and NAP identifies your machine as noncompliant with corpnet health requirements, and it quarantines your machine on a restricted subnet where it can interact only with Windows Server Update Services (WSUS) servers. NAP then points your machine to the WSUS servers and tells it to go and get updates from them. Your machine downloads the updates, NAP then verifies that your machine is now healthy, and you’re let in the door and can access corpnet. Automatic remediation like this allows NAP to not just prevent unhealthy machines from connecting to your network, but also help those machines become healthy so that they can have access to needed network resources without bringing worms and other malware into your network. Of course, NAP puts you, the administrator, in the driver’s seat, so you can turn off auto-remediation if you want to

NAP can limit access to network resources for computers that are noncompliant with your health policy requirements. This limiting of access can range from preventing the noncompliant computer from connecting to any other computers on your network to quarantining it on a subnet and restricting its access to a limited set of machines. Or you can choose to not limit access at all for noncompliant computers and merely log their presence on the network for reporting purposes; it’s you’re choice—NAP puts you, the administrator, in control of how you limit network access based on compliance.

Chapter 10

Network Access Protection

289

and instead have NAP simply point the noncompliant machine to an internal Web site that gives the user instructions on what to do to make the machine compliant (or simply states why the noncompliant machine is not being allowed access to the network). Again, it’s your choice how you want NAP to operate with regard to how remediation is performed. ■

Ongoing compliance Finally, NAP doesn’t just check for compliance when your computer joins the network. It continues to verify compliance on an ongoing basis to ensure that your machine remains healthy for the entire duration of the time it’s connected to your network.

As an example, let’s say your NAP health policy is configured to enforce compliance with the requirement that Windows Firewall be turned on for all Windows Vista and Windows XP clients connected to the network. You’re on the road and you VPN into corpnet, and NAP—after verifying that Windows Firewall is enabled on your machine— lets you in. Once you’re in, however, you decide for some reason to turn Windows Firewall off. (You’re an administrator on your machine, so you can do that—making users local administrators is not best practice, but some companies do that.) So you turn off Windows Firewall, which means the status of your machine has now changed and it’s out of compliance. What does NAP do? If you’ve configured it properly, it simply turns Windows Firewall back on! How does this work? The client computer has a NAP agent running on it and this agent detects this change in health status and tries to immediately remediate the situation. It can be a bit more complicated than that (for example, agent detects noncompliance, health certificate gets deleted, client goes into quarantine, NAP server remediates, agent confirms compliance, client becomes healthy again and regains access to the network) but that’s the basic idea—we’ll talk more about the NAP architecture in a moment.

NAP Enforcement Methods So NAP can enforce compliance with network health policies you define for your network. But how does it enforce compliance? What are the enforcement mechanisms available? NAP actually has five different enforcement mechanisms you can use: DHCP, VPN, 802.1X, IPSec, and TS-Gateway. Let’s briefly look at each of these mechanisms and how NAP uses them to verify health and enforce compliance with health policies you’ve defined.

DHCP Enforcement DHCP is the network administrator’s friend. It makes managing IP addresses across an enterprise easy. You don’t want to have to go back to managing addresses manually, do you? But DHCP is a notoriously unsecure protocol that basically just gives an address to any machine that wants one. You want an IP address? Here, you can have this one—don’t bother me for a while. Once your machine has an IP address (and subnet mask, default gateway, and DNS server addresses), you’re on the network and you can communicate with other

290

Introducing Windows Server 2008

machines. If you have the right permissions, you can access shared resources on the network. If you don’t have any permissions, you can’t access any resources, but you can still wreak havoc on the network if your machine is infected with Blaster, Slammer, or some other worm. So how does NAP help prevent such infected machines from damaging your network? It’s easy if your DHCP server is running Windows Server 2008 and either has the Network Policy Server (NPS) role service installed as a RADIUS server (with policies) or has NPS installed as a RADIUS proxy that redirects RADIUS requests to a different NPS server running as a RADIUS server somewhere else on your network. Basically, what happens in this enforcement scenario is this (for simplicity we’ll assume the first option above is true, that is NPS and DHCP servers are installed on the same Windows Server 2008 machine): 1. Client configured to obtain IP address configuration using DHCP tries to connect to DHCP server on network to obtain address and access the network. 2. DHCP (NAP) server checks the health of the client. If the client is healthy, it leases a full, valid IP address configuration (address, mask, gateway, and DNS) to the client and the client enters the network. If the client is unhealthy (not in compliance with NAP health policy requirements), the DHCP server leases a limited IP address configuration to the client that includes only the following: ❑

IP address

❑

Subnet mask

❑

Set of host routes to remediation servers on the restricted network

3. Once configured, the client has no default gateway and can access only the specified servers on the local subnet. These servers (called remediation servers) can apply patches, provide updated AV sigs, and perform other actions to help bring the client into compliance. 4. Finally, once the client has been brought into compliance (made healthy), the DHCP server leases a full IP address configuration to it and it can now connect to the intranet.

VPN Enforcement VPN is the most popular way today’s enterprises provide remote access to clients. Remember the old days when large businesses had to buy modem banks and lease dozens of phone lines to handle remote clients that needed to dial in and connect to corpnet? Those days are long gone now that secure VPN technologies have arrived that encrypt all communication between VPN clients and servers. Windows Vista has a built-in VPN client that enables a client computer to tunnel over the Internet and connect to a VPN server running Windows Server 2008. To use VPN as an enforcement mechanism for NAP, your VPN server needs to be running Windows Server 2008 and have the Routing And Remote Access Services role service installed on it. (This role service is part of the Network Policy And Access Services role. (See Chapter 5 for more information about roles and role services.)

Chapter 10

Network Access Protection

291

Basically, VPN enforcement works like this: 1. The remote VPN client attempts to connect to the VPN server on your perimeter network. 2. The VPN server checks the health of the client by contacting the NAP server (which again is either a separate NPS or RADIUS server running Windows Server 2008 or a RADIUS proxy redirecting RADIUS requests to a different NPS on your network). If the client is healthy, it establishes the VPN connection and the remote client is on the network. If the client is unhealthy, the VPN server applies a set of packet filters that quarantines the client by letting it connect only to your restricted network where your remediation servers are located. 3. Once your client gets remediated (for example, by downloading the latest AV sig file) the VPN server removes the packet filters from the client and the client can then connect freely to corpnet.

802.1X Enforcement 802.1X is an IEEE standard that defines a mechanism for port-based network access control. It’s used to provide authenticated network access to Ethernet networks and was originally designed for wired networks but also works with 802.11 wireless networks. By port-based network access control I mean that 802.1X uses the physical characteristics of a switched LAN infrastructure to authenticate a device that is attached to a port on a switch. If the device is authenticated, the switch allows it to send and receive frames on the network. If authentication is denied, the switch doesn’t allow the device to do this. The authentication mechanism used by 802.1X is EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol), which is based on PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol), and for Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 the exact supported authentication protocols are EAP-TLS, PEAP-TLS, and PEAP-MS-CHAP v2. We’re talking acronym city here—we won’t go into that. 802.1X enforcement basically works like this: 1. An EAP-capable client device (for example, a computer running Windows Vista, which has an EAPHost NAP enforcement client) tries to connect an 802.1X-capable switch on your network. Most modern managed Ethernet switches support 802.1X, and in order to support NAP the switch must support 802.1x authentication and V-LAN switching based on the authentication results from the auth submitted to the RADIUS server (in this case the RADIUS server is NPS, which will also do NAP). 2.

The switch forwards the health status of the client to the NPS, which determines whether it complies with policy. If the client is healthy, the NPS tells the switch to open the port and the client is let into the network. If the compliance test fails, either the switch can close the port and deny the client entry, or it can VLAN the client to place it on an isolated network where it can talk only to remediation servers. Then once the client is remediated, the switch lets it onto corpnet.

292

Introducing Windows Server 2008

IPSec Enforcement IPSec enforcement for NAP works a little differently than the other enforcement methods just described. Specifically, IPSec enforcement doesn’t quarantine a noncompliant client by isolating it on a restricted network or VLAN. Instead, a noncompliant client simply doesn’t receive a health certificate as these are only given to machines that connect to a Health Registration Authority (HRA), submit a Statement of Health (SoH), pass the health check and then receive that certificate back. Then, other machines that have IPSec policy that mandates that they only receive incoming connections from machines that have a health certificate will ignore incoming connections from noncompliant machines since they don’t have a health certificate. So in other words, in IPSec NAP enforcement, a noncompliant machine is allowed onto the network in a physical sense (in the sense that it can send and receive frames), but compliant computers on the network simply ignore traffic from the noncompliant machine. To configure IPSec enforcement, you configure IPSec policy for your client machines to require a health certificate. This is easy to do in Windows Vista because this functionality is built into the new Windows Firewall With Advanced Security. (See the Windows Vista Resource Kit from Microsoft Press for more information.) Then you set up a HRA on your network, and the HRA works together with the Network Policy Server (NPS) to issue X.509 health certificates to clients that are determined to comply with NAP health policy for the network. These certificates are then used to authenticate the clients when they attempt to initiate IPSecprotected connections with other machines (called peers) on your network. The HRA is a key component of using IPSec for NAP enforcements, and it has to be a machine running Windows Server 2008 and having the IIS7 component (Web Server role) installed. The HRA obtains health certificates for compliant NAP clients from a certification authority (CA), and the CA can be installed either on the Windows Server 2008 machine or on a different system. The HRA obtains health certificates. Let’s learn more about HRA from an expert at Microsoft:

From the Experts: HRA Auto Discovery for Network Access Protection IPSec Enforcement Large enterprises often have complex deployments involving many domains, multiple forests, and a large number of sites within this hierarchy. NAP clients require the configuration of Health Registration Authorities (HRAs), which clients need to contact to acquire a health certificate. This can be configured on the client either locally or pushed out via Group Policy, which requires the administrators to create site-specific GPOs to specify which HRAs a client should hit to acquire a health certificate and which HRAs are perceived to be too costly. This can be complex. An alternative solution is to use the HRA Auto Discovery feature built into the NAP client, which enables clients to dynamically discover the appropriate HRA based on DNS SRV records.

Chapter 10

Network Access Protection

293

How HRA Auto Discovery Works A client will dynamically discover HRAs only when there is no NAP Group Policy or NAP Local configuration on the client. Also, clients need to be explicitly set to discover HRA. Here’s how it works. The client first checks to see whether there are SRV records for HRAs in the “site” the host is in: ■

If yes, add the HRA as the discovered one.

■

Or else, try to see if there are SRV records for the AD domain the host is in and derive the HRA list from there.

■

If not, the client discovers the HRA from the SRV records for the DNS domain the host is in.

Domain-joined clients discover HRA from the “DNS site SRV” records of the DNS server, while site-less domain clients discover HRA from the “Domain SRV records.” Workgroup clients look up the “DNS domain name” from the DHCP server and then discover HRA from the “Domain SRV records” of that DNS server. With HRA Discovery, the client discovers HRA dynamically when it roams from one network to another. Also, to ensure that posture information is sent only to trusted HRAs, the NAP client always attempts an HTTPS connection with Server certificate validation. The NAP client communicates only with an HRA that has a certificate issued by the enterprise CA. HRA Discovery Setup Setting up HRA Discovery requires actions to be performed on the DNS server, the DHCP server, and the client. On the DNS Server: Add site SRV records (one for each HRA) as follows: ■

DNS\\Forward Lookup Zones\\_sites\Default-First-Site-Name\_tcp

■

SRV record name: “_hra”

■

SRV record data: Also add Domain SRV records (one for each HRA) as follows:

■

DNS\\Forward Lookup Zones\\_tcp

■

SRV record name: “_hra”

■

SRV record data:

On the DHCP Sever: Add the DNS domain name and DNS Server in the Scope options of the DHCP server.

294

Introducing Windows Server 2008

On the Client: Enable HRA Discovery on the client using the following registry key: ■

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\napagent\ LocalConfig\Enroll\HcsGroups

■

EnableDiscovery REG_DWORD = 1

Some Troubleshooting Steps ■ The client will discover HRAs only if it is configured to do so, so verify that the client does not have any NAP configuration pushed down through Group Policy or configured locally. ■

The client will send requests to the discovered HRA only if IPSec QEC is enabled.

■

If the client fails to discover HRA, make sure that the client is able to contact the DNS server and look up the DNS records. Nnslookup can help in troubleshooting.

■

In case of workgroup clients, make sure that the client has acquired an IP address from the correct DHCP server and that the client is able to look up the DNS records.

■

On the server side, make sure that the DNS and DHCP records are configured properly.

■

If the client discovers HRA correctly but fails to acquire a health certificate, investigate the following: ❑

Verify that there are no network issues that are preventing the client from being able to reach the discovered HRA.

❑

Verify that the discovered server is a trusted enterprise server.

❑

Verify that the discovered server is configured to accept SSL requests, as by default the client sends HTTPS requests to the discovered HRA.

For further troubleshooting procedures, see the additional sidebars later in this chapter. –Harini Muralidharan Software Development Engineer in Test, Network Access Protection

TS Gateway Enforcement TS Gateway is yet another NAP enforcement method—see Chapter 8, “Terminal Services Enhancements,” for more information about what TS Gateway is and how it works. TS Gateway NAP enforcement, however, supports only quarantine enforcement and does not support auto-remediation of the client when the client fails to meet health checks. To

Chapter 10

Network Access Protection

295

understand how TS Gateway NAP enforcement works, let’s examine a “clean machine” scenario where a TS Gateway client is used for the first time from a non-domain-joined client computer: 1. The user clicks on a Remote Desktop Connection icon, and the TS Gateway Client (TSGC) on his computer attempts to connect through TCP and HTTP transports simultaneously (the client tries TCP first and then HTTP). As soon as Terminal Services (TS) name resolution or TCP fails, the TSGC will attempt to connect to a TS Gateway server (TSGS) and authenticate the user at IIS and RPC layers. 2. During the user authentication process and after SSL handshake but before the GAP/RAP authorization sequence begins, the TSGS challenges the client for a “SoH request” blob and in its challenge/response it includes its certificate in PKCS#7 formats plus a random generated nonce value. 3. Since the request for a SoH was made on behalf of an untrusted TSGS name, the TSG-QEC will block the request. First the TS user must add to the TSG URL in the trusted gateway server list in the registry, and this requires admin privilege on the machine. Network administrators can also use SMS or logon scripts to populate this regkey setting. 4. The TSG_QEC will then talk to the QA to get the SoHs from SHAs. The TSG_QEC will then create a “SoH request blob” by combing SoHs from QAs, the nonce from the TSGS, a randomly generated symmetric key, and the client’s machine name. The TSG QEC will encrypt this “SoH request” blob using the TSGS’s public key and give it to the TSGC. 5. The TSGC then passes this encrypted blob to the TSG server, which decrypts the blob and extracts the SoH, the TSGS nonce, and the TSG_QEC symmetric key. The TSGS then verifies that the nonce it received from the TSG_QEC is the same as the one it sent out previously, and if it is the same, the TSGS sends the decrypted SoH blob to the NPS (RADIUS) server for validation. 6. The NPS server then calls SHVs and sends the “SoH request” blob for validation. The NPS server calls SHVs to validate the SoHs and replay with a response back to the NPS server, and based on SHVs’ pass/fail response the NPS server will create a “SoH response” and send it to the TSGS. 7. The TSGS passes this information to the TSGS RADIUS proxy for GAP (Gateway Authorization Policy) authorization, and if this succeeds, the TSGS RADIUS proxy returns success with its gateway level of access info. Based on this result, the TSGS then allows the TS client to connect to the TS server.

296

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Let’s hear from another expert at Microsoft to learn more about TS Gateway and NAP:

From the Expert: Better Together—TS Gateway, ISA Server, and NAP Terminal Services–based remote access has long been used as a simpler, lower-risk alternative to classical layer 2 VPN technologies. Whereas the layer 2 VPN has often provided “all ports, all protocols” access to an organization’s internal network, the Terminal Services approach restricts connectivity to a single well-defined port and protocol. However, as more and more capability has ascended the stack into RDP (such as copy/paste and drive redirection), the potential attack vectors have risen as well. For example, a remote drive made available over RDP can present the same kinds of security risks as one mapped over native CIFS/SMB transports. With the advent of TS Gateway, allowing workers to be productive from anywhere has never been easier. TS Gateway also includes several powerful security capabilities to make this access secure. In addition to its default encryption and authentication capabilities, TS Gateway can be combined with ISA Server and Network Access Protection to provide a secure, manageable access method all the way from the client, through the perimeter network, to the endpoint Terminal Server. Combining these technologies allows an organization to reap the benefits of rich RDP-based remote access, while mitigating the potential exposure this access can bring. ISA Server adds two primary security capabilities to the TS Gateway solution. First, because it can act as an SSL terminator, it allows for more secure placement of TS Gateway servers. Because ISA can be the Internet-facing endpoint for SSL traffic, the TS Gateway itself does not need to be placed within the perimeter network. Instead, the TS Gateway can be kept on the internal network and the ISA Server can forward traffic to it. However, if ISA were simply performing traffic forwarding, it would be of little real security benefit. Thus, the second main security benefit ISA brings to the solution is application-layer inspection capabilities. Rather than simply terminating SSL traffic and forwarding frames on to the TS Gateway, ISA can perform advanced application layer inspection of the traffic to ensure that only desired IP frames are forwarded on to the TS Gateway. Using ISA as the SSL endpoint and traffic inspection device allows for better placement of TS Gateway resources and ensures that they receive only inspected, clean traffic from the Internet. Although ISA Server provides important network protection abilities to a TS Gateway solution, it does not address client-side threats. For example, users connecting to a TS Gateway session might have malicious software running on their machines or be noncompliant with the organization’s security policy. To mitigate against these threats,

Chapter 10

Network Access Protection

297

TS Gateway can be integrated with Network Access Protection to provide enforcement of security and healthy policies on these remote machines. NAP is included in Windows Server 2008 and can be run on the same machine as TS Gateway, or TS Gateway can be configured to utilize an existing NAP infrastructure running elsewhere. When combined with TS Gateway, NAP provides the same policy-based approach to client health and enforcement as it does on normal (not RDP-based) network connections. Specifically, NAP can control access to a TS Gateway based on a client’s security update, antivirus, and firewall status. For example, if you choose to enable redirected drives on your Terminal Servers, you can require that clients have antivirus software running and up to date. NAP allows organizations to ensure that computers connecting to a TS Gateway are healthy and compliant with its security policies. –John Morello Senior Program Manager, Windows Server Division

Understanding the NAP Architecture Let’s dig into the NAP architecture a bit so that we can understand these enforcement mechanisms better. So it’s time for a couple of diagrams and some explanation. Let’s start with the big picture (shown in Figure 10-1). Remediation Servers

System Health Servers

Updates

Client (SHA) MS SHA, SMS

(SHA) 3 Parties

Health statements

Network access requests

NPS Policy server (RADIUS)

rd

Quarantine Agent (QA) (EC)

(EC)

(DHCP, IPSec 802.1x, VPN)

3 Party EAP VPN’s

Figure 10-1

Health policy

rd

Health certificate

System Health Validator 802.1x switches Policy firewalls SSL VPN gateways Certificate servers

Quarantine Server (QS)

Overall architecture of NAP showing various components

On the left of this figure are the clients trying to get onto your network and the remediation servers that can provide updates to them to move the health status of these clients from unhealthy (noncompliant) to healthy (compliant). These remediation servers can be Microsoft products such as System Center Configuration Manager 2007 (currently in beta)

298

Introducing Windows Server 2008

or Windows Server Update Services (WSUS), or they can be third-party server products from AV vendors, patch management solution providers, and so on. Now for a client machine to participate in a NAP infrastructure, the machine must include a NAP client. This NAP client comes built into Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008, and Microsoft is currently working on a NAP client for Windows XP that is planned for release around the time Windows Server 2008 RTM’s. This NAP client has several layers as follows: ■

System Health Agents (SHAs)

■

Quarantine Agent (QA) Also called the NAP Agent, this is basically a broker layer that takes health status information collected by SHAs and packages them into a list that is then handed to the Enforcement Clients to handle accordingly.

■

Enforcement Clients (ECs) These are the client-side components that are involved in helping enforce whether the client is granted full (or partial, or no) network access based upon compliance with your predefined health policy. In Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008, there are built-in ECs for each of the different NAP enforcement mechanisms described previously in this chapter. And because the platform is extensible, thirdparty ISVs and IHVs are also being encouraged to develop ECs for their own network access and security products.

These are components that verify whether the client machine satisfies given health requirements. For instance, one SHA might determine whether the client has AV software installed and whether the sig file is up to date. Another SHA might determine whether the client has the latest software updates installed for some enterprise LOB application. By default, Windows Vista includes its own Microsoft SHA (MS SHA) that can do things like check whether Windows Firewall is turned on, verify whether Automatic Updates is enabled, and determine whether the system has AV or spyware protection software installed and enabled on it. This built-in SHA basically interacts with Security Center on the machine to verify this information. Other SHAs are typically provided by third-party ISVs to support their AV, patch management, firewall and other security products.

In the middle of Figure 10-1 are your network access devices that control access to the network. These devices need to be able to interoperate with the NAP infrastructure to pass the statements of health (SOHs) to the NPS servers for health evaluation. In some cases, this will require that the server be enabled for NAP, which is why you need to use Windows Server 2008 DHCP and VPN servers if you are going to use those NAP enforcement methods. However, some existing network access devices (such as 802.1X authenticating switches) are already able to integrate with NAP using their built-in RADIUS capabilities. These network access devices, if running Windows Server 2008 (for example, DHCP or VPN servers) must include a component called an Enforcement Server (ES) that corresponds to an EC on the clients. For example, Windows Server 2008 has a DHCP NAP ES that corresponds to the DHCP NAP EC in the NAP client for Windows Vista, and an ES on the server works together with its

Chapter 10

Network Access Protection

299

corresponding EC on the client to make the enforcement mechanism work. We’ll walk through how that happens in a moment. Finally, on the right of the figure is your Network Policy Server (NPS) and your system health servers. The health servers (also called policy servers) provide NAP health policy information to the NPS upon request. The heart and soul of the NAP platform, however, is the NPS server, which is a RADIUS server that is basically the replacement for the Internet Authentication Service (IAS) found in previous versions of the Windows Server operating system. The NPS server is a key component of Windows Server 2008 and is installed by adding the Network Policy Server role service from the Network Policy And Access Services role using the Add Roles Wizard. (See Chapter 5.) The NPS also has a layered architecture as follows: ■

System Health Validators (SHVs) These are the server-side components on the NPS that correspond to the SHAs on the client. Again, this includes both a Microsoft SHV (MS SHV) that ensures the different security components managed by Security Center are enabled on the client, and third-party SHVs developed by ISVs that are enhancing their security products to support the NAP platform. We’ll see how the SHAs and SHVs communicate in a moment.

■

Quarantine Server (QS) This is basically a broker between the SHVs running on the NPS and the ESs running on the NAP servers. Note that in a large enterprise deployment of NAP, the NPS servers and NAP servers are typically running on different boxes. It’s possible, however, to implement NPS and NAP server functionality on a single machine— for example, by installing the DHCP Server role on an NPS server. However, this actually makes managing NAP more complicated instead of simplifying things because if you do this, each NAP server must be separately configured with its own network access and health policy. In most scenarios, however, the NPS and NAP servers will be running on different machines and the QS on the NPS server will use the RADIUS protocol to send and receive messages with the NAP servers.

A Walkthrough of How NAP Works Now that we understand a bit about NAP enforcement mechanisms and the architecture of the NAP platform, let’s walk through an example of NAP at work. Figure 10-2 shows a VPN NAP scenario that we’re going to analyze. (Other NAP scenarios such as DHCP and IPSec work a bit differently.) We’ll leave out a few elements, like Active Directory for performing authentication, so that we don’t complicate things too much, and some of the interactions between the different components are simplified. If you want a more detailed explanation of how NAP works, you can always look at some of the references listed under “Additional Resources” at the end of this chapter.

300

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Internet

Figure 10-2

Restricted network

Intranet

Remediation servers

System Health servers

VPN NAP server

NPS server

A VPN scenario showing NAP at work

Here’s a simplified description of what happens when a noncompliant laptop running Windows Vista tries to VPN into corpnet by connecting to a VPN server running Windows Server 2008 when a NAP infrastructure has been deployed: 1. The VPN client uses PEAP to try and establish an authenticated connection with the VPN server. Keep in mind that the VPN client is a NAP client and the VPN server is a NAP server in this scenario. 2. The VPN server, which is also a NAP server, relays the health status information provided by the client to the NPS. What’s happening under the hood is that each SHA running on the client performs a system health policy check to determine whether the client is healthy (with respect to the function being performed by the SHA—firewall on, AV enabled, and so on). The result of each check is a data blob, called a Statement of Health (SoH), that indicates compliance or noncompliance with policy. The QA caches these SoHs and consolidates them into a list. The QA then waits for an EC to request this health status information. 3. When the VPN client tries to connect to the VPN server, the server notifies the client that it needs information concerning the client’s health status before it will let the client into the corporate intranet. The way it works is that the ES component on the NAP server (the VPN server) communicates using PEAP with the EC component on the NAP client and requests the SoH information from the client. 4. Once the client has sent this SoH information to the NAP server, the NAP server then uses the RADIUS protocol to communicate with the NPS. Specifically, what’s happening here is that the SoH information (along with the other non-NAP user authentication

Chapter 10

Network Access Protection

301

stuff) is being sent from the SHAs on the client (where it was collected) to the corresponding SHVs on the NPS (where it is analyzed against the policy information obtained from the System Health Servers). 5. One of the SHVs on the NPS now determines that the client is noncompliant (for example, Windows Firewall is turned off on the machine). Each SHV produces a Statement of Health Response (SoHR) in response to its compliance analysis of the SoH information it received from the corresponding SHA. The QS uses these SoHRs to construct a System Statement of Health Response (SSoHR), which indicates that the noncompliant client should be denied network access until remediated. The QS then uses RADIUS to send this information from the NPS back to the NAP server. 6. The VPN (NAP) server now applies a set of packet filters to the client to quarantine the client. The client has now been authenticated but can access only the resources on the restricted network, which basically means the VPN server and the remediation servers. The NAP server passes the SoHRs to the NAP client, and the SHAs on the client perform their designated remediation actions (assuming auto-remediation is enabled). The result might then be that the client’s firewall is turned on, the client downloads the latest AV sig, or some other remediation action or actions are performed. 7. Once the SHAs on the client have determined that the client is now compliant, an updated list of SoHs is sent by the client to the NAP server and forwarded to the NPS to verify compliance. The procedure repeats as described here, only this time the VPN server recognizes that the client is now healthy, so it removes the restrictive filters from the client and allows it free access to the intranet.

Implementing NAP Let’s move on now and talk about how to implement NAP in an enterprise environment. Obviously, this is a big topic and we can’t do it justice in a brief book like this—plus Windows Server 2008 is only at Beta 3 at the time of writing this book, so some aspects of implementing NAP might still change. Still, the NAP platform is pretty far evolved at this point, and we can at least cover some of the important points for deploying it. So let’s look at three aspects in particular: ■

Choosing the NAP enforcement methods you want to use

■

Deploying your NAP solution using a phased implementation method

■

Configuring the NPS and other aspects of the NAP platform

Note that you’ll also find references to other available documentation on deploying NAP in the “Additional Resources” section at the end of this chapter.

302

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Choosing Enforcement Methods One choice you need to make when planning your NAP deployment is which enforcement method (or methods) to use. DHCP enforcement is probably the easiest solution to deploy, as it relies on modifying the IP routing table of NAP clients and makes no other changes to these clients. But being the easiest NAP solution to implement means DHCP is probably also the weakest NAP enforcement method. So if you’re going to use DHCP enforcement, you probably also want to couple this with another enforcement method, typically 802.1X or IPSec, in order to provide defense-in-depth protection for your network. 802.1X port-based enforcement is a good way of enhancing network protection for both wired and wireless networks within your enterprise, but it requires supporting hardware (802.1Xcapable switches) and client computers that have 802.1X supplicant software. This supplicant software has been built into Microsoft Windows since Windows 2000, but it has gone through several updates and is best supported in Windows Vista. This method of NAP enforcement can provide strong network access control, as clients with valid authentication credentials will receive different VLAN identifiers based on their compliance with your network health requirements. IPSec policies were difficult and sometimes confusing to configure and manage on previous versions of Windows, but in Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008, IPSec connection rules are easy to configure using the Windows Firewall With Advanced Security snap-in. Using IPSec as a NAP enforcement method requires that you set up a PKI infrastructure with an HRA for issuing health certificates to clients in quarantine, which means more planning and deployment overhead when implementing NAP. But because IPSec can be used to restrict communication with compliant clients on a per-IP address or per-port basis, IPSec is the strongest network access control method you can implement using NAP and can be considered a host protection scenario for deploying NAP. However, if you plan on implementing IPSec NAP enforcement, you need to implement IPSec across your entire corpnet because IPSec NAP doesn’t quarantine noncompliant clients on a restricted network. Instead, when a noncompliant client obtains physical access to corpnet, IPSec-enabled hosts on corpnet simply drop any traffic received from the client. So if you still have hosts on corpnet that are not IPSec-enabled, these hosts might be susceptible to malware infection from the noncompliant client. So basically, IPSec NAP is an all-or-nothing solution, so if you implement this as your enforcement solution you need to do it everywhere . Other NAP enforcement methods might require adding network infrastructure (such as a restricted network for quarantining noncompliant clients), but they don’t require making changes to hosts already on your corpnet.

Chapter 10

Network Access Protection

303

Finally, VPN enforcement is obviously something you should consider deploying if your enterprise has mobile clients that need to remotely connect into corpnet. VPN enforcement provides strong limited network access for any computer trying to access your network using a VPN connection, and is therefore a good choice for implementing perimeter protection using NAP.

Phased Implementation The best way to deploy the NAP platform in an enterprise is to do this in stages. Begin with a test implementation using an isolated test network so that you can learn how NAP works and test whether your hosts and network infrastructure can support it. Then try a pilot rollout, maybe by deploying NAP for users in your IT department. (They’re used to having headaches, so they won’t be too upset when they can’t RAS into corpnet Monday morning—well, maybe they will be upset, but they’re paid to solve such problems anyway.) Then, depending on the size of your enterprise, you can start rolling out NAP for different business units or in different locations. Even when you’re deploying NAP, however, you have different options you can implement in terms of the level of enforcement you use. So rather than starting by configuring NAP to refuse network access to noncompliant clients, it’s better to follow a more measured approach like this: ■

Phase 1: Reporting only

■

Phase 2: Reporting and remediation Once you’ve monitored NAP in reporting mode for a while and you’ve gained some understanding of the possible health states of NAP clients, you can now enable remediation in addition to reporting. During phase 2, clients that are noncompliant get automatically remediated (if they can be) but nonremediated clients are not prevented from accessing your network.

■

Phase 3: Delayed enforcement After you’re sure that autoremediation is working properly, bump NAP enforcement up a notch and implement delayed enforcement. What this does is allow unhealthy clients to still have access to the network but only for a predetermined period of time. For example, a client that is missing the latest security update would be allowed to connect to corpnet, but if after one week has elapsed the client still hasn’t downloaded and installed the update, the client is moved into quarantine and denied corpnet access until the client can be remediated.

Implement NAP so that client access is logged in the Event logs on the NPS but no remediation or quarantining is performed. If you follow this approach at first, you can monitor how NAP is doing without users becoming frustrated over network access problems and without having to tie your remediation infrastructure together with NAP.

304

Introducing Windows Server 2008 ■

Phase 4: Immediate enforcement

Finally, once you’re ready (and your users are ready), you can remove the grace period and configure NAP to quarantine noncompliant clients immediately if NAP determines them to be unhealthy. Clients are remediated automatically whenever possible, and when for some reason this is not possible, the client remains in quarantine until it can be manually remediated. Phase 4 is the most secure NAP deployment you can do, but not every organization will need to go this far— you need to balance your security requirements against usability/manageability to determine whether Phase 4 is necessary or Phase 3 (or some earlier phase) might be enough to meet the needs of your business. In general, however, the more managed the environment, the more likely you’ll be to implement Phase 4 (or perhaps Phase 3 with a very short grace period).

Let’s find out more about implementing NAP by listening to another of our experts at Microsoft talk about it deploying it:

From the Experts: Planning the Deployment of Network Access Protection Deploying solutions that enforce policy compliance by restricting network access is a powerful tool for protecting the network. However, the time during which the deployment is taking place can also be intimidating because of the concern of unintentionally blocking network access. Appropriate deployment planning and execution can significantly reduce the risk of unintended network restrictions and greatly smooth the process of getting NAP deployed. A recommended process for planning and deploying NAP is the following one: 1. Plan an enforcement type. 2. Plan the health policy. 3. Deploy the NAP components. 4. Enable NAP in reporting mode. 5. Enable NAP in deferred enforcement mode. 6. Enable NAP in full enforcement mode. A significant decision that needs to be made early in the NAP deployment planning is what type of access enforcement will be used. There are four enforcement types supported natively with NAP: Server and Domain Isolation using IPSec policies, 802.1x authentication, VPN remote access, and DHCP. Other options might be provided by NAP partners. The decision of which enforcement type to use depends on many factors, including what is currently in use in the network, the desired robustness of the enforcement, and cost of deployment and maintenance.

Chapter 10

Network Access Protection

305

NAP depends on the administrator to define the health policy for the network. This commonly includes standards regarding antivirus measures, firewalls, patch management, and other items that are viewed as critical for protecting or managing the network. By defining the health requirements of the network, the administrator can then plan the software required to check for and enforce compliance with those standards using the NAP infrastructure. Once health policies are defined, administrators can ensure that the appropriate software and tools are deployed in advance of enabling NAP. After the initial planning, the NAP components and servers need to be deployed. This deployment process includes installing and configuring the required Network Policy Servers, System Health Validators, and System Health Agents. This should be done while NAP policies are operating in reporting mode. When operating in this mode, the NAP health policies are in place and all clients connecting to the network are requested to participate in health checks. However, in reporting mode, regardless of compliance to the health policy, no access restriction is applied. The results of the health check are logged, but all clients are given full network access. This mode allows administrators to validate the operation of the NAP infrastructure, see the level of compliance with the health policies, and take steps to get the compliance rates to the desired levels, without causing any disruption to the end user. One of those steps is to enable automatic remediation of noncompliant clients to elevate compliance rates. After compliance levels are at an acceptable level, the administrator can enable NAP deferred enforcement. In this operating mode, computer health is checked and noncompliant clients receive a notification that they are out of compliance. This allows for additional elevation of the compliance rates, introducing the operation of NAP to the end users, while giving noncompliant users time to address any lingering problems before network restrictions are applied. As with reporting mode, the results of the client health checks are logged and can be analyzed by the network administrator to verify client compliance rates and the operation of the NAP infrastructure. The final step is to enable NAP in enforcement mode. This mode applies the defined access restrictions to clients that fail the health compliance check, protecting the network from clients that are unhealthy. As with the other modes, the results of the health check are logged for monitoring the NAP infrastructure operation. Automatic remediation can be applied to noncompliant machines to return them to a compliant state and restore full network access with as minimal impact to the user as possible. –Kevin Rhodes Lead Program Manager – Network Access Protection

306

Introducing Windows Server 2008

One thing to consider when you’re deploying NAP is how to handle exceptions. A good example is when a contractor comes on site and has to connect to corpnet using her laptop to perform some task. Now in situations like this, you often can’t just let NAP take control of her computer and try and remediate it if the machine is not compliant. Why not? Well, first there’s the ownership issue—the contractor’s computer belongs to her, not the enterprise. Second, how can NAP remediate her machine if it’s running different AV software than you use in your enterprise? Or a different host-based firewall? Or a different operating system, like Linux? What should you do in these types of situations? Let’s hear some insights concerning this issue from another of our experts:

From the Experts: Managing NAP Policy Exceptions It’s inevitable: as soon as you get NAP deployed in your organization someone way more important than you will demand an exception to the policy. Or perhaps you have some non–NAP capable machines on your network and you want a simple method for exempting them from the policy. Or maybe you have a vendor coming on site who needs network access for the afternoon. In any case, managing exceptions to your policy is a key part of a successful NAP deployment. Because NAP is built around RADIUS, you can build exception policies based around many types of attributes. The following are three common scenarios that occur frequently. The first and most common scenario of all involves non–NAP capable computers. NAP policies can include a conditional statement about whether or not a machine is NAP capable. This provides a convenient method for allowing access to machines that are not NAP capable, while still enforcing health on those that are. For example, your policy set can be expressed as follows: 1. Healthy Full Access: Grant access when “Computer Health matches ‘Healthy’ AND Computer is NAP-capable.” 2. Not Healthy Restricted Access: Quarantine when “Computer Health matches ‘Not Healthy’ AND Computer is NAP-capable.” 3. Not NAP Capable Full Access: Grant access when “Computer is not NAP-capable.” Because the Network Policy Server processes rules sequentially, any machines that are NAP capable will be judged against one of the first two rules, while any machines that are not NAP capable will fall back to the third rule. This exception method is a useful way to preserve interoperability with existing machines as you go through your NAP deployment. The second scenario involves a machine that is NAP capable but that you want to exempt from policy. Using the NAP-capable Computers attribute would not help in this case because the machine would match one of the first two policies from the previous

Chapter 10

Network Access Protection

307

example. Instead of exempting based upon NAP capability, you can design a policy that exempts based upon group membership. These groups can include user and machine accounts, and complex rules can be built combining the two (for example, allow when user is in DOMAIN\Finance Users and machine is in DOMAIN\Finance Workstations). In the preceding example, you would want to list group-based policies first because these rules must be matched for the exemptions to be granted. If the group-based rules are not listed first, the match will occur within the original two Healthy / Not Healthy rules and the exemptions will never be triggered. In the final example, what about the vendor who comes on site briefly and needs network access? In this case, the computer and user will not have group memberships to build rules around. If you’ve completed your NAP deployment or taken a more aggressive enforcement stance, you might not have the “Not NAP Capable” rule to fall back on either. In this case, a simple way to exempt a user on a short-term basis is by MAC address. A new rule could be created that utilizes the Calling Station ID RADIUS Client Property. This rule could be expressed as “Exempt by MAC Address: Grant access when Calling Station ID matches ‘0015B7A6F653’.” Once your rules are ordered properly, the visitor’s connection attempt will match this rule first and will gain network access based purely on its MAC address. –John Morello Senior Program Manager, Windows Server Division

Configuring the Network Policy Server Let’s now look at configuring the NPS, which you’ll remember is the “heart and soul” of NAP. The discussion that follows is not meant to be a tutorial on how to do this. (You’ll find references to “Step by Step” guides for NAP under “Additional Resources” at the end of this chapter.) Instead, we’re just going to take a bird’s-eye view of the Network Policy Server MMC snap-in and see what’s there and how certain configuration tasks are performed. These screen shots were taken using a near-Beta 3 build, so they should be nearly accurate for Beta 3 and probably beyond also. They were also taken on a test NAP deployment that uses 802.1X for the NAP enforcement method.

308

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Let’s start by opening Network Policy Server from Administrative Tools.

From the root node of the NAP console, you can configure NAP various ways. For example, by selecting Network Access Protection (NAP) policy server from the drop-down list, you can define health policies your NPS can use to check the health of clients when they try to access your network. Other options available include configuring a RADIUS server for dial-up or VPN connections, and configuring a RADIUS server for 802.1X wireless or wired connections. Selecting the RADIUS Clients And Server node lets you configure RADIUS clients and remote RADIUS server groups. Your RADIUS clients will be your network access servers that perform NAP enforcement. Because we’re using 802.1X as the enforcement method for our test network, typical RADIUS clients might be 802.1X-compliant Ethernet switches or wireless access points.

Chapter 10

Network Access Protection

309

The Remote RADIUS Server Groups node lets you specify where to forward connection requests when the local NPS server is configured as a RADIUS proxy. Selecting the Policies node lets you configure connection request policies, network policies, and health policies for your NAP deployment. Connection request policies (the first node) let you designate whether connection requests are handled locally or are forwarded to a remote RADIUS server for processing. Because we’re using 802.1X NAP enforcement, we also need to configure PEAP authentication as part of our connection request policy. Health policies (the third node) let you define the configuration required for NAP-capable clients to access the network. You deploy a health policy by configuring System Health Validators (SHVs), creating a health policy, and adding the policy to the Health Policies condition in network policy.

310

Introducing Windows Server 2008

The Network Policies node (second node in the preceding figure) is where some key NAP configuration settings reside. Here is where you specify who will be authorized to connect to your network and also the conditions under which they can (or can’t) connect. In our test setup, we have three network policies defined: one for 802.1X clients that are compliant, another for clients that aren’t compliant, and a third for clients that are not NAP-capable.

Chapter 10

Network Access Protection

311

Let’s examine the properties of the first policy mentioned (the one for compliant clients) and see what settings can be configured here. Let’s double-click on this policy to open its properties.

Notice that it’s here on the Overview tab that you can enable or disable your network access policy and specify whether clients that match this policy should be granted or denied access to your network. Note that this particular policy setting can be confusing. For example, when you think of “noncompliant” policy you might expect this to be “Deny Access” because you don’t want noncompliant computers accessing your network. But this is actually not the right place to do that—this should be “Grant Access” for all policies that are going to be allowing clients to be checked for health.

312

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Now let’s switch to the Settings tab and select NAP Enforcement on the left.

Note that here is where we can configure the level of enforcement (full access, full access with grace period, or limited access to the restricted network only) and also whether autoremediation is attempted or not. For example, the settings you configure here for a network policy for compliant clients might look like this: ■

Allow full network access

■

Auto-remediation turned off

By contrast, the settings you configure for a policy for noncompliant clients might be these: ■

Allow limited access

■

Auto-remediation turned on

Looking back under the root node in the NPS console, the Network Access Protection node is where you can configure SHVs and also remediation server groups, which are groups that let you specify the remediation servers that will store and provide software updates for NAP

Chapter 10

Network Access Protection

313

clients that need them. By default, the NPS includes one predefined SHV called the Windows Security Health Validator.

To configure the settings for this SHV, double-click on it to open its properties.

314

Introducing Windows Server 2008

If we click the Configure button, we can see the different kinds of health checks that are performed by this default SHV.

As we described earlier in this chapter, the Windows SHV performs the following kinds of health checks on NAP clients: ■

Check whether the Windows Firewall (or any other NAP-compliant host-based firewall) is enabled.

■

Check whether AV software is running (and optionally whether its sig file is up to date).

■

Check whether Windows Defender or some other antispyware program is running (and up to date).

■

Check whether Automatic Updates is turned on for the machine.

■

Check whether all available security updates above a specified level of criticality are installed, the minimum time since the client last checked for security updates, and where the client obtains its updates from.

How does the NPS know how to handle a NAP client whose health satisfies (or fails to satisfy) the requirements you’ve specified in this Windows SHV? Look back under the Policies node

Chapter 10

Network Access Protection

315

again, where you’ll find a subnode called Health Policies. If you select this node in our test network, you’ll see two kinds of health policies that have been defined.

If you double-click on the “compliant” health policy, you’ll see that the Windows SHV is being used to check for compliance.

316

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Looking back under the root node, the fourth and final subnode, called Accounting, can be used to configure logging for the NPS. This logging can be in the form of local logging (for display in Event Viewer) or remote logging to a SQL server. That’s a brief whirlwind tour of the Network Policy Server snap-in, which is used for configuring your NPS. There’s another way of configuring NPS, however, and that’s by doing it programmatically. Let’s hear from an expert at Microsoft concerning how this can be done:

From the Experts: Programmatic Method for Configuring NPS Using Netsh Pre-Windows Server 2008, the Server Data Objects (SDO) API made it possible to programmatically configure and administer Microsoft’s RADIUS server (IAS). The SDO API was designed for programmers who use C/C++ and Visual Basic. With NPS however, programmatic configuration is now possible using scripts and batch files. The new netsh nps context has made this possible. Following is a sample VBScript called AddClient.vbs that can programmatically add a list of RADIUS clients provided in a text file using one of the new netsh nps commands: If WScript.Arguments.Count = 1 Then Set objShell = CreateObject("WScript.Shell") Set objFSO = CreateObject("Scripting.FileSystemObject") Set objTextFile = objFSO.OpenTextFile(WScript.Arguments.Item(0), 1) Do While objTextFile.AtEndOfStream True arrclientinfo = split(objTextFile.Readline, ",") netshcmd = "netsh nps add client name = """ & arrclientinfo(0) &_ """ address = """ & arrclientinfo(1) &_ """ state = ""enable"" sharedsecret = """ & arrclientinfo(2) &_ """ requireauthattrib = ""no"" napcompatible = ""no"" vendor = ""RADIUS Standard""" objShell.Run "cmd /c"& netshcmd wscript.sleep 15000 Loop objTextFile.Close Else Wscript.Echo "Usage: addclients.vbs filename" Wscript.Quit End If

The AddClient.vbs vbscript just shown makes use of the netsh nps add client command and a text file named clients.txt containing per-line comma-delimited RADIUS client friendly names, the hostnames, and the RADIUS client shared secrets: radiusclient1,host1,secret1 radiusclient2,host2,secret2 radiusclient3,host3,secret3 radiusclient4,host4,secret4

Chapter 10

Network Access Protection

317

Running this script adds these RADIUS clients to the NPS configuration, and the NPS snap-in displays the four new RADIUS clients.

–Kapil Jain Software Development Engineer, NPS Test Team

Configuring NAP Clients Now that we’ve examined how to configure NAP on the server end (that is, the NPS), what sort of configuration do NAP clients need and how is this done? Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 include an MMC snap-in called NAP Client Configuration that you can use to manually configure client-side NAP settings.

318

Introducing Windows Server 2008

For example, to configure the NAP client to respond to 802.1X enforcement policy on the NPS, you simply select the Enforcement Clients node as shown in the preceding figure, rightclick on EAP Quarantine Enforcement Client, and select Enable. Obviously, you’ll get tired of configuring NAP clients manually like this if your enterprise has thousands of client computers. The solution? Use Group Policy to configure your NAP clients. In Windows Server 2008 and Windows Vista, the Group Policy settings for NAP are found under this policy location: Computer Configuration\Windows Settings\Security Settings\Network Access Protection Here’s a screen shot showing NAP client settings in Group Policy for configuring supported enforcement methods. Compare what you see here with the previous screen shot and you’ll see that the same user interface for locally configuring NAP clients is used by the Group Policy Object Editor, which is pretty cool indeed.

Chapter 10

Network Access Protection

319

Troubleshooting NAP Let’s end this chapter with some more meat from the Windows Server 2008 product team. If you plan on deploying NAP soon in your enterprise, the following pages alone might be worth the price of the book. And if you don’t want to keep the whole book, you can always tear these pages out and throw away the rest! First let’s look at some general tips on how to diagnose various kinds of NAP enforcement issues:

From the Experts: Network Access Protection Diagnostics The following is designed to be a support aid to diagnose Network Access Protection issues in various enforcements, including IPSec, 802.1x, and DHCP. It is meant to provide additional information to the administrator to identify the root cause of the problem and refers to Microsoft troubleshooting procedures and related information. These Network Access Protection diagnostics involve the Vista/XP client (we will use the term NAP Client to refer to them), the network access devices (DHCP Server, HRA Server, 802.1x switch), and the Network Policy Server.

320

Introducing Windows Server 2008

The goal is to collect information to help classify the problem. The first step in diagnosing the NAP system is collecting the following information for diagnosis: 1. Client operating system and the corresponding version (example: Is it Windows Vista or Windows XP?) 2. Network connection information (ipconfig /all details) 3. NAP Client configuration 4. Event logs for the NAP and corresponding enforcement components The key to identifying the problem quickly is getting to know the scope of the issue. “Who is affected by the problem?” If the problem is shared by many users, it is better to start the investigation by verifying the connectivity and the health of NAP servers—for example: ■

Are the servers running as expected?

■

Are there any errors in the server event logs pointing to various issues?

■

Are the clients receiving the configuration from group policy?

In the following section, we will focus on the NAP client-specific problems—that is, NAP Client Diagnostics. Information Gathering Open a command prompt with administrator credentials, and issue the following commands: ipconfig /all netsh nap client show state sc query

Chapter 10

Network Access Protection

Troubleshooting Flowchart

Verify that Network Access Protection Agent is started and running

No

Start the Network Access Protections Agent

Yes

Verify that the corresponding QECs are enabled

No

Enable the corresponding QECs

Yes

Is the System Quarantine State in ipconfig /all restricted?

Yes

Is the client NAP state using “netsh nap client show state” restricted?

Yes Check the compliance results. The compliance results provide information about the failure.

No

This is not a NAP client issue

321

322

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Detailed Investigation The following steps help identify failures and misconfigurations in the NAP system. The NAP system can have various points of failure. The following diagram illustrates the failure points and the process for debugging them.

System Health Agent (SHA)

System Health Validator (SHV)

MSSHA and others

NAPAgent

MS and 3rd parties

Network access devices and servers

NAPServer (QSHVHOST)

(NAP runtime, IPsec)

Enforcement Client (EC) (DHCP, IPSec, 802.1x, VPN)

Client

NPS

Network Policy server

The diagnosis of a NAP client failure starts with the verification of NAP client configuration: 1. Is NAP turned on? (Is NAPAgent service running?) 2. Is the corresponding NAP Enforcement client enabled? 3. Are there any NAP client events in the event logs? There are a number of events on the client that provide information about the failures. The following diagram shows the informational events logged on the client when the NAP transaction crosses the component boundaries.

Chapter 10

SHA

Network Access Protection

SHA 27

27

NapAgent 29

28

QEC

28

29

QEC

The following is a description of various NAP events that can help the diagnosis: Event ID

Event Details

27

Indicates that a Statement of Health (SoH) was received from the System Health Agent (SHA)

28

Indicates that the Statement of Health (SoH) was received by the Quarantine Enforcement client indicated in the event

29

Indicates the Statement of Health Response from the server, and it also contains the client health state

18

Indicates a NAP Health state change

All the events have a unique correlation ID that identifies a NAP transaction. –Chandra Nukala Program Manager, Network Access Protection –Ram Vadali Software Design Engineer, Network Access Protection Next let’s examine how to troubleshoot NAP IPSec enforcement. We’ll start by troubleshooting on the client side because this is generally the best way to begin your troubleshooting when an issue arises.

323

324

Introducing Windows Server 2008

From the Experts: NAP IPSec Enforcement: Client-Side Troubleshooting Here are the client-side troubleshooting steps to identify the root cause of the problem when the client fails to acquire a health certificate in the NAP IPSec environment. These are common to both Windows Vista and Windows XP clients (we will use the term NAP IPSec Client to refer to them and the term NAP Server to refer to the Windows Server 2008 system, with HRA/NPS/IIS).

Verify that Network Access Protection Agent is started and running

No

Start the Network Access Protections Agent

Yes

Verify that the IPsec QEC is enabled

No

Enable the corresponding QECs

Yes

Can the client contact the HRA (verify both events and http)?

Yes

Based on the “Failed to contact HRA” errors, continue the investigation on the server side

No

Contact the administrator

Chapter 10

Network Access Protection

325

Verify Client Configuration 1. Check for the NAP health certificate in the client’s machine store. Mmc.exe Certificates Snap-in Computer Account Local Computer Personal Certificates Store Proceed to the following troubleshooting steps if the health certificate is not found. A client would not have acquired a certificate if any of the following aren’t true. 2. Verify NAP Agent service is running–sc query napagent. 3. Verify Security Center service is running–sc query wscsvc. 4. Confirm the client is in “nonrestricted” state–netsh nap client show state. If the client is restricted, follow the remediation steps to get the client out of restriction state. 5. Validate IPSec Relying Party (QEC) is “Enabled”. Make sure the client is configured with the correct URL needed to contact HRA Server. ❑

If NAP settings are configured locally–netsh nap client show config

❑

If NAP settings are configured through Group Policy–netsh nap client show grouppolicy

Verify Client’s Connectivity 1. Try to ping HRA. If it fails, there might be a network issue. (Recheck your firewall settings, IPSec Policies, and potential DNS/DHCP issues.) 2. Validate that the client can access the HRA’s URL by typing the address into a browser (IE). Following is a list of HTTP errors and the possible causes of these errors: HTTP Errors

Failures Indicated by the Error Codes

401

Access Denied.

403

Forbidden. This error indicates that the client is sending HTTP requests to HTTPS URL or vice-versa.

404

Page not found. This error indicates that this could be a server-side issue, and investigation has to continue on the server. (Is the HRA installed and set up?)

500

Server error. This error indicates that the client request reached the HRA and because this could be a server-side issue, investigation has to continue on the server.

326

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Client-Side Event Errors Once the administrator verifies that the client is configured accurately, he can use the following steps to help identify failures and misconfigurations in the IPSec scenario. The administrator can start the investigation by looking at the various “Network Access Protection” events, particularly looking for events 21 and/or 22 in the event log. All NAPrelated events are logged in the “Event Viewer/Windows Logs/Applications and Services logs\Microsoft\Windows\Network Access Protection” channel. All NAP events use the event source name “Network Access Protection.” Event 22 indicates that the NAP Agent successfully acquired a health certificate from the HRA Server. Event 21 indicates that the NAP Agent failed to acquire a certificate from the HRA. The event also provides an error code associated with the failure. The following table shows various error codes and the corresponding failures: Error Codes

Failures indicated by the Error codes

2147954407

Indicates a name resolution problem. This could indicate a DNS problem. Use ping and nslookup to further investigate the issue.

2147954430

Indicates a connection error.

2147954429

Indicates a connection error.

2147954575

Indicates secure failure. There is a problem setting up an SSL channel with the server. (This could indicate a SSL Certificate configuration problem.)

–Wai-O Hui Software Development Engineer in Test, Network Access Protection –Harini Muralidharan Software Development Engineer in Test, Network Access Protection Having seen how to perform client-side troubleshooting of NAP IPSec enforcement, now let’s examine how to approach troubleshooting on the server end of things. Event Viewer is going to be especially useful here.

From the Experts: NAP IPSec Enforcement: Server-Side Troubleshooting Here are the server-side troubleshooting steps to identify the root cause of the problem when the client fails to acquire a health certificate in the NAP IPSec environment. It is assumed that you have already gone through the client-side troubleshooting steps in the previous sidebar.

Chapter 10

Verify that the HRA is installed

No

Yes

Verify that the Web server service is running

Install HRA using RMT

No

Start the Web server services

Yes

Are the ports for http and https open?

Yes

Network Access Protection

No

Open the http and https ports

1. Verify the HRA configuration (Web site, port bindings, CA, and NPS). 2. Check the event viewer for events from the following a. Web server b. Process activation services c. HRA

Verify Server Configuration Use the following steps to verify the server configuration: 1. Verify that HRA and IIS services are installed on the NAP IPSec server. 2. Make sure HRA is configured to point to the correct Certificate Authority. 3. Validate IIS has configured port bindings to support HTTP and HTTPS (SSL) requests.

327

328

Introducing Windows Server 2008

4. Confirm that the server’s firewall settings have exemption for both HTTP and HTTPS traffic. 5. Make sure that HRA is configured to accept anonymous requests (requests from workgroup clients). This is configured during HRA installation. To verify, in the IIS snap-in check whether a non-domain hra root is configured. 6. When configuring the NAP health certificate validity period, make sure it is greater than 15 minutes or else the client will fail to obtain a certificate. Verify Certificate Authority Configuration Use the following steps to verify the Certificate Authority configuration: 1. Confirm that the CA is set to auto-issue certificates. The option is located in CA Properties Policy Module Properties Choose “Follow the settings in cert template, if applicable, otherwise automatically issue the cert”. 2. Verify that the HRA server is configured with permissions to request and delete certificates from the Certification Authority on behalf of the client. Both the Issue And Manage Certificates option and the Manage CA option need to be verified in the security configuration of the CA properties. 3. After making any changes to the Certification Authority, make sure to restart the certificate services to allow the settings to take effect. Verify Server Connectivity Make sure that the HRA server could reach the configured CA. If not, there might be a network issue. (Recheck your firewall settings, IPSec Policies, and potential DNS/DHCP issues.) Server-Side Event Errors All HRA-related events are logged in the “Event Viewer/Windows Logs/System” channel. All HRA events use the event source name “HRA”. The following table indicates the HRA error events and the possible failures causing the errors: Event Event Number Type Event Text 7

Error

Resolution Steps

The Health Registration Authority denied A client domain configuration the request with the correlation-id %1 at problem. Make sure the client %2 (principal: %3) because the request is joined to the correct domain. could not be authorized (%4) by the provided DNS. Discarding the request.

Chapter 10

Network Access Protection

Event Event Number Type Event Text 8

Error

The Health Registration Authority is misconfigured or cannot read its configuration, stopping Health Registration Authority. Verify the Health Registration Authority configuration or contact an administrator for more information.

329

Resolution Steps Certification Authority Configuration error. Verify that Certification Authorities are configured in HRA by doing the following: In a command window run: netsh nap hra show configuration

and verify that the HRA configuration is correct. If no Certification Authorities are configured, set any available Certification Authorities using the MMC Health Registration Authority snap-in or by using the following netsh command: netsh nap hra

set caserver name = “\\server1\CA” processingorder = “1”

9

Error

The Health Registration Authority was unable to acquire a certificate for request with the correlation-id %1 at %2 (principal: %3). Discarding the request. The Certification Authority %4 denied the request with the following error: %5 (%6). Contact the Certification Authority administrator for more information.

Health Registration Authority (HRA) does not have the proper permissions to request a certificate from the Certification Authority (CA). Contact the CA administrator, and configure to grant the HRA permission to request certificates.

10

Error

The Health Registration Authority was unable to acquire a certificate for request with the correlation-id %1 at %2 (principal: %3). The Certification Authority %4 denied the request with the following error: %6 (%7). This failure was possibly due to a network related issue. The request will be discarded if no other Certification Authorities are available. This server will not be tried again for %5 minutes. Contact the Certification Authority administrator for more information.

Unable to connect to a Certification Authority because of a network failure. Perform the following resolution steps: Verify the server’s network connection. Verify the CA’s network address, computer name, and connectivity. Inform the CA administrator of connectivity problems.

330

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Event Event Number Type Event Text

Resolution Steps

11

Error

The Health Registration Authority could not contact NPS: %1

Contact the Network Policy Server (NPS) administrator to verify that the NPS service is running and is not disabled. Ensure that Network Policy Server is installed correctly.

20

Error

The Health Registration Authority failed to validate the certificate request against the HRA configuration. The Health Registration Authority denied the request with the correlation-id %1 at %2 (principal: %3) because it did not satisfy the cryptographic policy (%4). Discarding the request.

A configuration problem between the client and the Health Registration Authority (HRA). Verify the client’s cryptographic policy. If the problem persists or shows up with multiple clients, verify the applied group policy’s cryptographic settings against the HRA configuration regarding Hash and Asymmetric Key algorithm.

24

Error

The Health Registration Authority was unable to validate the request with the Correlation ID %1 at IP address %2 (Principal: %3). The Network Policy Server had no policy matching the request (%4). Contact the Network Policy Server administrator for more information.

The client did not match any of the policies on the Network Policy Server (NPS). Review the client health state. If the problem appears across multiple clients, consider creating additional NPS policies.

25

Error

The Health Registration Authority was unable to validate the request with the Correlation ID %1 at IP address %2 (Principal: %3). The Network Policy Server denied the request because the request was not authorized (%4). Contact the Network Policy Server administrator for more information.

Network Policy Server (NPS) configuration problem. Verify that the NPS proxy is authorized to forward requests to the correct NPS.

28

Error

The Health Registration Authority was unable to validate the request with the Correlation ID %1 at IP address %2 (Principal: %3). The Network Policy Server (NPS) was unable to contact the Active Directory Global Catalog necessary to validate the request (%4). Contact the Network Policy Server administrator for more information.

NPS cannot connect to the Global Catalog. Verify the Global Catalog status, its network connectivity, and the NPS permissions in the forest.

Chapter 10

Network Access Protection

Event Event Number Type Event Text 29

Error

The Health Registration Authority denied the certificate request with the correlation-id %1 at %2 for (principal: %3). Either no Certification Authorities are configured or none are available. Verify the Health Registration Authority configuration or contact its administrator for more information.

331

Resolution Steps Certification Authority Configuration error. Verify that Certification Authorities are configured in HRA by doing the following: In a command window run netsh nap hra show configuration

If Certification Authorities are configured, all of them might be blacked out. Contact the CA administrator, and examine whether the current configuration meets the traffic requirements for the network. 30

Error

The Health Registration Authority was unable to connect to the Certification Authority to remove expired records. The Certification Authority [ca-name] denied the request with the following error: [ca-error-number]. Contact the Certification Authority administrator to check the permissions and for more information.

Health Registration Authority (HRA) does not have the proper permissions to delete expired certificates on the Certification Authority (CA). Contact the CA administrator, and configure to grant the HRA permission to delete expired certificates.

–Wai-O Hui Software Development Engineer in Test, Network Access Protection –Harini Muralidharan Software Development Engineer in Test, Network Access Protection Now let’s look at troubleshooting NAP 802.1X enforcement. Once again, we’ll begin on the client side, as problems most often begin there—especially if only some clients and not all of them have difficulties.

From the Experts: Debugging NAP 802.1x Enforcement Using Client-Side Troubleshooting These instructions are designed to be a support aid to diagnose Network Access Protection issues in 802.1x enforcement. They are meant to provide additional information to the administrator to identify the root cause of the problem and refer to Microsoft troubleshooting procedures and related information. Network Access

332

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Protection diagnostics involve the Vista/XP client (we will use the term NAP Client to refer to them), the 802.1x switch, and the Network Policy Server. Is NAP the Problem? The goal of this section is to collect the information to help classify the problem. The first step in diagnosing the NAP system is collecting the following information for diagnosis: 1. Client Operating system and the corresponding version (Example: Is it Windows Vista or Windows XP?) 2. Network connection information (ipconfig /all details) 3. NAP Client configuration 4. Event logs for the NAP and corresponding enforcement components 802.1x Enforcement 802.1x provides client authentication to the network devices. When diagnosing 802.1x issues, information can be gathered from the NAP Client, the network device, and the Network Policy Server (NPS). NAP utilizes the PEAP authentication to pass health data, enabling the use of 802.1x as a NAP enforcement. 802.1x NAP health policy is enforced on the network access device through the use of VLANs, which are assigned through RADIUS attributes from NPS to the switch. Information Gathering Use the following steps to gather the necessary information: 1. Open the “services.msc,” and verify that the following services are running (this can also be verified using the command line by using the command 3c – sc query): ❑

NAP Agent

❑

EAP Host

❑

Wired AutoConfig (for wired scenarios)

❑

WLAN AutoConfig (for wireless scenarios)

2. Open a command prompt with administrator credentials, and issue the following commands: netsh nap client show config > C:\napconfig.txt netsh nap client show state > C:\state.txt sc.exe query > C:\services.txt

Troubleshooting Flowchart The following is the troubleshooting flowchart that administrators can use to debug the 802.1x NAP system.

Chapter 10

Verify that Network Access Protection Agent is started and running

No

Yes

Verify that EAPHost is started and running

Start the Network Access Protections Agent

No

Yes

Verify that dot3svc and/or wlansvc is started and running

Start EAPHost

No

Yes

Verify that the EAP/802.1x QEC is enabled

Start dot3svc and/or wlansvc

No

Yes

Verify that Enable Quarantine Checks in authentication settings on the connection is enabled Yes Check the event viewer for events corresponding to the client failure and continue the investigation on the server side

Network Access Protection

Enable EAP/802.1x QEC

No

Enable the Quarantine check on the corresponding connection

333

334

Introducing Windows Server 2008

Detailed Investigation The administrator has to first verify the configuration of the client: 1. The following services are enabled: ❑

Network Access Protection Agent (“napagent”)

❑

Extensible Authentication Protocol (“eaphost”)

❑

Wired AutoConfig (“dot3svc”). This service is used if the administrator is setting up a wired 802.1x environment.

AND/OR ❑

WLAN AutoConfig (“wlansvc”). This service is used if the administrator is setting up a wireless 802.1x environment.

2. The EAP/802.1x QEC is enabled. 3. The Enable Quarantine Checks option in the Authentication settings for the corresponding connection is configured. ( Enable Quarantine Checks is a setting in the connection profile; this setting is new and enables NAP.) 4. Verify the PEAP configuration on the wired connection profile. (Verify the EAP method configuration, and also verify that the certificate is chained back to the same root for validation of the server certificate.) Once the administrator verifies that the client is configured accurately, he can use the following steps to help identify failures and misconfigurations in the 802.1x/EAP scenario. The administrator can start the investigation by looking at the various Wired AutoConfig (for wired 802.1x scenarios) and Wireless AutoConfig (for wireless 802.1x scenarios) events, particularly looking for events 15505 and/or 15514 (for wired 802.1x scenarios) and events 12013 and/or 12011 (for wireless 802.1x scenarios) in the event log. Events 15505 and 12011 indicate “Authentication success.” Events 15514 and 12013 indicate “Authentication failures.” For authentication failures, look for the reason code and reason text to help with further debugging. (The investigation needs to continue on the NPS server.) –Tom Kelnar Lead Software Design Engineer, Network Access Protection –Chris Edson Software Development Engineer in Test, Network Access Protection

Chapter 10

Network Access Protection

335

Finally, here’s the server side of NAP 802.1X troubleshooting. Once again, Event Viewer will be of invaluable use in determining the nature of the problem.

From the Experts: Troubleshooting the Network Policy Server for 802.1x PEAP-Based NAP Use these instructions if you have already configured 802.1x PEAP-based NAP and have attempted authentication, but you do not see the expected behavior on the client. It is expected that the client-side troubleshooting procedure outlined in the previous sidebar has already been used. Information Gathering Use the following steps to gather the necessary information: 1. Dump all NPS events into an Event viewer file for later analysis: wevtutil.exe epl System NPS.evtx /q:"*[System[Provider[@Name='NPS'] and TimeCreated[timediff(@SystemTime)